MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFER DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION PROJECT - 07-0021-UTCITY OF CLEARWATER
Po r Orru:i: Box 4-48, CLr..AltWki Colt, Roml)A 33758-4748
Mi.. timji. SFimx:rti Bi iu>ixe, 100 Sol -n-i l'1)1111.F AT-N -. S? rn: 220,( 1-1-AMVI ER, Fi-oizn)-a 33756
?,N'l tir ?4a -2 ?27) 56? 2-:''
?.?a. Tri,ui-iom- ( ,) 562--4'50 FAX (: 55
May 18. 2011 a
a =s?:1ALRECf)kDS,
TLC Diversified, Inc. lv1St,???? Aw ,?
Attn: Thurston Lamberson -Dcr'
2719 17"' Street East
Palmetto, FL 34221
Re: Marshall St & East APCF Chlorine Gas and Sulfur Dioxide Gas Conversion Project (07-
0021-UT) Certificate of Final Completion
Dear Mr. Lamberson:
The work of the above referenced project is completed and acceptable as of Friday, May 5, 2011.
However, if at some later date any defects appear due to construction, you will be expected to accept
the responsibility according to the Guarantee of the General Conditions which reads:
"The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to
other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final
acceptance."
cc: Robert Fahey, PE, Utilities Manager
Tak Kai Pang, PE, Jones Edmunds
Susan Chase_ City Clerk Specialist, Office of Official Records & Leg. Services
Project File
"F??iv. E?mi,w±n.?; ,?nrlrrirs,i:crnr?lrrn.>.?: E?irrnr?r,"
Project Manager
City of Clearwater
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF
CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE
GAS CONVERSION PROJECT
(#07 -0021- UT)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
LL
earwater
o
>-
I-
u
Issue For Bid
October 2009
~
ACORDfI) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I DATE (MMIDDIYYYY)
~ 12/23/09
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
M. E. Wilson Co., Inc. ONL Y AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
300 W. Platt St. AL TER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Ste 200
Tampa, FL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A: WESTFIELD INS CO 24112
TLC Diversified, Inc.
INSURER B: FCCI INS CO 10178
2719 17th Street East INSURER C:
Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER 0:
I INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR ~DD'L POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
A ~NERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/09 04/01/10 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000
~ OMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ~~~~~J9E~~~~nce' $ 150,000
~ CLAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) $ 10,000
~ Contractual Liability PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000
~ $500 Prop Dmg Ded GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000
~'L AGGRE~ LIMIT APMS PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000
POLICY X ~bWr X LOC
A ~TOMOBILE LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/09 04/01/10 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
$ 1,000,000
~ ANY AUTO (Ea accident)
~ ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
~
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
~ $
~ NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident)
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per accident)
RRAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
A tijESS I UMBRELLA LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/09 04/01/10 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000
X OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000
$
8 DEDUCTIBLE $
X RETENTION $ 0 $
B WORKERS COMPENSATION WC105360l 04/01/09 04/01/10 X I T~g;IiiJ#~ I IOJ~-
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY YIN
ANY PROPRIETORlPARTNERlEXECUTIVE ~ E.l. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000
OFFICERlMEMBER EXCLUDED?
(Mandatory in NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000
~~~~I~L~~.)j~1gNS below E.l. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000
OTHER
A Installation Floater TRA3972460 04/01/09 04/01/10 Anyone Site 500,000
Transit & Storage Included
Deductible 1,000
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
City of Clearwater as additional insured
Marshall Street & East APCF Chlorine Gas & Sulfur Dioxide Gas Conversion Project (07-0021-UT)
. v.. Of'f'i"...... ,Tn..nn.. n ..nn ...... from Wnrk..r..' Cov......"...
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
City of Clearwater DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
Attn: Alice R. Eckman IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
P.O. Box 4748
REPRESENTATIVES.
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ,.~ '} /-JufJrc,
I USA ';/ . 1U.:.t ~;
~/
ACORD 25 (2009/01) JL002
13947424
@ 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
This Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized
representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend,
extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2009/01)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
City of Clearwater, Florida
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND
SULFUR DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION PROJECT
(#07-0021-UT)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVA SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
Page I
03/20/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE GAS
CONVERSION PROJECT #07-0021-UT
CLEARVVATER,FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by
prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address:
www.myClearwater.com/cityoroiects. ON MONDAY, OCTOBER 12, 2009, until no later than close of
business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated
on the website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of installing new sodium hypochlorite and sodium
bisulfite feed systems at Marshall Street and East APCF and related works.
A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on THURSDAY.
OCTOBER 22. 2009 at 10:00 AM in MSB-130 Conference Room, Municipal Services Bldg., 100
South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting
Engineer will be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasin~ Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the
Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3r Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30
P.M. on VVEDNESDAY. NOVEMBER 18.2009, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for
Marshall Street and East APCF Chlorine Gas and Sulfur Dioxide Gas Conversion (#07-0021-UT),
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and
proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for
review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are
currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of VV ASTEVV A TER/VV A TER
TREATMENT FACILITIES with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $1.500.000.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays
prior to the bid opening date.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
George McKibben, Purchasing Manager
(727) 562-4634
Sectionl _100609 .doc
Page 1 of 1
8/27/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents:
S E CTI 0 N II .................................................................................................. ................................. i
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS.......................................................................... 1
2 Q U ALIFI CA TI 0 N OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .................................1
4 INTERPRET A TIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND ....................................................................................3
6 CONTRACT TIME....................... .................................... ..................... .......................... 3
7 LI Q UIDA TED DAMA GES ............................................................................................. 3
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQillPMENT ......................................................... 3
9 SUBCONTRACT 0 RS.............................................. ................................ ........................ 3
10 BIDIPR 0 POSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5
13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5
14 D ISQ U ALIFI CA TI ON OF BIDDER.............................................................................. 5
15 0 PENIN G OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE............................. 6
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT............................................................................................... 7
19 BID P ROTE ST... ................................................................. .......................................... .... 7
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANA G EMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8
Section II.doc
7/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan
Room - website address: www.myclearwater.com/citvproiects.Price of Contract
Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications,
bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified
bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a
possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualifY to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-
4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street
address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and
delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14)
days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City
do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notifY Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
Section II.doc
Page 1 of9
Revised: 7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
Section II.doc
Page 2 of9
Revised: 7/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
Section lI.doc
Page 3 of9
Revised: 7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with the
project name and number on the bottom left: hand comer. If forwarded by mail, the Bid
shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof
and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be
received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified.
Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
Section ILdoc
Page 4 of9
Revised: 7/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
du1y authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regu1ations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregu1arities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it wou1d not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 liCENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regu1ations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
Section lI.doc
Page 5 of9
Revised: 7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the
WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical
Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1 ).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
Section ILdoc
Page 6 of9
Revised: 7/1712008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the BidJProposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City
deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18 .4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved
person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals.
Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the
bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
Section II,doc
Page 70f9
Revised: 7/17/2008
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions
should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid.
19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event ofa timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EP A) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit
and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater
management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control
practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment
loadings to surface waters.
Section II.doc
Revised: 7/17/2008
Page 8 of9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and
sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion
and sediment control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering
Environmental Division and EP A websites to help address construction-related Best
Management Practices.
References EP A website
Section II.doc
Page 9 of9
Revised: 711 7/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
1 D EFINITI 0 N S ......................................................................... ........................ ....... .......... 1
2 PRELIMINARY MA TTERS........................................................................................... 5
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS............................................................................................ 5
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT................................................................................................................ 5
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 5
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................6
2.6 PROGRES S MEETINGS................................................................................................ 6
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7
INTENT........................................................................................................................... 7
REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7
AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUB SURF ACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINT S ..... ........................................ ............ .............................. ............. 8
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS......................................................................................... 8
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................8
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ..................... ....................................................... ......................... 9
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND............................... 9
5 .2 INSURANCE................................................................................................................... 9
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE......................................................... 10
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE............................ 10
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITy.................................................... 11
5 .3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ...................................................... ............................................ 12
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14
6.5 USE OF PREMISES. .............................. ........... .... ........ ................................................ 15
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS.................................................................................................... 15
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS................................................................... ............. 15
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16
6. 7 LAWS AND REGULA TIONS...................................................................................... 16
6.8 PERMITS....................................................................................................................... 16
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17
6.1 0 EMERGENCIES............................................................................................................ 18
6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................. ................................................ 18
3
3.1
3.2
4
SectionIII.doc
11/17/2008
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW........................ 18
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRA WINGS.............................. ........................ ........... ........................... 19
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS............................... ............................... ..................................... 21
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:.................................................................................................... 22
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE........................... 22
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION.................................................................................................... 23
7 OTHER WORK.... .................................. ........ ................ ................................................ 24
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24
7 .2 COORDINATION......................................................................................................... 24
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 24
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ............................................. ...................................... 25
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 25
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 25
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................26
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES............. 26
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK.......................................................................................... 27
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE................................................................... 28
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE.................................................................... 28
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK ....................................................................................................29
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OF DEFECTIVE W 0 RK............................................................................................... 31
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ...................... .................................................................... 31
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................... ............ .................................................... 31
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK....................................... 32
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 32
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 32
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 33
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ...........................................................34
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 34
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION .......................... .................................................................. 35
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................... 36
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 36
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPT ANCE................................................................... 37
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 37
SectionIlLdoc
ii
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 37
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK...................................................................... 37
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 39
16 DISPUTE RESO L UTI 0 N .............................................................................................. 39
1 7 MISCE LLANE 0 US ....................................................... ............................................ .... 40
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40
17.2 GIVING NOTICE.......................................................................................................... 40
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ........................................................................................ ............. 40
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED..................................... 40
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 40
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION ....................................................................................................40
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK.............................................................. 40
19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION....................................................... 41
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION.......................... 41
22.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 41
22.2 EXAMPLE..................................................................................................................... 42
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 42
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE............................................................................................... 42
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE .................................................43
23.3 FIXED SIGN ................................................................................................................. 43
23 .4 PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 43
23.5 SIGN COLORING......................................................................................................... 43
23 .6 SIGN PLACEMENT..................................................................................................... 43
23. 7 SIGN MAINTENANCE................................................................................................ 43
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN ..........................................................................................44
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 44
SectionIII.doc
iii
ll/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or [mal payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
SectionIII.doc
Page 1 of 45
11/1712008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Construction Coordinator
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and IS
responsible for the administration of construction documents.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule-CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
SectionIII.doc
Page 2 of 45
11/17/2008
SectionIII.doc
Page 3 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
FD. 0. T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseemg.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Person
A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
SectionIII.doc Page 4 of 45 11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to fUll. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to fUll.
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
SectionIII.doc
Page 5 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the
Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction
conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction
Manager.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a
color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events
including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a
completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of
construction stakeout and as-built survey.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for
reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification.
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period. The City's Construction
Coordinator typically chairs these meetings.
SectionIII.doc
Page 6 of 45
I 1117/2008
Section III - General Conditions
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
SectionIII.doc
Page 7 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
4 AVAilABiliTY OF lANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAilABILITY OF lANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer
shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
SectionIII.doc
Page 8 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner
and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or
destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor
licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for
more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew
is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the
Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge
of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the
Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
Bureau of Government Financial Operations, u.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety
on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet
the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice
thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
SectionIIl.doc
Page 9 of 45
ll/17/2008
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this
paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and
maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect
of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include
coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include
completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's
indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the
Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of
continuation of such insurance at [mal payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and
telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1
WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2
PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; .Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
SectionIII.doc
Page 10 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
5.2.3
COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which
may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for
purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's
Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide
full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be
accepted without prior approval from Owner.
Lone:shore and Harbor Worker's COIDDensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
SectionIII.doc
Page 11 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBiliTIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed
SectionIIl.doc
Page 12 of 45
ll/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the
Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on
weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be
$60.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to
be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in
the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
SectionIIl.doc
Page 13 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or
equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability .
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
SectionlII.doc
Page 14 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1
STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction.
6.5.2
RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
. Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
. Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
. All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
. Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
SectionIII.doc
Page 15 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
. Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe
pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed.
Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
SectionlII.doc
Page 16 of 45
11117/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees
will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
SectionIII.doc
Page 17 of45
11117/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or
Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, iIi addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and
Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the
Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The
Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The
Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress
meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive
calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay
claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
SectionIII.doc
Page 18 of 45
ll/I? /2008
Section III - General Conditions
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not
conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1
General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
SectionIII.doc
Page 19 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
61G17-6.002 Definition: (lO)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, I-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5
Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement
shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
SectionlII.doc
Page 20 of 45
11/17/2008
SectionllLdoc
Page 21 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
6.11.2.6
Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61 G 17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7
Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part ofthis contract) -line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11 3 1 2 L
. . . a' er amlnQ e Inl Ions:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
N
D fi "f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property comers, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.50, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELlVERABLE5:
The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20'
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony@myclearwater.com.
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
SectionIII.doc
Page 22 of 45
11/1712008
Section III - General Conditions
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold hannless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who
SectionIlLdoc
Page 23 of 45
11117/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims
against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or
employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7 .1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and
perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2 COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBiliTY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
SectionIII.doc
Page 24 of 45
11/1712008
Section III - General Conditions
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The
duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
SectionlILdoc
Page 25 of 45
11/1712008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENT A TIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
SectionIlLdoc
Page 26 of 45
11117/2008
Section III - General Conditions
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance
of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
SectionIII.doc
Page 27 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on
Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
SectionIII.doc
Page 28 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment
and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or montWy rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
SectionIII.doc
Page 29 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the ContraCt
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid ifnot submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
SectionIII.doc
Page 30 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work,
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
SectionIlI.doc
Page 31 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
SectionIII.doc
Page 32 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by
Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
SectionIlI.doc
Page 33 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
to the exercise by the Owner ofthe Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated
in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully
installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of
the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey
and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site
marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment, free and clear ofliens. No materials or supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at the Owenr's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
SectionlII.doc
Page 34 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) days after receipt of each Application for
payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to the Owner, or
return the Application to Contractor indicating Owner Representative's reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. Owner's Representative may refuse to recommend the whole or any
part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in Owner Representative's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the
Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement,
(ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has
been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative has
actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension
of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's
performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work,
except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the
satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-
off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the
events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal
to pay with a copy to the Owner's Representative, stating the reasons for such actions, and
Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed
to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the
reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
SectionIIl.doc
Page 35 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such
part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
access thereto.
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals
that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch
list and assign a date for this work to be completed. Contractor shall immediately take such
measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-builtlRecord Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii)
consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in
connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i)
the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien
could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be
responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien.
SectionIlI.doc
Page 36 of 45
11/1712008
Section III - General Conditions
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for
such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the
Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the
amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
SectionlIl.doc
Page 37 of 45
I 1/1712008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to
the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
SectionIlI.doc
Page 38 of 45
11/1712008
Section III - General Conditions
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work
until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended
to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or
Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
SectionIII.doc
Page 39 of 45
11117/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any
error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorN endor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
SectionIII.doc
Page 40 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III ~ General Conditions
19 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical
Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION
The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's
documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in
the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is
exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable
taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The
Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various
construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of
construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis.
Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract
Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents.
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
22.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-Y4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to
maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours.
SectionlII.doc
Page 41 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
22.2 EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
---
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
Weare available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at alllocation(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
SectionIII.doc
Page 42 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of II2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080-
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic
barricade.
23.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall
be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black.
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside ofthe Owner's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SectionIII.doc
Page 43 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IoI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section III - General Conditions
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
,,'
o
I
I _H
'", L PROJECT NAME
(CbNTRACT NUMBER)
tDEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT
;,,_ CONTRACTOR: _, ___,_____ _____
t COMPLETION DATE: ___ __
FUNDING: ____ _____________ ______
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:_
''OJ-
cJ r€learwater
I_~
lu~
f_
i
L..--
I
2)"
CO'
a;
4"xL" i'.T
fJest (i yp.)
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar davs as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE
DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor
fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the
Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be
discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee
SectionIlLdoc
Page 44 of 45
11/17/2008
Section III - General Conditions
Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the
Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars
($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
SectionIII.doc
Page 45 of 45
11/17/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents:
SCOPE OF WORK.................. ........... ............. ............... ..... ............................................. 1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 3
FIELD EN G INEE RIN G................ ......................... .............. ........................................... 4
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 4
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS............................................................................. 4
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ....................................................................................................... 5
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITy................................. 5
3 D EFINITI ON OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 5
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 5
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 5
ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 7
EXCA V ATI ON FOR UND ERGRO UND WORK .......................................................... 7
CON CRETE...... ...... ............. ............................... ...... ........... ..... ..... ................................... 8
EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 8
EXCA V ATI ON................................................................................................................ 8
FORMS ........................................................................................................................... 8
REINFORCEMENT.............................. ........................ ............... .................................... 9
BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................9
o BS TR U CTI ON S.................................. ................... ............................ ............................ 9
RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 9
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................ 10
12 DEWATERING ............................................................................................................... 10
12.1 GENERAL ............................................ .... ....................................... ............................. 10
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................11
12.2.1 DEWATERiNG CONTROL....................................................................................11
12.2.2 GENERiC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND
WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY............................11
13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 13
13 .1 BUILT UP TypE.......................................................................................................... 13
13.2 PRECAST TYPE .................. ....................... ................................................ ................. 14
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................14
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ........................... .......... .............. ............... .......... ......................... 15
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS .............................. ................................... ........................... 15
1
2
4
5
6
7
7.1
7.2
8
8.1
9
10
Section N.doc
03/13/2009
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS ............................. ................ ......... ................................. ....... 15
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ...... ....................................................................... 15
14 BACKFILL......................................................................................................... ............. 15
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. ....................................................................................... 15
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
S TR U CTURE S................................................................................................................ 16
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................ ............... .......................................... 16
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 16
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 16
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16
18 UND ERD RAINS ............................................................................................................. 16
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 17
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17
19 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 17
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION......................................................................................... 17
19 .2 TESTING...................................................................................................................... 17
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............... ..................................... ............................................. 18
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS.............................................................. 18
20.1 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 18
20.1.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE......................................................................... ............... 18
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE.. ................ .............................................. ............................. 18
20.2 INS TALLATION .......................................................................................................... 19
20.2.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE........................................................................................ 19
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 19
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ........................................................................................ ....... 19
20.4 TES TIN G ...................................................................................................................... 19
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRA VITY SEWERS ........................................................................ 19
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS.............................................................................. 20
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............ ......... ........... .... .............. ...................................... ......... 20
20.5.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIP E........................................................................................ 20
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 20
21 DRAINAGE ..................................................................................................................... 20
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE.......................................................................... 20
22.1 BASE............................................................................................................................ 20
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ...................22
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE............................... 22
22.2 SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................. 22
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT...................... .......................................................... 23
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT............................................................................................ 23
23 ASPHAL TI C CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 23
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ....... ................ ................................ ..... ..... ................ .......... 23
Section IV.doc
ii
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
23.1.1 AGGREGATE........................................................................................................ 23
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS....................................... ...... .................................... 23
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............. ....................... ............ ........ .................................... 23
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 24
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 24
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 25
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ..............................................................25
23.6.1 CRACKS................................................................................................................ 25
23.6.2 POTHOLES........................................................................................................... 26
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ...............................................................................26
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS............................................................26
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 27
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .... ......... ......................................................................... 27
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................................28
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 28
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 28
25 .1 IRRIGATION................................................................................................................ 28
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 28
25.1. 2 PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................... 30
25.1.3 EXECUTION........................................................................................................ 34
25.2 LANDSCAPE............................................................................................................... 37
25.2.1 GENERAL................. ............................................................................................ 37
25.2. 2 PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................... 42
25.2. 3 EXECUTION..................................................................... ................................... 45
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING................................................... 52
26.1 INTENT........................................................................................................................ 52
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITy........................ 52
26.3 MATERIALS .............................................. ................................................... ............... 52
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ...................................................................53
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION....................................................................................... 53
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ......... .................................................................................... 54
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION .....................................................................................54
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................54
26. 9 PAYMENT.................................................................................................................... 54
27 PLANT MIX D RIVEW A YS ........................................................................................... 54
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT......................................................................................55
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................................55
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 55
29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 55
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT. ...................... ...................... ............................ ............. 55
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................................55
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAyS......................................................... 55
Section IV.doc
iii
03/13/2009
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ........................ .................................... .............................. 55
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS .........................................................................................56
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT......................................................................................56
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................................56
31 SOD D IN G .......................................................................................................... .............. 56
32 SEED IN G ....................................................................... ................................ .................. 57
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES...................................................................... .................. ........................ 57
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 57
33.2 PRECAS T TypE.......................................................................................................... 58
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 58
3 4 MATERIAL USE D ............................... ................... ......................... ....... ........ ......... ...... 58
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 58
36 S TREE T S I G N S ....................................................... ........................... ............................ 58
37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 58
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING................................ 58
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ...................................................58
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ........................... ......... ..... .............................. 59
37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 59
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 59
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 59
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 59
37.8 LIGHTING ......... ........... ..................................................................................... .......... 60
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL ...................................................... .............................................. 60
37.10 VIDEO LOGIINDEX ........ ............................. ............... ............................................... 60
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................ ................................... 60
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 60
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 60
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 60
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 61
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SySTEMS.................................... 61
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES........................................................................61
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS .......................................................................................61
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 61
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 62
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION .......................................................62
38.9 MAINTENANCE ........ .................. ......................................... .............................. ........ 62
38.10 COMPLIANCE.. .... ....................... ..... ............. ......... .... ............................. ........... ......... 62
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING................................................................. 65
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.................... 65
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
AP P URTEN AN CE S ............ ...................................................................................... ..... 65
Section IV.doc
iv
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
41.1 SCOPE .................................... ...... ... ............................................................................. 65
41.2 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 66
41.2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 66
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS..................................................................... 66
41.2.3 GATE VAL VES...................................................................................................... 68
41.2.4 VAL VE BOXES...................................................................................................... 68
41.2.5 HYDRANTS........................................................................................................... 69
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES............................................................................................. 70
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS.................................................................. 70
41.2.8 BACKFLOW P REVENTERS .............. .................................................................. 70
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 71
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 71
41.3 CONSTRUCTION........................................................................................................ 71
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 71
41. 3.2 PIPE LAYING ................................................................ ....................................... 71
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS......................................... 73
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 73
41.4 TESTS.......................................................................................................................... . 74
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS......................................................................................... 74
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST............ ........ ............................................................................ 74
41.5 STERILIZATION ..... ......................... ........... ................................................................ 74
41.5.1 STERILIZING A GENT.......................................................................................... 74
41.5.2 FLUSHING SySTEM.................................................................. .......................... 74
41.5.3 STERILIZATiON PROCEDURE ................................................ .......................... 74
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS............................................................................ 75
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS.............................................................................................. 75
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 75
41.6.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 75
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS........................................................... 76
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS................................................................... 76
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS............... .................... ................................ ............................................. 76
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS....................................................... 76
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFI CA TI 0 NS .............................................................................. 77
43 TENNIS COURTS............................................................................. ............................. 77
43 .1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ..................................... ...... ....... ........................................ 77
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS............................ ......... ....................................... ................. 77
43.1.2 BASE COURSE..................................................................................................... 77
43.1.3 PRIME COAT ...... ...... ......................... ..................................................... ............. 77
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE....... ..................... ........... ........ ....... ...................... ................ 77
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ..... ........... .................... ........ .... .................... ......................... 77
43.1.6 COLOR COAT................................................................................ ...................... 78
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ..... ........ ....................................................... ........................ 79
43.2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 79
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION............................................................................................ 80
43.2.3 SLOPE................................................................................................................... 80
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION...................................................................................... 81
Section IV .doc
03/13/2009
v
43.2. 5 PERIMETER CURBING................................................................... .................... 81
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE .............................................................................................81
43.2. 7 ROOT BARRIER ............................................................................................ ....... 81
43.2.8 FENCING............................................................................................................. 82
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS.................................................................................................... 82
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... 82
43.2.11 SHADE STR UCTURE........................................................................................... 84
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE {Potable).................................................................................. 84
43.2.13 CONCRETE.......................................................................................................... 84
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING................................................. 84
43.2.15 WATER COOLER.................................................................................................. 85
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................. 85
43.2.17 WARRANTY........................................................................................................... 85
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 86
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 86
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 86
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY............................................... ....... ............... .................... 86
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES....................................................................... 87
44.3.1 ALL ROAD WAyS................................................................................................... 87
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS................. 87
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS...... ..................................... .............. 87
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS............................................................................................. 87
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN................................... 87
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 88
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 88
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 88
45 CURED-IN - PLACE PIPE LINING.............................................................................. 88
45.1 INTENT........................................................................................................................ 88
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITy........................ 89
45.3 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 89
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 89
45 .5 TELEVISION INSPECTION....................................................................................... 90
45.6 LINER INS TALLATI ON ............................................................................................. 90
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................... ................................ 90
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................90
45.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 90
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING..................................... 91
46.1 MATERIALS .................................................................................. .............................. 91
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS........................................................................................... 91
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL ...................... ........................... .......................... ................ 91
46.1. 3 SAMPLES.............................................................................................................. 91
46.1.4 REJECTION.......................................................................................................... 91
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS..................................................................................................... 91
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 92
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE........................................................................................... 92
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS.................................................................... 92
Section IV.doc
03113/2009
VI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
46. 3.3 PIPE JOINING ......................... ................................................................. ........... 92
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE................................................................... .......... 92
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE........................................................................................ 92
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS......................................... ............. 92
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION...........................................................................92
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS..........................................................93
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER......................... ............ ........................... ................ 93
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...................................................................... 93
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED................................................ 93
46.4.7 BACKFILLING..................................................................................................... 94
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR..................................................................................................... 94
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS..................... ............. ................ ..................... ............ 94
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE...................... 94
47.1 SCOPE.......................................................................................................................... 94
47.2 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 94
47.3 PIPE.............................................................................................................................. 94
47.4 JOINING SySTEM...................................................................................................... 95
47.5 FITTINGS..................................................................................................................... 95
48 G UNITE SPECIFI CAT I 0 NS ........................................................................................ 95
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 95
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 95
48.3 COMPOSITION ........................................................................................................... 95
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ..... ................................. ............................................ 96
48.5 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 96
48 .6 WATER......................................................................................................................... 96
48.7 REINFORCEMENT..................................................................................................... 96
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS .......................................................... ............................. 96
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 97
48.1 0 PROPORTIONING....................................................................................................... 97
48.11 MIXING........................................................................................................................ 97
48.12 APPLICATION............................................................................................................. 97
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS .........................................................................................98
48.14 SURFACE FINISH .......................... ................................... .......................................... 98
48 .15 CURING....................................................................................................................... 98
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ..................................................................... 98
48.17 INSPECTION............................................................................................................... 99
48.18 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................... 99
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .........................100
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT .......... ........... ......... ........ ................. ............................... ......... 100
49 .2 PAYMENT. .................... ................... ............. ....... ................................... ........... ........ 100
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 100
49.3.1 MATERIALS........................................................................................................ 100
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. 101
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 101
49.4.1 MATERIALS........................................................................................................ 102
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ........... ........ ........... ................ .............. .......................... 102
Section IV.doc
vii
03/13/2009
49.6 GROUTING MIX .... .......... .... .................. ............ ................ .................................... ... 102
49.7 LINER MIX ..................... ......... ..... ...................................................................... ....... 102
49. 8 WATER....................................................................................................................... 103
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS................................................................................................ 103
49.10 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................. 103
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 103
49.11.1 P REPARATION............... .................................................................................... 103
49.11.2 MIXING.............. ................................................................................................. 104
49.11.3 SPRAyING.......................................................................................................... 104
49.11. 4 PRODUCT TESTING......................................................................................... 104
49.11.5 CURING.............................................................................................................. 104
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 105
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 105
49.12.1 SCOPE.................................................. ....... ....................................................... 105
49.12.2 MATERIALS........................................................................................................ 105
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. 107
50 PROJECT INFO RMATI ON SIGNS .......................................................................... 109
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ 109
51.1 SCOPE......... ............................................................................................................... 109
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ......................................................................................11 0
51.2.1 ASPHALT............................................................................................................ .11 0
51.2.2 CONCRETE........................................................................ ................................ .11 0
51. 2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX............................................................................ 11 0
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ..........................................................110
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE...........................................................111
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .....................................................................................111
51.6 PLAYING LINES ........................................................................................................111
51.7 GENERAL ................................................................................................................. ..111
51.8 LIMITATIONS............................................................................................................. 111
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................112
53 G ADI 0 NS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................112
53.1 MATERIAL................................................................................................................ .112
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL...................................................112
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL............................................... 114
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE...... ......................... ........................... ..................................... .115
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC....................................................................................... .115
53.2 PERFORMANCE....................................................................................................... .115
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFI CATIONS ...........................................................116
54.1 SCOPE ...... ............................................................................... ....................................116
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK.........................................................................................116
54.3 WORK METHODS .................................... ...... ................................... ........................117
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING...................................................................... ..117
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT................... ....................................................... ..117
54.4 LITTER....................................................................................................................... .117
54.5 VISUAL CHECK ................................... ............ ................... .................................... ..117
Section IV.doc
viii
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ...........................................................117
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)......117
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL ...................................................................................................117
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................................................118
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY .............................................................................................118
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION.... .......................................................................................118
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA.......................................................... 118
54.13 MULCH CONDITION .............................. ..................................................................118
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .....................................................................118
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL......................................................118
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION .............................................................................................118
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION .................... .........................................................................119
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE......................................... .........................................................119
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ........................................................................................119
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ...............................................................................119
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................119
55 MILLING 0 PERATI 0 NS ........................................................................................... 120
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE...................................... 120
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 120
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ........................ ....................................... .................. 121
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................... ................ 121
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ..................121
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 121
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 121
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS.............................................................................. 122
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.................................................................................... 122
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...... ................... ........................ .............................................. 122
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 122
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 122
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 122
57 RIPRAP ... ........... ......... ................... ... .................................. ...... ..... ........ .............. ... ...... 122
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.................................................................................... 122
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 123
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETy................................................................................ 123
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL............................................................................................. 123
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 123
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS........................................... 123
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 124
60 SI GNIN G AND MARKING......................................................................................... 124
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 124
61 ROADWAY LI G HTIN G .............................................................................................. 124
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 124
Section IV.doc
ix
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
x
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
62 TREE PR OTECTI ON .................................................................................................. 125
62.1 TREE BARRICADES................................................................................................ 125
62.2 ROOT PRUNING .................................................................................................... ... 125
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING........................................................................................ 126
63 PROJECT WEB P A G ES.............................................................................................. 127
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 127
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 127
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 127
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 128
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 128
63 .6 POSTING.................................................................................................................... 128
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 128
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name:
Conversion
Marshall Street and East APCF CWorine Gas and Sulfur Dioxide Gas
Proiect
Project Number: 07-0021-UT
Scope of Work:
The work at Marshall StreetAPCF (see Section 01000 and Section 01100) consists of removal of
piping, electrical wiring, and connections associated with equipment already removed,
installation of new sodium hypocWorite storage tanks and sodium bisulfite storage tanks,
installation of new liquid cWorine and liquid bisulfite feed pumps and pump skids, corresponding
piping, concrete pad for the tanks with chemical resistant coating, re-surface the building floor
and apply chemical resistant coating, chemical filling stations with chemical resistant coating;
clean, prepare and re-paint walls and ceilings in cWorine and sulfur rooms, install and modify the
flow meter at the reclaimed water wet well, modification to the SCADA; and electrical system to
support the new equipment, and other related works. The Contractor shall coordinate with the
temporary chemical system supplier during the work to relocate the temporary liquid cWorine
feed pump skids, and to prevent any interruption to the cWorination and decWorination processes
at the Marshall Street APCF during the Work. The Contractor will responsible for any permit
violation as a result of interruption to the cWorination and decWorination processes during the
Work.
Scope of Work:
The work at the East APCF (see Secton 01000 and Section 01100) consists of demolition of
existing cWorine gas and sulfur dioxide gas systems including cWorinators and sulfonators and
associated electrical wiring and connections, demolition of the concrete slab and installing a new
concrete floor slab with chemical resistant coating, concrete pad for the tanks with chemical
resistant coating, installation of new sodium hypocWorite storage tanks and sodium bisulfite
storage tanks, installation of new liquid cWorine and liquid bisulfite feed pumps, chemical filling
stations with chemical resistant coating; clean, prepare and re-paint walls and ceilings in cWorine
building including chlorinator room, and sulfur building, modification to the SCADA; and
electrical system to support the new equipment, and other related works. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the temporary chemical system supplier during the work to prevent any
interruption to the cWorination and dechlorination processes at the East APCF. The Contractor
will be responsible for any permit violations as a result of interruption to the chlorination and
decWorination processes during the Work.
Section IV. doc
Page I of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall provide 2 fixed project signs (one per APCF) as described in SECTION III,
ARTICLE 23 ofthe Contract Documents.
The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain equipment under the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) option (see Section V). These ODP items include,
. chemical bulk storage tanks,
. chemical pump skids,
CONTRACT PERIOD: 300 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS
Section IV.doc
Page 2 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: Marshall Street and East APCF Chlorine Gas and Sulfur Dioxide Gas
Conversion Proiect
Project Number: #07-0021-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 ~ Scope Of Work
2.1 ~ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor
2.2 D Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City
3 ~ Definition Of Terms
4 ~ Order And Location Of The Work
5 ~ Excavation For Underground Work
6 ~ Concrete
7 ~ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 ~ Reinforcement
9 ~ Obstructions
10 ~ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
11 D Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 D Dewatering
13 D Sanitary Manholes
14 D Backfill
15 D Street Crossings, etc.
16 D Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 D Unsuitable Material Removal
18 ~ Underdrains
19 D Storm Sewers
20 D Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 D Drainage
22 D Roadway Base And Subgrade
23 ~ Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 D Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 D General Planting Specifications
26 D HDPE Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining
27 D Plant Mix Driveways
28 D Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 D Concrete Curbs
30 D Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 D Sodding
32 D Seeding
33 D Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 ~ Material Used
35 ~ Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 D Street Signs
Section IV,doc
Page 3 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
37 ~ AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas
38 ~ Erosion And Siltation Control
39 D Utility Tie In Location Marking
40 ~ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 D Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 D Gas System Specifications
43 D Tennis Courts
44 D Work Zone Traffic Control
45 D Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46 D Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining
47 D Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 D Gunite Specifications
49 D Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 ~ Project Information Signs
51 D In-Line Skating Surfacing System
52 ~ Resident Notification of Start of Construction
53 D Gabions and Mattresses
54 D Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 D Milling Operations
56 ~ Clearing and Grubbing
57 D Riprap
58 ~ Treatment Plant Safety
59 D Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials
60 D Signing And Marking
61 D Roadway Lighting
62 D Tree Protection
63 D Project Web Pages
2 FIELD ENGINEERING
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such
work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and layout site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the
work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals
under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-
built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III
(General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and
shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any
Section N.doc
Page 4 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
permanent property comers or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the
proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land
Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida.
2.1.2
LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III,
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that
the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a
basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not
assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated
quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate
of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations
pertaining thereto.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard
adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:
AA
AAMA
AASHTO
Aluminum Association, Inc.
Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association
American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
American Concrete Institute
American Iron and Steel Institute
Acoustical Materials Association
ACI
AISI
AMA
Section IV.doc
Page 5 of ]28
03/] 3/2009
Section IV.doc
AMCA
ANSI
APA
ASAE
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWG
AWMA
AWS
AWWA
CFR
CISPI
CRSI
CS
DEP
DOT
EPA
FAC
FBC
FFPC
FGC
FMC
FPC
FedSpec
HI
IBBM
IEEE
IPS
MIL
NAAMM
NBFU
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
NPT
NWMA
PCA
PCI
SBC
SBCCI
SDI
SFPC
SGC
SJI
Section IV ~ Technical Specifications
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
American National Standards Institute
American Plywood Association
American Society of Agricultural Engineers
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wire Gauge
Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Code of Federal Regulations
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards
Department of Environmental Protection (Florida)
Department of Transportation (Florida)
Environmental Protection Agency
Florida Administrative Code
Florida Building Code
Florida Fire Prevention Code
Florida Gas Code
Florida Mechanical Code
Florida Plumbing Code
Federal Specifications
Standards of Hydraulic Institute
Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Iron Pipe Size
Military Specification
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Pipe Thread
National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association
Portland Cement Association
Prestressed Concrete Institute
Standard Building Code (SBCCI)
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
Steel Door Institute
Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI)
Standard Gas Code (SBCCI)
Steel Joist Institute
Page 6 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
SMACCNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI)
Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI)
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
Steel Structures Painting Council
Title Council of America
Underwriters'Laboratories
SMC
SPC
SPIB
SSPC
TCA
UL
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE
WORK.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staffin conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
Section IV.doc
Page 7 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry".
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
spnngmg.
Section IV.doc
Page 8 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM AI85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS.
CURBS. SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
Section IV.doc
Page 9 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
12.1 GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
Section IV.doc
Page 10 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for
the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to
dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must
collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The
following document has been incorporated into this section for reference...
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED
GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE
ACTIVITY
City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental
Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities:
1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEPNotification
Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be
placed on the project.
Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required
to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action.
The following procedure will be followed:
1st occurrence - Stop Work Order
2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP
It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have
any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance.
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site
activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-
620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the
listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites,
analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to
determine if contamination exists.
Section N.doc
Page 11 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The eflluent shall be
sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement
of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued
coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit
shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The eflluent shall be
sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1
Screening Values for Discharges into:
Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/l
PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5
Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631 E 0.012 ~g/l 0.025 ~g/l
Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 ~g/l 9.3 ~g/l
Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 ~g/l 2.9 ~g/l
Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/l 5.6 ~g/l
Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 ~g/l 86.0 ~g/l
Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 ~g/l 50.0 ~g/l
Benzene 1.0 ~g/l 1.0 ~g/l
Naphthalene 100.0 ~g/l 100.0 ~g/l
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the
discharge is not authorized by this permit or bv the City of Clearwater.
(a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which
may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic
compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC
requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional
information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the
method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The
Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates
that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight
organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty
(30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information:
1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued
to;
Section IV.doc
Page 12 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2. the name and address of the facility, including county location;
3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s);
4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and
longitude);
5. the name of the receiving water; and
6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) ofthis permit.
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the
Department.
For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the efl1uent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0
units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless
the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of
this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units
for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural
background or vary more than one (l) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal
waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units,
the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (I) unit below natural
background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH
of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this
permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration
of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or
greater than 1500 mg/I.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), EA.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from
floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on
surface waters.
If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph
(2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an
individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface
waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other
applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any
source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having
to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed
activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office
within one (l) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during
discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge
Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department.
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, EA.C., are applicable to this Generic
Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
Section IV.doc
Page 13 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of3.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
13.2.1
MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete -
Adjustment of Manholes.
Section IV.doc
Page 14 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have
the inside plastered with l/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227
Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
Section IV.doc
Page 15 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 16 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined
in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
Section IV.doc
Page 17 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl cWoride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying
length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of20-feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl cWoride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl cWoride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl cWoride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
Section IV.doc
Page 18 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
20.2 INSTAllATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and
compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted
haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUilT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
Section lV.doc
Page 19 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The
Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of
bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4-
inches shall be cause for rejection.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as
described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and sub grade items.
Section IV.doc
Page 20 of 128
03113/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The sub grade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a *
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
Section IV.doc
Page 21 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (l/2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Section IV.doc
Page 22 of 128
03/1 3/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the sub grade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized sub grade.
22.2.1
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized sub grade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be
corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the
City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas
that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, sub grade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S- Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 919 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
Section IV.doc
Page 23 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV ~ Technical Specifications
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per Section 330-11 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of Yt" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of Yt" or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Proiect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
(RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III Type S-I
Type S-III with FC- 3 with FC- 3
Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer
1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
1 1 1
1~ 1~
Section IV.doc
Page 24 of ] 28
03/] 3/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2 lY-t % * 1 1
2'li lY-t lY-t 1'li 1 1'li 1
3 1'li 1'li 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
Section IV.doc
Page 25 ofl28
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
nser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period
between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve
boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be
included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure
that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all
utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item
for asphalt.
Section IV.doc
Page 26 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom
Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas
shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that
picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water
supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off
of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be W' above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 101.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic
concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
Section IV.doc
Page 27 of 128
03113/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com.Itis under the section "Doing Business
with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The montWy billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
25
GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1
IRRIGATION
25.1.1
A.
DESCRIPTION
The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
Section IV.doc
Page 28 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
addressees) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
Section N.doc
Page 29 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5
THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 21N. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
Section IV.doc
Page 30 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe- T-Shear Stem
5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 lb. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7
SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemicallUV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal J.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
Section IV.doc
Page 31 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
c. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
with #182002
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (112") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the drip line manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high
point( s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
Section IV.doc
Page 32 of 128
03113/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
25.1.2.1 0.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
Section IV.doc
Page 33 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation ofthe solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, ofEFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
Section N.doc
Page 34 of 128
03113/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
EXCAVATING AND BACKFilLING
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFilLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" offill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than 'l2 in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 ofFDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 1 00 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3
ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
Section IV.doc
Page 35 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3
INSTAllATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure IS on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
Section IV.doc
Page 36 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any eXlstmg
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
Section lV.doc
Page 37 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
Section IV.doc
Page 38 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7
ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
OA. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
CT.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
CW:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR. :
Straight trunk.
MIN:
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
OC:
On center, distance between plant centers.
Section IV. doc
Page 39 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
DIA.:
Diameter.
L Vs.:
Leaves.
D.B.H:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL. :
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner s Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
25.2.1.8
Section lV.doc
03/13/2009
Page 40 of 128
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9
JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verifY elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notifY the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notifY the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notifY the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
Section IV.doc
Page 41 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.R. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
Section IV.doc
Page 42 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "BOO shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
Section IV.doc
Page 43 ofJ28
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1: 1 or 2: 1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than Y4 the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Barten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4"
by 16" wood connected with two - %" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
Section N.doc
Page 44 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under I gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4 - 'li feet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
Section IV.doc
Page 45 of 128
03113/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval ofthe Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - 'l'2 inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native sub grade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (113), sandy loam (113), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per lOOO square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
Section IV.doc
Page 46 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2
INSTAllATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0-
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 lAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
SIzes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
Section IV.doc
Page 47 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each Y:z" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to sub grade.
Section IV.doc
Page 48 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion ofthe Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2: 1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
R For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
Section N.doc
Page 49 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
25.2.3.3
MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
Section IV.doc
Page 50 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
Section IV.doc
Page 51 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Property ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=I13,OOO psi
Section IV.doc
Page 52 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thorougWy clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
Section N.doc
Page 53 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
26.6 LINER INSTAllATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 lATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
Section IV.doc
Page 54 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ItI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
This Article deleted.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
Section IV.doc
Page 55 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 x 1011 0 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
Section IV.doc
Page 56 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to tota160 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES. INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance ofthe work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.s
Section N.doc
Page 57 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS.
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance ofthe proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
Section IV.doc
Page 58 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation.
37.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such
coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
higWy visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indic{lte the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
Section N.doc
Page 59 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
37.8 LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering surveyor coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at anyone time.
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
Section IV.doc
Page 60 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
contain-ing at least one (l) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Section IV.doc
Page 61 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading :from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at anyone time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods
that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
Section IV.doc
Page 62 of128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of
soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The
procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence Warning
2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee
3rd occurrence $80 reinspecion fee
4th occurrence Stop work order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify
the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact
Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750.
Section IV.doc
Page 63 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF
ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION
CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$32.00 Reinspection Fee
$80.00 Reinspection Fee
Stop Work Order
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727562-4741
&
PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727 462-6126
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been
received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt
or concurrence with findings of the inspector.)
Inspector's Signature:
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
Section IV.doc
Page 64 of 128
10/13/2008
-------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER
WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical
curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT. WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK
SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS. RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
Section N.doc
Page 65 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modem design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSIJAWWA CI51/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.) (PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance withANSIJAWWA CI51/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSIJAWWA CI04/A21.4 80 or latest
reVISIOn.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance withANSIJAWWA
C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241
and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Section IV.doc
Page 66 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length
(ODffhick.) (PSI) (Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the
use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid
strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece
of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum
above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the
adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass
plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M
brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and
elbows.
41.2.2.3
FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA Cl11/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4
RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
41.2.2.5
PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
Section N.doc
Page 67 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method
by the Engineer.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall
be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted
with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all
valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with
ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the
following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage
at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring
bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body..
Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the
service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in
conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure.
All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers,
bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass.
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3-
piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be
provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their
installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of
5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of2 & Sheett2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
Section IV.doc
Page 68 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
. Kennedy Guardian #K 8lD Fire Hydrant,
. Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
. AVK Nostalgic 2780.
. American Darling B-84- B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be ofthe compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (l-1/2-inch) pentagon nut.
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into
upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be ofEPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0-
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper
nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
Section IV.doc
Page 69 of 128
03/13/2009
Section N - Technical Specifications
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may
be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.v.c. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be I-I/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2-
inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC
202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless
steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that
are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be
purchased from the City and installed by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest
reVISIOn.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
Section N.doc
Page 70 ofl28
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42-
inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and
obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress
of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or
arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the
obstructions.
Section IV.doc
Page 71 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2
INSTAllATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
Section IV.doc
Page 72 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2
VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to
exceed I8-inches from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 &
Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2
of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
41.3.3.3
HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located
to-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants
shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Section IV.doc
Page 73 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed
before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed
under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision.
All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and
all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor
at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
41.5.1
STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron" .
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are
not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never
more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
Section IV.doc
Page 74 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with A WW A C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all
respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
applicable pay ifems of work:
. Clearing and grubbing
. Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
. Shoring and/or dewatering
. Structural fill
. Backfill
. Grading
. Tracer wire
. Refill materials
. Joints materials
. Tests and sterilization
. Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
Section IV.doc
Page 75 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
41.&.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.&.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA CllO/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.&.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2
PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.&.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are
listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
Section lV.doc
Page 76 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 1 0 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
Section IV.doc
Page 77 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
be approved. If a deficiency of more than l;4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the fmish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thorougWy cured.
43.1.6.2.2
FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3
PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
Section IV.doc
Page 78 of 128
03/] 3/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
Degree's F and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and lor the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2
CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3
STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4
BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5
COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four comers of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
Section IV.doc
Page 79 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6
BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet ofthe site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7
SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed. "
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2
DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3
SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation oftesting to the Owner.
43.2.2.4
FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
Section IV.doc
Page 80 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2
BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (114) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (112) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (118) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
Section N.doc
Page 81 ofl28
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 82 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2
POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-112" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system.
43.2.8.3
FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-314" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4
GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-112)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each comer. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (l each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction" Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (l each) - six-foot length aluminum.
Section N.doc
Page 83 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 84 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-Iamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole wlexisting sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and lor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
Section IV.doc
Page 85 of 128
03/13/2009
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
· Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
· Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
. Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
. Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
. Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
. Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
. Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
Section N.doc
Page 86 of 128
03113/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1
PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1
PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C- View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
Section N.doc
Page 87 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or
an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trencWess restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
Section IV.doc
Page 88 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for pre qualification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thorougWy clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
Section IV.doc
Page 89 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The
television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTAllATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 lATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
Section IV.doc
Page 90 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) D.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
Section IV.doc
Page 91 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLlPLlNING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into IS-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
21 ~-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
Section IV.doc
Page 92 ofl28
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
Section IV.doc
Page 93 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for slip lining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made ofPVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
Section IV.doc
Page 94 ofI28
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
Section IV.doc
Page 95 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 96 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation CI50
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve
Passing No.4 Sieve
Passing No.8 Sieve
Passing No. 16 Sieve
Passing No. 30 Sieve
Passing No. 50 Sieve
Passing No. 100 Sieve
100%
95% to 100%
80% to 100%
50% to 85%
25% to 60%
10% to 30%
2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove
all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thorougWy moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thorougWy mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thorougWy enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Comers shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
Section IV.doc
Page 97 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV ~ Technical Specifications
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if:
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thorougWy cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed comers by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.l(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
Section IV.doc
Page 98 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Compo Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
(cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi)
365 I 5/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 21/2 21/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
Section IV.doc
03/13/2009
Page 99 ofl28
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
3753.
49.3.1.2
MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No.8 sieve.
49.3.1.3
GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
Section IV.doc
Page IOOof128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.3.2 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
Section IV.doc
Page 101 of 128
03/13/2009
Section N.doc
Page 102 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-l09) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +1- 5 pcf
49.5 INFilTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% oftotal weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product( s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
49.11 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
Section N.doc
Page 103 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV .doc
Page 104 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Model35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLlNE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofmg), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
1- 3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
Section IV.doc
Page 105 of 128
03/13/2009
Section N - Technical Specifications
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17Ibs/gal
Tensile Strength 150 psi
Elongation 250%
Shrinkage Less than 4%
Toxicity Non Toxic
ASTM D-3574
ASTM D- 412
ASTM D-3574
ASTM D-1042
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa)
(7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa)
ASTM C 190
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 4855
8.1x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 em/see
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement
12 Hrs
Section N.doc
03/13/2009
Page 106ofl28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
Astrn C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume
Color (other colors available on request)
Pot Life, hrs
Tensile Strength, psi, min
Tensile Elongation, %
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi
1:1
Light Gray
1
2,000
10 -20
5
1,800
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
Section N.doc
Page 107 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 108of128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitiouslcrystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofmg/ crystallization.
49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS.
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
Section IV.doc
Page 109 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
. 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
· 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
. 2 Coats of Plexiflor
. Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
Section IV.doc
03/13/2009
Page 110 of 128
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section N - Technical Specifications
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats ofPlexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thorougWy dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 500F or more than 1 40oF.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
Section N.doc
Page 111 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot SUll.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 700F with 60% relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START
OF CONSTRUCTION.
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1
PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4 'is inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 'is), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger- Tite
Section IV.doc Page 112 of 128 03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2
PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3
ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
Section IV.doc
Page 113 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
53.1.1.4
PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3. Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than + 18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
. Absorption, maximum 5%
. Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
. Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM I-TI04), maximum loss 12%
Section IV.doc
Page 114 of128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
. Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
Section IV.doc
Page 115 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor( s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
. Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
. Trash and debris removal from the job site;
. Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
. Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
. Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
. Irrigation service and repair;
· Mulch replacement;
. Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
. Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
Section N.doc
Page 116 ofl28
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
Section IV.doc
Page 117 of128
03/13/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 118 ofI28
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11 :00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. -7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
.
Section IV.doc
Page 119 ofl28
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
55 MilliNG OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom
Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its
own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving
the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S- Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
Section IV.doc
Page 120 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
Section IV.doc
Page 121 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
55.8 MilLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (lastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
Section IV.doc
Page 122 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
. An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe bums
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
. Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
· The date of the training, and
· The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
Section IV.doc
Page 123 of 128
03/13/2009
Section N - Technical Specifications
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of
existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's
Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report,
shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All
mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the
manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both
the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown
features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
Section N.doc
Page 124 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
specIes.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline oftrees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
Section IV.doc
Page 125 of 128
03!l3/2009
Section IV.doc
Page 126 of 128
03113/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root
Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector
assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
Section IV.doc
Page 127 of 128
03/13/2009
Section IV - Technical Specifications
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
Issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
Section IV.doc
Page 128 of 128
03/13/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I SECTION IV A
I SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents
I DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
I 01040 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION
01100 SUMMARY OF WORK
01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I 01220 PROJECT MEETINGS
01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
I 01340 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
I 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01590 FIELD OFFICES
I 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01660 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
01700 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
I 01710 FINAL CLEANING
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
I 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01800 TRAINING
I DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02060 DEMOLITION
I DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
I 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I 03350 CONCRETE FINISHES
03600 GROUT
03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
I DIVISION 5 - METALS
I 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
I
I 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 -
09900
09901
09902
09980
DIVISION 11-
11345
11350
DIVISION 13-
13401
13402
DIVISION 15-
15060
15063
15064
15075
15100
15103
15144
DIVISION 16-
16401
FINISHES
PAINTING
PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS
PWEANDEQUWMENTPAINTING
CHEMICAL RESISTANT COATINGS FOR CONCRETE
EQillPMENT
CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
HIGH DENSITY CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (HDXLPE)
CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE TANKS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS COMPONENT
SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL
PWING SYSTEM GENERAL
WALL PWES, SEEP RINGS AND PENETRATIONS
PWE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PROCESS EQUWMENT, PWING, AND VALVE
IDENTIFICATION
PROCESS VALVES
POL YVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
ELECTRICAL
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01000
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Work consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and
performing all Work included in this Contract. The Contractor shall coordinate
the Work with the Engineer and Owner to prevent any interference and disruption
to the plant's continuous operation throughout the construction period. The
Contractor will be held liable for permit violations caused by interruptions to the
plant's processes.
B. A summary of the Work is presented in Section 01100 - Summary of Work.
C. Work Included
1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials,
chemicals, plant power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances,
equipment, supplies, and means and methods of construction necessary for
proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contractor shall
obtain and pay for all necessary permits including but not be limited to
local building permits. The Contractor shall perform and complete the
Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction
consistent with the safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after
construction, until accepted, and shall do all Work and pay all costs
incidental to this clean up and maintenance. The Contractor shall repair or
restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed
during performance of the Work.
2. The cost of incidental work described in these Project Requirements for
which there are no specific Contract Items shall be considered as part of
the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices for
the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made.
3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modem plant, tools, and
equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform
in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the Work required by this
Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency
shall be used. Prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding, the
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
01000-1
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his
workmanship, materials, and equipment.
D. Public Utility Installations and Structures
Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles,
tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and
facilities pertaining to these utilities and structures whether owned or controlled
by the Owner; other governmental bodies; or privately owned by individuals,
fIrms, or corporations. Public utility installations and structures are those that
serve the public with transportation, traffIc control, gas, electricity, telephone,
sewerage, drainage, water, or other public or private property which may be
affected by the Work.
1. The Contract Documents contain data relative to public utility installations
and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not
guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility
of the Contractor to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of
the character, condition, and extent of all such installations and structures
as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations.
2. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures
from damage during the Work. In gaining access across any buried public
utility installation or structure, the Contractor shall avoid any damage to
these facilities. The Contractor shall provide all required protective
devices and construction at his expense. All public utilities damaged by
the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. No
separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public
utility installations or structures.
3. At all times in the performance of the Work the Contractor shall employ
acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid
unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of public utility
installations and structures and shall at all times in the performance of the
Work avoid unnecessary interference with or interruption of public utility
services and shall cooperate fully with the owners of those public utilities
to that end.
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01000-2
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL
A. Drawings: When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall
be used in preference to scaled dimensions and large-scale drawings in preference
to small-scale drawings.
B. Supplementary Drawings
1. When in the opinion of the Engineer it becomes necessary to explain more
fully the Work to be done or to illustrate the Work further or to show any
changes which may be required, the Engineer will prepare drawings
known as Supplementary Drawings with accompanying specifications,
and the Contractor will be furnished one complete set of reproducible
contract drawings (24 inches by 36 inches) and one reproducible copy of
the specifications.
2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with
the same force as the Contract Drawings. Where such Supplementary
Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of
Work, credit to the Owner or compensation to the Contractor shall be
subject to the terms of the Agreement.
C. Checking of Drawings and Data
1. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities, and details shown
on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications, or
other Data received from the Engineer, and shall notify the Engineer of all
errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found in the materials
checked. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies
shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory
work, faulty construction, or improper operation, nor from rectifying such
conditions at his own expense. The Contractor shall not be allowed to take
advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished
by the Engineer should such errors or omissions be discovered.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01000-3
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
2. The Contractor shall verify all demolition details on the Drawings,
Supplementary Drawings, Specification, or other Data in the field with the
plant operators and Engineer before starting work. Failure to discover or
correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of
full responsibility for unsatisfactory work; mistakes in demolition or faulty
construction; damages to existing equipment, instruments, and piping; nor
from rectifying such conditions at his own expenses.
3. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the
Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall
assume all responsibility for estimating the size, kind, and quality of
materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract.
D. Specifications: The Technical Specifications consist of three parts: General,
Products, and Execution. The General part of a Specification contains General
Requirements governing the Work. The Products and Execution parts modify and
supplement the General Requirements by detailed requirements for the Work and
shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict.
E. Intent
1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract but
not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be as
if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified either in the Drawings
or in the Specifications but necessary to carry out their intent or for the
complete and proper execution of the Work is required and shall be
performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or
described.
2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail or the apparent
omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be
done and materials to be furnished shall be regarded as meaning that only
the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and
workmanship of the best quality are to be used. These Specifications shall
be interpreted on that basis.
1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturer
1. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through
the Contractor, including Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) items, unless the
Contractor requests and at the Engineer's option that the manufacturer or
subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01000-4
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under
this Contract.
2. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type,
or classification used for identical types of service shall be made by the
same manufacturer.
Delivery
1. The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the
most efficient and uninterrupted progress of the Work to complete the
Work within the allotted time.
2. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries to avoid delay III or
impediment of the progress of the work of any related Contractor.
Tools and Accessories
1. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
furnish with each type, kind, or size of equipment one complete set of
suitably marked high-grade special tools and appliances which may be
needed to adjust, operate, maintain, or repair the equipment. Such tools
and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly
labeled, and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified in this Specification and as
recommended by the manufacturer necessary for the operation of the
equipment, not including materials required for routine maintenance.
3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
securely fastened in place, and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's
name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight, and principal rate data.
Service of Manufacturer's Engineer
1. The Contract Prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a
competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent
the manufacturer and shall help the Contractor to install, adjust, test, and
place in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract
Documents.
2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, the
manufacturer's engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and
tests required by the Engineer to prove that the equipment is in proper and
01000-5
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
satisfactory operating condition and shall instruct such personnel as may
be designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of
the equipment.
1.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. General:
1. For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel
shall make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports of these
inspections and tests shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to
determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Five copies of the
reports shall be submitted and authoritative certification of the reports
must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of
any material or equipment.
2. If during any test of any material or equipment, the Engineer determines
that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract
Documents, the Contractor will be notified and will be directed to refrain
from delivering the unacceptable material or equipment or to remove it
promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable
material, without cost to the Owner.
3. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be
conducted in accordance with the recognized test codes of the ANSI,
ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated in this
Specification.
4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of
equipment during testing and instruction periods and shall neither have nor
make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment before the
Owner formally takes over the operation of the equipment
B. Costs
1. All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will
be provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified.
2. The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests
specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the
Contractor, and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
Price.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01000-6
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
3. Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to
those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the Owner for
compliance. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the
expenditures incurred in making such tests of any materials and equipment
rejected for non-compliance.
Certificate of Manufacture
1. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with authoritative evidence in
the form of a certificate of manufacture that the materials to be used in the
Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract
Documents.
2. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results
of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been
made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer.
Shop Tests
1. Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating,
efficiency, performance, function, or special requirements are specified
shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively
prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor shall submit five copies of the manufacturer's actual test
data and interpreted results of these data, accompanied by a certificate of
authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing
company and/or independent laboratory, to the Engineer for approval.
3. The cost of shop tests and of furnishing the manufacturer's preliminary
and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the
Contractor.
E.
Start-up Tests
1. As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor,
materials, and instruments and shall make start -up tests of equipment.
2. If the start-up tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract
which does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall make all changes, adjustments, and replacements
required before demonstration tests. The manufacturer shall assist in the
start-up tests as applicable.
01000- 7
PROJECT REQUiREMENTS
F. Demonstration Tests
1. Before the Contractor can request a Substantial Completion inspection, all
equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to
demonstration tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the
Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and all other
materials, equipment, and instruments necessary for all demonstration
tests, at no additional cost to the Owner. The manufacturer shall assist in
the demonstration tests as applicable.
1.13 LINES AND GRADES
A. Grade
1. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the
lines and grades shown on the Drawings or as given by the Engineer. The
full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the
Contractor.
2. The Engineer will establish benchmarks and baseline controlling points.
As the Work progresses, the Contractor shall locate reference marks for
lines and grades so as to cause as little inconvenience to the prosecution of
the Work as possible. The Contractor shall place excavation and other
materials so as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks
provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him contrary to this
proVISIon.
B. Surveys
1. At his own expense the Contractor shall furnish and maintain stakes and
other such materials.
2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as he may
deem necessary and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention
to any inaccuracies.
3. At his own expense the Contractor shall establish all working or
construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set by
the Engineer and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of these
construction lines and grades. He shall, however, be subject to the
Engineer's check and review.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01000-8
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2
PART 3
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
C.
Safeguarding Marks
1. The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks,
monuments, and bench marks made or established on the Work; bear the
cost of re establishing them if disturbed; and bear the entire expense of
rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting
or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes, and
marks.
2. The Contractor shall safeguard all known property comers, monuments,
and marks adjacent to but not related to the Work and shall bear the cost
of re-establishing them if they are disturbed or destroyed.
PRODUCTS
In accordance with the provisions of paragraph 6.2 of the General Conditions, the
City of Clearwater is exercising its right to implement an Owner Direct Purchase/
Sales Tax Savings Program. At the time the Contract Price is established but not later
than concurrently with submission of the required values, the City of Clearwater and
the Engineer shall identify the specific items and the estimated costs of the potential
ODP.
The Contractor shall submit a separate line item cost for each ODP item. The
Contractor must clearly and separately identify any contingency or allowance amount
associated with any ODP items. The Contract Price must include the total cost of the
Work, including the cost of the ODP item and associated sales tax. After the City of
Clearwater and the Engineer have identified ODP items, the Contractor shall follow
the procedures set out in the contract documents.
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01000-9
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01040
CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall coordinate Work with that of other construction projects
insofar as they apply to the Contractor's Work.
B. Before starting Work and from time to time as the Work progresses, the
Contractor and each Subcontractor shall examine the work and materials installed
by others insofar as they apply to their own work and shall notify the Engineer
immediately in writing if any conditions exist which will prevent satisfactory
results in the installation of the system. Should the Contractor or Subcontractor
start work without such notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance of all
claims or questions as to the suitability of the work of others to receive the
Contractor's or Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall remove and/or
replace, at its own expense, all work under this Contract which may have to be
removed because of such defects or omissions.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner to prevent
any interference and disruption to the plant's continuous operation throughout the
construction period. The Contractor will be held liable for permit violations
caused by interruptions to the plant's processes.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the temporary chemical system supplier and
Owner at the Marshall Street and the East APCF during the Work, including but
not limited to the relocation of the temporary sodium hypochlorite pump skids at
the Marshall Street APCF. The location to which the temporary chemical pump
skids at the Marshall Street APCF are be relocated shall be verified in the field by
the Contractor and agreed upon with the Owner and the Engineer.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
B. Section 01220 - Progress Meetings
C. Section 01310 - Progress Schedule
D. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
E. Section 01700 - Project Close-Out
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit drawings, product data, and samples in accordance
with Project Submittals and Acceptance, Section 01340. Ensure compliance with
Contract Documents and field dimensions and clearances.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION COORDINA nON
01040-1
B. The Contractor shall submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents in
a timely fashion to ensure no disruptions with the Work as scheduled. Obtain
instructions through the Engineer to resolve all queries.
C. Process requests for substitutions and Change Orders through the Engineer.
D. Deliver closeout submittals to the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall indicate the location to which the temporary chemical skids
at the Marshall Street APCF will be relocated.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Contractor shall submit a preliminary Progress Schedule, in accordance with
Section 01310, to the Engineer. After review, revise and resubmit the Progress
Schedule to comply with requested revisions.
B. Submit a preliminary Sequence and Method Design for each facility, Marshall
Street and East APCF as described in Section 01100 - Summary of Work. After
review, revise and resubmit the Sequence and Method Design with requested
reVISIons.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION
To ensure efficient construction mobilization, the Contractor shall do the following:
A. Cooperate with the Owner in allocating mobilization areas on site for field offices
and sheds, access, traffic, and parking facilities. During construction, coordinate
use of the site and facilities through the Engineer.
B. Comply with the Engineer's procedures for intra-project communications:
submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings,
recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities/conflicts.
C. Comply with the Engineer's instructions for use of temporary utilities and
construction facilities.
D. Coordinate field Engineering and layout work under instructions of the Engineer.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01040-2
CONSTRUCTION COORDiNATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various Sections of Contract
Documents to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction
elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later.
F. Coordinate sequence of Work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified in
the Contract Documents.
G. In addition to Progress Meetings specified in Section 01220, hold pre-
construction conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to ensure
coordination of Work. The Engineer shall be informed of such meetings and shall
be allowed to attend.
H. Coordinate the Work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing equipment, connecting equipment, and placing such equipment in
servIce.
I. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of civil, architectural,
mechanical, structural, instrumentation, systems, and electrical and control work.
Follow practicable routings for pipes, ducts, and conduits, with due allowance for
available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Use space
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, maintenance, and
repaIrs.
J. The Contractor shall coordinate Work at existing facilities to minimize disruption
of the Owner's operations.
K. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified III Project Close-Out,
Section 01700.
1.11 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall provide information required by the Engineer for preparing
coordination drawings.
B. Review drawings before submitting them to the Engineer.
1.12 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES
A. Notify the Owner when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with the Owner's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed
Certificates of Substantial Completion.
C. Notify the Owner when Work has reached Final Completion.
D. Comply with the Owner's instructions for completion of items of Work found
incomplete in the Engineer's final inspection.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01040-3
CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION
E. Comply with Project Closeout, Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All vehicles on the property or easement must be operative.
3.02 UTILITIES
Coordinate with utility compames on all underground and above ground utilities III the
construction area.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
No cutting and patching of new Work will be accepted. All Work must be new and continuous
in its final form.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01040-4
CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, the Work must be performed
using the best modem practice, with materials and workmanship of the highest quality to the
satisfaction ofthe Owner.
A. The Project title is "Marshall Street and East APCF Chlorine Gas and Sulfur
Dioxide Gas Conversion Project."
B. The Work of this project generally consists of the following:
1. Remove the chlorine gas and sulfur dioxide gas systems and install a new
liquid chlorine (12% sodium hypochlorite solution) system and a liquid
bisulfite (40% sodium bisulfite solution) system in the Marshall Street and
East APCF and perform related work.
11. Modification of the flow meter at the reclaimed water wet well in Marshall
Street APCF and perform related work.
111. Resurface, clean, prepare and re-paint interior walls and ceilings of the
Chlorine Building, Sulfur Building, and Chlorinator/Sulfonator Room at
Marshall Street APCF and of the Chlorine Building, including Chlorinator
Room, and the Sulfur Building at East APCF.
C. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for
the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with
Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from paying sales tax.
D. The Owner has reserved the right to retain some or all of the equipment/material
removed from the Work except that specified in Section 02060.
E. The Specifications and Drawings are an integral part of the Contract Documents
and as such will not stand alone if used independently as individual sections,
divisions, or drawing sheets. The Drawings and Specifications establish
minimum standards of quality for this Project. They do not purport to cover all
details of the design and construction of materials and equipment.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01100-1
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 CONTRACT METHOD AND TIME
A. The Work described in the Contract Documents will be constructed under a
Lump-Sum Contract with two separate items: (1) liquid chlorine and liquid
bisulfite at the Marshall Street APCF, and (2) liquid chlorine and liquid bisulfite
at the East APCF.
B. Work will begin no later than 5 calendar days from the written Notice to Proceed.
C. Contract time from the Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion is 270
consecutive calendar days and an additional 30 consecutive calendar days from
Substantial Completion to Final Completion. The total contract time from the
Notice to Proceed to Final Completion for all work at the Marshall Street and East
APCF is 300 consecutive calendar days.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE
The following sequence of construction is intended to illustrate the requirements for demolition,
construction, and installation of the liquid chlorine and liquid bisufite systems at the Marshall
Street and East APCF. This is not intended to be a complete list of all required construction
activities but a guideline for the sequencing of work. Installing support systems such as
electrical and control or making site improvements is not included in this description. The exact
sequence of construction shall be determined by the Contractor subject to the subsequent
requirements. The Contractor shall submit a sequence-of-construction plan with description on
how the Work will be performed to the Engineer for approval within 2 weeks after the Notice to
Proceed to ensure that all critical unit processes are kept in proper operation and to minimize
interruptions to the treatment process. Before starting the Work the Contractor shall verify all
equipment and material to be demolished and shall verify all new connections. During the Work
the Contractor shall maintain the operation and shall take all precaution to protect existing
equipment and/or new equipment from damage and shall be responsible for any damage.
A. Marshall Street APCF - Liquid Chlorine and Bisulfite
1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the temporary systems supplier to
relocate the temporary chemical pump skids to prevent any interruption to
the chlorination and de-chlorination operation of the treatment plant
during construction of the new liquid chlorine and liquid bisulfite systems
at the Marshall Street APCF. The Contractor will be held liable for permit
violations caused by interruptions to any of the plant's processes.
2. The temporary systems cannot be disconnected until the new permanent
systems are installed, inspected, accepted by the Owner, and operational.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01100-2
SUMMARY OF WORK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. The Contractor shall prevent any gas leakage and exposure, if any, of his
workers, the plant operators, and nearby residents to the gas during the
removal of the cWorinators; sulfonators; and associated equipment, piping,
and storage accessories. The Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety
Plan to the Engineer for review and approval. All work must comply with
the approved Health and Safety Plan.
4. The Contractor shall purge the equipment and piping of any residual gas,
if necessary, before removing and disposing of the equipment and piping.
5. A sequence must be followed to avoid process downtime. The Contractor
must design the sequence and method for installing and starting up the
new liquid cWorine and liquid bisulfite feed systems and submit the
sequence to the Engineer for approval before beginning the Work.
B. East APCF - Liquid CWorine and Bisulfite
1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the temporary systems supplier to
maintain the cWorination and de-cWorination operation of the treatment
plant during construction of the new liquid cWorine and liquid bisulfite
systems at the East APCF. The Contractor will be held liable for permit
violations caused by interruptions to any ofthe plant's processes.
2. The temporary systems cannot be disconnected until the new permanent
systems are installed, inspected, accepted by the Owner, and operational.
3. The Contractor shall prevent any gas leakage and exposure, if any, of his
workers, the plant operators, and nearby residents to the gas during the
removal of the, cWorinators; sulfonators; and associated equipment,
piping, and storage accessories. The Contractor shall submit a Health and
Safety Plan to the Engineer for review and approval. All work must
comply with the approved Health and Safety Plan.
4. The Contractor shall purge the equipment and piping of any residual gas,
if necessary, before removing and disposing of the equipment and piping.
5. A sequence must be followed to avoid process downtime. The Contractor
must design the sequence and method for installing and starting up the
new liquid cWorine and liquid bisulfite feed systems and submit the
sequence to the Engineer for approval before beginning the Work.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01100-3
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
PART 2 WORKING HOURS
2.01 GENERAL
Workdays shall consist of 10 hours maximum, between 6:00 am and 6:00 pm, Monday
through Friday. City inspection services are available 7:30 am to 3:30 pm, excluding
weekends and holidays. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection services required
outside normal work hours.
2.02 SAFETY PROCEDURES
The Contractor is responsible for taking all appropriate safety precautions to meet
whatever hazardous conditions may be present during the performance of the work,
whether reasonably foreseeable or not.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all safety procedures and maintaining a
safe work place in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In
addition, the Contractor shall review and comply with the City of Clearwater
Emergency Action Plan and all Safety Procedures for Advanced Pollution-Control
Facilities.
The Contractor shall also prepare and submit a Site-Specific Hurricane Preparedness
Plan, Emergency Response Plan, and Health and Safety Plan for all two locations.
The Contractor shall submit the name(s) of an employee(s) assigned on-site
responsibility to enforce compliance with the Contractor's safety program and with all
federal, state, and local safety regulations. This person(s) shall have current certification
showing the completion of a 10-hr OSHA Basic Safety Course. The Contractor shall also
supply the name and contact information of the Corporate Safety Director.
Compliance with the above does not relieve the Contractor of his sole duty and
responsibility for ensuring a safe worksite and work environment.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
SUMMARY OF WORK
01100-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.03 ACCIDENT REPORTS
Accidents shall be reported immediately to the Owner's Site Representative by
messenger, telephone, or other communication device.
All accidents shall be documented and a full detailed written report shall be submitted to
the Owner's representative after each accident.
2.04 CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORTS
The Contractor shall submit daily reports of construction activities, including non-
working days. The report shall include the following:
1. Activity work referencing the CPM activity number.
2. Manpower on each project location; specify number and trade.
3. Equipment on each project location; specify whether in use or idle.
4. Major deliveries.
5. Problems, conflicts, errors, and interference with planned operations or delays.
2.05 TWO WEEKS LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall submit a two-week look ahead schedule during the bi-weekly site
meeting. The schedule shall detail Contractor's plan to accomplish in the next two
weeks.
PART 3 ABBREVIATIONS
3.01 ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, AND CODES
Reference in the Specifications to known standards, codes, specifications, etc., promulgated by
professional or technical associations, institutions, and societies is intended to mean the latest
edition of each such standard adopted and published as of the date of the Advertisement for Bid
on this project except where otherwise specifically indicated. Each such standard referred to
shall be considered a part of the Specifications to the same extent as if reproduced in this Section
in full. The following documents apply to this Contract:
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
Formerly (AASHO)
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01100-5
SUMMARY OF WORK
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01100-6
SUMMARY OF WORK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Standards Association (ASA)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM)
American Water Works Association (A WW A)
American Welding Society (A WS)
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA)
Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA)
Construction Specifications Institute (CSI)
Federal Specification (FS)
Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP)
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, Latest English Edition (Standard Specifications)
FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design Standards Latest English Edition (FDOT Index)
National Bureau of Standards (NBS)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Portland Cement Association (PCA)
Occupational Safety and Health Act (Public Law 91-596), U.S. Department of Labor
(OSHA)
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
Southern Standard Building Code (SSBC)
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
United States of America Standards Institute (USASI)
US Environmental Protection Agency (USEP A)
Regulations of Florida Industrial Commission Regarding Safety
All local, state, county, or municipal building code requirements of the Owner's
Insurance.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01100-7
SUMMARY OF WORK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01200
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall produce a completed, quality project, as intended by the general nature of
the Drawings and Specifications, whether or not any particular wording or direction is
inadvertently omitted. Pay items listed on the Bid Form are for comparison of bids and may be
used as a method of determining the value of work performed for partial payment requests.
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 LUMP-SUM QUANTITIES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the quantities of each lump-sum pay
item necessary to complete the Work as required by the Contract Documents. When lump-sum
items are broken into components, the sum of the components shall be the total Contract Price
for the Work. The lump-sum price stated on the Bid Form shall constitute full compensation for
each pay item completed in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. No other
payments will be made to the Contractor except as specifically authorized by change order.
PART 2 PAY ITEM DESCRlPTIONS
The descriptions provided in the following paragraphs are to be used by the Bidder to prepare a
bid proposal. They generally indicate how the major work scope items and their respective costs
are to be separated into the line items listed in the Lump-Sum Schedule. These descriptions are
not fully representative nor all inclusive of the work required to complete the project in
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01200-1
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
accordance with the Contract Documents. It is the Bidder's responsibility to include costs within
the most appropriate line item(s) of the Lump-Sum Schedule. The following descriptions are
ordered in the same numeric sequence as the Lump-Sum Schedule.
2.01 MARSHALL STREET APCF CHLORINE AND BISULFITE SYSTEMS
Item I - Demolition of remaining piping, equipment, and electrical components of
chlorine gas system and sulfur dioxide gas system (Main components already removed.)
1. Under this item the Contractor shall remove the overhead cranes and crane
supports; electrical wiring and control, and any remaining associated
piping and piping support up to the tie-in points of the new system, load,
transport and disposal of removed materials, and other related work as
specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item I - Demolition of remaining piping,
equipment, and electrical components of chlorine gas system and sulfur
dioxide gas system (Main components already removed.)
Item 2a - Furnish and deliver sodium hypochlorite solution bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, and
proper storage prior to installation of five new sodium hypochlorite
solution bulk storage tanks, and associated ultrasonic level meter and
transmitter and accessory as specified in the Contract Documents and
shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 2a - Furnish and deliver sodium
hypochlorite solution bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
Item 2b - Sodium hypochlorite solution bulk storage tanks sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract
amount.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01200-2
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item 2c - Installation, testing, and warranty of sodium hypochlorite solution bulk storage
tanks
1. Under this bid item the Contractor shall install the concrete pad for the
tanks, re-surface the building floor, coating of pads and floor with
chemical resistant epoxy, install the sodium hypochlorite solution bulk
storage tanks, connect the chemical feed and discharge pipes, vent pipes,
ultrasonic level meters and associated transmitters, testing, warranty, and
all related work for a complete operational system supplying sodium
hypochlorite solution to the new chemical feed pump skids as specified in
the Contract Document. The Contractor shall clean and re-paint the
interior walls and ceilings of the Chlorine Room and the Chlorinator
Room ofthe Chemical Building as specified in the Contract Document.
2. Payment under this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with
the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item and upon Engineer
verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 2c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of sodium hypochlorite solution bulk storage tanks.
Item 3a - Furnish and deliver sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, and
proper storage prior to installation of three new sodium bisulfite solution
bulk storage tanks, and associated ultrasonic level meter and transmitter
and accessory as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the
Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 3a - Furnish and deliver sodium
bisulfite solution bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
Item 3b - Sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage tanks sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
the completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract
amount.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-3
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Item 3c - Installation, testing, and warranty of sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage tanks
1. Under this bid item the Contractor shall install the concrete pad for the
tanks, re-surface the building floor, coating of pads and floor with
chemical resistant epoxy, install the sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage
tanks, connect the chemical feed and discharge pipes, vent pipes, ultrasonic
level meters and associated transmitters, testing, warranty, and all related
work for a complete operational system supplying sodium bisulfite
solution to the new chemical feed pump skids as specified in the Contract
Document and shown in the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall
clean and re-paint the interior walls and ceilings of the Sulfur Room of the
Chemical Building as specified in the Contract Document.
2. Payment under this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with
the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item and upon Engineer
verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 3c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage tanks.
Item 4a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed pump skids for sodium hypochlorite system -
ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, and
proper storage prior to installation of three new sodium hypochlorite
solution feed pump skids with chemical feed pumps and associated
instruments, flow meters, electrical and control panel, piping and fittings,
calibration cylinder, valves and related instruments, and related equipment
for a complete operational pump skid as specified in the Contract
Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 4a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed
pump skids for sodium hypochlorite system - ODP Item
Item 4b - Chemical feed pump skids for sodium hypochlorite system sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of project, this item will be deducted from the final contract amount.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-4
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item 4c - Installation, testing, and warranty of chemical feed pump skids for sodium
hypochlorite feed systems.
1. Under this item the Contractor shall install the sodium hypochlorite feed
pump skids, flow meters and transmitters, piping and fittings, instruments,
filling stations, interconnecting piping to the tie-in points of discharge,
electrical and control, safety equipment, flow meters at the reclaimed
water wet well, pump skid testing, warranty and all related work for a
complete operational sodium hypochlorite feed system as specified and
shown in the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate with the
temporary system supplier and Owner to relocate the temporary sodium
hypochlorite feed pump skids. The temporary system supplier will remove
the temporary system after the new permanent system is operational and
accepted by the Owner. The temporary piping will be capped and left in
place. During the Work, no interruption of the chlorination process is
allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any permit violation
related to the Work.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification
3. Payment shall be made under Item 4c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of chemical feed pump skids for sodium hypochlorite feed systems.
Item 5a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed pump skids for sodium bisulfite system - ODP
Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, and
proper storage prior to installation of one new sodium bisulfite solution
feed pump skid with chemical feed pumps and associated instruments,
flow meters, electrical and control panel, piping and fittings, calibration
cylinder, valves and related instruments, and related equipment for a
complete operational pump skid as specified in the Contract Documents
and shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 5a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed
pump skids for sodium bisulfite system - ODP Item
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-5
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Item 5b - Chemical feed pump skids for sodium bisulfite system sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of project, this item will be deducted from the [mal contract amount.
Item 5c - Installation, testing, and warranty of chemical feed pump skids for sodium
bisulfite feed systems.
1. Under this item the Contractor shall install the sodium bisulfite feed pump
skids, flow meters and transmitters, piping and fittings, instruments, filling
stations, interconnecting piping to the tie-in points of discharge, electrical
and control, safety equipment, pump skid testing, warranty and all related
work for a complete operational sodium bisulfite feed system in the
Chemical Building as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in
the Contract Drawings. The temporary system supplier will remove the
temporary system after the new permanent system is operational and
accepted by the Owner. The temporary piping will be capped and left in
place. During the Work, no interruption of the dechlorination process is
allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any permit violation
related to the Work.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification
3. Payment shall be made under Item 5c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of chemical feed pump skids for sodium bisulfite feed systems.
Item 6 - Furnish and Relocate the Level Meter in the Reclaimed Water Pump Wet Well
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish a ultrasonic level meter and
relocate a ultrasonic level meter in the reclaimed water pump wet well
downstream of the chlorine contact chamber, modification of electrical
and control, and related work as specified in the Contract Documents and
shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under item 6 - Furnish and Relocate the Level
meter in the Reclaimed Water Pump Wet Well.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-6
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item 7 - Mobilization and Demobilization
1. Under this item the Contractor shall perform preparatory and cleanup
work and operations in mobilizing and demobilizing for beginning and
closing of the work on the project including but not limited to those
operations necessary for moving personnel, equipment, supplies, and
incidentals to the project site and for the establishment of temporary
offices and sanitary and other facilities. This item shall also include
demobilization work for closing of work on the project including leaving
the site in its original or better condition. The bid price shall not exceed
3% of the total bid price for the Marshall Street APCF chlorine and
bisulfite work.
2. Payment for this item shall be made according to the following:
Percent of Original Contract Allowable Percent of the
Amount Earned Mobilization Lump Sum
5 30
10 50
25 80
50 100
3. Payment shall be made under Item 7 - Mobilization and Demobilization
Item 8 - SCADA Integration Services Allowance
1. Under this bid item the Contractor shall integrate the new equipment to the
SCADA system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the
Contract Drawings. The work will be performed by the City's SCADA
Contractor.
2. Payment for SCADA integration services shall be made upon receipt of
invoices (copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of
services. Payment shall be made for submitted invoice amounts. Payment
to the Contractor for coordinating, obtaining, and submitting documents
shall be included in other bid items associated with the work.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 8 - SCADA Integration Service
Allowance.
Item 9 - Owner's 10% Contingency
Under this bid item the Contractor shall perform unforeseen work not included in
the other bid items and requested and approved by the Engineer/Owner. The cost
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-7
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-8
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
of this additional work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by the
Engineer/Owner prior to commencement of the work.
2.02 EAST APCF CHLORINE AND BISULFITE SYSTEMS
Item 10 - Demolition of chlorine gas system and sulfur dioxide gas system
1. Under this item the Contractor shall remove the overhead crane and
support, gas cylinder scale, cylinder supports, chlorinators, sulfonators,
associated piping and piping support up to the tie-in points of the new
system, associated electrical and instruments, demolish the floor slab,
load, transport and disposal of removed materials, and perform related
work as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract
Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 10 - Demolish the chlorine gas system
in the Chlorine Building, sulfur dioxide gas system in the Sulfur Dioxide
Building, and related work
Item 11 a - Furnish and deliver sodium hypochlorite bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload and
proper storage prior to installation of three new sodium hypochlorite
solution bulk storage tanks, associated accessory, and associated ultrasonic
level meter and transmitters as specified in the Contract Documents and
shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 11 a - Furnish and deliver sodium
hypochlorite bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
Item 11 b - Sodium hypochlorite bulk storage tanks sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract
amount.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item 11 c - Installation, testing, and warranty of sodium hypochlorite solution bulk storage
tanks
1. Under this bid item the Contractor shall install the concrete floor slab,
concrete pad for the tanks and coating of pads and building floor with
chemical resistant epoxy, install the sodium hypochlorite solution bulk
storage tanks, connect the chemical feed and discharge pipes, vent pipes,
ultrasonic level meters and associated transmitters, testing, warranty, and
all related work for a complete operational system supplying sodium
hypochlorite solution to the new chemical feed pump skids as specified in
the Contract Document and shown in the Contract Drawings. The
Contractor shall clean, re-paint the interior walls and ceilings of the
Chlorine Building and Chlorinator Room as specified in the Contract
Document.
2. Payment under this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with
the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item and upon Engineer
verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 11 c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of sodium hypochlorite solution bulk storage tanks.
Item 12a - Furnish and deliver sodium bisulfite bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, and
proper storage prior to installation of two new sodium bisulfite solution
bulk storage tanks, associated accessory, and associated ultrasonic level
meter and transmitters as specified in the Contract Documents and shown
in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 12a - Furnish and deliver sodium
bisulfite bulk storage tanks - ODP Item
Item 12b - Sodium bisulfite bulk storage tanks sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract
amount.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-9
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Item 12c - Installation, testing, and warranty of sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage
tanks
1. Under this bid item the Contractor shall install the concrete floor slab,
concrete pad for the tanks, coating of pads and building floor with
chemical resistant epoxy, install the sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage
tanks, connect the chemical feed and discharge pipes, vent pipes, ultrasonic
level meters and associated transmitters, testing, warranty, and all related
work for a complete operational system supplying sodium bisulfite
solution to the new chemical feed pump skids as specified in the Contract
Document and shown in Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall clean
and re-paint the interior walls and ceilings of the Sulfur Dioxide Building
as specified in the Contract Document.
2. Payment under this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with
the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item and upon Engineer
verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 12c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of sodium bisulfite solution bulk storage tanks.
Item 13a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed pump skids for sodium hypochlorite system -
ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, proper
storage prior to installation of two new sodium hypochlorite solution feed
pump skids with chemical feed pumps and associated instruments, flow
meters and transmitters, electrical and control panel, piping, calibration
cylinder, valves, and related equipment for a complete operational pump
skid as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract
Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 13a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed
pump skids for sodium hypochlorite system - ODP Item
Item 13b - Chemical feed pump skids for sodium hypochlorite system sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract
amount.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01200-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item Bc - Installation, testing, and warranty of chemical feed pump skids for sodium
hypocWorite feed systems.
1. Under this item the Contractor shall install the sodium hypocWorite feed
pump skids, flow meters and transmitters, piping and fittings, instruments,
filling stations, interconnecting piping to the tie-in points of discharge,
electrical and control, safety equipment, pump skid testing, warranty and
all related work for a complete operational sodium hypocWorite feed
system as specified and shown in the Contract Drawings. The temporary
system supplier will remove the temporary system after the new
permanent system is operational and accepted by the Owner. The
temporary piping will be capped and left in place. During the Work, no
interruption to the cWorination process is allowed. The Contractor shall
be responsible for any permit violation related to the Work.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification
3. Payment shall be made under Item Bc - Installation, testing, and warranty
of chemical feed pump skids for sodium hypocWorite feed systems.
Item 14a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed pump skids for sodium bisulfite system -
ODP Item
1. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, deliver to site, unload, proper
storage prior to installation of one new sodium bisulfite solution feed
pump skid with chemical feed pumps, flow meters and transmitters,
associated instruments, electrical and control panel, piping and fittings,
calibration cylinder, valves and related instruments, and related equipment
for a complete operational pump skid as specified in the Contract
Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification.
3. Payment shall be made under Item 14a - Furnish and deliver chemical feed
pump skids for sodium bisulfite system - ODP Item
Item 14b - Chemical feed pump skids for sodium bisulfite system sales tax
This item is for the sales tax associated with the purchasing of the ODP item. At
completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-11
MEASUREMENf AND PAYMENT
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01200-12
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
amount.
Item 14c - Installation, testing, and warranty of chemical feed pump skids for sodium
bisulfite feed systems.
1. Under this item the Contractor shall install the sodium bisulfite feed pump
skids, flow meters and associated transmitters, piping and fittings,
instruments, filling stations, interconnecting piping to the tie-in points of
discharge, electrical and control, safety equipment, pump skid testing,
warranty and all related work for a complete operational sodium bisulfite
feed system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the
Contract Drawings. The temporary system supplier will remove the
temporary system after the new permanent system is operational and
accepted by the Owner. The temporary piping will be capped and left in
place. During the Work, no interruption to the dechlorination process is
allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any permit violation
related to the Work.
2. Payment for this item shall be on a lump-sum basis in accordance with a
percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved
schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification
3. Payment shall be made under Item 14c - Installation, testing, and warranty
of chemical feed pump skids for sodium bisulfite feed systems.
Item 15 - Mobilization and Demobilization
1. Under this item the Contractor shall perform preparatory and cleanup
work and operations in mobilizing and demobilizing for beginning and
closing of the work on the project including but not limited to those
operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies,
and incidentals to the project site and for the establishment of temporary
offices and sanitary and other facilities. This item shall also include
demobilization work for closing of work on the project, including leaving
the site in its original or better condition. The bid price shall not exceed
3% of the total bid price for the East APCF chlorine and bisulfite work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Payment for this item shall be made according to the following:
Percent of Original Contract Allowable Percent of the
Amount Earned Mobilization Lump Sum
5 30
10 50
25 80
50 100
3. Payment shall be made under Item 15 - Mobilization and Demobilization
Item 16 - SCADA Integration Services Allowance
1. Under this bid item the Contractor shall integrate the new equipment to the
SCADA system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in
Contract Drawings. The work will be performed by the City SCADA
Contractor.
2. Payment for SCADA integration services shall be made upon receipt of
invoices (copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of
services. Payment shall be made for submitted invoice amounts. Payment
to the Contractor for coordinating, obtaining, and submitting documents
shall be included in other bid items associated with the work
3. Payment shall be made under Item 16 - SCADA Integration Services
Allowance.
Item 17 - Owner's 10% Contingency
Under this bid item the Contractor shall perform unforeseen work not included in
the other bid items that may be requested and approved by the Engineer/Owner.
The cost of this additional work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by
the Engineer/Owner prior to commencement of the work.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01200-13
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01220
PROGRESS MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
The Owner's Representative shall schedule a meeting after NOTICE OF AWARD (see Section III
Article 2.5); this meeting shall be attended by the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and Major
Subcontractors, if needed.
The agenda will be:
1. Submit executed bonds and insurance certificates (if not previously provided)
2. Introduce personnel representing the parties in this Contract and the establishing of
lines of communication, including contact methods, phone numbers, e-mail
addresses, and emergency contact information for all parties.
3. Review Contract administration procedures, including but not limited to
processing field decisions, submittals, substitutions, payment applications, cut-off
dates, proposal requests, request for information, change order procedures,
Contractor's work plan, project CPM schedule, as-built record maintenance, and
contract closeout procedures.
4. Clarify Owner direct-purchase (ODP) requirements and procedures.
5. Submit list of Subcontractors and major suppliers.
6. Discuss general issues, including but limited to site offices location, temporary
utilities lay down/storage areas, sanitary facilities, review of working hours, project
signage, site access, housekeeping/general cleanup, security etc.
7. Establish Meeting Schedule
1.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
The Owner's Representative will schedule a meeting with the Contractor at the project sites before
the Contractor's occupancy. This meeting is to be held to confirm the designated locations for site
offices, temporary utilities hookup sanitary facilities, storage, and the Contractor's lay-down areas.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01220-1
PROJECT MEETINGS
1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Progress Meetings (see Section III Article 2.6) will be required to review project
progress, to ensure correct interpretation of these documents, and to maintain general
coordination between the Owner's, Engineer's, and Contractor's project personnel.
The agenda will indicate which project members should be present at each meeting.
B. The Engineer shall do the following:
1. Schedule and administer regular Progress Meetings throughout progress of
the Work at 2-week intervals.
2. Make physical arrangements, prepare agenda, and distribute notice of each
meeting to participants 4 working days in advance of the meeting date.
3. Attendees for the Progress Meetings shall include the Contractor, job
superintendent, sub-consultants, subcontractors, and suppliers as appropriate
to agenda.
Agenda shall include but not be limited to the following items:
a. Approval of minutes of previous meetings
b. Review of Work progress
c. Field observations, problems, and decisions
d. Maintenance of Progress Schedule
e. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals
f. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules
g. Identification of problems that impede planned progress
h. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules
1. Planned progress during succeeding work periods
J. Coordination of projected progress
k. Maintenance of quality and work standards
1. Other business relating to the Work
C. The Contractor shall do the following:
1. Submit a Two-Week look ahead schedule detailing what the Contractor is
planning to accomplish in the next two weeks including material delivery and
equipment mobilization/demobilization. The Two-Week look ahead
schedule shall coincide with the overall project schedule.
2. Discuss what has been accomplished in the last 2-weeks.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROJECT MEETINGS
01220-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections or requested in the field, the
Engineer shall convene pre-installation conferences at Work sites before beginning
the Work of the Section or item.
B. The Engineer will require attendance of entities directly affecting or affected by
Work.
C. The Engineer shall notify participants 4 working days in advance of the meeting date.
D. The Engineer shall prepare the agenda, preside at the conference, record minutes, and
distribute copies to participants within 1 week after the conference.
E. The Engineer shall review conditions of installation, preparation and installation
procedures, and coordination with related Work and the manufacturer's
representative services.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01220-3
PROJECT MEETINGS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01310
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All work of this contract shall be scheduled and monitored by the Contractor
using Critical Path Method (CPM) techniques (see Section III Article 2.5). The
Contractor shall prepare all schedules and all montWy updates described in this
Section. Revisions of the schedule to reflect changes in the Contractor's plan of
performance or changes in the Work will be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer for acceptance. The Engineer's acceptance of the
scheduling documents is to determine that all CPM Scheduling documents
prepared by the Contractor are in conformance with the Contract Documents and
specifications described in this Section. Such acceptance will not impose on the
Engineer or Owner the responsibility for the schedule or for the sequencing,
scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor will such acceptance interfere with or
relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for the schedule and the means,
methods, procedures, and sequence of construction.
B. The Contractor shall use the latest version of Primavera Scheduling software, or
an approved equal, for all CPM Scheduling applications.
C. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed progress schedule
throughout the construction of the project. The schedule shall be the Contractor's
working schedule and used to plan, organize, and execute the Work; record and
report actual performance and progress; and show how the Contractor plans to
complete the Work. The schedule will be in the form of an activity-oriented
network diagram (Critical Path Method). The principles and definition of the
terms used in this Section shall be as set forth in the Associated General
Contractors of American (AGC) publication, Construction Planning and
Scheduling, Copyright 1994. In the event of discrepancies elsewhere in the
Contract Documents, this Section shall govern the development and use of the
progress schedule.
D. When the CPM Schedule is approved by the Contractor and accepted by the
Engineer, it shall become part of the Contract Documents and will be used by the
Contractor and the Engineer to monitor the progress of the project. The CPM
Schedule may be revised to show changes in the Contractor's method or manner
of performance, delays, or authorized changes in the Work. All changes to the
schedule will be made in accordance with Section 1.14 of this Section.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
o 131O-}
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
E. The Contractor acknowledges that the float belongs to the project and can be
shared by the Owner and Contractor.
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit in accordance with Section 01340 - Project
Submittals, one electronic copy and five hard copies of the Progress Schedule.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall employ or retain to services of a Project Scheduler for the
CPM scheduling of this project. The Project Scheduler will have a minimum of 5
years verifiable experience as the person primarily responsible for preparing and
maintaining detailed CPM project schedules on projects of similar size and nature
as this project.
The Contractor shall submit the name, company employment history, project
scheduling experience with corresponding contract values, and verifiable
references with phone numbers and contact for the Project Scheduler.
The Engineer shall have the right to approve or disapprove employment of the
Project Scheduler. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of his decision within
7 calendar days from receipt of the Project Scheduler's Statement of
Qualifications. In case of rejection, the Contractor shall resubmit another Project
Scheduler's Statement of Qualifications for consideration. Approval or
disapproval of the Project Scheduler does not release the Contractor from his
Contractual obligations.
B. The Project Scheduler shall attend all meetings pertaining to scheduling and
progress of the Work and be ready to discuss alleged delays and time impacts.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
01310-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.10 PRELIMINARY 120-DA Y CPM SCHEDULE (NOT USED)
1.11 DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE
A. The Detailed Network Diagram shall provide sufficient detail and clarity of form
and technique so that the Contractor can plan, schedule, and control his work
properly and the Engineer can readily monitor and follow the progress for all
portions of the Work. The Detailed Network Diagram shall comply with the
Contract Times of the Agreement and various limits imposed by the Contract
Documents, including required sequencing of portions of the Work described in
the Summary of Work section. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of
the Engineer, but the following factors shall have a bearing on the required depth
of activity detail:
1. The structural breakdown of the project
2. Project Phasing and/or Milestones
3. The type of work to be performed and the labor trades involved
4. All purchase, manufacture, and delivery activities for all major materials
and equipment
5. Maintenance of Facilities in Operation
6. Submittal and approval of shop drawings and material samples
7. Plans for all subcontract work
8. Crew flows and sizes
9. Assignment of responsibility for performing all activities
10. Access and availability to work areas
11. Identification of interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent
and follow-on subcontractors and contractors
12. Testing and start up of systems
13. Planning for phased takeover by Owner
B. Activities shown shall be in working days and shall have a maximum duration of
10 days except in the case of non-construction activities such as procurement of
materials and delivery of equipment. All durations shall be the result of definitive
manpower and resource planning by the Contractor.
C. The Detailed Network Diagram shall be prepared using a computer plotter.
1.12 COMPUTERIZATION OF THE DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE
A. The mathematical analysis of the Detailed Network Diagram shall be made by
computer, and a tabulation for each activity shall include the following:
1. Unique event numbers
2. Activity descriptions
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01310-3
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
3. Durations in workdays for each activity
4. Earliest start date (by calendar date)
5. Earliest finish date (by calendar date)
6. Latest start day (by calendar date)
7. Latest finish day (by calendar date)
8. Slack or total float in workdays
9. Percentage of activity completed
B. The following computer outputs shall be prepared as part of the initial schedule
submission and each update thereafter:
1. Activity file sort
2. Eight week "Look Ahead" detailed bar chart
3. Summary bar chart
4. Additional computer sorts as required by the Owner
5. Electronic copy of all computer files
6. Four copies of each ofltems 1 through 4 above
1.13 COMPLETION REQUIREMENT
A. The 120- Day Schedule shall be completed within 15 calendar days after the date
contained in the Notice to Proceed.
B. The Detailed CPM Schedule shall be prepared within 30 calendar days after the
date contained in the Notice to Proceed.
C. If the Contractor fails to provide the required CPM scheduling documents to the
Engineer within the time prescribed and/or revisions of the documents within the
required time, the Contractor shall be in default of the Contract requirements and
the Engineer may withhold approval of progress payments until such time as the
Contractor submits the required information.
D. Notwithstanding the implementation of the Progress Schedule, it shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time of
completion required by the Contract.
1.14 UPDATINGS
A. The 120-Day CPM Schedule shall be updated monthly until the Engineer accepts
the Detailed CPM Schedule.
B. The first update of the Detailed CPM Schedule shall take place 60 calendar days
after the Notice to Proceed with subsequent updates performed monthly at the
jobsite for the duration of the contract.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
01310-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. The Contractor shall update the Detailed CPM Schedule monthly, using a
cutoff/data date agreeable to both the Contractor and the Engineer. This
cutoff/data date shall be consistent from month to month. The updated
information shall include but not be limited to:
1. Actual start dates
2. Actual completion dates
3. Activity percent completion
4. Remaining duration of activities in progress
D. The Contractor shall update all the scheduling documents and submit the
documents to the Engineer within 5 workdays of the cutoff/data date.
E. As part of the normal CPM update, the Contractor shall prepare a written
narrative report highlighting the progress during the past update period. The
written narrative report shall include but not be limited to the following
information:
1. Summary of work accomplished during the past update period
2. Milestone Comparison Chart
3. Analysis of Critical Path(s)
4. Analysis of Secondary Critical Path(s). Secondary Critical Path is defined
as float within ten (10) W.D. of Critical Path
5. Analysis oftime lost/gained during the update period
6. Identification of problem areas
7. Identification of change orders and/or any delay that IS currently
impacting/delaying the project schedule
8. Solutions to current problems
F. The Contractor is required to attend and participate in a CPM update review
meeting with the Engineer. Attendance is mandatory. This meeting will take
place 7 work days after the cutoff/data date. The purpose of this meeting is to
review past progress, current status, problem areas, and future progress. The
Contractor's narrative report will be reviewed at this meeting.
G. All schedule update information outlined above will be reviewed and accepted by
the Engineer.
1.15 RECOVERY SCHEDULE
A. If the Contractor fails to achieve the planned progress, as indicated in the
approved/updated detailed CPM Schedule, and the Contractor's lack of progress
delays the Critical path and/or an intermediate milestone by more than lO work
days (monthly or cumulatively), the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01310-5
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
review and acceptance a proposed Recovery Schedule indicating how the
Contractor will recover the time lost.
B. If the Contractor fails to submit a Recovery Schedule and/or fails to cooperate
with the Engineer in the Recovery Schedule process, the Owner can immediately
order the Contractor to accelerate completion of the late activities by whatever
means necessary without any additional costs to the Owner. The Owner can
withhold future progress payments until the Contractor's progress is in
compliance with the contract schedule or until the Owner has approved, by
Change Order, proposed adjustments to the contract milestones, extension of
contract time, or modification of the Contract Schedule.
1.16 CHANGE ORDERS, DELAYS, AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
A. When proposed Change Orders, approved Change Orders, or any delays are
experienced and the Contractor believes the Change OrderfDelay is causing delay
to an intermediate contract milestone or to the project completion, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer a Time-Impact Analysis, explaining the influence of
each Change OrderfDelay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The
Contractor shall prepare a "Fragnet" (network analysis) of each Change
OrderfDelay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The analysis will
demonstrate the time impact based on the date the change is given to the
Contractor, the status of construction at that time, and the event time computation
of all affected activities. The event times used in the analysis shall be those
included in the latest update copy of the detailed CPM Schedule closest to the
time of delay or as accepted by the Engineer.
B. F or the Contractor to be entitled to an extension of Contract time to an
intermediate contract milestone and/or to the project completion, the Time-Impact
Analysis must show that the Change OrderfDelay impacts the intermediate
contractual milestone date and/or the updated CPM Schedule's Critical Path,
thereby directly impacting the project completion date. Change Orders/Delays
that do not impact intermediate contractual milestones and/or the critical path and
impact activities with float will not be considered as a delay to the project and no
extension of time will be granted.
C. The Contractor must submit a written analysis within 7 calendar days after a delay
occurs or authorized change in work is given to the Contractor. If Contractor
does not submit a written analysis for specific Change Order(s) or Delay(s) within
the specified period, it is mutually agreed that the particular Change Order of
Delay has no time impact on the Project CPM Schedule and no time extension is
required.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01310-6
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Acceptance or rejection of each Time Impact Analysis by the Engineer will be
made within 14 calendar days after submission, unless subsequent meetings and
negotiations are necessary. Upon the Engineer's acceptance, fragnets illustrating
the influence of the Change Orders and Delays will be incorporated into the
Detailed CPM Schedule by the Contractor during the first update after agreement
is reached.
END OF SECTION
01310-7
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01340
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 OBJECTIVES
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit documentation that describes the Work to be
performed under the Contract as required in this Section. This documentation will be
for the Engineer's review and use. The documentation furnished by the Contractor
must enable the Engineer to verify the Contractor's performance, sequence of
construction, and compliance with Contract requirements. The documentation shall
cover all services and deliverables required and secured by the Contract.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall prepare documentation and submittals required by other sections
of the Contract. The format of documents and submittals required by other sections
shall conform to the requirements of this Section 01340.
1. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
2. Section 01700 - Project Close-Out
3. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents
4. Section 01730 - 0 & M Manuals
5. Section 01800 - Training
6. All Sections and Divisions that require submittal of documents described in
this Section.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall prepare, assemble, and submit all documents necessary to
complete the Work. The Contractor shall submit certification that the documents it
has prepared conform to the Contract requirements and will result in a complete and
operable project. The Engineer will review the Contractor's documents for
conformance to the Contract requirements and may comment on the documents.
B. The Contractor shall approve and certify all project documents. The Contractor's
failure to certify the documents or failure to provide documents that demonstrate
conformance to the Contract requirements are grounds for default. The Contractor shall
be responsible for and bear all costs for proceeding with any part of the Work that fails
to meet the Contract requirements.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01340-1
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
C. Submittal of documents for the Engineer's review will be for the purpose of keeping
the Owner informed of the Contractor's progress. It shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of full responsibility for providing a complete, safe, reliable, operating and
coordinated Work (system/equipment/facilities) which is in compliance with these
Contract documents.
1.04 DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall submit all documentation necessary to ascertain
compliance with technical/contractual provisions.
2. Shop drawings: Drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other data prepared
specifically for this Contract by the Contractor or through the Contractor by
way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier
contractor to illustrate a portion of the Work.
3. Product data: Preprinted materials such as illustrations, standard schedules,
performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's
descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate a portion of the
Work, but not prepared exclusively for this Contract.
4. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or
workmanship that are physically identical to portions of the Work, illustrating
portions of work, or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of
finished work or both.
5. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure
that administrative requirements of the project are adequately met but not to
ensure directly that work is in accordance with the design concept and in
compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Coordination: Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the
Work of all trades involved before they are submitted and shall bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings or
schedules submitted without this stamp of approval shall be returned to the
Contractor for resubmission.
C. Start of Work: Within 10 calendar days after Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer a Contract Data Requirements List that defines all data to be
submitted under this Contract. Included in this list shall be the names of all proposed
manufacturers furnishing specified items to the extent known. Review of this list by
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01340-2
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor from providing materials,
equipment, systems, and structures fully in accordance with the Specifications.
D. Sequence of Construction: Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for review a sequence of construction describing the
Contractor's construction sequence. The document shall be in sufficient detail for
the Engineer and Owner to determine the Contractor's Work in compliance with the
Contract requirement. Review of the sequence of construction by the Engineer shall
in no way relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Specifications.
1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall direct submittals to the Engineer's Field Representative at the
following address unless otherwise specified:
Utilities Engineering Department
City of Clearwater
100 North Myrtle Ave., Room 220
Clearwater, FL 33755
B. Transmit each required submittal using an Engineer-accepted form. Sequentially
number the transmittal forms. Re-submittals shall have original number with an
alphabetic suffix.
C. Drawing Formats and Requirements
1. Drawings - All Drawings and Shop Drawings shall be prepared on 24-x-36-
inch (60.96-x-91.44-cm) paper and shall have a blank area of 3 x 4 inches
(7.62 x 10.16 cm), located in the lower right hand comer, above the title
block. Each drawing shall indicate the following information in the title
block:
a. Title and Drawing Number.
b. Date of Drawing or Revision.
c. Name of Building or Facility.
d. Name of Contractor or subcontractor.
e. Drawing contents and locations.
f. Spectext Section and Subsection Numbers.
2. Drawing Media - All drawings shall be generated according to the direction
ofthe Engineer.
3. Required Copies - All drawings submitted shall have a minimum of five
copIes.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01340-3
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
D.
E.
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Product Data:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Requirements - Product data shall include all catalog cuts, performance
surveys, test reports, equipment lists, material list, diagrams, pictures, and
descriptive material. All product data shall be submitted on either 8.5-x-11-
inch (21.59-x-27 . 94-cm) or folded 11-x-17-inch (27.94-x-43.18-cm) paper of
20-lb. (9.072-kg) weight. The submittal information shall show the standard
and optional product features as well as all performance data and
specifications.
2. Required Copies - A minimum of five copies of each product information data
sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
Samples: The Contractor shall furnish samples required by the Contract Documents
for review by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified
or directed.
1. All samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to illustrate clearly the
functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and
attachment devices. The samples shall show the full range of color, texture,
and pattern.
2. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of two samples of items submitted.
All samples shall be marked with required submittal information, as specified
above.
Color, Texture, and Pattern Charts:
1. The Contractor shall submit color, texture, or pattern charts of all required
finishes.
2. A minimum of three charts of each item shall be submitted.
G.
Submittal Information Requirements:
1. When used in the Contract Documents, the "Submittal Information" shall be
considered to mean the following information, at a minimum:
a. Contract Name
b. Contract Number
c. Location within Facility
d. Date Submitted
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
01340-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Drawings - The Contractor shall mark submittal information on all drawings
in the left halfofthe 4-x-3-inch (10. 16-x-7.62-cm) block as described above.
3. Product Data and Manufacturer's Literature - The Contractor shall mark all
product data and manufacturer's literature with submittal information and
note which item is being furnished. The Contractor shall mark the option and
supplies to be furnished with item. At least one original manufacturer
product data sheet must be submitted; the balance can be copied. Do not
submit the manufacturer's general catalog: submit only items being installed
or delivered. When manuals are being submitted, the Contractor shall mark
submittal information on both the cover and title page. If manuals being
submitted contain more than just one item, each item must be marked and
only the Contract name and number are to be marked on the cover and title
page.
H. Training, Operational, and Maintenance Manual: The Contractor shall submit the
manufacturer's installation, operational, lubrication, maintenance, spare parts list,
and training manuals for all equipment installed or delivered under this Contract to
the Engineer for review and approval. All manuals shall have submittal information
marked on the front cover, title page, and three places inside the manual. If the
manual being submitted is for different components, mark the front cover and title
page only. Each component section must be marked with spectext section and
subsection numbers. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to
requirements defined in Sections 01730 and 01800.
1.06 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit for review all specified shop drawings, working
drawings, product data sheets, catalog cuts, manufacturing manuals, and all other
items which would affect the performance or operation of the equipment or system.
Final (As-Built) documentation shall be provided for all drawings and documents
required by the Contract Documents.
B. Process Instrumentation and Control Submittals:
1. Product Data - The Contractor shall submit the following instrumentation and
control product data:
a. Material Data Sheets
b. Instrument Data
c. Component Fabrication Drawings
d. Certification Data
e. Test Procedures
f. Test Reports
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01340-5
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
g. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
h. Recommended Spare Parts Lists
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Equipment, materials, and installation specifications
Architectural and Structural Submittals:
This Section specifies general procedural requirements for contractual submittals for
the following architectural and structural schedules, product data, samples, and
manufacturer's certificates.
1. Product Data - The Contractor shall provide product data for all architectural
and structural items, options, and other data and provide supplemental
manufacturer's standard data for information unique to the Work and
installation. The submittals shall reflect all items delivered or installed under
this Contract.
2. Samples - The Contractor shall provide all samples required under this
Specification including color charts and product samples.
3. Material, equipment, and installation and demolition specifications
Mechanical and Electrical System Submittals:
This Section specifies general procedural requirements for mechanical schedules,
performance data, control diagrams, and other submittal data.
1. The Contractor shall submit the following:
a. Performance Data
b. Power and Riser Diagrams - Single-line riser, power diagrams, and
all conduit runs shall be provided for all equipment and facilities.
c. Wiring Diagrams - Elementary controls diagrams and separate wiring
diagrams for mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem. Drawing for
starting and shutdown of equipment including controls shall be
provided, including a comprehensive description of operation.
d. Finished Data - Complete surface preparation and finished data for all
mechanical and electrical unit/subsystems shall be provided,
including a complete list of cleaning instructions.
PROJECT SUBMITIALS AND ACCEPTANCE
01340-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Factory Testing - Detailed description of factory testing procedures,
reporting procedures and criteria for test passing or failing shall be
provided for all mechanical and electrical units/subsystems. Testing
shall comply with the General Requirements and Technical
Requirements Sections.
f. Site (Field) Testing and Acceptance - Detailed description of site
testing and acceptance tests including descriptions of procedures,
testing equipment, reporting procedures, and criteria for test passing
or failing shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical
units/subsystems. Testing shall comply with General Requirements
and Technical Requirements.
g. Factory Test Report - After fabrication and testing, the results oftests
shall be submitted. No shipment of any mechanical and electrical
unit/subsystem shall be allowed without the written certification from
the Contractor that the equipment conforms to the Contract
requirements.
h. Site Test and Acceptance Report - Site test and acceptance report
shall be submitted to Engineer.
1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals - The Contractor shall furnish
manuals for all mechanical and electrical equipment specified under
this Contract. At a minimum each manual shall include a description
of equipment, record shop drawing, operation and maintenance
instructions, part lists, equipment ratings, valve list, and lubrication
instructions. Compliance with this Section does not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with the requirement of Section 01730 -
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.07 SUBMITTAL REVIEW
A. Review of the Contractor's documents by the Engineer shall not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility to meet all of the requirements of the Contract or of
the responsibility for the correction of the documents furnished by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall have no claim for additional cost or extension in time on
account of delays due to revisions of the documents that may be necessary for
ensuring compliance with the Contract.
B. The Engineer will review a submittal once and one re-submittal (if required) once,
after which the cost of Engineer's review will be borne by the Contractor. The cost
of Engineering review shall be equal to the Engineer's full cost, not to exceed $100
per hour.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01340-7
PROJECT SUBMITIALS AND ACCEPTANCE
C. No partial submittals will be reviewed. A submittal or re-submittal not complete will
be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal.
D. Documents submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer will be returned
bearing a project-specific stamp bearing the dated signature ofthe reviewer and one
of four boxes checked:
1. ACCEPTED - This indicates that the submittal appears to be in compliance
with the requirements of the performance specifications and that the Work
may proceed.
2. AS CORRECTED - This indicates that the reviewer has added a minor
correction to the submission and that the Work (modified according to the
correction comment) may proceed. The Contractor shall accept the
responsibility of the modified document and resulting Work with no
additional compensation.
3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT - This indicates that the submittal will require
contractor modifications based on the reviewer's comments that accompanied
the return submittal. The Contractor will be cautioned that work may not
proceed under this review status.
4. REJECTED - This indicates that the submittal is not in conformance with the
requirements of the performance specifications and cannot be modified to
gain compliance. A new submittal will be required in the instance of a
"reject" status and the Contractor will be cautioned that work may not
proceed under this condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Before submittal for the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall review the
documentation for conformance to the Contract requirements. Submittals shall be
complete and comprise a logical division of the Contract Work.
B. All documentation submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer shall be accompanied
by a letter of transmittal and shall be submitted in a sequence that allows the Engineer
to have all of the information necessary for checking and accepting a particular
document at the time of submittal.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROJECT SUBMITIALS AND ACCEPTANCE
01340-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all drawings, data, and samples
prepared before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Any deviations from the
Drawings or substitutions of materials shall be identified as such. Each and every
copy of the Drawings and data shall bear the Contractor's stamp showing that they
have been checked. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the
Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor for conformance with this
requirement.
D. Each submittal shall bear a stamp indicating that the Contractor has satisfied
the Contractor's obligations and the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal as illustrated below.
(OWNER'S NAME)
(PROJECT NAME)
(pROJECT NUMBER)
(SHOP DRAWING NO : )
(SPECIFICATION SECTION: DRAWING NO: )
WITH RESPECT TO THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE, I HAVE
DETERMINED AND VERIFIED ALL QUANTITIES, DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA, INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS,
CATALOG NUMBERS, AND SIMILAR DATA WITH RESPECT TO THE SHOP
DRAWING OR SAMPLE AND REVIEWED OR COORDINATED THIS SHOP
DRAWING OR SAMPLE WITH OTHER SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE WORK AND THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS.
NO VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS SHOWN
(CONTRACTOR'S NAME)
(CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS)
BY: DATE:
AUTORIZED SIGNATURE
TITLE:
3.02 DOCUMENTATION CONTROL AND SUBMITTAL SEQUENCING
A. The Contractor shall establish a documentation control procedure for all project
documentation. Within 10 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall
develop and submit to the Engineer a "Contract Documentation Requirements List
and Submittal Log" which defines all documentation to be submitted under this
Contract. The list shall be updated and resubmitted to the Engineer montWy
throughout the duration of the Contract. This list shall identify the Contractor's
submittal number, proposed and actual submittal date, Contract Specification Section
Number, Paragraph, Item of the Work, and type of document.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01340-9
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
B. The Contractor shall work with the Engineer to provide a regulated flow of submittals
that allows the Engineer to review the submittals in the defmed time frame without
undue delays. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a schedule of the approximate
quantities and delivery dates for all submittals due for the next 120 days with each
monthly report.
3.03 FINAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit the Final As-Built Drawing Package to the Engineer for
review 60 days after the acceptance of the Work. The Final As-Built Drawing
Package shall contain one set of optical media written on CD and three sets of
xerographically black line prints on 20-lb (9.072-kg) bond paper of all drawings.
Prints shall be black line on a white background.
3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTAL
A. Additional documents, drawings, interface data, and other pertinent project submittal
data are listed in specific sections of this Contract.
3.05 RECORD PRINTS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three sets of all record prints within 30
days after submitting "Certificate of Substantial Completion." The record print or
project records shall include catalog cut, drawing, calculations, test reports,
manufacturer's data, maintenance manuals, installation instructions, and operating
manuals. All "record prints" shall be delivered to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE
01340-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED)
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract are included in Section
IlL-General Conditions in the bid document.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a proposed Schedule of Values
allocated to the various portions of the Work, in accordance with Section 01000,
Project Requirements, and Section 01200, Measurement and Payment.
B. Upon the request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will
substantiate their correctness.
C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
D. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders affect the
listing or when actual performance of Work involves necessary changes of
substance to values previously listed and approved.
E. Schedule of Values
1. Submit typed schedule on EJCDC 191O-8-E forms provided by the
Engineer. The Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout
will be considered.
2. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after the date of
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
3. Format - Use schedule of prices in Bid Proposal. Show cost breakdown
for each lump-sum item. Lump-sum breakdown shall, at a minimum, use
the Table of Contents of this manual outline. Identify each line item with
the number and title of the major specification section. Identify site
mobilization and demobilization, bonds and insurance, record drawings,
photographs, operations and maintenance manuals, etc.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01370-1
SCHEDULE OF VALVES
4. For unit cost allowances, identify quantities taken from the Contract
Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item.
5. Include within each line item a direct proportional amount of the
Contractor's overhead and profit.
6. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application for
Payment.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 CASH ALLOWANCES
A. Costs Included in Allowances - Cost of product to Contractor or Subcontractor,
less applicable trade discounts, and applicable taxes.
B. Costs Not Included in the Allowance, but Included in the Contract Price - Product
handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of
products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and finishing.
C. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Execute purchase agreement with designated supplier.
2. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples.
Arrange for delivery.
3. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and
defects. Submit claims for transportation damage.
D. Differences between allowance amounts and actual costs will be adjusted by
Change Order before final payment.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01370-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
I PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
I END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 03720-030-01 01370-3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Bid Documents
---------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01380
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
PART 1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall video record and photographically document all phases of the project, including
preconstruction, construction progress, and post construction. The cost of video recording and
photographic documentary shall be borne by the Contractor. This Section specifies the requirement
for construction photographs. For video recording, see requirement specified in Section IV Article
37.
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall have digital pictures, photographs and DVDs made of the Work
from views and at such times as directed by the Engineer. These photographs shall
represent a visual history of the Project, from Contract Award through Contract
Completion. Digital or 35mm camera may be used, but all film development and
photographic production shall be on photographic paper done by a commercial
photographic laboratory
B. Electronic digital photography shall also be used to record and facilitate resolution of
on-site issues through the transmission of electronic photographs bye-mail from the
site to the Engineer's and Owner's offices. Format shall be minimum resolution of
1152 x 864 pixels and 24-bit, millions of color
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01000 - Proj ect Requirements
B. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents
1.03 PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED
A. Photographs and digital pictures shall be in color. Provide one copy of each digital
picture on each of three CDs and provide one print of each photograph in two
separate albums.
B. Provide photographs taken at each of the major items during construction. Particular
emphasis shall be directed to structures and equipment inside and outside the Work
area.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01380-1
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
C. Provide up to 12 digital photographs per site of views randomly selected by the
Owner's representative taken before any construction and before each scheduled
Application for Payment.
D. Deliver electronic images, prints, and negatives to the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS
A. Each print shall be single-weight paper with glossy finish and the overall dimension
shall be 7-112 x 10 inches (19.05 x 25.4 em). The print shall be clear, sharp, and free
of distortion after the enlargement from the negative.
B. Provide loose-leaf albums for each set of photographs to hold prints with a maximum
of 50 leaves per binder.
C. Each print shall be protected by flexible, transparent acetate or plastic sheet protector
leaves with metal reinforced holes. Two extra leaves shall be provided in each
binder.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VIEWS REQUIRED
A. Photograph shall be from locations to illustrate condition of construction and state of
progress adequately.
B. The Contractor shall provide before-and-after photographs of each portion of the site.
The below-ground facilities shall include all equipment, walls, floor, piping, supports,
and entrance. At major locations, photographs shall include before, during, and after
prints and all prints shall be placed in binders in ascending date order to show the Work
as it progresses.
3.02 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION
A. Each photograph shall have a permanent title block on the back and shall contain the
typed information and arrangement as follows:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
01380-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
NORTHEAST/~SHALLSTREET/EAST
ADVANCED POLLUTION-CONTROL FACILITY
BID No. XXXX-XXX
Jones Edmunds No. 03720-030-01
CONTRACTOR:
DATE:
PHOTO NO.:
PHOTO BY:
LOCATION:
(Name of Contractor)
(When photo was taken)
(Consecutive Numbers)
(Firm Name of Photographer)
(Description of Location and View)
B. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a written description of each
photograph. This description shall be included in the binders and a copy shall be
submitted with the CDs. The field Engineer shall approve the description.
3.03 DIGITAL PHOTO DOCUMENTATION
A. The Conttractor shall catalog and manage electronic images of photographs in a secure
digital photo management system capable of being linked to the project schedule and
document management database. Add captions, descriptions, and key words. Transfer
a copy of all digital photos with their related notes, keywords, captions and activity ill's
to the Engineer weekly.
B. All prints shall be clear, sharp, and free of distortion after enlargement from the
negative. Each photograph shall have a permanent title block in the lower-right-hand
comer, which shall be 2 1/2 inches high by 6 inches wide and shall contain the letters
and arrangement as described in paragraph 3.02(A) above.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01380-3
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General
1. This Section defines minimum requirements for the Quality Assurance
(QA) program to be provided by the Contractor. The deliverable
documents are defined, along with the method of execution of the QA
program.
2. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with
requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit the
Contractor's Quality Control procedures that facilitate compliance with
the Contract Documents.
B. Definitions
1. Quality Assurance services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed
before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and
deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with Contract
requirements.
2. Quality Control services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related
actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed
construction complied with requirements.
C. Payment
Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective
Quality Assurance and Quality Control program, and all costs associated with such
a program shall be included in the applicable unit prices, lump-sum prices, or
allowances contained in the Contract Price Breakdown.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01400-1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
B. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
C. Respective Specification Sections
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Contractor shall conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the
date for receiving bids, except where a specific date is established by code.
B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trades, or other consensus
standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid
requirements are specified or are required by applicable code.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from the Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and first -class workman-
like manner.
B. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal and replacement of any
items, which, in his or her opinion, do not present an orderly and reasonably neat
or workman-like appearance, provided such an orderly installation can be made
using customary trade methods. The removal and replacement shall be done
when directed in writing by the Engineer at the Contractor's own expense and
without additional expense to the Owner.
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.10 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit
tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances
conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Engineer before
proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in
place.
1.11 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Furnish field samples at the site as required by individual Specifications Sections
for review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
C. Where a field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear the
area after the field sample had been accepted by the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor is responsible for quality control and shall establish and maintain
an effective quality control system in compliance with the Contract Documents.
The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization
necessary to produce an end product that complies with the Contract
requirements. The system shall cover all Work and shall be keyed to the
proposed design and construction sequence. The project QC Officer will be held
responsible for the quality of work on the job and is subject to removal by the
Engineer for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the Contract.
The project QC Officer in this context shall mean the individual with the
responsibility for the overall management of the project quality.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400-3
3.02 TESTS
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
A.
Testing Services:
1. All tests to determine compliance with the Contract Documents shall be
performed by an independent commercial testing firm acceptable to the
Owner. The testing firm's laboratory shall be staffed with experienced
technicians, properly equipped, and fully qualified to perform the tests in
accordance with the specified standards.
2. Testing services provided by the Owner are for the sole benefit of the
Owner; however, test results shall be available to the Contractor. Testing
necessary to satisfy the Contractor's internal Quality Control Procedures
shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall interrupt the Work for Owner sampling and testing,
when necessary. The Contractor shall have no Claim for an increase in
Contract Price or Contract Time due to such interruption. The Contractor
shall cooperate in these testing activities as needed.
4. Testing, including sampling, will be performed by the testing firm's
laboratory personnel in the general manner indicated in the Specifications.
B.
Transmittal of Test Reports:
Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by the Contractor for the
Engineer's review shall be submitted as specified for Shop Drawings.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Manufacturer's field services will be specified in the respective equipment
Sections and in Table 01600-1 in Section 01600 - Materials and
Equipment.
2. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the
manufacturer of each item of equipment for which field services are
indicated shall visit the Site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if
necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case the
manufacturer's representative shall be present when the equipment is
placed in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall revisit the
Site as often as necessary until any and all trouble is corrected and the
equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of the
Engineer.
01400-4
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Each manufacturer's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the
Engineer, a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly
installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue
stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolt, has been operated
under full load conditions, and has operated satisfactory.
3.03 COMPLETION INSPECTION
A. Final Completion Punch List: Near the completion of all Work, the QC Officer
shall conduct an inspection of the Work and develop a "punch list" of items which
do not conform to the approved Drawings and Specifications. Such a list of
deficiencies shall be included in the QC documentation and shall include the
estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. The QC Officer or
staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been
corrected. Once this is accomplished the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that
the Facility is ready for the Engineer's final inspection.
B. Final Inspection and Acceptance: The Contractor's Quality Control Officer and
the Engineer will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Engineering
personnel may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be
formally scheduled by the Engineer when all punch list deficiencies have been
corrected. Notice will be given to the Engineer at least 14 days before the final
inspection and must include the Contractor's assurance that all punch list items
will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final inspection.
Failure of the Contractor to have all Contract Work acceptably complete for this
inspection will be cause for non-certification of [mal payment by the Engineer.
3.04 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
A. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the
foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action
after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor, shall
be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or
refuses to comply promptly, the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part
of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time
lost due to such stop orders shall be made the subject of claim for extension of
time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
3.05 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, the
Contractor shall repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400-5
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
B.
The Contractor shall protect all construction exposed by or for Quality Control
service activities.
C.
The repair and protection are the Contractor's responsibilities, regardless of the
assignment of responsibility for Quality Control services.
END OF SECTION
01400-6
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED)
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 RESPONSIBILITY
This Section specifies the minimum requirements for temporary facilities, utilities, and controls
required to provide an adequate and safe work site at every stage during construction of the
project. The Contractor is solely responsible for the requirements set forth in this Section.
1.11 ONSITE TEMPORARY
Except as otherwise indicated, the Contractor may, at his option, furnish stand-alone utility
plants to provide needed services in lieu of connected services from available public utilities,
provided such stand-alone plant facilities comply with all governing regulations. Before
temporary utility services are available the Contractor will provide trucked-inltrucked-out
containerized or unitized services for start up of construction operations at the site.
1.12 COSTS
Except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary utility services are
included in the contract sum.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-1
PART 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
2.01 GENERAL
The types of utility services required for general temporary use at the project site include the
following (other specific services may be required for specific construction methods of
operations):
A. Electrical Power Service
B. Water Service (potable for certain uses)
C. Sanitary
D. Storm Sewer or Open Drainage/Run-off Control
E. Telephone Service
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Power:
1. Electric power will be available at or near site. Determine type and
amount available and make arrangements for obtaining temporary electric
power service, metering equipment, and pay all costs for electric power
used during contract period, except for portions of the Work designated in
writing by the Engineer as substantially complete.
2. Cost of electric power will be born by the Contractor.
B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting to meet applicable safety requirements to
allow erection, application, or installation of materials and equipment and
observation or inspection of the Work.
2.03 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Potable Water:
1. Potable water is available on site. Secure written permIssIOn for
connection and use from the water department and meet requirements for
use. Notify the fire department before obtaining water from fire hydrants.
2. Include costs to connect water in Contract Price.
B. The Owner will provide a place of temporary connection for drinking water at the
site. The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities and piping required to
bring water to the point of use and remove these when no longer needed. Install
an acceptable metering device and pay for water used at the Owner's current rate.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01500-2
TEMPORARY F AC1LITlES AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Provide a means to prevent water used for testing from flowing back into source
pipeline.
2.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain facilities for Contractor's employees,
Subcontractors, and all other onsite employers' employees. Service, clean, and
maintain facilities and enclosures.
B. Use of the Owner's sanitary facilities by construction personnel will not be
allowed.
C. The Contractor shall provide separate sanitary facilities for the Engineer and the
Engineer's Field Representative's use.
2.05 TELEPHONE SERVICE:
A. The Contractor shall arrange and provide onsite telephone service for his use
during construction and pay costs of installation and monthly bills.
B. The Contractor shall arrange and provide an onsite telephone system for use by
the Engineer during construction. The Contractor shall pay for all installation and
monthly charges, including long-distance charges.
C. No incoming calls are allowed to the Owner's plant telephone system.
2.06 FIRE PROTECTION:
A. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain on site adequate firefighting equipment
capable of extinguishing incipient fires. Comply with applicable parts of National
Fire Prevention Standard for Safeguard Building Construction Operations (NFP A
No. 241).
2.07 CLEANLINESS OF FACILITIES
The Contractor shall maintain the sanitary facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition at all
times and shall enforce their use. He shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances on
the site ofthe work, on the lands ofthe Owner, or on adjacent property.
2.08 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
At the time the need for a temporary utility service has ended or has been replaced by permanent
services or not later than the time of final completion, the Contractor shall promptly remove the
installation, unless requested by the Engineer to retain it for a longer period. Any work which
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-3
may have been delayed or affected by the installation and use of the temporary utility, including
repairs to construction and grades and restoration and cleaning of exposed surfaces, shall be
completed at this time. The Contractor shall replace any work damaged beyond acceptable
restoration.
PART 3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
3.01 NOISE CONTROL
The Contractor shall provide adequate protection against objectionable noise levels caused by the
operation of construction equipment.
3.02 DUST CONTROL
The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against raising objectionable dust clouds
caused by moving construction equipment, high winds, or any other cause.
3.03 WATERCONTROL
The Contractor shall provide for satisfactory disposal of surplus water and shall submit a plan to
the Engineer for review before implementing the plan. Prior approval shall be obtained from the
proper authorities for the use of public or private lands or facilities for such disposal.
3.04 POLLUTION CONTROL
The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against polluting any public or private
lands, lakes, ponds, rivers, streams, creeks, and other such areas by the disposal of surplus
material in the form of solids, liquids, gases, or from any other cause.
3.05 ADVERSE IMPACT
The Contractor shall evaluate and assess the impact of any adverse effects on the natural
environment which may result from construction operations and shall operate to minimize
pollution of air, ground, or surface waters vegetation and to afford the neighboring community
the maximum protection during and up to completion of the construction project.
3.06 STREAMS, LAKES, AND OTHER BODIES OF WATER
The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, reservoirs,
and other water bodies with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other harmful materials.
He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or otherwise prevent pollution of
siltation of streams, lakes, and reservoirs and to avoid interference with movement of migratory
fish.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01500-4
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.07 CHEMICALS
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether
herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show
approval of either EP A or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in
strict conformance with instructions.
3.08 EROSION CONTROL
The Contractor shall not expose, by construction operations, a larger area of erosive land at any
one time than the minimum necessary for efficient construction operations, and the duration of
exposure of the uncompleted construction to the elements shall be as short as practicable.
Erosion-control features shall be constructed concurrently with other work and at the earliest
practicable time.
PART 4 STORAGE FACILITIES
4.01 GENERAL
All products, materials, and equipment shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Products subject to damage by the elements
shall be stored in the weather-tight enclosures. Temperature and humidity shall be maintained
within the ranges required by the manufacturer's instructions. Fabricated products shall be stored
above the ground on blocking or skids. Products which are subject to deterioration shall be
covered with impervious coatings with adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. Loose
granular materials shall be stored in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with
foreign matter. Any products which will come in contact with water shall be stored off the
ground so as to prevent contamination.
4.02 INSPECTION
Storage shall be arranged to provide easy access for inspection. Periodic inspections shall be
made of all stored products to ensure that they are maintained under specified conditions and free
from damage or deterioration.
4.03 TEMPORARY PROTECTION
After installation the Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to installed
products to protect them from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations.
Coverings shall be removed when no longer needed.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-5
PART 5 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY
5.01 ADJACENT TO WORK
The Contractor shall preserve from damage all property along the line of the work or which is in
the vicinity of or in any way affected by the work, the removal or destruction of which is not
called for by the plans. Wherever such property is damaged due to the activities of the
Contractor, it shall be immediately restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost
to the Owner.
5.02 REMEDY BY OWNER
In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or to make good such
damage or injury, the Owner may, after 48 hours' notice to the Contractor, proceed to repair,
rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be deemed necessary and the cost of this
repairing, rebuilding, or restoring will be deducted from any monies due or which may become
due to the Contractor under this Contract.
5.03 PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of property in the areas in the vicinity of
the project and for the protection of his equipment, supplies, materials, and work against any
damage resulting from the elements, such as flooding, rainstorm, wind damage, or other such
occurrence and shall be responsible for damage resulting from such occurrences. The Contractor
shall provide adequate drainage facilities, tie-downs, or other protection throughout the contract
period for the protection of his, the Owner's, and other properties from such damage.
All the existing analyzers and instruments in the chlorinator and sulfonator rooms shall be
protected from damage during removal of the chlorinators and sulfonators.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01500-6
TEMPORARY F AC1LlTlES AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01590
FIELD OFFICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a field office (s) for his use during the
entire construction period. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall
remove all field offices, sheds, and other storage facilities and restore the areas to
pre-construction or better condition. The Contractor's field office (s) shall be the
size required for his use.
B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain storage and work sheds at all
active work sites as needed or required for the construction.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits required to install
and maintain the field offices.
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01590-1
FIELD OFFICES
PART 2 MISCELLANEOUS
2.01 CONSTRUCTION FIELD OFFICE
At a minimum the Contractor shall provide the following in the construction field office:
A. Electric lights (50-foot candles at desktop height) and power supply outlets.
B. Two private telephone lines with a facsimile/answering machine.
C. One direct line for Computer with DSL access for internet connection.
D. Air Conditioning and Heating System sufficient to maintain comfortable
conditions.
E. Acceptable toilet facilities, including sink and mirror (shared with Engineer's
personnel and visitors).
F. Fire extinguisher (Halon type, minimum 4-lb capacity).
G. Water cooler, bottled water and paper cups, coffee maker, portable refrigerator,
and microwave oven for the Contract Period (shared with Engineer's personnel
and visitors).
H. Office furnishings as described below.
1. Table for viewing Project Drawings.
J. Computer systems and software as described below.
K. Suitable file cabinet(s) and plan racks containing a copy of the complete Project
Record documents.
L. Standard Office Supplies for the duration of the Work.
M. Internet access for the duration of the Work.
2.02 OFFICE FURNISHINGS:
A. The furniture shall be delivered and placed as directed by the Engineer.
B. Desks: Flat top, double pedestal, with one box and one file drawer in each
pedestal, 60 inches by 30 inches.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01590-2
FIELD OFFICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Chairs: Six (6) Desk-type chairs, adjustable heights, on rollers, with armrests.
D. Drawing Table: One plywood or standard drawing table, 3 feet by 6 feet, with all
required appurtenances. One extended-height stool suitable for use at the drawing
table.
E. Printer: One printer with ability to copy, scan, and print pages up to and including
11 inch by 17 inch networked to computer systems as described in this Section.
All warranties, maintenance, and servicing for the duration of the Work.
F. Copier: One photocopy machine capable of sorting and producing the following
copies: 8 ~ xlI, 8 ~ x14, and 11 x17.
G. Fax machine: One plain paper fax machine with dedicated telephone line.
I. All consumable including paper, ink/toner, and maintenance of the equipment
shall be provided by the Contractor for the duration of the Work.
2.03 COMPUTER SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE:
A. Complete HP or Dell Desktop Computer. Dual Core lntel@ Xeon@ Processor
2.00GHz, 2GB DDR2, 250GB, 16X DVD:f::RW/:f::R/CD-RW, Vista Business (or
XP Professional), 22-in Widescreen Flat Panel Analog Monitor,
B. Provide Microsoft wireless mouse, including a warranty to cover the duration of
the Work.
C. Surge protectors, monitor wipes, and compressed gas duster.
D. The Contractor shall supply the latest version of Windows software as required
for the operation of each of the computer systems. The software shall include the
latest versions of the following:
1. Microsoft Office Professional (Word, Excel, Access, PowerPoint,
Publisher, Outlook, etc.).
2. Visio Professional.
3. Adobe Acrobat Version 8.0.
4. Norton Virus Protection (with annual renewal of updates).
5. Audio and DVD Player.
6. Scheduling Software compatible with the Contractor's scheduling
program.
7. Expedition or other Project Management Software compatible with the
Contractor's Management Plan and an Internet Browser with internet
access.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
FIELD OFFICES
01590-3
2.04 ENGINEER'S OFFICE
The Engineer's office and utilities shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be no less than 7
ft-6 inches x 9 feet-O inches. The Engineer's office may be a separate room in conjunction with
the Contractor's office. The Contractor shall provide the following for the Engineer's use: one
standard desk, one office chair, one telephone with connection, and one computer system with
dedicated internet access. The Engineer's Office furnishings and supplies shall conform to the
descriptions in Articles 2.02 and 2.03.
2.05 CLEANLINESS OF FACILITIES
The Contractor shall maintain the facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition at all times
and shall enforce their use. The Contractor shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances
on the site of the work, on the lands of the Owner, or on adjacent property.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
The field office shall be installed on a clean, graded, well-drained area of suitable size.
Installation of the field office shall meet all local building codes and ordinances. Where no such
apply, the Contractor shall as a minimum install the structure on a level foundation and secure it
against 100-mph winds or the latest building code. The office shall be provided with structurally
sound and safe steps and landings for each door. The office shall be designated a "No Smoking
Area. "
PART 4 REMOVAL AT COMPLETION OF CONTRACT
On the completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall remove the office, storage, sheds, and all
such temporary facilities from the site. Remove foundations and debris, grade the site to
required elevations, grass the disturbed area, and clean and remove trash and debris.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01590-4
FIELD OFFICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01600
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new and shall not have
been in service at any other installation unless otherwise approved. Materials and
equipment shall conform to applicable specifications approved in writing by the
Engineer.
B. Manufactured and fabricated products shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in
accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. Like parts of duplicate
units shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gauges to be interchangeable.
C. Quantities of items that are identical shall be by the same manufacturer, regardless of
the Design Package breakdown.
D. Any product furnished by the Contractor shall be suitable for service conditions.
E. Equipment sizes, capacities, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to
unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
F. Materials and equipment shall not be used for any purpose other than that for which
they are designed or specified.
G. Where materials or equipment are specifically shown or specified to be reused in the
Work, special care shall be used in removing, handling, storing, and reinstalling them
to ensure the materials or equipment function properly in the completed work.
H. Material and equipment incorporated into the work:
1. Conforms to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Complies with size, make, type, and quality specified or as specifically
approved in writing by the Engineer.
3. Manufactured and fabricated products:
a. Rotating machinery shall be designed and fabricated to provide
satisfactory operation without excessive wear and without excessive
maintenance during its operating life. Rotating parts shall be statically
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-1
MA TERlALS AND EQUIPMENT
and dynamically balanced and shall operate without exceSSIve
vibration.
I. Salvage Materials - In the absence of special provisions to the contrary, salvaged
materials, equipment, or supplies related to the demolition of existing cWorine and
sulfur dioxide equipment become the property of the Contractor and the Contractor
shall properly dispose of these materials. The Owner reserves the right to retain any
material, equipment, or supplies that the Owner deems are reusable at the plants.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract
B. Section 01000: Project Requirements
C. Section 01710: Final Cleaning and Protection
D. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Manuals
E. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds
F. Section 01800: Training
1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Work. All materials
and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the inspection and
acceptance ofthe Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the Work that does not
meet the Contract Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
consideration and acceptance before materials are necessary for incorporating in the
Work. Any delay of acceptance resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit
samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the Owner
C. The materials and equipment used in the Work shall correspond to the approved
samples or other data.
D. If requested, the Contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer ample
evidence that each and every part of the materials, machinery, and equipment to be
furnished are of a reliable make and of a type that has been in successful operation
within the continental United States. No equipment will be considered unless the
manufacturer has designed and manufactured equipment of a comparable type and
size for at least 5 years. The Engineer and Owner will not allow installation of any
experimental or untried type of material or machinery.
E. The equipment specified in this Section shall be carefully designed and installed to
ensure that all required functions shall be adequately performed within the specified
degree of precision. Each unit shall operate with each of the other parts of the
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01600-2
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
equipment to provide a completely integrated system that shall operate to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner.
F. All equipment, machinery, parts, and assemblies entering into the work shall be
tested as specified. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all field and
performance tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer or authorized
representative. When such a waiver is issued, sworn statements in duplicate of the
tests made and the results of the tests shall be furnished to the Engineer by the
Contractor or manufacturer.
G. The Contractor shall submit copies of welding procedures for all welding. Welders
and welding operators shall be in accordance with the qualification requirements of
the A WS Code. Welders and welding operators for stainless steel shall pass
qualification tests using stainless steel filler metal and procedures developed for
stainless steel. Procedures, welder, and operator qualifications shall be certified by
an independent testing laboratory retained and paid by the Contractor.
H. The Contractor shall not start fabrication of the work until the Contractor receives
written acceptance of the proof of welding procedures from the Engineer for each
type of weld.
I. The Contractor shall submit copies of mill certificate for each type of rolled steel and
as required in the Specifications. The Contractor shall not start fabrication of the
work until the Contractor receives written acceptance of all mill certificates from the
Engineer.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
A. The equipment installation details shall suit the existing and furnished equipment and
are subject to the Engineer's acceptance.
B. Any changes or revisions made necessary by the type and dimensions of the
equipment furnished shall be made at the expense of the Contractor and the
Contractor shall furnish detailed drawings showing such changes or revision for the
acceptance of the Engineer.
C. The installation of all work shall comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
The Contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties
involved in the installation including three copies to the Engineer for distribution.
One complete set of instructions shall be maintained at the job site during installation
and until completion.
D. All products and equipment shall be handled, installed, connected, cleaned,
conditioned, and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-3
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
specified requirements. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict
with the manufacturer's instructions, such conflicts shall be called to the Engineer's
attention for resolution and revised instructions.
E. The Contractor shall perform the work according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically
modified or exempted by the Contract Documents.
1.05 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. The cost of the Work shall include the cost of competent manufacturers'
representatives of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing
of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and
maintenance.
B. A certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is
satisfactory; that the unit has been satisfactorily tested; is ready for operation; and
that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation,
lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before Substantial Completion.
C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of competent manufacturer's representatives
for Contractor- or Owner-furnished equipment, when evident malfunction or over-
heating makes such services necessary or as determined by the Engineer. All such
equipment shall be installed by skilled mechanics and in accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer and at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with
particular reference to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric drives.
These units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights
after their sole or base plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor
bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims.
After the manufacturer has approved the foundation alignments, the bedplates or
wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of
equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations, and after
confirmation of all alignments the sole or base plates shall be [mally grouted in place.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with
associated piping, and under no circumstances will "pipe springing" be allowed.
E. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to
properly align, level, and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the
Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. Any
grinding necessary to bring parts to proper alignment after erection shall be done at
the expense ofthe Contractor.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-4
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary materials and construct suitable concrete
foundations or pads for all equipment installed by him, even though such foundations
or pads may not be indicated on the Drawings. The tops of foundations shall be at
such elevations as will permit grouting.
G. In setting pumps, motors, and other items of equipment customarily grouted, the
Contractor shall make an allowance of at least I inch (2.54 cm) for grout under the
equipment bases. Shims used to level and adjust the bases shall be steel. Shims may
be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatly and so as to
be as inconspicuous as possible in the completed work. Unless otherwise permitted,
all grout shall be a suitable non-shrinking grout.
1. Grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer. Where practicable, the grout shall be placed through the
grout holes in the base and worked outward and under the edges of the base
and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so
constructed as to provide a suitable chamber around the top edge of the
finished foundation.
2. Where such procedure is impracticable, the method of placing grout shall be
as permitted. After the grout has hardened sufficiently, all forms, hoppers,
and excess grout shall be removed, and all exposed grout surfaces shall be
patched in an approved manner if necessary, given burlap-rubbed finish, and
painted with at least two coats of an acceptable paint.
1.06 TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY, AND HANDLING
A. Materials and equipment shall be loaded and unloaded by methods affording
adequate protection against damage. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent
injury to the material or equipment during transportation and handling. Suitable
power equipment will be used and the material or equipment shall be under control at
all times. Under no condition shall the material or equipment be dropped, bumped,
or dragged. When a crane is used, a suitable hook or lift sling shall be used. The
crane shall be so placed that all lifting is done in a vertical plane. Materials or
equipment skid loaded, palletized, or handled on skidways shall not be skidded or
rolled against material or equipment already unloaded.
B. Material and equipment shall be delivered to the job site by means that will
adequately support it and not subject it to undue stresses. Material and equipment
damaged or injured in the process of transportation unloading or handling shall be
rejected and immediately removed from the site.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of all materials, including those
furnished by the Owner. He shall be responsible for the proper transport, handling,
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-5
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
and storage of all materials, and they shall be protected to ensure their expected
performance. Delivery schedules shall be coordinated by the Contractor, in advance,
so that timely prosecution of the work will be effected.
D. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules; coordinate
to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original
containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
2. Immediately on delivery inspect shipments to ensure compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals and that
products are properly protected and undamaged.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or
damage to products or packaging.
1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish on-site a covered, weather-protected storage structure
providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive environment for mechanical equipment, valves,
architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and special equipment
for work which is in progress.
B. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage"
of each equipment supplier and manufacturer, including connection of heaters,
placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. Corroded, damaged, or deteriorated
equipment and parts shall be replaced before being accepted for the project.
Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment
estimate.
C. Store products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather-tight enclosures.
2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by the
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Store fabricated products above the ground on blocking or skids to prevent
soiling or staining. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with
impervious sheet coverings, and provide adequate ventilation to avoid
condensation.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-6
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to
prevent mixing with foreign matter.
All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and
stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to prevent
warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft, or
damage of any kind to the material or equipment.
Cement and sand shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept
completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel and reinforcing
steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or
grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize
rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Pre-cast concrete beams shall
be handled and stored to prevent accumulation of dirt, standing water, staining,
chipping, or cracking. Brick, block, and similar masonry products shall be handled
and stored to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking, and spalling to a minimum.
All materials which in the opinion of the Engineer have become so damaged as to be
unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the
work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or
its removal.
G.
The Contractor shall arrange storage so as to provide easy access for inspection and
make periodic inspections of stored products to ensure that products are maintained
under specified conditions, free from damage or deterioration.
H.
The Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed
products from traffic damage and subsequent construction operations and shall
remove covering when no longer needed.
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies sold and
delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the work and
acceptance of the Work by the Owner. If any such material, equipment, or supplies
are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed before final inspection and acceptance, the
Contractor shall replace this material, equipment, or supplies without additional cost
to the Owner.
J.
Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment
supplied under this Contract within 7 days after written notice to do so has been
given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously
transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from
the Contractor's Contract. These costs may consist of expenditures for labor,
equipment use, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs associated
with making the necessary corrections.
01600-7
MATE~SANDEQUWMENT
K. Locate on-site storage facilities in areas accepted by the Engineer.
1.08 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish two sets of any special tools
(including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment,
operations and maintenance, and disassembly, together with instructions for their use.
The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and instructions in
good order before completion of the Contract. Tools shall be high-grade, smooth,
forged, alloy, tool steel. Grease guns shall be lever-type.
B. Special tools are considered to be those tools which because oftheir limited use are
not normally available but which are necessary for the particular equipment.
C. Special tools shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they
pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such special tools until
completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner.
1.09 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A. The minimum design criteria for lubrication of moving parts of the equipment shall
include 1 week of continuous operation during which no lubricants shall be added to
the system.
B. The system shall be designed to receive lubricants whether in operation or shut down
and shall not leak or waste lubricants under either condition. The manufacturer's
recommendations of grade and quality and a supply of the lubricants so
recommended in quantities sufficient to conduct start-up and testing operations shall
be furnished with the equipment.
1.10 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS
When used in the Contract Documents, "Factory/Fabricating Shop Performance, Evaluation,
Certification, and/or Acceptance Tests and Test Reports" shall be considered to mean the
corresponding manufacturer's, fabricator's, and/or other builder's official tests and tests reports.
Included in these test reports are appropriate substantiating documentation/data ascertaining the
correct and complete manufacture, fabrication, and "shop performance" (to the greatest extent
normally practicable) of the particular material, equipment, system, and/or facilities proposed for
eventual delivery. These are subdivided into three significant tests and test report types: 1)
"Certification Tests and Test Reports," 2) "Factory Tests and Test Reports," and 3) "Shop
Performance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports." Minimal requirements are described below:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-8
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
A.
Certification Tests and Test Reports
1. Standard specifications, code references, etc. for minimum quality and
workmanship levels are indicated in the Contract Documents and
Construction Documents. Statements, certificates, other substantiating
reporting data, hereinafter "Certification Test Reports" oftests conducted on
previously manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for
use shall be compiled by the Contractor.
2. At a minimum all Certification Test Reports shall contain an official analysis
of sufficient material composition or show evidence of meeting or exceeding
the specified material standard(s) referenced, e.g., ASTM, ASME, other
designations. All reports shall also indicate from whom the material was/will
be purchased.
3. The Contractor shall pay all costs of certification tests and test reports.
B.
Factory Tests and Test Reports
1. Additional tests and reports performed on material or equipment by the
manufacturer or fabricator to ascertain quality or workmanship are referred to
here as "Factory Tests and Test Reports."
2. Before the delivery of any Factory Test Report, the Contractor shall first
submit for review and approval a detailed description of the proposed testing
including reporting procedure and criteria. Such descriptions shall also be
delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the first submission of the
technical submittal.
3. Materials and equipment used in the performance of the Work under this
Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or
fabrication. If Work to be accomplished away from the construction site is to
be inspected on behalf of the Owner during its fabrication or manufacture, the
Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the place and time where
such fabrication or manufacture is to be done. Such notice shall be in writing
and delivered to the Engineer not less than 30 days before the event so that
the necessary arrangements for the particular factory inspection tests can be
made.
4. Upon completion of the factory inspection tests and immediately following
manufacture or fabrication, the Contractor shall compile a complete Factory
Test Report following the approved format above. All such reports shall be
delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the technical submittal
corresponding to such tested material or equipment.
01600-9
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
C.
Shop PerformancelEvaluation Tests and Tests Reports
1. Material and equipment used in the performance of the Work of this Contract
are also subject to the evaluation and testing after the complete full-scale
assembly into major equipment and/or systems. Shop
PerformancelEvaluation Tests, i.e., tests of simulated startup, steady state,
variable loading, and other normal operating conditions for such assembled
equipment/systems shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the
starJdard testing practices specified or otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
2. Before the delivery of any Shop PerformancelEvaluation Test Report, the
Contractor shall submit for review a detailed description of the proposed
performance/evaluation tests, including anticipated reporting procedures, data
reduction, and criteria used. Where appropriate, such descriptions shall also
be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of a first or subsequent
submission of the technical submittal.
3. Should such performance/evaluation tests be accomplished away from the
construction site, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the
places and times where such tests will be accomplished. Such prior notice
shall be in writing and delivered not less than 30 days before the events so
that necessary arrangements for the particular tests can be made.
4. The requirements above pertaining to Factory Tests and Test Reports shall be
incorporated in this Section for Shop PerformancelEvaluation Tests and Test
Reports. Unless factory tests are coincident with shop performance tests and
vice versa for the same material or equipment, a minimum of 15 days shall be
scheduled between such multiple equipment tests where extended travel is
required.
Cost of Performance Shop Tests
1. The Contractor shall conduct shop performance full-scale tests at its expense
on all equipment as specified. Each piece of equipment shall be tested
completely assembled and the shop tests performed by the equipment
manufacturer until successful tests are achieved.
2. Ifthe performance tests are conducted outside the continental United States,
the Contractor shall pay all transportation expenses incurred by the Owner's
representatives in witnessing the tests at no additional cost to the Owner.
01600-10
MATE~SANDEQUWMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.11 FIELD TESTING
A. Field-testing shall be conducted when called for in the Technical Specification
Sections and on all completed systems in general. An independent testing facility
approved by the Owner shall conduct all field testing in accordance with the
Technical Specifications. All costs associated with these field tests shall be paid by
the Contractor.
B. After completing the installation, the Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer,
shall test the system under actual operating conditions. Tests shall be performed
according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. The Contractor shall include with its bid the services of the equipment manufacturer's
field service technician for a period necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and the Owner.
D. This service shall be for the purposes of checkout, initial start-up, certification, and
instruction of facilities personnel.
E. A written report covering the technician's findings from all inspections and
installation approval and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
1.12 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION
A. The Engineer may accept an equipment system installation as ready for Substantial
Completion when:
1. The Engineer has accepted all factory tests and all other component testing.
2. The Engineer has accepted all performance shop tests.
3. All components of the system are installed and tested, including without
limitation hydrostatic tests, leak tests, continuity tests, insulation resistance
tests, phase rotation tests, bump tests, stroke testing, calibration, adjustment
for proper operation, and all other component tests as appropriate.
4. Field start-up activities have been completed and approved by the Engineer.
5. The appropriate certificates have been submitted.
6. All equipment has met the performance requirements.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01600-11
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
7. The Engineer has accepted integrated system tests and adjustments performed
by the Contractor to demonstrate that the system as a whole functions in a
reliable manner and meets the performance requirements in manual and
automatic modes without failure, fault, or defect of any component or of the
system as a whole.
8. The Engineer has accepted integrated facilities tests performed by the
Contractor and the manufacturer's representative to demonstrate that the
entire system functions together reliably as a integrated facilities and meets
the performance requirements in manual and automatic modes without
failure, fault, or defect of any component.
9. The Engineer has accepted facilities performance tests which demonstrate
that the design criteria and performance criteria are met.
10. The Engineer has accepted the O&M Manuals.
11. All required Owner personnel have been trained.
12. All other Contract requirements for Substantial Completion have been
satisfied.
1.13 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL
A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for start-up and testing of equipment shall be
furnished with the respective equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate
drives of each piece of mechanical equipment after initial break-in ofthe equipment,
which shall be no greater than 30 days.
1.14 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall obtain and install all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor
and attachment bolts, working drawings for installation, templates, and all other
appurtenances necessary for the installation of the equipment specified.
Subcontractors furnishing equipment shall also furnish anchors and templates to the
General Contractor.
B. Anchor bolts shall be of size and strength suitable for the purpose intended and shall
be in accordance with Section 05500 and the individual Specification Sections.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01600-12
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Pipe sleeves or other means of adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where
indicated or needed. Equipment shall be leveled by first sitting nuts on the anchor
bolts and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal
with grout. Where equipment bases (i.e. pumps) are installed with grout holes,
subsequent to field testing, those bases shall be totally filled with grout.
D. Provide grout as required by Section 03300.
E. Provide concrete equipment pads or 4-inch-high housekeeping pads for all
mechanical, heating and ventilating, plumbing, and electrical equipment. Coordinate
with other contractors before pad placement to confirm dimensions, location, and
anchor requirements.
1.15 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
A. All items of electrical equipment that are furnished with process, heating, ventilating,
or other equipment shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate
electrical sections of the Specifications. Enclosures for electrical equipment, such as
switches and starters, shall conform to the requirements specified under the
appropriate electrical sections of the Specifications.
1.16 ELECTRIC MOTORS
A. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, all electric motors furnished and installed by
the Contractor shall conform to the requirements set forth below.
1. Ratings of Motors
a. Every motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven
equipment under all load and operating conditions without exceeding
its rated nameplate current or power or its specified temperature limit.
b. When the horsepower rating is specified for a motor, the motor
furnished shall meet the requirements of the output specified. When
the horsepower rating is not specified, the motor shall have sufficient
capacity to operate the driven equipment as given in the detail
specifications.
c. For voltage rating of motors, the requirements of this specification
section shall apply.
d. Motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 unless otherwise noted or
specified.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
0]600-13
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
2. Type of Motors I
a. All motors shall be of a type having starting characteristics and I
ruggedness as may be necessary under the actual conditions of
operation and, unless otherwise specified, shall be suitable for full- I
voltage starting.
b. Motors shall be manufactured by General Electric Co.; Reliance
Electric; U.S. Electrical Motors; or be acceptable equivalent products. I
c. All motors shall have Class B or Class F insulation with Class B
temperature rise in accordance with NEMA Standards for Motors and
Generators and based on a maximum ambient temperature of 40 0 C. I
d. Explosion-proof motors shall comply with all requirements of Class
1, Division I, Group D, Electrical Code and with all other codes I
pertaining to such motor.
3. General Design of Motors I
a. Motors shall comply with the latest NEMA Standards for motors and
generators, M G 1, unless otherwise specified. I
b. Motor windings shall be braced to successfully withstand the stresses
resulting from the method of starting. The windings shall be treated I
thoroughly with acceptable insulating compound suitable for
protection against moisture and slightly acid or alkaline conditions.
c. Bearings, when applicable, shall be of the self-lubrication type, I
designed to ensure proper alignment of rotor and shaft and to prevent
leakage of lubricants. The motors shall be lifetime lubricated with
silicone grease. I
d. Vertical motors shall be provided with thrust bearings adequate for all
thrusts to which they can be subjected in operation. I
e. Vertical motors of the open drip-proof type shall be provided with
drip of acceptable shape and construction. When the drip hood is too
heavy to be easily removed, provision shall be made for access for I
testing.
4. Single-Phase Motors Auxiliary Devices I
Single-phase motors requiring switching devices and auxiliary starting I
resistors, capacitors, or reactors shall be furnished as combination units with
such auxiliaries either incorporated within the motor housings or housed in
suitable enclosures mounted upon the motor frames. Each combination unit I
shall be mounted upon a single base and shall be provided with a single
conduit box.
5. Motor Terminal Boxes and Leads I
03720-030-0 I 01600-14 MATE~SANDEQUWMENT I
Bid Documents
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Motors shall be furnished with oversize conduit terminal boxes to provide for
making and housing the connections. Motors shall also have flexible leads of
sufficient length to extend beyond the face of the box for a distance of not
less than 4 inches (10.16 cm). The size of cable terminals and conduit
terminal box holes shall be as permitted by the Engineer. An acceptable type
of solder-less lug shall be furnished. Total-enclosed and explosion-proof
motors shall have cast-iron terminal boxes.
6.
Special Motors
Hoists and other devices complying with special safety codes shall be
furnished complete with their control equipment and with all accessories and
safety devices for code-approved, safe, and efficient operation.
7.
Control Data
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with two certified copies of
characteristic curves for each motor furnished (except lIS-volt motors) and
all other data required for designing the control equipment.
8.
Motor Shop Tests
a. Motor shop tests shall be made in accordance with the IEEE Test
Code as specified in the NEMA Standards for Motors and Generators
MG 1. NEMA report-of-test forms shall be used in submitting test
data. Motor efficiency shall be determined by use of IEEE 112, Test
Method B, and by use ofMGI-12.53 a and b.
b. For induction motors larger than 100 hp complete tests of each motor
furnished shall be made and certified tests data sheets shall be
submitted, unless witness shop tests are required by the detail
specifications pertaining to the equipment. Each motor shall be tested
for efficiency and power factor at 50, 75, and 100% of its rated
horsepower for temperature rise, torque, starting current, and
dielectric strength and for compliance with all specified performance
requirements.
c. For induction motors 5 hp up to and including 100 hp, copies of
routine test reports of electrically duplicated motors shall be
furnished.
d. For motors 3 hp or less, no test data need be furnished.
e. Additional tests on individual motors shall be as specified in the
detail specifications for the motor-driven equipment.
f. Motors shall be given a shop application of paint filler or enamel
sealer, a flat coat of undercoat for enamel, and two coats of enamel
01600-15
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
or, in lieu ohhis treatment, other suitable treatment customary with
the manufacturer.
B. Unless otherwise specified, motors with ratings in excess of 1/3 hp shall be rated
460-volt (nameplate rating), three-phase, 60-Hertz. Motors of 1/3 hp or less shall be
rated 1I5-volt, single-phase, 60-Hertz.
1.17 EQUIPMENT DRIVE GUARDS
A. Screens, guards, or cages shall be provided for all exposed rotating or moving parts
in accordance with accepted practices of applicable governmental agencies. Guards
shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel or galvanized woven wires or expanded
metal set in a frame of galvanized steel members. Guards shall be secured in position
by steel braces or straps, which will permit easy removal for servicing the equipment.
1.18 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS
A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation
shall be provided between adjoining surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any
resultant electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy
bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers; or other acceptable
materials.
1.19 NAMEPLATES
A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate of stainless
steel securely attached in place and clearly and permanently inscribed with the
following: manufacturer's name, catalog and/or model, or type designation, serial
number, principle rated capacities, electrical or other power characteristics, and
similar information as appropriate.
B. Each process valve shall be provided with a substantial tag of non-corrodible metal
securely fastened in place and inscribed with an identification number in
conformance with the Valve Identification Schedule furnished later by the Engineer.
1.20 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Concrete inserts for hangers shall be designed to support safely in the concrete that is
used the maximum load that can be imposed by the hangers used in the inserts.
Inserts for hangers shall be of a type which will permit adjustment of the hangers
both horizontally (in one plane) and vertically and locking of the hanger head or nut.
All inserts shall be galvanized.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01600-16
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.21 SLEEVES
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, opening for the passage of
pipes through floors and walls shall be formed of sleeves of standard-weight,
galvanized-steel pipe. The sleeves shall be of ample diameter to pass the pipe and its
insulation, if any, and to permit such expansion as may occur. Sleeves shall be of
sufficient length to be flush at the walls and the bottom of the slabs and to project 2
inchs above the finished floor surface. Threaded nipples shall not be used as sleeves.
B. Sleeves in exterior walls below ground or in walls to have liquids on one or both
sides shall have a 2-inch (5.08 cm) annular fin of lI8-inch (0.3175 cm) plate welded
with a continuous weld completely around the sleeve at about mid-length. Sleeves
shall be galvanized after the fins are attached.
C. All sleeves shall be set accurately before the concrete is placed or shall be built-in
accurately as the masonry is being built.
1.22 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from each
company manufacturing or supplying certain equipment as listed in this Section (or
in the respective technical specification sections) to perform the duties described.
B. After the listed equipment has been installed and the equipment is presumably ready
for operation, but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect,
operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include but not be
limited to the following points as applicable:
1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts).
2. Completeness in all details, as specified.
3. Correctness of setting, alignment, relative arrangement of various parts.
4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants.
C. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the
equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions
specified.
D. On completion of his or her work, the manufacturer's or supplier's representative
shall submit in triplicate to the Engineer a complete and signed report of the results
of its inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed
descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustment made, quantitative results
obtained, if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure
proper maintenance. The report also shall include certification that the equipment
conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01600-17
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2
PART 3
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and
void.
E.
After the Engineer has reviewed the reports from the manufacturer's representatives,
the Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives
present when the field acceptance tests are made.
F.
At a minimum the Contractor shall arrange for the service of qualified service
representatives from the companies manufacturing or supplying the equipment listed
in Table 01600-1 and as required in the Technical Specifications:
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01600-18
MATE~SANDEQUWMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Table 01600-1: Equipment Testing and Manufacturers Services
SERVICES OF MFG. REP. (MINIMUM) WRfITEN
INSTALLATION FINAL INSTRUCTION
EQUIPMENT ITEM SPEC. SHOP FIELD MANUF SUPERVISION DAYS ACCEPTANCE DAYS O&M INSTRUCTIONS VlDEOT APPED
SECTION TESTS TESTS CERT. DAYS MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION
Chemical pump skid 11345 y y y 2 2 2 Y Y Y
Chemical buik storage tank 11350 Y Y Y 4 2 Y Y N
Instrumentation and control 13401 Y Y Y 6 6 2 Y Y Y
Flow meter, level sensor 13402 y y y 4 2 2 Y Y Y
-
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01660
EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes work associated with the start up and initial operation of the liquid
chlorine and liquid bisulfite systems at Marshall Street and East APCF.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
B. Section 01100 - Summary of Work
C. Section 01040 - Construction Coordination
D. Section 01220 - Progress Meetings
E. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
F. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
G. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Before equipment start-up the Contractor shall have completed each of the following and submit
all required certification to the Engineer:
A. Verification that all final acceptance tests have been performed.
B. Certification of equipment compliance as required under Section 01600.
C. Verification that all required lubrication equipment and materials are provided.
D. Verification that all piping and valves have been properly.
E. Verification that existing plant personnel agree that other plant components are
ready for start-up.
F. Submit a written report in accordance with Sections 01340 and 01400 that all
equipment has been properly installed and is ready for plant start-up.
G. Verification that all safety equipment is installed and fully functional.
H. Verification that all indicating and annunciating systems are installed and fully
functional.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
EQUIPMENT START -UP AND INITIAL OPERA nON
01660-1
1. Verification that all utilities are operable.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE
To maintain treatment plant process flows as stated in Section 01100 - Summary of Work, the
Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and the temporary chemical system supplier during
construction and startup of the hypochlorite and bisulfite feed systems. During the Work, no
interruption of the chlorination and dechloriantion processes is allowed The Contractor shall be
responsible for any permit violation related to the Work.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 EQUIPMENT START-UP
A. Sodium Hypochlorite and Sodium Bisulfite
Before startup and filling the bulk storage tanks with chemicals, the Contractor
shall test the piping and bulk storage tanks for leakage in accordance with
requirement and procedures with chemical as specified in the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall calibrate the feed pumps, flow meter, and
ultrasonic level meter in the bulk storage tanks as specified in the Contract
Documents.
During startup testing the Contractor shall test the feed pumps and automatic
control system to maintain the set point residual within ::1:3% of the set point for
30 consecutive days without failure, and that the automatic mode functioned
properly as specified in the Contract Documents.
The sequencing of equipment installation and removal shall be coordinated with
the City Management and Operations staff to prevent treatment disruptions.
The Contractor shall implement the tagging system described in Article 1.11 of
this Specification.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01660-2
EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.11 TAGGING SYSTEM
A tagging system shall be used to establish prerequisites for equipment start-up. The
tagging system shall be as follows:
1. Preliminary check completed ("Field Testing" in Section 01600) and red tags
shall be placed on the system.
2. Red tags shall remain on the system until the system receives "Acceptance of
Installation" in accordance with Section 01600.
Tags will be signed and dated by the Engineer upon acceptance and shall remain attached
to the item until ordered removed by the Engineer.
Equipment testing shall not begin until all equipment required for use has been cleared of
red tags.
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Instructional visits by the manufacturer's representatives shall be scheduled during the
initial equipment start-up and initial operation period. The Contractor shall submit
tentative schedule of instructional visits to the Engineer for review with the Owner's
operating personnel 2 weeks before the proposed start-up date. An equipment
manufacturer who has supplied several items of equipment may combine instructions on
two or more items on the same day, with follow-up visits within 6 months, so that the
total number of days is in accordance with the Specifications. Instruction from more than
one equipment manufacturer shall not be permitted on a given day.
1.13 COORDINATING CONFERENCE
At least 14 days before equipment start-up, a coordinating conference shall be held to
establish start-up procedures which are to be followed, to determine the status of all
equipment, and generally to coordinate all aspects of this phase of the project.
Representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall attend the conference. All
shop drawings, manuals of instruction and maintenance for equipment, and the Contract
Documents shall be made available for reference by the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01660-3
EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED)
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Administrative Provisions for Substantial Completion and for Final Acceptance.
B. General Conditions of the Contract
C. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
D. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning and Protection
E. Section 01730 - O&M Manuals
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When the Contractor considers the Work or designated portion of the Work is
Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall submit a written notice with a list of
items to be completed or corrected.
B. Should the Engineer's inspection find the Work is not substantially complete, the
Engineer will promptly notifY the Contractor in writing, listing observed
deficiencies.
C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of
Substantial Completion.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01700-1
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
D. When the Engineer finds the Work is Substantially Complete the Engineer will
prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion.
1.11 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When the Contractor considers the Work or a designated period of the Work is
complete, the Contractor shall submit written certification of the following:
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and
deficiencies listed with Certificates of Substantial Completion have been
corrected.
4. Work is complete and ready for fmal inspection.
5. All required shop drawings, catalog cuts, maintenance manuals,
instruction manual, test reports, samples, operational manuals and all other
submittals have been submitted and reviewed by the Engineer.
6. All deliverables have been delivered or placed as accepted by the
Engineer.
B. Should the Engineer's inspection reveal that the Work is incomplete, the Engineer
will promptly notify the Contractor in writing listing observed deficiencies.
C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of Final
Completion.
D. When the Engineer fmds the Work is complete, the Engineer will consider close-
out submittals.
1.12 REINSPECTION FEES (NOT USED)
1.13 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. All required Certificates of Inspection.
B. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01720.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Under provisions of Section 01730.
D. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the
Contract.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
01700-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
1.14 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to total Contract Price, indicating:
1. Original total Contract Price
2. Previous change orders
3. Changes under allowances
4. Changes under unit prices
5. Deductions for uncorrected Work
6. Penalties and bonuses
7. Deductions for liquidated damages
8. Deductions for re-inspection fees
9. Other adjustments to total Contract Price
10. Total Contract Price as adjusted
11. Previous payments
12. Sum remaining due
B. The Engineer will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to
the total Contract Price not previously made by change orders.
1.15 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
The Contractor shall submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of
Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01700-3
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01710
FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of the Work and at the completion of the
Work as required by General Conditions.
1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.1 0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS
Cleaning and disposal operations shall comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti-
pollution laws.
PART 2 MATERIALS
The Contractor shall:
A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or
property and which will not damage surfaces.
B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by the
manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned.
C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material
manufacturer.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01710-1
FINAL CLEANING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DURlNG CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall:
A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the Work, the site, and adjacent properties free
from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown debris.
B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and
rubbish.
C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from the site periodically and
dispose of these at legal areas away from the site.
3.02 DUST CONTROL
The Contractor shall:
A. Clean interior spaces before the start of finish painting and continue cleaning as
needed until painting is finished.
B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning
will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces.
3.03 FINAL CLEANING
The Contractor shall:
A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.
B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other
foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces.
C. Broom clean exterior paved surface; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.
D. Before final completion or Owner occupancy, the Contractor shall conduct an
inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas to
verify that the entire work is clean.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01710-2
FINAL CLEANING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This Section details the minimum requirements for the Contractor for maintenance
and recording of Record Documents.
B. The Contractor shall label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance
with the corresponding Specification Section number. Each document shall be
labeled "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Record Documents
shall be maintained in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall
not be used for construction purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in the Contractor's field office apart from documents
used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.
B. The Contractor shall institute a computerized record control program.
C. Documents and samples shall be available at all times for inspection by the Engineer.
1.04 RECORDING
The Contractor shall record construction information as follows:
A.
Record and update daily "as-built" information from field notes and on set of opaque
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.
Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for
recording information.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-1
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Record information concurrently ( daily) with construction progress. Work shall not
be concealed until required information is recorded.
D.
CAD Requirements for As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a complete set of as-built drawings in AutoCAD 2007 or later format
upon completion of the Work. The Contractor shall use the AutoCAD 2007
drawings furnished by the Engineer for this purpose. No additional compensation
will be allowed for Contractor to provide the as-built drawings.
E.
It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure the as-built drawings conform to
the following CAD requirements:
I. Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer on CD-ROM. Each CD shall be
clearly labeled with the appropriate project number, client name, date, and
file names included on each CD. Iffiles are compressed, a description of the
compression software must be included along with a copy of the appropriate
uncompressing software.
2. All changes to drawings must be done in accordance with the appropriate
scale of the drawing revised and shall be delineated by placing a "cloud"
around the areas revised and adding a revision triangle indicating the
appropriate revision number.
3. Each drawing must have the revision block completed to indicate the revision
number, date, and initials ofthe person revising the drawing. The description
of the revision must say "Record Drawing." This procedure must be followed
for every drawing even when no changes are made to the drawing.
4. All revisions to drawings must be put on separate layers with the layer names
prefixed "as-built" followed by the appropriate existing layer name. The
colors and line types of the appropriate existing layers shall be adhered to
when creating new layers.
5. Contractor shall supply five (5) full sets of reproducible opaque as-built
drawings.
As-built Drawings: The construction drawings shall be marked to reflect:
I. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances referenced to three permanent surface improvements.
2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Field changes of dimension and detail.
4. Changes made by modifications.
5. Details not on original Construction Drawings.
G. Specifications and Addenda-Legibly mark each Section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and
item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Change Order.
H. The Contractor shall have the Licensed Land Surveyor certifY the as-built drawings
as being correct and complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. At Contract closeout the Contractor shall transmit Record Documents and samples
with a cover letter to the Engineer listing the following:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and addresses
4. Number and title of each Record Document
5. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative
6. Contract Section and Subsection numbers
7. Location
B. Before assembly and submittal the Contractor shall review for completeness the
records maintained by its subcontractors.
C. Tracings of all Construction Documents and Shop Drawings made by the Contractor,
subcontractors, and suppliers of materials or equipment shall be corrected to show
the Work as actually completed or installed.
D. As-built drawings
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01730
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for
the Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
One O&M Manual shall be provided for each APCF.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as
referenced in other pertinent sections of the Specifications. The data
presented in the O&M Manuals shall be specifically related to this
Contract and application.
2. Incorporate maintenance and operation data furnished by the Owner, if
any.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items to
supply and deliver, to the Engineer, O&M Manuals for the Work in accordance
with the requirements of this Section.
C. The Contractor shall provide O&M Manuals for all equipment, including
instrumentation, electrical, and process control system equipment and software
for the Facility.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
B. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents
C. Section 01800 - Training
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In general, the manuals shall have two levels: facilities-wide systems level and
individual component level.
1. The facilities-wide systems level shall:
a. Describe the facilities-wide systems, including diagrams.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
01730-1
B.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
b. Explain start-up, shutdown, normal operations and malfunction of
the facilities-wide systems.
c. Tabulate a lubrication schedule for the facilities-wide systems.
d. Describe preventive maintenance checking procedures for the
facilities-wide systems.
e. Include a cross reference to all individual component manuals.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. The individual component level shall contain:
a. Storage requirements
b. Installation instructions
c. Alignment instructions and tolerances
d. Operating instructions
e. Troubleshooting instructions
f. Lubrication requirements
g. Maintenance instructions
h. Parts list
1. Recommended spare parts list and how to obtain same
Format:
1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm).
2. White paper: 20-lb (9.072-kg) minimum.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly word-processed.
4. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced, punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger
than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x 43.18 cm).
c. All drawings shall be placed at the end of each section and
drawings shall be printed on one side only.
5. Provide a flyleaf for each separate product or each piece of operation
equipment.
a. Provide word-processed description of product and major
component parts of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," listing:
01730-2
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual
C.
Media
1. Original word processed CD shall be delivered to the Engineer.
2. All word processing must be done using the latest version of Microsoft
Word or as directed by the Engineer.
3. All drawings except control system configuration drawings must be
submitted on CD using AutoCAD.
Binders
1. Filled to not more than 75% capacity.
2. When multiple binders are used, arrange the data into related consistent
groupmgs.
The Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Equipment Manuals. Five copies of the O&M Instruction Manual for each
piece of equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer with delivery of the
equipment. O&M manuals will not include manufacturer's test results and
as-built specifications.
2. Systems O&M Manuals. Five copies of the systems' O&M Manuals
bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer no later than 90 days
before start-up. Systems O&M Manuals will be complete except for field
results and refinements added as result of demonstration
3. Final O&M Manuals. Five copies of the Final Equipment and Systems
O&M Manuals bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer before
the Substantial Completion under this Contract.
4. The cost ofthese Manuals submitted shall be included in the total Contract
Price. Copies supplied under Item "2" will not be included under Item "3."
Any modifications required after final O&M submission shall be made to the
manuals by issuance of addenda in the form of change pages to the manual. The
addenda will identify where the new data are to be inserted, what data are to be
01730-3
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
removed, new index sheets as necessary, and a list of shop drawings and
submittals.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Florida Administrative Code, 62-555.350, "Operation and Maintenance of Public
Water Systems."
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Data shall be prepared by personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled as technical writers to the extent required to communicate essential
data.
4. Skilled as draftsmen competent to prepare required drawings.
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
1.10 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Neatly word-processed table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
order, to include the following:
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, fax number, and
telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
3. List, with each product, name, address, fax number and telephone number
of:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01730-4
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
a. Subcontractor or installer
b. A list of each product to be included, indexed to the content of the
volume
c. Identify area of responsibility of each subcontractor or installer, if
more than one
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement
e. Manufacturer
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as
set forth in the Contract Documents.
Product Data
1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed
b. Clearly identify data applicable information
c. Delete references to inapplicable information
Drawings
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate clearly:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems
b. Control and flow diagrams
c. Include Owner Tag Numbers
2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
3. Project Record Documents shall not be used as maintenance drawings.
Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
3. Describe how complete system is to operate.
01730-5
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
E. Copy of pertinent information related to warranty, bond, and Service Contract
issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel; give:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
F. Training manuals used in training courses will become part ofthis Manual.
1.11 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Content, for architectural products, applied materials, and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Catalog number, size, composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for re-ordering special-manufactured
products.
2. Instructions for care and maintenance.
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and
methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental
to product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
B. Content for moisture-protected and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards.
b. Chemical composition.
c. Details of installation.
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
C. Additional requirements for maintenance data as required by other sections of the
Specifications.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
01730-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.12 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
03 720-030-0 1
Bid Documents
A. Content for each electrical, mechanical, and instrumentation, as appropriate:
1. Make a table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control
or instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of
the control or instrument.
2. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions
for both the system, sub-system and the component parts.
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
3. Circuit directories of panel boards:
a. Electrical service
b. Controls
c. Communications
4. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams.
5. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or
instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes:
a. An electrical schematic for each item.
b. A chart listing the controls/instruments in a loop identifying the
equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol,
design criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's
model and serial number.
6. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
7. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting"
c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly
01730-7
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
B.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
d. Alignment, adjustment and checking
8. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
9. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices,
and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
10. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
11. Abnormal and emergency operations:
a. Potential overloads
b. Procedures for equipment breakdown
c. Action to be taken in a power outage
d. Identify alarms by equipment location and action to correct
e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards
12. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of
standard programming.
Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts
d. Model number and name plate data for each piece of equipment
e. Assembly drawings
f. List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or
systems including where they are stored
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency
instructions
c. Summer and winter operating instructions
d. Special operating instructions
e. Control settings and ranges
01730-8
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
12.
13.
3.
Maintenance Procedures:
a. Identify type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities
required for each piece of equipment
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting"
c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly
d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking
Servicing and lubrication schedule:
a. List of lubricants required
b. Period between lubrications
The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. (This
is not to be a generalized catalog of the entire product line.)
Description of sequence of operation
Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
diagrams required for maintenance:
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts
As-installed control diagrams.
Each Contractor's coordination drawings
10.
List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices,
and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage
11.
Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications
Charts of equipment, instrument and valve tag numbers with location and
function of each piece of equipment, instrument or valve:
a. Reference drawing which shows equipment, instrument or valve
location
b. Manufacturer's model and serial number
c. Valve actuator type (manual, hydraulic, electric or pneumatic)
Local services (process water and air, drains, HV AC, natural gas and
steam).
01730-9
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
C. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of the Owner's personnel.
D. Additional Requirements for O&M Data required by sections of Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 O&M MANUALS
A. Binders: The manuals shall be supplied in binders that are the same as those
provided in paragraph 1.04 D. above.
B. Electronic V ersion: Word-processed portions of the manuals shall also be
provided on word processor diskettes. The electronic version manuals must be
capable of being read, edited, and printed with Microsoft Word or that which is
congruent file format with word processing in Document Control at the time of
transmittal of documents. The format will be provided to the Contractor upon
request. All drawings shall be generated using personal computer and plotter with
the software package program from AutoCAD.
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01730-10
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall do the following:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
C. Review submittals to verifY compliance with Contract Documents.
D. Submit these to the Engineer for review.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract
B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts executed by
each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors.
B. Number of original signed copies required: two each.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in sequence of the Specifications. Provide
completion information for each item as follows:
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, address, telephone, fax, and E-mail number, and name of principal.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
W ARRANTlES AND BONDS
01740-1
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure
b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranty or bond
7. Contractor, with address, telephone, faxes and E-mail numbers, and the
name of responsible principal.
D. Submittal of warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts shall be
included in submittals for review and before Final Completion with actual dates
included.
E. The Contractor's obligation to correct defective or nonconforming Work shall run
for 12 months (or such longer period of time as may otherwise be specified in the
Contract Documents) beginning from the date Substantial Completion is
achieved.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. All mechanical and electrical equipment, together with devices of whatever nature
and all components, which are furnished and/or installed by the Contractor shall
be guaranteed.
B. The guarantee shall be against the manufacturing and/or design inadequacies,
materials, and workmanship not in conformity, improper assembly, hidden
damage, failure of devices and/or components, excessive leakage, or other
circumstances which would cause the equipment to fail under normal design
and/or specific operating conditions for12 months or such longer period as may be
shown and/or specified from and after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. Each piece of equipment, device, or component which shall fail within the above
specified term of the guarantee shall be replaced and installed with reasonable
promptness by the Contractor without increase in the Contract Price. Failure of
the Contractor to provide timely repairs as specified in this Section shall result in
a claim being issued by the Owner against the Contractor's Bond. In some
instances, if approved by the Owner, the Contractor may be allowed to repair the
equipment.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01740-2
W ARRANTlES AND BONDS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- --- --------------- ---------- ------------------
I
I 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
I 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED)
I PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
I PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
I END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 03720-030-0 ] 01740-3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
Bid Documents
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01800
TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall do the following:
A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract.
B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished by the
suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment manuals,
and start-up engineering and training assistance.
C. Ensure that system suppliers provide a qualified training instructor to help the
Contractor train the Owner's employees in the proper operation and maintenance
of all equipment and systems.
D. Furnish training videos and manuals during the training program.
E. Include in the total Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing
training manuals; conducting classroom instructions; performing field, factory,
and hands-on training; and coordinating and incorporating training service
provided by suppliers and all other activities required to provide a comprehensive
training program of sufficient length, as determined by the Owner.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions
B. Section 01000 - Project Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01800-1
TRAINING
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE
A. All factory training programs, if required, shall be completed before start-up of
the Owner's system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment.
B. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the approved
schedule.
C. Individuals requiring training shall be trained in small groups during Mondays
through Fridays. The Contractor will normally provide training during the 8-hour
day shift.
D. The hands-on training shall be conducted with a maximum of 10 students per
instructor.
E. Thirty days before the first training event, the Contractor shall coordinate and
submit a training schedule to the Engineer.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be
performed by qualified personnel who are:
1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment and
systems installed under this Contract.
2. Familiar with training requirements ofthe Owner.
B. Furnish resumes, including three outside references, for each instructor to be used
in the training program.
C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based upon the review of
resumes, and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, request
additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If
the proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit resumes of another
candidate within a reasonable time.
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01800-2
TRAINING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.09 QUALIFICA nONS (NOT USED)
1.10 TRAINING PLAN
A. At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall provide a competent and
experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for not less than 3 days to
instruct permanent operating personnel in operation of equipment and control
systems.
B. At least 120 days before training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
detailed training plan including:
1. Title and objectives
2. Training schedule
3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees
4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, Engineers, operators,
maintenance staff)
5. Course description and outline of course content
6. Duration
7. Location (e.g., training center or site)
8. Format (e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on)
9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements
1.11 FORM OF TRAINING MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall prepare training packages in the form of an instruction
manual for use by the Owner's personnel. At least 30 days before training, the
Contractor shall submit training packages to the Engineer for acceptance.
B. Format
1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm).
2. Paper: 20-lb (9.072-kg) minimum, white, for typed pages.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly word processed, including:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
01800-3
TRAINING
a. Table of contents
b. Pretest
c. Learning objectives
d. General operations, theory, specific equipment information
4. Drawings
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages, not larger
than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x 43.18 cm).
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Marshall Street
and East APCF Chlorine Gas and Sulfur Dioxide Gas Conversion Project"
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structure or system as applicable
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual
d. Locations
C. Binders
1. Commercial quality three-post binders with durable and cleanable plastic
covers.
2. Maximum post width shall be 3 inches (7.62 cm).
3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the information into related
consistent groupings.
1.12 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL
A. Produce or provide video training material, subject to approval of the Owner.
B. Furnish four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, the
Owner's name, and time on label in a clear plastic sleeve.
C. All costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs shall be borne by
the Contractor.
1.13 INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the completion of Work, the Contractor shall provide a competent and
experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for a period of time as
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
01800-4
TRAINING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2
PART 3
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
directed by the Owner to instruct permanent operating personnel in the operation
of equipment and control systems.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish four complete sets of operating instructions applying
to each piece of equipment installed in conjunction with this Contract.
C.
An "As Installed" diagram of all control wiring and operating instructions shall be
mounted in a water-tight pocket on the inside door of the control panel of each
unit.
D.
Unless otherwise specified, provide engraved metal, plastic tags, or instructions
on any valve, switch, control, pipe or other piece of equipment which is not self
evident as to its function or mode of operation. This includes but is not limited to
all exposed piping and all switches. This shall particularly apply to operations
which must be manually sequenced.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01800-5
TRAINING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02060
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
This Section describes work required for the following demolition and restoration:
A. Demolition and removal of all piping, mechanical, structural, electrical facilities
and equipment, debris, lubricant, and wasted fluid at City of Clearwater's
Marshall Street, and East APCF within the Limits of Demolition shown on the
Contract Drawings, loading, transporting, unloading, and disposal of removed
materials in a disposal facility in accordance with applicable City, County, State,
and Federal regulations.
B. Site and/or facility restoration following demolition.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit asbestos and/or lead abatement plan provided by a
qualified abatement contractor for removal of asbestos- or lead-containing
materials, if asbestos and/or lead are identified in the building and if required, in
accordance with this Specification Section.
B. The Contractor shall submit Record Drawings accurately showing locations of
capped utilities (i.e. piping), subsurface obstructions, and below-grade
foundations that remain on-site following completion of demolition work.
C. The Contractor shall submit a demolition sequence/procedure to the Engineer for
review before demolition work. The procedure shall, at a minimum, include
equipment layout area, spill containment, material disposal, safety, and include
sufficient details for the Engineer to review for compliance of Contract
Documents.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures,
protection of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control, and disposal of
materials and waste hydraulic fluid.
B. Obtain permits from City Building Department and regulatory agenCIes (as
required).
C. Notify affected utility companies before starting demolition operations and
comply with their requirements.
D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, walkways, hydrants, parking areas, or
buildings without required permits and/or Owner approvals.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
02060- ]
DEMOLITION
E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if a hazardous environmental
condition is encountered at any site.
1.04 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. If an unknown or unforeseeable hazardous environmental condition is
encountered at the site or if the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is
responsible creates a hazardous environmental condition, immediately do the
following:
1. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition.
2. Stop all work in connection with such condition and in any area affected
thereby.
3. NotifY Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice
in writing).
B. Resume work in connection with such condition or in any affected area only after
the Owner has obtained any required permits related to the condition or area and
delivered to the Contractor a written notice, specifYing under what special
conditions Work may be resumed safely.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Fourteen days before performing any demolition, a coordination meeting shall be
held between each of the prime Contractors, the Owner, and the Engineer to
discuss the Contractor's Demolition Plan and related procedures. Items to be
discussed shall include but not be limited to confirmation of material to be
removed, dust control, sequence of work, removal of material, protection of
existing equipment, health and safety, emergency response plans, handling of
hazardous materials, access and egress of material, etc.
Demolition procedures must be coordinated with the Owner's operating personnel
and adjusted accordingly, if necessary, to prevent upsetting facility operations.
Following the coordination meeting, demolition operations shall begin after the
Contractor obtains written authorization to proceed from the Owner.
B. NotifY the Owner and the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the intended
start of demolition operations in each affected area.
C. Erect and maintain temporary barriers, temporary facilities, signs, and security
devices as required or directed by the Owner or the Engineer.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
02060-2
DEMOLITION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Erect and maintain temporary partitions and weatherproof closures to prevent
spread of dust, odors, and noise in areas of continued Owner occupancy.
F. Protect existing structures, equipment, instrumentation, appurtenances,
architectural features, and materials that are not to be demolished.
G. Protect existing site-related items such as pavements, walkways, parking areas,
curbs, aprons, and landscaping features that are not to be demolished.
H. Protect existing electrical, heating, ventilating and air conditioning, and plumbing
systems, including related components, that are not to be demolished.
I. Mark location of underground utilities.
J. Submit plans for abatement of asbestos- and lead-containing materials, if
required.
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Confine demolition operations to designated areas of the sites and within "Limits
of Demolition" established in contract drawings.
B. Conduct operations to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building
areas (as appropriate). Maintain protected access and egress at all times.
C. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify
the Engineer and do not resume operations until directed.
D. All the material, equipment, piping, etc. demolished, shall become the property of
the Contractor unless otherwise direct by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for disposing of all the material not to be retained by the Owner at an
approved facility. The Contractor shall transport items designated by the Owner
to be retained to the storage area as directed by the Engineer.
E. Dispose of all rubble and non-metallic scrap at an approved facility.
F. Dispose of hydraulic fluid, lubricant, etc at an approved facility.
G. Conduct demolition work between 7:00 AM and 5:00 PM
3.03 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
A. Break up and remove slabs-on-grade, pavements, curbs, aprons, etc., and related
items located within "Limits of Demolition" established to each site.
B. Break up and remove foundation walls, footings, etc., including any below-grade
concrete foundations, to a depth of 3 feet below existing grade.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
02060-3
DEMOLITION
C. Break up and remove concrete structures and tanks, including walls, piers, base
slabs, cover slabs, etc. Except where noted, for concrete tank floors/foundations
greater than 3 feet below existing grade, break-up and fracture to allow drainage
of water and prevent water ponding within the demolished area.
D. Empty all water, gas, and accumulated debris and remove buried tanks, meter pits,
and associated piping.
E. Disconnect and remove designated process piping systems and compressed air
system, including valves and fittings. Plug openings in walls and floors where
utilities are removed.
F. Carefully disconnect, protect, and remove any equipment designated for the
Owner's future use.
G. Remove and dispose of demolished materials as work progresses. Do not burn
materials.
H. Patch and refinish existing visible metal surfaces that are to remain and repair
concrete surfaces that are to remain.
1. Paint designated metal surfaces and reinforcing steel exposed by demolition
operations.
J. Remove temporary barricades, partitions, SIgns, etc., upon completion of
demolition operations.
K. Remove and dispose of debris, trash, and other scrap.
L. Upon completion of demolition operations, leave areas in a clean condition.
3.04 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Structural and Mechanical Demolition. The Contractor shall demolish and
remove all structures, portions of structures, pavement, process piping, and other
items as required in this Specification and as shown on the Contract Drawings or
as necessary to accomplish the Work. The Contractor shall protect equipment,
piping, instruments, and control panels to remain as shown in the Contract
Drawings.
Electrical Demolition. The Contractor shall demolish and remove or relocate
conduit and wires, supports and hangers, electrical panels, lighting, and other
items as required in this Specification and as shown on the Contract Drawings or
as necessary to accomplish the Work.
Major work items scheduled for demolition include but are not limited to the
following:
03 720-030-0 1
Bid Documents
02060-4
DEMOLITION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
1.
Marshall Street APCF Chemical Building mechanical equipment
(overhead cranes, and supports), and piping associated with the existing
cWorinator and sulfonator that have not been removed, coordinate with the
temporary chemical feed system supplier to relocate the temporary sodium
hypocWorite pump skids at the chlorine building, electrical wiring and
conduits, and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Drawings.
2.
Marshall Street APCF reclaimed water pump wet well level meter
relocation and related work as shown in the Contract Drawings.
3.
East APCF CWorine and Sulfur Dioxide Buildings mechanical equipment
(cWorine gas feed systems, sulfur dioxide gas feed system, concrete pads,
overhead cranes and supports), floor slabs, and all associated piping,
electrical wiring and conduits, and appurtenances as shown in the Contract
Drawings.
4.
Before demolition work starts the Contractor shall verifY all the locations
and items to be demolished with the Engineer and the Owner.
5.
During demolition, the Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent
interruption of the cWorination and decWorination processes at the
facilities and shall responsible for any permit violation related to the
Work.
END OF SECTION
02060-5
DEMOLlTlON
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required
and design, install, and remove formwork for cast-in-place concrete as shown on the
Drawings and as specified in this Section.
B. Secure to forms as required or set for embedment as required all miscellaneous metal
items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, inserts, and other items furnished under other
Sections and required to be cast into concrete.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
B. Cast-in-Place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product
data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:
1. Form release agent
2. Form ties
B. Samples
1. Demonstrate to the Engineer on a designated area of the concrete substructure
exterior surface that the form release agent will not adversely affect concrete
surfaces to be painted, coated, or otherwise finished and will not affect the forming
materials.
C. Certificates
1. Certify that form release agent is suitable for use in contact with potable water after
30 days (non-toxic and free of taste and odor).
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FORMWORK
Bid Documents
03100-1
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
3. ACI 347 - Formwork for Concrete
B. American Plywood Association (AP A)
1. Material grades and designations as specified
C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time
of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The form liner manufacturer's representative shall be on-site during the initial
installation of the form liner to instruct the Contractor on the proper methods of
application and use of the liner. He/She shall be available to answer any questions on
the liner that the Engineer may have.
1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Architectural Concrete is wall, slab, beam, or column concrete which will
have surfaces exposed to view in the finished work. It includes similar exposed surfaces
in water containment structures from the top of walls to 2 ft below the normal water
surface in open tanks and basins.
B. Structural design responsibility: All forms and shoring shall be designed at the
Contractor's expense by a professional engineer registered in Florida. Formwork shall
be designed and erected in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318
and as recommended in ACI 347 and shall comply with all applicable regulations and
codes. The design shall consider any special requirements due to the use of plasticized
and/or retarded set concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configurations desired.
03720-030-01
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Bid Documents
03100-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Forms for cast-in-place concrete shall be made of wood, metal, or other approved
material. Wood forms for the project shall be new and unused. Construct wood forms
of sound lumber or plywood of suitable dimensions and free from knotholes and loose
knots. Where used for exposed surfaces, dress and match boards. Sand plywood
smooth and fit adjacent panels with tight joints. Metal forms may be used when
approved by the Engineer and shall be of an appropriate type for the class of work
involved. All forms shall be designed and constructed to provide a flat, uniform
concrete surface requiring minimal finishing or repairs.
B. Wall Forms
1. Forms for all exposed exterior and interior concrete walls shall be new and unused
"Plyform" exterior grade plywood panels manufactured in compliance with the
AP A and bearing the trademark of that group, or equal acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide B grade or better veneer on all faces to be placed against concrete during
forming. The class of material and grades of interior plies shall be of sufficient
strength and stiffness to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal
finishing and grinding.
2. All joints or gaps in forms shall be taped, gasketed, plugged, and/or caulked with an
approved material so that the joint will remain watertight and will withstand placing
pressures without bulging outward or creating surface patterns.
3. Forms for circular structures shall conform to the circular shape of the structure.
Straight panels may be substituted for circular panels if the straight panels do not
exceed 2 ft in width, deflect more than 3-1120 per joint, nor conflict with specific
notes on the Drawings.
C. Column Forms
1. Rectangular columns shall be formed as specified for wall forms. All comers shall
have a 314-in chamfer unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
2. Circular columns shall be formed with steel, fiberglass reinforced plastic, or
seamless cardboard column forms. The forms shall be continuous for the height of
the column between construction joints indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
D. Rustications shall be at the location and shall conform to the details shown on the
Drawings. Moldings for chamfers and rustications shall be milled and planed smooth.
Rustications and comer strips shall be of a nonabsorbent material, compatible with the
03720-030-01
CONCRETEFO~ORK
Bid Documents
03100-3
form surface and fully sealed on all sides to prohibit the loss of paste or water between
the two surfaces.
E. Form-Release Agent
1. Coat all forming surfaces in contact with concrete using an effective, non-staining,
non-residual, water-based, bond-breaking form coating unless otherwise noted.
Form-release agents used in potable water containment structures shall be suitable
for use in contact with potable water and shall be non-toxic and free of taste or
odor.
F. Concrete surfaces which are to be painted shall be formed with hard plastic finished
plywood or a similar material which does not require a form-release agent unless the
Contractor can substantiate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the form-release
agent will not remain on the formed surface after it is stripped.
G. Form Ties
1. Form ties encased in concrete other than those specified in the following paragraphs
shall be designed so that after removal of the projecting part no metal shall remain
within 1-1/2 -in of the face of the concrete. The part of the tie to be removed shall
be at least 1/2-in diameter or be provided with a wood or metal cone at least 1/2-in
diameter and 1-l/2-in long. Form ties in concrete exposed to view shall be the
cone-washer type.
2. Form ties for exposed exterior and interior walls shall be as specified in the
preceding paragraph except that the cones shall be of approved wood or plastic.
3. Flat bar ties for panel forms shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a minimum
depth of 1-1/2-in and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of the tie
hole.
4. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an integral waterstop that is tightly
welded to the tie.
5. Common wire shall not be used for form ties.
6. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through-bolts of at least I-in diameter at
the smallest end or through-bolts that use a removable tapered sleeve of the same
minimum size may be used at the Contractor's option. Obtain Engineer's
acceptance of the system and spacing of ties before ordering or purchase of
forming. Clean, fill, and seal the form tie hole with non-shrink cement grout. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the watertightness of the form ties and any
repairs needed.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FORMWORK
Bid Documents
03100-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. Bond breakers for precast and tilt-up construction when cast against concrete shall be a
nonstaining, non-residual type, which will provide a positive bond prevention. Bond
breakers shall be Williams Distributors, Inc., Seattle, W A - Williams Tilt-Up
Compound; SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior Concrete Accessories,
Franklin Park, IL - Silcoseal 77 or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Forms shall be used for all cast-in-place concrete including sides of footings. Forms
shall be constructed and placed so that the resulting concrete will be of the shape, lines,
dimensions, and appearance indicated on the Drawings.
B. Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for cleaning, inspection, and
joint surface preparation. Forms for walls of considerable height shall have closable
intermediate inspection ports. Tremies and hoppers for placing concrete shall be used to
allow concrete inspection, prevent segregation, and prevent the accumulation of
hardened concrete on the forms above the fresh concrete.
C. Molding, bevels, or other types of chamfer strips shall be placed to produce blockouts,
rustications, or chamfers as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section.
Chamfer strips shall be provided at horizontal and vertical projecting comers to produce
a 3/4-in chamfer. Rectangular or trapezoidal moldings shall be placed in locations
requiring sealants where specified or shown on the Drawings. Sizes of moldings shall
conform to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand construction loads and vibration and to
prevent displacement or sagging between supports. Construct forms so that the concrete
will not be damaged by their removal. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for
the adequacy of the forming system.
E. Before form material is re-used, all surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting nails withdrawn, and all
protrusions smoothed. Reuse of wooden forms for other than rough finish will be
permitted only if a "like-new" condition of the form is maintained.
3.02 FORM TOLERANCES
A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed, and constructed in accordance with the
recommendations of ACI 347 and shall meet the following additional requirements for
the specified finishes.
B. Formed Surface Exposed to View: Edges of all form panels in contact with concrete
shall be flush within 1I32-in and forms for plane surfaces shall be such that the concrete
03720-030-01
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Bid Documents
03100-5
will be plane within 1/16-in in 4 ft. Forms shall be tight to prevent the passage of
mortar, water, and grout. The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point
shall not exceed 114-in from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings. Form
panels shall be arranged symmetrically and in an orderly manner to minimize the
number of seams.
C. Formed surfaces not exposed to view or buried shall meet requirements of Class "C"
Surface in ACI 347.
D. Formed rough surfaces including mass concrete, pipe encasement, electrical duct
encasement, and other similar installations shall have no minimum requirements for
surface smoothness and surface deflections. The overall dimensions of the concrete
shall be plus or minus 1 inch.
E. Formed concrete Surfaces to Receive Paint: Surface deflections shall be limited to
1/32-in at any point and the variation in wall deflection shall not exceed 1/16-in per 4 ft.
The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point shall not exceed 1/4-in
from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings.
3.03 FORM PREPARATION
A. Wood forms in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an effective release agent
before forms are installed.
B. Steel forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and mill scale and other ferrous deposits shall
be sandblasted or otherwise removed from the contact surface for all forms, except those
used for surfaces receiving a rough finish. All forms shall have the contact surfaces
coated with a release agent.
3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removal of forms.
Forms and shoring for structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in accordance with
ACI 301 and ACI 347. Form removal shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 03300.
3.05 INSPECTION
A. The Engineer shall be notified when the forms are complete and ready for inspection at
least 6 hours before the proposed concrete placement.
B. Failure of the forms to comply with the requirements specified in this Section or to
produce concrete complying with requirements of this Section shall be grounds for
rejection of that portion of the concrete work. Rejected work shall be repaired or
replaced as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Such repair or
03720-030-01
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Bid Documents
03100-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
replacement shall be subject to the requirements of this Section and approval of the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
CONCRETEFOR~ORK
Bid Documents
03100-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required
and install all concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as
specified in this Section.
B. Furnish only all deformed steel reinforcement required to be entirely built into concrete
masonry unit construction.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
B. Cast-in-place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product
data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:
1. Reinforcing steel. Placement drawings shall conform to the recommendations of
ACI315. All reinforcement in a concrete placement shall be included on a single
placement drawing or cross referenced to the pertinent main placement drawing.
The main drawing shall include the additional reinforcement (around openings, at
comers, etc) shown on the standard detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings
and/or to be of special steel or special yield strength are to be clearly identified.
2. Bar bending details. The bars shall be referenced to the same identification marks
shown on the placement drawings. Bars to have special coatings and/or to be of
special steel or special yield strength shall be clearly identified.
3. Schedule all placements to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The amount of
fibers per cubic yard to be used for each of the placements shall be noted on the
schedule. The name of the manufacturer of the fibers and the product data shall be
included with the submittal.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-1
B. Submit Test Reports of each of the following items in accordance with Section 01340.
1. Certified copy of mill test on each steel proposed for use showing the physical
properties of the steel and the chemical analysis.
2. Welder's certification. The certification shall be in accordance with A WS D1.4
when welding of reinforcement is required.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. ASTM AI84 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM AI85 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement
4. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement
5. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement
6. ASTM A6I5 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
7. ASTM A6I6 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
8. ASTM A6I7 - Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
9. ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
10. ASTM A767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
11. ASTM A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
03720-030-0 I
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12. ASTM A884 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Fabric for Reinforcement.
13. ASTM A934 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
2. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcment.
3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
4. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual
C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
1. Manual of Standard Practice
D. American Welding Society (A WS)
1. A WS Dl.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time
of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide services of a manufacturer's representative with at least 2 years experience in
the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and assistance during the
first placement of the material.
1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or other
foreign matter.
B. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and shape
fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof
markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on the submitted
Placing Drawings.
03720-030-01
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-3
C. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground; protected from moisture; and kept free
from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture, and shall comply with the following
material specifications:
A. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars.
B. Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Welded: ASTM A706.
C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets.
D. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
E. Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars.
F. Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60
deformed bars.
G. The following alternate materials are allowed:
1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 may be used for ASTM A706 provided the following
requirements are satisfied:
a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill tests shall not
exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi. Retests shall not
exceed this value by more than an additional 3000 psi.
b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield
strength of the reinforcement shall not be less than 1.25.
c. The carbon equivalency (CE) of bars shall be 0.55 or less.
H. Reinforcing Steel Accessories
1. Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 1 -
Maximum Protection.
2. Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 2 -
Moderate Protection.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Precast
Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the surrounding concrete.
I. Tie Wire
Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16-gauge or heavier, black annealed wire.
J. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting taper-threaded
type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as manufactured by
Erico Products Inc., Solon, OR, or equal. They shall meet all ACI 318 Building Code
requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with coupler manufacturer's bar threader
to ensure proper taper and thread engagement. Bar couplers shall be torqued to the
manufacturer's recommended value.
1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices shall be
designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression of not less than
125% of the ASTM specified minimum yield strength of the rebar.
2. Compression-type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing from one bar
to the other bar and shall be capable of developing the ultimate strength of the rebar
. .
III compreSSIOn.
K. Fiber Reinforcement
Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100% polypropylene collated, fibrillated
fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic Industries Inc.,
Chattanooga, TN - Fibermesh, or equal. Fiber length and quantity for the concrete mix
shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by
the Engineer.
2.02 F ABRICA nON
A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice.
B. Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or rebent.
C. Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than that
recommended by the ACI 318.
D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in metal, or
threaded shall have the applicable end(s) saw-cut. Such ends shall terminate in flat
surfaces within 1-1120 of a right angle to the axis ofthe bar.
03720-030-0]
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-5
E. Spirals
1. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 finishing turns at the top and bottom.
2. Splices shall be tension lap splices at least 48 bar diameters, but not less than 12
inches long. Welded splices shall only be used where specifically approved by the
Engineer.
3. Provide spacers as recommended by the CRSI.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Surface condition, bending, spacing, and tolerances of placement of reinforcement shall
comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for providing an adequate number of bars and maintaining the spacing and
clearances shown on the Drawings.
B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the mInImum concrete cover of
reinforcement shall be as follows:
1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 in
2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge, and/or weather: 2 in
(including bottom cover of slabs over water or sewage)
3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge, and/or weather:
a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells and folded plate members: 1in
b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals and stirrups): 1-1/2 in
C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after being
placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry.
D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection unless
specifically shown on the Drawings or specified in this Section, or unless prior written
approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been welded,
including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately removed from the
work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called for, it shall comply with
AWS D1.4.
03 720-030-0 I
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits, or
embedded items may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar diameter,
whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid interference shall only be
made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts,
conduits, mechanical openings, or other items without the prior approval of the
Engineer.
F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete
placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete.
G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the Drawings or
specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized, bars shall be cold-bent
around the standard diameter spool specified in the CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely
inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the reinforcing steel is damaged, replace,
Cadweld, or otherwise repair as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement
after it is embedded in concrete unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.
3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS
Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the Drawings,
provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening equivalent to one half of
the cross-sectional area of the reinforcing steel interrupted by an opening. The bars
shall have sufficient length to develop bond at each end beyond the opening or
penetration.
3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted,
shall be 30-bar diameters, but not less than 12 in. The lap splice length for column
vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above.
B. Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI 318. Splices in
adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when 50% or less of the
bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class B splices shall be used at all other
locations.
C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, splices in circumferential reinforcement
in circular walls shall be Class B tension splices and shall be staggered. Adjacent bars
shall not be spliced within the required lap length.
D. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members" on the
Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for
constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be welded to
03 720-030-0 1
CONCRETEREmFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-7
develop, in tension, at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. Splices in
adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B splice.
E. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall be
rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be lapped in
accordance with the requirements of ACI - 318 but not less than 12 in. The spliced
fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more than 24 in on center and
laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Do not position laps
midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous structures.
Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous splices.
F. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the Drawings.
Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 3D-bar diameters. Mechanical
reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel conditions approved
by the Engineer.
3.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Determine, provide and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars, and the like in
sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement and prevent its
displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the placement of concrete.
B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over soil.
C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used where
the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to weather, high
humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing areas). Use of
galvanized or plastic tipped metal chairs is permissible in all other locations unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified in this Section.
D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels supported on
the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom and top mats, may be
used if approved by the Engineer.
3.05 INSPECTION
In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the installation of
the reinforcement, including the size, spacing, and position of the reinforcement has
been observed by the Engineer and the Engineer's release to proceed with the concreting
has been obtained. The Engineer shall be given ample prior notice of the readiness of
placed reinforcement for observation. The forms shall be kept open until the Engineer
has finished his/her observations of the reinforcing steel.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
CONCRETEREmFORCEMENT
Bid Documents
03200-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required and install cast-in-place
concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
B. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
C. Concrete Finishes is included in Section 03350.
D. Concrete Finishes are included in Section 03350.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product
data including the following:
1. Sources of cement, pozzolan, and aggregates.
2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures.
3. Air-entraining admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data,
storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature
considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards.
4. Water-reducing admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data,
storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature
considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards.
5. High-range water-reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data including
catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended
dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect, slump range, and conformity
to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-1
6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use including
constituent quantities per cubic yard, water-cementitious materials ratio, concrete
slump, and type and manufacturer of cement. Provide either a. or b. below for each
mix proposed.
a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical
records.
b. The curve of water-cementitious materials ratio versus concrete cylinder
strength for each formulation of concrete proposed based on laboratory tests.
The cylinder strength shall be the average of the 28-day cylinder strength test
results for each mix. Provide results of 7 - and 14-day tests if available.
7. Sheet curing material. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, and
conformity to ASTM standard.
8. Liquid curing compound. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data,
storage requirements, product life, application rate, and conformity to ASTM
standards. Identify proposed locations of use.
B. Samples
1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer.
C. Test Reports
1. Fine aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substance.
2. Coarse aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances.
3. Cements - chemical analysis and physical properties for each type.
4. Pozzolans - chemical analysis and physical properties.
5. Proposed concrete mixes - compressive strength, slump, and air content.
D. Certifications
1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each
other and the aggregates.
2. Certify that admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30
days of concrete curing.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Certify that curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water after
30 days (non-toxic and free of taste or odor).
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.
2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
4. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete.
5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
6. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
7. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
8. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
9. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method.
10. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method.
11. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
12. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete.
13. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
14. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
15. ASTM ClO17 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for use In
Producing Flowing Concrete.
03720-030-01
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-3
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
1. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
2. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
4. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
5. ACI 350R - Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time
of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318; the recommendations of ACI 350R;
and other stated requirements, codes, and standards. The most stringent requirement of
the codes, standards, and this Section shall apply when conflicts exist.
B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on anyone structure. Concrete
shall be uniform in color and appearance.
C. Well in advance of placing concrete, discuss with the Engineer the sources of individual
materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement methods,
waterstops, and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather concreting as
required. Before placing any concrete containing a high-range water-reducing
admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor, accompanied by the plasticizer manufacturer,
shall discuss the properties and techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete.
D. If during the progress of the work it is impossible to secure concrete of the required
workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order
such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the
desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
E. If during the progress of the work the materials from the sources originally accepted
change in characteristics, the Contractor shall at his/her expense make new acceptance
tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes.
F. Testing of the following materials shall be furnished by the Contractor to verify
conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards.
1. Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis, physical
properties, and deleterious substances.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - SIeve analysis, physical
properties, and deleterious substances.
3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150 - chemical analysis and physical
properties.
4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 - chemical analysis and physical
properties.
5. Proposed concrete mix designs - compressive strength, slump, and air content.
G. Field testing and inspection services will be provided by the Owner. The cost of such
work shall be paid by the Owner except as specifically stated otherwise. The Owner
shall test the following items to verify conformity with this Specification Section:
1. Concrete placements - compressive strength ( cylinders), compressive strength
(cores), slump, and air content.
2. Other materials or products that may come under question.
H. All materials incorporated in the Work shall conform to accepted samples.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cement: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from
dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set.
B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination
with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in
successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 ft in thickness. Complete each layer before
the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate.
C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain to
uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.
D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation,or damage.
Provide suitable agitating equipment to ensure uniform dispersion of ingredients in
admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and
other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics.
E. Pozzolan: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from
dampness and contamination.
03720-030-01
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-5
F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weathertight buildings or off the ground and under
cover.
G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.
B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide
standardization for appearance, maintenance, and manufacturer's service.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements.
B. Cement: Domestic Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining
cements shall not be used. The cement brand shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following cement
type(s) shall be used:
1. Class A,B,C,D Concrete - Type II with the addition of fly ash resulting in C3A
being below 5% of total cementitious content, Type III limited to 5% C3A or Type
v.
C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM
C33.
D. Coarse Aggregate: Well-graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33
Table 2 for the specified coarse-aggregate size number. Limits of Deleterious
Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 3
for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the concrete mixes shall be as shown in
Table 1 in this Section.
E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic
matter, or other deleterious substances.
F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of cWorides and alkalis (except for those
attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a concrete
mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures shall be
03720-030-01
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures and shall be suitable for
use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing.
1.
Air-Entraining Admixture:
Proportioning and mixing
recommendations.
The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260.
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
2. Water-Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A.
Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. High-Range Water-Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply with ASTM
C494, Type F and shall result in non-segregating plasticized concrete with little
bleeding and with the physical properties of low water/cement ratio concrete. The
treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining its plastic state more than 2 hours.
Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not be used
without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the admixtures shall be
retarding or accelerating water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixtures.
G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash) Pozzolan shall be Class C or Class F fly ash complying with ASTM
C618 except the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3% maximum.
H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white
burlap-polyethylene sheeting, all complying with ASTM C171.
I. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall comply
with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type I-D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye)
and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. The curing compound shall be approved for
use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non-toxic and free of taste or odor).
2.03 MIXES
A. Development of mix designs and testing shall be by an independent testing laboratory
acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor.
B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits
specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability, durability,
strength, appearance, and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a
homogenous mixture which will readily work into comers and angles of forms and
around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allow excessive free
water to collect on the surface.
03720-030-01
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-7
C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of previous mixes with
essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data are not
available, be developed by a testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by
and at the expense of the Contractor. Acceptance of mixes based on standard deviation
shall be based on the modification factors for standard deviation tests contained in ACI
318. The water content of the concrete mix, determined by laboratory testing, shall be
based on a curve showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7- and 28-
day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves
shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average value of at
least three test specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient
to yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified below,
without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as
determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16% greater than the specified
design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for
maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content as specified
in Table 1.
D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to
demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in conformity
with the above paragraph.
E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1.
1. If the air-entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods
other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of
this requirement in the admixture submittal.
F. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143 shall be as shown in Table 1. If a
high-range water-reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be that
measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging
from 7 to 10 in.
G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more
admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in
combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on
the properties of each other.
03720-030-01
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---------------------
I
I TABLE 1
CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS
I Design Fine Coarse Cementitious
Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate Content
I (1) (2) (2) (3) (4)
I A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min.
I B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min.
C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min.
I D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min.
I
I W/C AE Slump
Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR Range
(5) (6) (7) (8) Inches
I
I A 0.62 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1-4
B 0.54 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1-3
I C 0044 max. 25% max 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3-5
I D 0040 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3-5
NOTES:
I (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days
(2) ASTM designation
I (3) Size Number in ASTM C33
(4) Cementitious content in lbs/cu yd
(5) W/C is Water-Cementitious ratio by weight
I (6) AE is percent air-entrainment
(7) WR is water-reducer admixture
(8) HR WR is high-range water-reducer admixture
* HRWR used at the contractor's option.
I
03720-030-01 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I Bid Documents
I 03300-9
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS
A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water
and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer.
All constituents, including admixtures, shall be batched at the plant except a high-range
water reducer may also be added in the field.
B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the
tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales shall have been
certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within 1 year of use.
C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3% with a moisture meter.
Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of
gallons of water as-batched on printed batching tickets.
D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or measuring
tanks or an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specific admixture.
1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an
automatic dispenser or similar metering device.
2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence.
3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
A. Concrete shall be ready-mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to the
Engineer. No hand-mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck drum and
reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each
transit-mix truck with a continuous, nomeversible, revolution counter showing the
number of revolutions at mixing speeds.
B. Ready-mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks
loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate.
C. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition of
water must be directed by the Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by
additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. All added water shall be metered and the
amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery ticket.
D. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI 318
and ASTM C94.
03720-030-01
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the
delivery end. Metal or metal-lined non-aluminum discharge chutes shall be used and
shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3
horizontal. Chutes more than 20 ft long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may
be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution.
F. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of
concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted.
G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing
concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks from the batching
plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding
excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of
concrete in the forms.
H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck arrives.
Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as
batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to
zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse
aggregate, cement, and water in each batch; the quantity delivered; the time any water is
added; and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and
time of discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer.
I. Temperature and Mixing Time Control
1. In cold weather do not allow the as-mixed temperature of the concrete and concrete
temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop below 400 F.
2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer
before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate
when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 900 F.
3. In hot weather cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the
concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 900 F. If necessary, substitute
well-crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water.
4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and/or cement to
the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the values shown
in Table 2.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-11
Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher)
Maximum Time
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE 2
MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE
80 to 900 F (27 to 320 C) .............................................................................45 minutes
70 to 790 F (21 to 260 C) ............................................................................. 60 minutes
40 to 690 F (5 to 200 C) ............................................................................... 90 minutes
If an approved high-range water-reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized
concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes.
3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE
A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with
paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be
rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but excessive bleeding, poor
workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be
obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following:
1. The gradation of aggregate.
2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate.
3. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits.
B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when hardened,
will have the required strength, durability, and appearance. Mixtures and workmanship
shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing. When
concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when viewed in good lighting from 10ft
away shall be pleasing in appearance and at 20 ft shall show no visible defects.
3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING
A. Placing
1. Verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely
braced before concrete placement. Remove ice, excess water, dirt, and other
foreign materials from forms. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded
items are securely in place. Have a competent workman at the location of the
placement who can ensure that reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in
designated locations while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi-porous
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely
porous subgrades in an approved manner.
2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which ensures the
concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete
which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on
concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of
weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place
construction joints as specified or as approved.
3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate sizes
suitable for pumping and submit for approval.
4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful.
Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of
galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained.
5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the
supporting element (columns, slabs and/or walls) has reached adequate strength.
6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated
to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring
the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of excessive
surface voids.
7. Slabs
a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds, and jointing materials have been positioned,
the concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints beginning
at a bulkhead, edge form, or comer. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of
the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation.
b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after
the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that
previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct
level and struck off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to
smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows.
c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the
walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass between placement of the
wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep
the top surface of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-13
8. Formed Concrete
a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent
segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contact with the
concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4 ft.
Place concrete for walls in 12- to 24-in lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If
plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to 7 ft
and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 ft.
9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the recommendations
of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to place underwater concrete.
Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to 12 inches in diameter and be spaced at not
more than 16 ft on centers nor more than 8 ft from an end form. Where concrete is
being placed around a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of
each pipe. Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for
underwater placement may be used subject to approval of the system including
details by the Engineer.
B. Compacting
1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding, or forking so that
concrete is thorougWy worked around reinforcement, embedded items, and
openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc, shall be continuously
performed along with vibration of the placement to eliminate air or stone pockets
which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness.
2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The
number, type, and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of
placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators
(including standby units in working order) are on the job.
3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators. Insert
vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 in apart. At each insertion, vibrate
sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over
vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing
operations.
4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 in thick shall be consolidated with
vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 in thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators
and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into
concrete vertically and shall not be laid horizontally or laid over.
5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be used
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each vibrator needed to
melt down the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators must
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
be used to densify, homogenize, and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be
inserted vertically at regular intervals through the fresh concrete and slightly into
the previous lift, if any.
6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed
concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration
shall continue until:
a. Frequency returns to normal.
b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened, and glistening.
c. Trapped air ceases to rise.
d. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface but has not disappeared.
3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any kind
during construction operations.
B. Curing Methods
1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and
maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7 days after
placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows:
a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous
sprinkling, or covering with saturated burlap. Begin wet cure as soon as
concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure 24 hours a day.
b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Securely
anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping
air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs.
c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface except for
surfaces to receive additional concrete. The curing compound shall NOT be
placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed, where
concrete sealers or surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish
requires an integral floor product. The curing compound shall be applied as
soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is
visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be
absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
03720-030-01
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-15
2. Specified applications of curing methods:
a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only.
b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water curing, sheet
material curing, or liquid membrane curing.
c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water cunng or liquid
membrane curing.
d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete, Coatings, Grout,
or Other Material that Requires Bond to the substrate: Water curing.
e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7 days. Water
cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or liquid membrane cured if
forms are removed before 7 days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls
or columns shall be water cured for 7 days or until the next placement of
concrete is made.
f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured.
C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to prevent
checking and crazing.
D. Cold Weather Concreting:
1. "Cold weather" is defined as a period when for more than 3 successive days the
average daily outdoor temperature drops below 400 F. The average daily
temperature shall be calculated as the average of the highest and the lowest
temperature during the period from midnight to midnight.
2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional
requirements specified in this Section. Temperatures at the concrete placement
shall be recorded at 12-hour intervals (minimum).
3. Discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion shall
encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during cold weather
including the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and
temperature monitoring of the concrete. The procedures to be implemented upon
abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed.
Cold weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the
Engineer.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide continuous
warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required) for at least 350
degree-days of curing.
a. Degree-days are defined as the total number of 24-hour periods multiplied by
the weighted average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (eg: 5
days at an average 70 degrees F = 350 degree-days).
b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly
measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete
taking any measurement less than 500 F as 00 F. Divide the sum thus calculated
by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day.
5. Salt, manure, or other chemicals shall not be used for protection.
6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be terminated during
cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing has been terminated.
E. Hot Weather Concreting
1. "Hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative
humidity, and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation estimated in
accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or exceeding 0.2 lb/sqft/hr).
2. Concrete placed during hot weather shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured, and
protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R and the additional
requirements specified in this Section.
a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 900 F and every effort
shall be made to maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level.
The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties
from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints.
b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to promptly deliver the concrete to the
job site, to promptly place the concrete upon its arrival, and to provide vibration
immediately after placement.
c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plastic concrete
with sheet material.
3. Discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and procedures
proposed to be used for concrete placement and curing during hot weather periods.
Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the
Engineer.
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-17
3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be removed
before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30% of its specified design strength
nor before reaching the following number of day-degrees of curing (whichever is
longer):
TABLE 3
MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL
Forms for
Degree Days
Beams and slabs
Walls and vertical surfaces
500
100
(See definition of degree-days in Paragraph 3.05D above).
B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 60% of its specified
design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and
construction live loads.
3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and curing of concrete shall be subject to
the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of
his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours before each concrete placement. The
Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting including the preparation of
previously placed concrete, the reinforcing steel and the alignment, and the cleanliness
and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made without the inspection and
acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be taken by the Engineer (or inspector)
during the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets of
concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less
than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yd of concrete nor less than
one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or walls.
1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days and
two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fourth may be used
for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if the 28-day test
results are low.
2. When the average 28-day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls
below the specified design strength or below proportional minimum 7 -day strengths
03720-030-01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(where proper relation between 7-day and 28-day strengths have been established
by tests), proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to
achieve the required strengths.
C. The Contractor shall cooperate in the testing by allowing free access to the Work for the
selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens, affording
protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the operations, and furnishing
material and labor required for taking concrete cylinder samples. All shipping of
specimens will be paid for by the Owner. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the
Engineer.
D. Slump tests will be made in the field immediately before placing the concrete. Such
tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. If the slump is greater the
specified range, the concrete shall be rejected.
E. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on fresh concrete samples. Air content
for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be in compliance
with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric
method complying with ASTM C173. If lightweight aggregates or aggregates with high
absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used.
F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete work
such as construction joints and other locations as required for determination of concrete
quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for accepting, rejecting, or
determining the continuation of concrete work.
G. The Contractor shall cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the Work
and permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding, and such incidental equipment as may be
required. Repair all core holes. Cutting and testing the cores will be at the expense of
the Owner.
3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS
A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with
the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the Engineer shall have
the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply to the remainder of the
work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the right to require additional curing on
those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. The cost
of such additional curing shall be at the Contractor's expense. If such additional curing
does not give the strength required, as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the Engineer
shall have the right to require strengthening or replacement of those portions of the
structure which fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings
and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because
strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be entirely at the expense of
the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet strength requirements the Contractor
03720-030-01
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-]9
and Engineer shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in
compliance with Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements"
of ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this
Section.
B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified strength, the
Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores
drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the case of cores
not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in addition to other recourses, may
require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on anyone of the slabs, beams, piles,
caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Tests need not be made until
concrete has aged 60 days.
C. If the strength of test cylinders falls below 60% of the required minimum 28-day
strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced.
3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. It is the intent of this Section to require quality work including adequate forming, proper
mixture, and placement of concrete and curing so completed concrete surfaces will
require no patching.
B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall be
repaired as specified by the Engineer.
C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins and
other projections shall be removed, recesses left by the removal of form ties shall be
filled, and surface defects which do not impair structural strength shall be repaired.
Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete
to the approval of the Engineer.
D. Immediately after removing the forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as required
by Section 03100. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows:
. Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16-in brush coat of neat cement
slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste.
. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand
mixed slightly damp to the touch Gust short of "balling").
. Hammer the grout into the hole until dense and an excess of paste appears on the
surface in the form of a spiderweb.
. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing.
E. When patching exposed surfaces the same source of cement and sand as used in the
parent concrete shall be employed. Adjust color if necessary by additing proper
amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at an age of 1 to 5
days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to
03720-030-01
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IeI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash
thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter.
3.10 SCHEDULE
Table 4 lists the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths.
TABLE 4
CONCRETE SCHEDULE
Design
Strength
Class (psi)
A 2,500
B 3,000
Description
Concrete fill and duct encasement
Concrete overlay
pavements
slabs
and
C
4,000
Walls, slabs on grade, suspended
slab and beam systems, columns,
grade beams, and all other structural
concrete
D
5,000
Prestressed concrete
END OF SECTION
03720-030-0 I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03300-21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03350
CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required
and finish cast-in-place concrete surfaces as shown on the Drawings and as specified in
this Section.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
B. Cast-In-Place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
C. Grout is included in Section 03600.
D. Moisture Protection is included in Division 7.
E. Painting, toppings, and special surfaces are included in Division 9.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product
data showing materials of construction and details of installation for concrete sealer.
Confirmation that the sealer is compatible with additionally applied coatings shall also
be submitted.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time
of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Finishes
03720-030-0 I
CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-1
1. For concrete which will receive additional applied finishes or materials, the surface
finish specified is required for the proper application of the specified manufacturer's
products. Where alternate products are approved for use, determine if changes in
finishes are required and provide the proper finishes to receive these products.
2. Changes in finishes made to accommodate products different from those specified
shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. -Submit the proposed new
finishes and their construction methods to the Engineer for approval.
B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative
Upon 72 hours notification, the Contractor shall make available at no extra cost to
the Owner the services of a qualified field representative of the manufacturer of
curing compound, sealer, or hardener to instruct the user on the proper application
of the product under prevailing job conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Chemical hardener shall be Lapidolith by Sonneborn; Hornolith by A.C. Horn; Penalith
by W.R. Meadows, or equal fluosilicate-based material.
B. Concrete sealer shall be "Kure-N-Seal" by Sonneborn, Minneapolis, MN, or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FORMED SURFACES
A. Forms shall not be removed before the requirements of Section 03300 have been
satisfied.
B. Exercise care to prevent damaging edges or obliterating the lines of chamfers,
rustications, or comers when removing the forms or performing any other work adjacent
to the chamfers, rustications, or comers.
C. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete.
D. Rough-Form Finish
1. Immediately after stripping forms and before the concrete has changed color,
carefully remove all fins and projections.
2. Promptly fill holes left by tie cones and defects as specified in Section 03300.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FiNISHES
Bid Documents
03350-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Rubbed Finish
1. Immediately upon stripping forms and the before concrete has changed color,
carefully remove all fins. While the wall is still damp apply a thin coat of medium-
consistency neat cement slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide a bonding
coat within all pits, air holes, or blemishes in the parent concrete. Avoid coating
large areas with the slurry at one time.
2. Before the slurry has dried or changed color, apply a dry (almost crumbly) grout
proportioned by volume and consisting of 1 part cement to 1-1/2 parts of clean
masonry sand having a fineness modulus of approximately 2.3 and complying with
the gradation requirements of ASTM C33 for such a material. Grout shall be
uniformly applied by damp pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 in square used as
a float. Scrub grout into the pits and air holes to provide a dense mortar in all
imperfections.
3. Allow the mortar to partially harden for 1 or 2 hours depending upon the weather.
If the air is hot and dry, keep the wall damp during this period using a fine fog
spray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can be scraped from the
surface with the edge of a steel trowel without damaging the grout in the small pits
or holes, cut off all that can be removed with a trowel. (Note: Grout allowed to
remain on the wall too long will harden and will be difficult to remove.)
4. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean dry burlap to
completely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout shall remain after this
rubbing. The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is
started. Do not leave grout on surfaces overnight. Allow sufficient time for grout
to dry after it has been cut off with the trowel so it can be wiped off clean with the
burlap.
5. On the day following the repair of pits, air holes and blemishes, the walls shall
again be wiped off clean with dry, used pieces of burlap containing old hardened
mortar which will act as a mild abrasive. After this treatment, there shall be no
built-up film remaining on the parent surface. If, however, such a film is present, a
fine abrasive stone shall be used to remove all such material without breaking
through the surface film of the original concrete. Such scrubbing shall be light and
sufficient only to remove excess material without changing the texture of the
concrete.
6. A thorough wash-down with stiff bristle brushes shall follow the final bagging or
stoning operation. No extraneous materials shall remain on the surface of the wall.
The wall shall be sprayed with a fine fog spray periodically to maintain a
continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application of the repair
grout.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-3
F. Abrasive Blast Finish
1. Coordinate with Rubbed Finish application. Do not begin until Rubbed Finish
operation is complete or before the concrete has reached minimum 7 -day strength.
The Engineer may delete the Rubbed Finish application if the unfinished concrete
surface is of superior quality. Apply the abrasive blast finish only where indicated
on Drawings.
2. Prepare a sample area of a mlmmum 4-ft-high-by-16-ft wide Blast Finish as
directed by the Engineer on a portion of new wall construction which will not be
exposed in the final work. The sample area shall contain a variety of finishes
obtained with different nozzles, nozzle pressures, grit materials, and blasting
techniques for selection by the Engineer. The final accepted sample shall remain
exposed until completion of all Blast Finish operations.
3. Blast Finish operation shall meet all regulatory agency requirements. The Blast
Finish contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all required permits and/or
licenses.
4. Perform abrasive blast finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, using the
same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or area of work.
Maintain patterns or variances in depths of blast as present on the accepted sample.
5. Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation as well as equipment and
technique to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces as follows:
a. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate - 1/4-in to 3/8-in reveal.
6. Abrasive blast comers and edge of patterns carefully, using back-up boards, to
maintain uniform comer or edge line. Determine type of nozzle, nozzle pressure,
and blasting techniques required to match the Architect's samples.
7. Upon completion of the Blast Finish operation, thoroughly flush finished surfaces
with clean clear water to remove residual dust and grit. Allow to air dry until
curing of concrete is complete.
8. After the concrete has cured for a minimum of 28 days, apply a clear acrylic sealer
as directed by the manufacturer.
3.02 FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Floated Finish
1. Machine Floating
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Screed floors and slabs with straightedges to the established grades shown on
the Drawings. Immediately after final screeding, sprinkle a dry cement/sand
shake in the proportion of two sacks of Portland cement to 350 lb of coarse
natural concrete sand evenly over the surface at the rate of approximately 500 lb
/1,000 sq ft of floor. Do not sprinkle neat dry cement on the surface.
b. The Engineer may eliminate the application of the cement/sand shake if the base
slab concrete exhibits adequate fattiness and homogeneity and the need is not
indicated. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support the weight of
a power float without its digging into or disrupting the level surface, thorougWy
float the shake into the surface with a heavy revolving-disc-type power
compacting machine capable of providing a 200-lb compaction force distributed
over a 24-in-diameter disc.
c. Start floating along walls and around columns and then move systematically
across the surface leaving a matte finish.
d. The compacting machine shall be the "Kelly Power Float with Compaction
Control" as manufactured by Kelley Industries of SSP Construction Equipment
Inc., Pomona, CA or equal. Troweling machines equipped with float (shoe)
blades that are slipped over the trowel blades may be used for floating. Floating
with a troweling machine equipped with normal trowel blades will not be
permitted. The use of any floating or troweling machine which has a water
attachment for wetting the concrete surface during finishing will not be
permitted.
2. Hand Floating
a. In lieu of power floating, small areas may be compacted by hand floating. The
dry cement/sand shake previously specified shall be used unless specifically
eliminated by the Engineer. Screed the floors and slabs with straightedges to
the established grades shown on the Drawings. While the concrete is still green,
but sufficiently hardened to support a finisher and kneeboards with no more
than 1/4-in indentation, wood float to a true, even plane with no coarse
aggregate visible. Use sufficient pressure on the wood floats to bring moisture
to the surface.
3. Finishing Tolerances
a. Level floors and slabs to a tolerance of plus or minus lI8-in when checked with
a 10- ft straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. Where drains
occur, pitch floors to drains so that no low spots are left undrained. Failure to
meet either of the above requirements shall be cause for removing, grinding, or
making other corrections to floors and slabs as directed by the Engineer.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-5
B. Broom Finish
Screed slabs with straightedges to the established grades indicated on the Drawings.
When the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to maintain small surface indentations,
draw a stiff bristle broom lightly across the surface in the direction of drainage, or,
in the case of walks and stairs, perpendicular to the direction of traffic to provide a
non-slip surface.
C. Steel Trowel Finish
Finish concrete as specified in Paragraph 3.04. Then, hand steel trowel to a
perfectly smooth hard even finish free from high or low spots or other defects.
D. Concrete Sealer
1. Prepare and seal surfaces indicated on the room finish schedule to receive a sealer
as follows:
a. Finish concrete as specified in the preceding paragraphs and in accordance with
the Schedule in Paragraph 3.05 below.
b. Newly Placed Concrete: Surfaces must be sound and properly finished. The
surface is application-ready when it is damp but not wet and can no longer be
marred by walking workmen.
c. Newly-Cured Bare Concrete: Level any spots gouged out by trades. Remove
all dirt, dust, droppage, oil, grease, asphalt, and foreign matter. Cleanse with
caustics and detergents as required. Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry so that
surface is no more than damp and not wet.
d. Aged Concrete: Restore surface soundness by patching, grouting, filling cracks
and holes, etc. The surface must also be free of any dust, dirt, and other foreign
matter. Use power tools and/or strippers to remove any incompatible sealers or
coatings. Cleanse as required following the procedure indicated under cured
concrete.
e. Methods: Apply sealer so as to form a continuous uniform film by spray,
soft-bristle pushbroom, long-nap roller, or lambswool applicator. Ordinary
garden-type sprayers using neoprene hose are recommended for best results.
f. Applications: For curing only, apply the first coat evenly and uniformly as soon
as possible after final finishing at the rate of 200 to 400 sq ft per gallon. Apply
the second coat at the rate of 400 to 600 sq ft per gallon when all trades are
completed and structure is ready for occupancy.
03720-030-01
CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g. To meet guarantee and to seal and dustproof, two coats are required. For
sealing new concrete, both coats shall be applied full-strength. On aged
concrete, when renovating, dustproofing, and sealing the first coat should be
thinned 10 to 15% with reducer in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
3.03 CONCRETE RECEIVING CHEMICAL HARDENER
A. After 28 days minimum concrete cure, apply chemical hardener in three applications to
a minimum total coverage of the undiluted chemical of 100 sq ft per gallon and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed.
3.04 APPROVAL OF FINISHES
A. When finished, all concrete surfaces will be inspected by the Engineer.
B. Surfaces which in the opinion of the Engineer are unsatisfactory shall be refinished or
reworked.
C. After finishing horizontal surfaces, regardless of the finishing procedure specified, the
Contractor shall cure concrete in compliance with Section 03300 unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
3.05 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
A. Concrete shall be finished as specified either to remain as natural concrete or to receive
an additional applied finish or material under another section.
B. Concrete for the following conditions shall be finished as noted on the Drawings and as
further specified in this Section:
1. Concrete to Receive Dampproofmg: Rough-form finish. See Paragraph 3.01D
above.
2. Concrete Not Exposed to View and Not Scheduled to Receive an Additional
Applied Finish or Material: Rough-form finish. See Paragraph 3.01D above.
3. Exterior Vertical Concrete Above Grade Exposed to View: Rubbed finish. See
Paragraph 3.01E above.
4. Interior Vertical Concrete Exposed to View Except in Water Containment Areas:
Rubbed fmish. See Paragraph 3.01E above.
03720-030-01 CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-7
5. Vertical Concrete in Water Containment Areas. Rubbed finish on exposed surfaces
and extending to 2 feet below normal operating water level: Rough-form finish on
remainder of submerged areas. See Paragraphs 3.01E and 3.01D above.
6. Interior and Exterior Underside of Concrete Exposed to View: Rubbed finish. See
Paragraph 3.01E above.
7. Exterior surfaces exposed to view and indicated to have an abrasive blast finish.
See Paragraph 3.01F above.
8. Interior or Exterior Horizontal Concrete not Requiring Floor Hardener or Sealer:
Floated finish. See Paragraph 3.02A above.
9. Concrete for Exterior Walks, Interior and Exterior Stairs: Broomed finish
perpendicular to direction of traffic. See Paragraph 3.02B above.
10. Concrete Slabs On Which Process Liquids Flow or In Contact with Sludge: Steel
trowel finish. See Paragraph 3.02C above.
11. Concrete to Receive Hardener: See Paragraph 3.02D above.
12. Concrete to Receive Floor Sealer: See Paragraph 3.02E above.
13. Concrete tank bottoms to be covered with grout: See Section 03600.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-0 I
CONCRETE FINISHES
Bid Documents
03350-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and
install grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Requirement
C. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
D. Section 03350 - Concrete Finishes
E. Section 03740 - Modifications and Repair to Concrete
F. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01340, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer,
shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details
of installation for:
1. Commercially manufactured nonshrink cementitous grout. The
submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage
requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature
considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards, and Material
Safety Data Sheet.
2. Commercially manufactured non-shrink epoxy grout. The submittal
shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product
life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity
to required ASTM standards, and Material and Safety Data Sheet.
3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the
cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any
proposed admixtures, and the proposed mix of the grout.
4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include data as required for
concrete as delineated in Section 03300 and for fiber reinforcement as
delineated in Section 03200. This includes the mix design, constituent
quantities per cubic yard, and the water/cement ratio.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-1
GROUT
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-2
GROUT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Laboratory Test Reports
Submit laboratory test data as required under Section 03300 for concrete to be
used as concrete grout.
C. Certifications
Certify that commercially manufactured grout products and concrete grout
admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days
cunng.
D. Qualifications
Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 10
years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts which they
will supply.
1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED)
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM C531 - Standard Testing for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and
Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concrete
2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and
Polymer Concrete
3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early
Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures
4. ASTM ClI07 - Standard Specification for Package Dry, Hydraulic
Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
B. CRD, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard
1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for N onshrink Grout
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the
time of bid opening shall apply.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-installation Conference
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Well in advance of grouting, the Contractor shall hold a pre-installation meeting
to review the requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing, and curing
procedures for each product proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting
shall be notified of the meeting at least 10 days before its scheduled date.
B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative
A qualified field technician of the non-shrink grout manufacturer, specifically
trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the pre-installation
conference and shall be present for the initial installation of each type of non-
shrink grout. Additional services shall also be provided, as required, to correct
installation problems.
C. .Field Testing
1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the
Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall
provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods
of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards.
2. The field testing of Concrete Grout shall be as specified for concrete in
Section 03300.
1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED)
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled
with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers, and
printed instructions.
B. Store material in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Total storage time for date of manufacturer to date of installation shall be
limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time,
whichever is less.
C. Material which becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately
removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional
cost to the Owner.
D. Non-shrink cement-based grouts shall be delivered as preblended prepackaged
mixes requiring only the addition of water.
E. Non-shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as premeasured, prepackaged,
three-component systems requiring only blending as directed by the
manufacturer.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-3
GROUT
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-4
GROUT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the
production and use of the type of grout proposed for the Work.
1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)
1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED)
1.12 DEFINITIONS
Nonshrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink
in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened
state, and bonds to a clean base plate.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the
purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired.
B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to
provide standardization of appearance.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Non-shrink Cementitious Grout
1. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements
of ASTM Cll07, Grades B or C, and CRD C-621. Grouts shall be
Portland-cement based, contain a pre-proportioned blend of selected
aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only
the addition of water. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain
expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no
shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827.
a. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to
the standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika
Corp.; Set Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction
Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Euco NS by the Euclid Chemical
Co.; NBEC Grout by U.S. Grout Corp. or equal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
b. Flowable (Precision) non-shrink cementitious grout shall
conform to the standards stated above and shall be Masterflow
928 by Master Builders, Inc.; Hi Flow Grout by the Euclid
Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Group by
Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by u.S. Grout Corp., or
equal.
Non-shrink Epoxy Group
1. Non-shrink epoxy-based grout shall be a pre-proportioned, three-
component, 100% solids system consisting of epoxy resin, hardener,
and blended aggregate. It shall have compressive strength of 14,000 psi
in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and have a
maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 106 when tested in conformity
with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by Master
Builders, Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur 42
Grout Pak by Sika Corp.; High-Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid
Chemical Co., or equal.
Cement Grout
1. Cement grouts shall be mixture of one part Portland cement conforming
to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to
ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content
shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the
degree that it will allow the grout to flow.
Concrete Grout
1. Concrete grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300
except as specified in this Section. It shall be proportioned with
cement, coarse and fine aggregates, water, water reducer, and air
entraining agents to produce a mix having an average strength of 2900
psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size
shall be 3/8 in maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 in and should be
as low as practical yet still retain sufficient workability.
2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers as specified in Section 03200 shall be
added to the concrete grout mix at the rate of 1.5 lb of fibers per cubic
yard of grout. Fibers shall be added from the manufacturer's
premeasured bags and according to the manufacturer's
recommendations in a manner which will ensure complete dispersion of
the fiber bundles as single mono filaments within the concrete grout.
03600-5
GROUT
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-6
GROUT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Water
1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic
mater, or other deleterious substances.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design
strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost,
dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance, and paints; and free of all loose
material or foreign matter which may affect the bond or performance of the
grout.
C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chopping, sandblasting, or other mechanical
means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken
concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if
they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into the parent concrete.
1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be
the oil-less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil
from being blown onto the surface.
D. Remove all loose rust, oil, or other deleterious substances from metal
embedments or bottom or base plates before placing the grout.
E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and kept moist for at least 24 hours
before the placement of cementitious or cement gout. Saturation may be
achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker
hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon
completion of the 24-hour period, visible water shall be removed from the
surface before grouting. An adhesive bonding agent shall be used in lieu of
surface saturation only when approved by the Engineer for each specific
location of grout installation.
F. Epoxy-based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate.
Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting.
G. Construct grout forms or other leak proof containment as required. Forms shall
be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place, and shored to
resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement.
Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic
head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms.
H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with
the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by
shims, wedges, blocks, or other approved means. The shims, wedges, and
blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate
bond-breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Mix, apply, and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and this Section.
B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous
mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at
hand.
c. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout
between 40 and 900 F during grouting and for at least 24 hours thereafter or as
recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take
precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and grout
during the curing period.
D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as
recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the
temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 to
900 F range.
E. Install grout in a manner which will preserve the isolation between the
elements on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an
expansion or control joint.
F. Reflect all existing underlying expansIOn, control, and construction joints
through the grout.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-7
GROUT
03720-030.01
Bid Documents
03600-8
GROUT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03 INSTALLATION, CEMENT GROUTS, AND NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS
GROUTS
A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement,
sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer.
B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is
recommended. Pre-wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add a pre-
measured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the
minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the
minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the
manufacturer's maximum recommended water content.
C. Placements greater than 3 in deep shall include the addition of clean, washed
pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with
the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to
be added.
D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid segregation
or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the
material. Placement should proceed in a manner which will ensure the filling
of all space and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces.
Provide grout holes as necessary.
E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement
grouts in layers. Do no add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial
stiffening.
F. Just before the grout reaches its fmal set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a
450 angle from the lower edge of the bearing plate unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish.
G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep
grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at
least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer.
Saturate the grout surface by wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding, or other
approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the
ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until
wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished.
3.04. INSTALLATION - NON-SHRINK EPOXY GROUTS
A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do
not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper
proportions of resin, hardener, and aggregate.
B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for
special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above
900 F.
C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air.
Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full
contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as
necessary.
D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base
plate). In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the
grout thickness.
E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish.
Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the
manufacturer's recommendation.
F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water.
Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature
range for at least 24 hours after placing or longer if recommended by the
manufacturer..
3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT
A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the
surface with a broomed finish aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface
clean until concrete grout is placed.
B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt
and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water.
Flushing of debris into tanks drain lines will not be permitted.
C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours before placing the concrete
grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by soaker hoses, or by other
methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just before placing
the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the concrete
grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is place. Work the slurry over
the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8 in
thick cement paste.
D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for
surface elevation and to ensure that high and low spots are eliminated. Unless
specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper
mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-9
GROUT
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
03600-10
GROUT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast-in-place concrete.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used:
1. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations
where non-shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates
greater in area than 3 ft wide by 3 ft long and except for setting anchor
rods, anchor bolts, or reinforcing steel in concrete.
2. Flowable non-shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates
greater in area than 3 ft by 3 ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive
flowable non-shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her
option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non-shrink grout
for general purpose non-shrink cementitious grout.
3. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor
bolts, and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically
indicated to receive epoxy grout.
4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental
base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base
plates for plateforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used
when non-shrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for
grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and
girders.
5. Concrete Grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper
mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface
grade.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03740
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut,
remove, repair, or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances as
shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. Work under this Section shall also
include bonding new concrete to existing concrete.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
B. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
C. Cast-in-Place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
D. Miscellaneous Metals are included in Section 05500.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01420 the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Schedule of
Demolition and the detailed methods of demolition to be used at each location.
B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use to the
Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's installation and/or
application instructions.
C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified in this Section are proposed,
submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to the Engineer for approval
before delivery to the project.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used
with Concrete by Slant Sheer.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-1
3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used with Concrete.
4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
7. ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool.
8. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
B. Where reference is made to one ofthe above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid
opening shall apply.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered until
authorization is given by the Engineer.
B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings in
existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring and
bracing, and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures
beyond the limits necessary for the new work, to protect personnel, control dust, and prevent
damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted,
shown, or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall have a
minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products and shall have an
ongoing program of training, certifying, and technically supporting the Contractor's
personnel.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's name,
labels, product identification, and batch numbers.
B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
MODiFICATION AND REPAiR TO CONCRETE
03740-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations.
B. Epoxy Bonding Agent
1. General
a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two-component, solvent-free, asbestos-free
moisture-insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened
concrete complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional
requirements specified in this Section.
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at 28 days.
2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14 days.
3. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 6,300 psi minimum at
14 days.
4. Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14 days.
5. Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1% maximum at 14 days.
6. Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 psi minimum at 14
days moist cure.
7. Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test.
8. Color: Gray.
3. Approved manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur 32,
Hi-Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive Liquid (LPL), or equal.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-3
C. Epoxy Paste
1. General
a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two-component, solvent-free, asbestos free, moisture-
insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond dissimilar materials to concrete such as
setting railing posts, dowels, anchor bolts, and all-threads into hardened concrete and
shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C88l, Type I, Grade 3 and the
additional requirements specified in this Section. It may also be used to patch
existing surfaces where the glue line is 1/8-in or less..
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material:
1. Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days.
2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at
Break - 0.3% minimum.
3. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 3,700 psi minimum at
14 days.
4. Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 days.
5. Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0% maximum at 7 days.
6. Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist cure.
7. Color: Concrete grey.
3. Approved manufacturers include:
a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 31;
Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438, or equal.
b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 32; Master Builders, Inc.,
Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438, or equal.
D. Non-Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout
and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600 GROUT.
E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HV A adhesive Anchoring System
by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall consist of a sealed glass capsule
containing premeasured amounts of a polyester or vinylester resin quartz sand aggregate and a
hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent
G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive
1. General
a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two-component, solvent-free, moisture-
insensitive epoxy resin material suitable for crack grouting by injection or gravity
feed. It shall be formulated for the specific size of the opening or crack being
injected.
b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be treated for potable use
that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive injection system shall be coated with an
acceptable epoxy coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable water.
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material:
1. Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days.
2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at
Break - 2 to 5%.
3. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 12,000 psi minimum at
14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi minimum at 14 days (injection)
4. Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days.
5. Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5% maximum at 7 days.
6. Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 2,000 psi at 14 days dry
plus 12 days moist.
7. Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test.
3. Approved manufacturers include:
a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-Mod;
Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concressive 1380, or equal.
b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-Mod LV;
Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concressive 1468, or equal.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate, or otherwise modify parts of the existing structures or
appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified in this Section, or necessary to permit
completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements, sealants, etc, are specified in
respective Sections. All work shall comply with other requirements of this Section and as
shown on the Drawings.
B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed, and applied in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or control joint the
repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between components on either side of the joint.
D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall stop if rebar is
encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location shall be relocated to avoid rebar.
Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar
locations shall be identified before drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations
may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference.
3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL
A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings or directed by
the Engineer shall be removed by line drilling at limits followed by chipping or
jack-hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete
in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and
existing in-place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be removed
shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings or after obtaining written approval from the
Engineer.
B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no new material is
to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface treatment of epoxy paste shall be
applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 114-in.
C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will be
exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the edge of concrete
removal shall be a l-in-deep saw cut on each exposed surface of the existing concrete.
D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by approved means
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional repairs to
existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by such other methods as may
be appropriate.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas requmng
patching, repairs, or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified in this Section, or as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting materials
from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. sandblasting, grinding, etc, as approved by the
Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than I/2-in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones
need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent
concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection.
C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all contaminants,
rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is
exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum
of I/2-in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation.
D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be incorporated in new
concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose material and products of
corrosion before proceeding with the repair. It shall be cut, bent, or lapped to new reinforcing
as shown on the Drawings and provided with I-in minimum cover all around.
E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used where called for
on the Drawings, specified in this Section, or as directed by the Engineer.
1. Method A: After the concrete surface at the connection has been roughened and cleaned,
thoroughly moisten the surface with water. Brush on a lII6-in layer of cement and water
mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after applying the cement paste,
place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings.
2. Method B: After the concrete surface has been roughened and cleaned, apply an epoxy
bonding agent at the connection surface. The field preparation and application of the
epoxy bonding agent shall comply strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Place new concrete or grout mixture to the limits shown on the Drawings within the time
constraints recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond.
3. Method C: Drill a hole I/4-in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole shall be
blown clear of loose particles and dust just before installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall
first be filled with [epoxy paste], then dowels/bolts shall be buttered with paste and
inserted by tapping. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be
drilled and set to a depth of lObar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled and set to a
depth of 15 bar diameters. If not noted on the Drawings, the Engineer will provide
details regarding the size and spacing of dowels.
4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C.
03720-030-01 MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
Bid Documents
03740-7
5. Method E: The capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by drilling holes to
the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear strengths of the anchor material
being used. The anchor bolts system shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar,
or other embedment item shall be tipped with a double 450 chamfered point, securely
fastened into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the capsule
filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical, and overhead positions.
3.04 CRACK REPAIR
A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant into cracks
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16-in thick they
shall be pressure injected.
B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant through
valves sealed to the surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and
install all miscellaneous metal complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in
this Section.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Formwork is included in Section 03100.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01300 the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop
drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation
for shop drawings, showing sizes of members, method of assembly, anchorage and
connection to other members.
B. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer during construction.
C. Design Data
1. Submit calculations or test data demonstrating that the railings will resist the loads
specified in the 2001 Florida Building Code at the post spacing provided.
2. Submit manufacturer's load and deflection tables for grating.
D. Submit a certified copy of mill test reports on each aluminum proposed for use showing
the physical properties and chemical analysis.
E. Certificates
1. Submit certification that the railing system is III compliance with OSHA
requirements and the 2001 Florida Building Code.
2. Certify that welders have been qualified under A WS within the previous 12 months
to perform the welds required under this Section.
03720-030-01 MISCELLANEI0US METAL
Bid Documents
05500-1
03720-030-01
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Aluminum Association (AA)
I. AA M31C22A41
a. M31: Mechanical Finish, Fine Satin
b. C22: Finish, Medium Matte
c. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
I. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
4. ASTM AI08 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished,
Standard Quality.
5. ASTM AI23 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
6. ASTM AI53 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
7. ASTM AI67 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
8. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Steel Bars and Shapes.
9. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 Psi
Tensile Strength.
10. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/1 05 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
II. ASTM A366 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled,
Commercial Quality.
Bid Documents
05500-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
13. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
14. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
15. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-
Rolled, Structural Quality.
16. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
17. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.
18. ASTM B429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural
Pipe and Tube.
C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
D. American Welding Society (A WS)
1. A WS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code Steel.
2. AWS Dl.2 - Structural Welding Code Aluminum.
E. Federal Specifications
1. FS-FF-B-575C - Bolts, Hexagonal and Square
F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
G. 2001 Florida Building Code. (FBC)
H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time
of bid opening shall apply.
03720-030-01
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-3
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other
Sections. The Contractor shall verify at the site the dimensions and work of other trades
adjoining items of work in this Section before fabricating and installing items specified
in this Section.
B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built
into the work of other Sections.
C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable
A WS welding code. Welding of steel shall conform to A WS D1.1 and welding of
aluminum shall conform to A WS D 1.2.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be
checked before installation.
B. Repair items which have become damage or corroded to the satisfaction of the Engineer
before incorporating them into the work.
1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS
A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site before fabrication of items to verify or
supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.
B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide
standardization for appearance, maintenance, and manufacturer's service.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the
following standards:
1. Structural Steel
ASTM A36
03720-030-01
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Structural Steel Tubing
ASTM A500, Grade B
3. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Type
E or S, Grade B Schedule 40. Use
standard malleable iron fittings,
galvanized for exterior work
4. Steel Sheets
5. Gray Iron Castings
6. Ductile Iron Castings
7. Aluminum Extruded Pipe
8. Aluminum Extruded Shapes
9. Aluminum Sheet and Plate
ASTM A366
ASTM A48, Class 35
ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12
ASTM B429, Alloy 6063 T6
ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6
ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6
10. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets, and Structural Shapes
a. Exterior, Submerged, or Industrial Use ASTM A167, Type 316
(Type 316L for welded)
b. Interior and Architectural Use ASTM A167, Type 304
11. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers ASTM A276, Type 316
12. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A307, Grade A (hot dip
galvanized nuts and washers where
noted)
13. High-Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and washers ASTM A325 (mechanically
galvanized per ASTM B695, Class
50, where noted)
a. Elevated Temperature Exposure Type I
b. General Application Type I or Type II
14. Galvanizing
ASTM A123, Zn w/0.5%
minimum Ni
03720-030-0 I
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-5
15. Galvanizing, hardware
ASTM A153, Zn w/0.5%
minimum Ni
2.03 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES
A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted.
B. Unless otherwise noted bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel
machine bolts, bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be galvanized
steel or stainless steel machine bolts, and bolts for the connection of aluminum or
stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts.
C. Unless otherwise noted expansion anchors shall be zinc-plated carbon-steel wedge-type
anchors complete with nuts and washers. Type 316 stainless steel wedge-type anchors
shall be used where they will be submerged or exposed to the weather or where stainless
steel wedge-type anchors are required. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not
noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion
sleeve portion of the bolt at least 1 in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion
anchors shall be Hilti, Kwick-bolt II; ITW Ramset; Redhead trubolt, or equal.
D. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be a two-part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring
system. Capsules shall contain premeasured amounts of polyester or vinyl ester resin,
aggregate, and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Stud
assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive
capsule anchors shall be Hilti, HV A Adhesive Anchor; Molly, Parabond; Rawlplug,
Rawl Chern-Stud, or equal.
E. Automatic end welded headed anchor studs shall be flux-ended studs made from cold
drawn steel, ASTM A108 Grades C-I01O through C-1020. Headed anchor studs shall
be Nelson, H4L Headed Concrete Anchors, or equal.
F. Machine bolts and nuts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-575C. Bolts and
nuts shall be hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, and related appurtenances
shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
G. Toggle bolts shall be Hilti, Toggler Bolt, or equal.
2.04 METAL GRATING
A. Grating shall have rectangular, 3/16-in-thick bearing bars spaced 1-3/16-in on center
with cross bars spaced at 4 in on center. All grating panels shall be banded with a bar
the same size as the bearing bars.
03720-030-01
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Grating shall not exceed the fabricator's maximum recommended span and shall
meet or exceed the following load and deflection criteria for the maximum span
length at the opening being covered by the grating:
a. The grating shall produce a deflection of 1/360 of the span or less under a
uniform live load of 100 lb/sq ft on the maximum span.
b. The grating shall produce a deflection of 1/360 of the span or less under a
concentrated live load of 300 lb applied at the mid point of the maximum span.
2. Openings 2 in or greater in diameter/dimension and grating edges shall be banded
with a bar of the same depth and thickness as the bearing bars. Cut bearing bars or
cross bars shall be welded to the banding bar.
3. Provide trench grating with symmetrical cross bar arrangement.
4. Grating clamps, nuts, bolts, washers, and other fastening devices for grating and
grating supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All grating shall be anchored to
the supporting system using saddle clips.
B. Aluminum grating material shall be aluminum alloy 6063- T6 with a [mill] [anodized]
finish. Cross bars shall be attached to the bearing bars with interlocked swaged joints.
The grating shall be Type BS by IKG Borden, Houston, TX; Type 19 SG-4 by Ohio
Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH; Type 19S4 by Seidelhuber Metal Products, San Carlos, CA,
or equal.
C. Metal frames and supports for grating shall be of the same material as the grating unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Where aluminum supports are used, they shall be
fabricated from aluminum alloy 6061- T6.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply
defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and be free from
defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall
be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete
each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.
B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the
stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting
and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads
concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or
intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and
03720-030-01
MISCELLANElOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-7
smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for
temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.
C. Miscellaneous steel items shall include beams, angles, lintels, metal stairs, support
brackets, base plates for other than structural steel or equipment, closure angles, bridge
crane rails, monorail hoist beams, holddown straps and lugs, door frames, splice plates,
sub framing at roof openings, and any other miscellaneous steel called for on the
Drawings and not otherwise specified.
D. Structural steel angle and channel door frames shall be shop coated with primer. Frames
shall be fabricated with not fewer than three anchors on each jamb.
E. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves, lifting attachments, and other functions shall be Schedule
40 pipe unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Wall and floor sleeves of steel pipe
shall have welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length.
F. Lintels, relief angles, or other steel supporting masonry or embedded in masonry shall
be shop coated with primer.
G. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned by effective means of all loose mill
scale, rust and foreign matter and shall be given one shop coat of primer compatible
with the finish coat after fabrication but before shipment. Paint shall be omitted within
3 inches of proposed field welds. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be
thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open spaces.
H. Galvanizing where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication. Coating
shall be not less than 2 oz/sq ft of surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall install all items except those to be embedded in concrete or other
masonry which shall be installed under Division 3 and Division 4, respectively. Items
to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in
accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not be
permitted.
B. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up immediately after erection. Areas left
unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding.
C. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shall be
cleaned and repaired after installation. The damage area shall be thoroughly cleaned by
03720-030-01
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating removed
before painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with two coats of zinc oxide-zinc
dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military Specifications MIL-P-15145. The
paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle in the ratio of one part zinc
oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight.
D. Specialty products shall be installed III accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Expansion bolts shall be checked for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial
installation.
F. Install adhesive capsule anchors using the manufacture's recommended drive units and
adapters and in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Headed anchor studs shall be welded in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. All railings shall be erected to line and plumb.
1. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive
a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions before installation.
J. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of zinc-chromate
primer followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar
metal.
K. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved alkali-
resistant paint to the masonry or concrete.
L. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint
to the wood.
M. Between aluminum grating, aluminum stair treads, or aluminum handrail brackets and
steel supports, insert 1I4-in-thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A
durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
MISCELLANEIOUS METAL
Bid Documents
05500-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prOVISIOns of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for surface preparation and field painting of the
following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the
schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Engineer will select from the paint
manufacturer's standard colors and finishes available.
C. Do not paint pre-finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces,
operating parts, and labels. Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL),
Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
2.
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when
measured at an 85-degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
3.
4.
5.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING
09900 - 1
6. Full gloss refers to a high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following:
A. Product data for each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate
each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and
application. IdentifY each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and
general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide the manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying
each coating material proposed for use.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this
Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each
coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original, unopened
packages and containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label and the following
information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 450 F. Maintain containers used in storage in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
03720-030-01 PAINTiNG
Bid Documents 09900 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Protect from freezing.
2. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
3. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
4. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected
from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 900 F.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 950 F.
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%;
or at temperatures less than 50 F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unless otherwise specified, paint materials and systems specified in this Section are
those of Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore. Subject to compliance with
requirements, equivalent materials and systems by one of the following
manufacturers are also acceptable:
1. Devoe and Reynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. Porter Paints.
2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the
various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying the
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Engineer.
03720-030-01 PAINTING
Bid Documents 09900 - 3
2.03 LEAD CONTENT
A. The paint shall comply with the latest requirements of the Federal Government for
maximum allowable lead content. Such compliance shall be stated on the MSDS and
container clearly identiJYing the product.
2.04 VOC COMPLIANCE
A. The paint shall comply with the latest requirements of Federal, State of Florida, City,
or Local Government requirements for the maximum allowable VOC content at the
time of purchase. Such compliance shall be stated on the MSDS and the paint
container clearly identiJYing the product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. With the Applicator present, the Contractor shall examine substrates, areas, and
conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint
application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces
and conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided tensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of fInish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
NotiJY the Engineer about anticipated problems using the materials specifIed over
substrates primed by others.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fIxtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. Remove
loose paint from wall and ceiling surfaces, resurface if necessary before cleaning.
2. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items
removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.
03720-030-01 PAINTING
Bid Documents 09900 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Remove loose paint, clean and prepare surfaces to be painted
on walls and ceilings according to the manufacturer's written instructions for each
particular substrate condition and as specified.
2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime.
3. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, and
cement plaster surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Pressure clean cement plaster, concrete, and
masonry surfaces with a mildewcide. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If
hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical
methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
b. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do
not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in the
manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy
coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
5. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the
Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum-based
solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
PAINTING
09900 - 5
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to the
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir
as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If
necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedule.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, convector covers, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces
behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non-specular black paint where
visible through registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior
faces.
9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply the first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,
pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation
and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat
has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to
produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup
painted.
2.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
P AINTlNG
09900 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the fmal coat of paint,
apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds,
and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do
not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform
or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another
coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to the manufacturer's written instructions. All metal surfaces
shall be sprayed except that piping, conduit, and ductwork may be brushed or rolled.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than the
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of
the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
E.
Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to the following:
1. Exposed conduit and fittings.
2. Exterior switchgear.
3. Electrical, mechanical storage rooms, plumbing chase.
F.
Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure
complete coverage with pores filled.
G.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or
fmished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears to
ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
PAINTING
09900 - 7
I. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface
film of even luster. Provide a finish free oflaps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity,
brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide semi-gloss finish for final coats where indicated.
J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fme texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other
surface imperfections.
K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and
as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1.
The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample
the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will
be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative material analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
1. Accelerated yellowness.
J. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
1. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.
2.
3.
The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show
material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The
Contractor shall remove non-complying paint from the site, pay for testing, and
repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the
Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted
surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are
incompatible.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING
09900 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.05 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by Engineer.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing
painting operations.
3. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCA Pl.
3.07 PAINT SCHEDULE (INTERIOR SURFACES)
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
Note that Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore numbers are used as basis of
design only.
1. Interior Gypsum Drywall; Epoxy Paint, Semi-Gloss at walls.
a. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Epoxy Paint.
1) PTl - Sherwin Williams - SW7071 Gray Screen
2. Interior Concrete Surface; Semi-Gloss Epoxy Paint
a. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Epoxy Paint.
1) PTl - Sherwin Williams - SW7071 Gray Screen
3. Exterior and Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, and Window Frames:
Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish.
a. Prime Coat: Spot Prime Scratched or Abraded Areas Only - Rust
Inhibitive Alkyd Metal Primer.
b. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
1) PT2 - Benjamin Moore - Color #1680.
4. Interior Exposed Steel: High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel
a. Primer: Metal Primer
b. First coat: Gloss Alkyd Enamel
03720-030-01 PAINTING
Bid Documents 09900 - 9
3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE (Exterior Surfaces)
A. Provide products complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI
Approved Products List."
B. Exterior CMU to receive clear water repellant: See Specification Section 07190
C. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler (MPI approved product
#4).
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat (MPI approved
product #10).
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) (MPI approved product #10).
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams.
b. Benjamin Moore.
c. Devoe.
d. Porter Paints.
D. Steel Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.ID.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer (MPI approved
product #79).
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat (MPI
approved product #97).
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss) (MPI approved product
#94).
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams.
b. Benjamin Moore.
c. Devoe.
d. Porter Paints.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B.
a.
Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer (MPI approved
product #26).
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING
09900 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat (MPI
approved product #94).
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss) (MPI approved product
#94).
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams.
b. Benjamin Moore.
c. Devoe.
d. Porter Paints.
F.
Stucco Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.1 A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat (MPI approved product
#10).
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat (MPI approved
product #10).
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) (MPI approved product #10).
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams.
b. Benjamin Moore.
c. Devoe.
d. Porter Paints.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900 - 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09901
PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes materials and application of painting and coating systems
for the following surfaces associated with the process equipment, piping, valves,
chemical systems, and ancillary process items:
1. Submerged metal.
2. Exposed metal.
3. Buried metal.
4. Concrete and masonry.
5. PVC and CPVc.
6. Metals in contact with concrete.
B. Refer to Section 09902 for pipe and equipment paint colors and paint systems.
C. This section does not include architectural and structural cast-in-place concrete
coatings and coatings for standard building construction and for standard building
mechanical items such as plumbing and HV AC. Refer to Section 03180 for
chemical-resistant coatings for the interior of the cast-in-place concrete chemical
bulk storage tank containment areas.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The Specification Sections listed below are an integral part of this Equipment Specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these Sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting
C. Section 15075 - Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-1
A. Shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340, and the
following.
B. Manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information:
1. Percent solids by volume.
2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thickness per coat for
prime, intermediate, and finish coats.
3. Recommended surface preparation.
4. Recommended thinners.
5. Statement verifying that the specified prime coat is recommended by the
manufacturer for use with the specified intermediate and finish coats.
6. Application instructions including recommended equipment and
temperature limitations.
7. Curing requirements and instructions.
C. Color swatches.
D. Certificate identifying the type and gradation of abrasives used for surface
preparation.
E. Material safety data sheets for each coating.
F. Current ANSIINSF 61 listing for each coating to be used in contact or subject to
contact with potable water as required in this Section.
G. Documentation showing that the applicator has been certified or approved by the
coating manufacturers to apply the coating systems.
H. Documentation demonstrating the credentials of the NACE-certified coatings
inspector .
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 PAINTING AND COATING SYSTEMS
The following index lists the various painting and coating systems by service and generic type:
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Paint Coatings System Index
No. Title Generic Coating
Submer!!ed Metal Coating Systems
1. Submerged Metal, Raw Water (Nonpotable) or Raw Epoxy
Sewage
6. Submerged Metal, Raw Sewage or Grit Slurries Epoxy resin/ceramic
7. Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water Epoxy
Exposed Metal Coating Systems
10. Exposed Metal, Atmospheric or Corrosive High-build epoxy (two-coat
Environment system) with polyurethane
topcoat
13. Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment Epoxy with urethane topcoat
18. Exposed Metal, Organic Zinc Primer for Shop Organic zinc
Coating and Field Touch-Up
Buried Metal Coating Systems
21. Buried Metal Epoxy
24. Buried Metal Corrosion-resisting grease
25. Buried Metal Piping and Tubing Coal-tar tape wrap
Concrete and Masonry Coating Systems
35. Submerged or Intermittently Submerged Concrete Epoxy
and Masonry, Potable Water
PVC, CPVC, and FRP Coating Systems
41. PVC, CPVC, and FRP, Ultraviolet Exposure Polyurethane
42. PVC, CPVC, and FRP, Ultraviolet Exposure Acrylic latex
Coating Systems for Nonferrous Metals
51. Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Bituminous
Steel
52. Exposed Metal, Galvanized Steel, and Aluminum Synthetic resin
54. Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Epoxy
Steel
These systems are specified in detail in the following paragraphs. For each coating the
required surface preparation, prime coat, intermediate coat (if required), topcoat, and
coating thicknesses are described. Mil thicknesses shown are minimum dry-film
thicknesses.
A. Submerged Metal Coating Systems
1. System No. I-Submerged Metal-Raw Water (Nonpotable) or Raw
Sewage:
a.
Type: Epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 80%.
b.
Service Conditions: For use with metal pipes or structures (such as
scum troughs, sluice gates, or piping) alternately submerged in raw
sewage or raw water (nonpotable) and exposed to a moist saturated
hydrogen sulfide atmosphere, as in raw sewage wet wells.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTiNG AND COATiNG-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-3
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
Minimum temperature resistance of the coating shall be 1400F for
moist heat conditions.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0.
d. Prime Coat: ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, 8 mils; Tnemec 104-1211,
8 mils; Carboline Carboguard 691, 5-8 mils; or equal.
e. Finish Coat: ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, 8 mils; Tnemec 104-
AB05, 8 mils; Carboline Carboguard 691,5-8 mils; or equal.
2.
System No.6-Submerged Metal, Raw Sewage or Grit Slurries:
a. Type: Two-component epoxy resin/ceramic having a 100%
volume solids and having the following characteristics:
Tensile shear adhesion (ASTM D 1002): 2,500 psi (min)
Shore D hardness (minimum): 85
Abrasion resistance (ASTM 4060): 0.8 mg (max) loss per 1,000 cycles
b. Service Conditions: For use as a lining for pump volutes, pump
impellers, piping, valves, and heat exchanger tubes, subject to
severe abrasion service.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0.
d. Coating System: Apply two coats (of two different colors) to a
minimum thickness of 10 mils per coat. Minimum total coating
thickness shall be 20 mils. Product: THORTEX Cerami-Tech C.R.
as applied by Western Industrial Technology, Inc., Fullerton,
California, or Paragon Industries, Horsham, Pennsylvania; Belzona
1341; or equal.
3.
System No.7-Submerged Metal, Potable Water:
a. Type: ANSVNSF 61 listed Epoxy
b. Service Conditions: For use with structures, valves, pIpmg, or
equipment immersed or intermittently immersed in potable water.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0.
d. Coating System: Apply the manufacturer's recommended number
of coats to attain the specified minimum coating thickness and
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
meet the allowable thickness listed for the product in the
ANSIINSF 61 listing. Products: Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Tnemec
N140 or 100, Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80, PPG
AQUAPON@ L T NSF Low Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-172,
Carboline Carboguard 891, Ameron 395, or equal; minimum DFT
16 mils total. Color of topcoat: white. Each coat shall be a
different color from the one preceding it.
B.
Exposed Metal Coating Systems
1. System No.1 O--Exposed Metal, Atmospheric, or Corrosive Environment:
a. Type: High-build epoxy intermediate coat having a minimum
volume solids of 60%, with an inorganic zinc prime coat and a
pigmented polyurethane fInish coat having a minimum volume
solids of 52%.
b. Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pipes
subjected to atmospheric conditions, water condensation; chemical
fumes, such as hydrogen sulfIde; salt spray; and chemical contact.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0.
d. Prime Coat: Self-curing, two-component inorganic zinc-rich
coating recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating with a
high-build epoxy fInish coat. Minimum zinc content shall be 12
pounds per gallon. Apply to a thickness of 3 mils. Products:
Tnemec 90-96, ICI Devoe Catha-Coat 304 or 304V, Ameron 9HS,
Carboline Carbo zinc 11 HS, Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad II Plus,
PPG METALHIDE@ 28 Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer 97-672, or
equal.
e. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec 104, ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS,
Ameron 385, Carboline Carbo guard 890, Sherwin- Williams
Macropoxy 646 B58-600, PPG PITT -GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust
Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal; 5 mils.
f. Finish Coat: Two-component pigmented acrylic or aliphatic
polyurethane recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating a
high-build epoxy coating. Apply to a thickness of at least 2 mils.
Products: Tnemec Series 1075, ICI Devoe Devthane 379, Ameron
450 HS, Carboline 133HB, Sherwin- Williams Hi-Solids
Polyurethane B65-300, PPG PITTHANE@ Ultra Gloss Urethane
Enamel 95-812 Series, or equal.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-5
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
2.
System No. 13-Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment:
a. Type: High-build epoxy prime coat with a pigmented high-build
aliphatic or acrylic polyurethane finish coat.
b. Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pipes
subjected to water condensation, chemical fumes such as hydrogen
sulfide, salt spray, and chemical contact.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-IO.
d. Prime Coat: Two-component high-build epoxy. Apply to a
thickness of 8 mils. Products: Ameron 400, ICI Devoe 235,
Tnemec 104, Carboline Carbo guard 890, Sherwin- Williams
Macropoxy 646 B58-600, PPG PITT-GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust
Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal.
e. Finish Coat: Two-component pigmented high-build polyurethane.
Apply one or more coats to a total thickness of 5 mils. Products:
Ameron "Amershield," ICI Devoe Devthane 359, Tnemec Series
1075, Carboline Carbothane 133 HB, Sherwin-Williams Hi-Solids
Polyurethane B65-300 series, PPG PITTHANE@ Ultra Gloss
Urethane Enamel 95-812 Series, or equal.
3.
System No. 18-0rganic Zinc Primer for Shop Coating and Field Touch-
Up:
a. Type: Organic zinc primer having a minimum zinc content of 14
pounds per gallon.
b. Service Conditions: For use as a shop-applied primer or field
touch-up primer over inorganic zinc prime coatings on exposed
metal.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0.
d. Coating: Coating shall be of the two- or three-component
converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or urethane type. Products:
Tnemec 90-97, Ameron 68HS, ICI Devoe 313, Carboline
Carbozinc 859, Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad III HS, PPG
Durethane™ MCZ 97-679, or equal; applied to a minimum dry-
film thickness of 3 mils. Organic zinc primer shall be
manufactured by the prime coat manufacturer.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Buried Metal Coating Systems
1. System No. 21-Buried Metal:
a. Type: High solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having a minimum
volume solids of 80% (ASTM D 2697).
b. Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as valves, flanges, bolts,
nuts, structural steel, and fittings.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0.
d. Coating System: Apply three or more coats of Ameron 400,
Tnemec 104 HS or 80, ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Carboline
890L T, Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80 series, or equal;
30 mils total (Carboline system - 18 mils total). Maximum
thickness of an individual coating shall not exceed the
manufacturer's recommendation.
2. System No. 24--Buried Metal:
a. Type: Corrosion-resisting grease.
b. Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as bolts, bolt threads, tie
rods, and nuts.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-3 or SP-6.
d. Coating: NO-OX-ID GG-2 as manufactured by Sanchem, Inc.
Apply to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch.
3. System No. 25-Buried Metal Piping and Tubing:
a. Type: Cold-applied coal-tar tape, hot-applied coal-tar tape.
b. Service Conditions: Buried ferrous and nonferrous piping and
tubing.
c. Coat with one of the following systems:
(1) Wrap with cold-applied coal-tar tape conforming to
A WW A C209. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 35
mils. Apply tape with manufacturer's prime coat. Tape
shall be Tapecoat CT, Protecto- Wrap 200, or equal.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-7
D.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
(2) Wrap with hot-applied coal-tar tape conforming to A WW A
C203, Section 4.6. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 50
mils. Apply tape with manufacturer's recommended prime
coat. Tape shall be Tapecoat 20, Protecto-Wrap 110, or
equal.
d. Use chloride-free primers with the above coatings when applying
to stainless steel piping or tubing.
e. Coat field joints of buried piping that has a shop-applied coating
with primer and tape conforming to A WW A C209. Use Type 1
tape of 35-mil thickness. Products: Protection Engineering Co.
Protectowrap 200 GT, Tapecoat CTI0/40W, Polyken 930-35, or
equal.
f. Perform electrical inspection of shop and field coating III
accordance with Section 5 of A WW A C209.
g. Install buried pipes with wrapped coatings by extending the
wrapping to the first joint after entering a building, penetrating a
slab, or 6 inches above finished grade. Wrap joints spirally with a
minimum overlap of 50% of the tape width.
Concrete and Masonry Coating Systems
1. System No. 35-Submerged or Intermittently Submerged Concrete and
Masonry, Potable Water:
a. Type: ANSIINSF 61 listed Polyamide epoxy.
b. Service Conditions: Concrete in contact with potable water or
subject to contact with potable water or as a lining for potable
water concrete storage tanks.
c. Surface Preparation: In accordance with Part 3.04.
d. Fill masonry surfaces and concrete surfaces that have pits, pockets,
and holes following surface preparation with an epoxy masonry
filler having a mimimum solids volume of 60%. Apply one coat to
fill voids, pores, and cracks. Apply according to the
manufacturer's instructions. Products: Tnemec 54-660, ICI Devoe
Devran 265 BHF, Carboline Sanitile 600, Sentry 610, Sherwin-
Williams Kern Cati-Coat HS B42 W400 series, or equal.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
e. Prime Coat: Tnemec Series N140-AA90 Pota-Pox Plus, ICI Devoe
Bar-Rust 233H, Carboline Carboguard 891 (white), Sherwin-
Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80 series (white), PPG AQUAPON@
LT NSF Low Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-172 (white), or
equal at 4 to 6 mils.
f. First Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series N140-1255 Pota-Pox Plus
(beige), ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H (buff), Carboline Carbo guard
891 (buff), Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80 series (blue),
PPG AQUAPON@ L T NSF Low Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-
173 (gray), or equal at 4 to 6 mils.
g. Second Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series N140-AA90 Pota-Pox
Plus (white), ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H (white), Carboline
Carboguard 891 (white), Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80
series (white), PPG AQUAPON@ LT NSF Low Temperature
Epoxy Coatings 95-172 (white), or equal at 4 to 6 mils.
h. Third Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series N140-1255 Pota-Pox Plus
(beige), ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H (buff), Sherwin-Williams Tank
Clad HS B62-80 series (blue), PPG AQUAPON@ LT NSF Low
Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-173 (gray), or equal at 4 to 6
mils.
1. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series N140-AA90 Pota-Pox Plus (white),
ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H (white), Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad
HS B62-80 series (white), PPG AQUAPON@ LT NSF Low
Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-172 (white), or equal at 4 to 6
mils.
J. Total system thickness of prime, intermediate, and finish coats
shall be 16 to 24 mils.
PVC and CPVC Coating System
1. System No. 41-PVC and CPVC, Ultraviolet Exposure:
a. Type: Epoxy primer with a minimum volume solids of 54% and a
pigmented polyurethane enamel having a minimum volume solids
of 52%.
b. Service Conditions: PVC or CPVC exposed to sunlight.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-9
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-l. Then lightly abrade the surface
with medium-grain sandpaper.
d. Prime Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline II, Ameron
385, ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy
646 B58 series, Carboline Carboguard 888, PPG PITT -GUARD@
Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal.
Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 4 mils.
e. Finish Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series 1075, International
Interthane 990HS, Ameron 450 HS, ICI Devoe Devran 379,
Carboline Carbothane 133HB or 134HB, Sherwin-Williams Hi-
Solids Polyurethane B65-300 series, PPG PITTHANE@ Ultra
Gloss Urethane Enamel 95-812 Series, or equal. Apply to a
minimum dry-film thickness of3 mils.
2. System No. 42-PVC and CPVC, Ultraviolet Exposure:
a. Type: Acrylic latex primer and topcoats with a minimum volume
solids of 35%.
b. Service Conditions: PVC or CPVC or FRP exposed to sunlight.
c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-l. Then lightly abrade the surface
with medium-grain sandpaper.
d. Prime Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series 28, Ameron 148,
Carboline Carbocrylic 3358, PPG PITT-TECH@ Int/Ext Industrial
DTM PrimerIFinish Enamel 90-712 Series, or equal. Apply to a
minimum dry-film thickness of2 mils.
e. Finish Coat: Two coats of Tnemec Series 28, Ameron 220,
Carboline Carbocrylic 3359, two coats of PPG PITT-TECH@
Int/Ext High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel 90-374 Series, or
equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 2 mils each.
Coating Systems for Nonferrous Metals
1. System No. 51-Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel:
Type: Bituminous paint having a minimum volume solids of 68% coal-tar-
pitch based.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
a. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs,
structural members or aluminum fabrications, in contact with
concrete or carbon steel with this system.
b. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam clean in accordance with
SSPC SP-l; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast.
c. Prime Coat: Apply synthetic resin or epoxy primer to metal surface
before finish coats. Products: International Intervinux
VT A528/529, or equal. No primer required for Carboline or
Tnemec.
d.
Finish Coat: Carboline Bitumastic 50,
International Intertuf 100, or equal. Apply
minimum dry-film thickness of 12 mils each.
Tnemec 46-465,
two coats to a
2.
System No. 52-Exposed Metal, Galvanized Steel and Aluminum:
a. Type: Synthetic resin or epoxy primer.
b. Service Conditions: Coat galvanized steel and aluminum and
copper surfaces with this system before applying topcoat.
c. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Surfaces shall be flat with
no protrusions. Then do the following:
(1) Remove high spots and tears in the galvanizing with hand
and power grinders. Comply with ASTM D 6386,
paragraph 5.2.1. Do not remove the galvanized coating
below the specified thickness.
(2) Solvent clean galvanized surfaces according to ASTM D
6386, paragraph 5.3.2.
(3) Sweep blast according to ASTM D 6386, paragraph 5.4.1.
Use one of the abrasive materials described in ASTM D
6386, paragraph 5.4.1. Surface preparation for weathered
and partially weathered galvanized steel shall be III
accordance with ASTM D 6386, paragraphs 6 and 7.
(4) Apply prime coating within 1 hour of the surface
preparation.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-11
G.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
d. Surface Preparation of Aluminum: Solvent clean or steam clean
aluminum surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1; do not use
alkali cleaning. Then dust blast and follow with a chemical
conversion coating per MIL-C-5541, Class lA.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Surface Preparation of Copper: Solvent clean or steam clean
copper surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1; do not use alkali
cleaning. Then dust blast.
f. Prime Coat: Tnemec N69-1211, Ameron 385, ICI Devoe Devran
224 HS, Carboline Carboguard 890, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy
646 B58-600 series, PPG PITT-GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy
Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal. Apply to a minimum
thickness of 4 mils.
g. Intermediate and Finish Coats: Epoxy and polyurethane as
described in System No. 10. Do not include the inorganic zinc
prime coat described in that system.
3. System No. 54-Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel:
a. Type: High solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having a minimum
volume solids of 80% (ASTM D 2697).
b. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs,
structural members or aluminum fabrications in contact with
concrete or carbon steel with this system.
c. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam clean in accordance with
SSPC SP-1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast.
d. Coating System: Apply three or more coats of Ameron 400,
Tnemec 100, ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Sherwin- Williams
Macropoxy B58-600, Carboline Carboguard 890L T, PPG PITT-
GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or
equal; 30 mils total. Maximum thickness of an individual coating
shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation.
Abrasives for Surface Preparation
1. Abrasives used for preparation of surfaces shall be silica free and shall
meet local environmental regulations suitable to achieve surface
preparation requirements of coating manufacturer.
PAiNTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. Organic Zinc Primer for Field Touch-Up and Shop Coating
1. Where shop-applied inorganic zinc primers cannot be used because of
volatile organic compound (VOC) regulations, the organic zinc primer
described in System No. 18 may be substituted for the specified inorganic
ZInC pnmers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Do not paint in the rain, wind, snow, mist, and fog or when steel or metal surface
temperatures are less than 50F above the dew point.
B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity is above 85%.
C. Do not paint when temperature of metal to be painted is above 120oF.
D. Do not apply alkyd, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints if
air or surface temperature is below 400F or expected to be below 400F within 24
hours.
E. Do not apply epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints on an exterior or
interior surface if air or surface temperature is below 600F or expected to drop
below 600F in 24 hours.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION PROCEDURES
A. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-l. Use
clean cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave a
film or greasy residue on the cleaned surfaces before abrasive blasting.
B. Remove weld spatter and weld slag from metal surfaces and grind smoothly rough
welds, beads, peaked comers, and sharp edges including erection lugs in
accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3. Grind 0.020-inch (minimum) off the
weld caps on pipe weld seams. Grind outside sharp comers, such as the outside
edges of flanges, to a minimum radius of 1/4 inch.
C. Do not abrasive blast or prepare more surface area in 1 day than can be coated in
1 day; prepare surfaces and apply coatings the same day. Remove sharp edges,
burrs, and weld spatter.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-13
J.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
D.
Do not abrasive blast PVC, CPVC, or FRP piping or equipment. Do not abrasive
blast epoxy- or enamel-coated pipe that has been factory coated, except to repair
scratched or damaged coatings.
E.
For carbon steel, do not touch the surface between the time of abrasive blasting
and the time the coating is applied. Apply coatings within 2 hours of blasting or
before any rust bloom forms.
F.
Surface preparation shall conform to the SSPC specifications as follows:
Solvent Cleaning SP-1
Hand Tool Cleaning SP-2
Power Tool Cleaning SP-3
White Metal Blast Cleaning SP-5
Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-6
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SP-7
Pickling SP-8
Near- White Blast Cleaning SP-lO
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SP-ll
Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials SP-12
by High- and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting before Recoating
Surface Preparation of Concrete SP-13
G.
Wherever the words "solvent cleaning," "hand tool cleaning," "wire brushing," or
"blast cleaning" or similar words are used in these Specifications or in paint
manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable
SSPC (Steel Structure Painting Council) surface preparation specifications listed
above.
H.
Dust blasting is defined as cleaning the surface through the use of very fine
abrasives, such as siliceous or mineral abrasives, 80 to 100 mesh. Apply a fine
etch to the metal surface to clean the surface of any contamination or oxide and to
provide a surface profile for the coating.
1.
Brush-off blasting of concrete and masonry surfaces is defined as opemng
subsurface holes and voids and etching the surface for a coating to bond.
For carbon steel surfaces, after abrasive blast cleaning, the height of the surface
profile shall be 2 to 3 mils. Verify the surface profile by measuring with an
impresser tape acceptable to the NACE inspector and City's Representative.
Perform a minimum of one test per 100 square feet of surface area. Testing shall
be performed by the NACE inspector and witnessed by the City's Representative.
The impresser tape used in the test shall be permanently marked with the date,
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
time, and locations where the test was made. Test results shall be promptly
presented to the City's Representative.
K. Do not apply any part of a coating system before the NACE inspector and City's
Representative have reviewed the surface preparation. If coating has been applied
without this review, remove the applied coating by abrasive blasting and reapply
the coat in accordance with this Specification if directed by the City's
Representative.
3.03 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING
A. Use dry abrasive blast cleaning for metal surfaces. Do not use abrasives in
automatic equipment that has become contaminated. When shop or field blast
cleaning with handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles.
B. After abrasive blast cleaning and before applying coating, dry clean surfaces to be
coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting.
Apply the specified primer or touch-up coating within an 8-hour working day. Do
not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Before applying primer or touch-
up coating, reclean any blast-cleaned surface not coated within the 8-hour period.
C. Keep the area of the work in a clean condition and do not permit blasting particles
to accumulate and constitute a nuisance or hazard.
D. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule
blast cleaning and coating so that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill
scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces.
3.04 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES TO BE COATED
A.
Surface preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces shall be in accordance with
SSPC SP-13 and the following.
B.
Do not apply coating until concrete has cured at least 30 days. Finish concrete
surfaces according to Section 03300. Do not use curing compound on surfaces
that are to be coated.
C.
Concrete and masonry surfaces on which coatings are to be applied shall be of
even color, gray or gray-white. The surface shall have no pits, pockets, holes, or
sharp changes of surface elevation. Scrubbing with a stiff-bristle fiber brush shall
produce no dusting or dislodging of cement or sand. Sprinkling water on the
surface shall produce no water beads or standing droplets. Concrete and masonry
shall be free of laitance and slick surfaces.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-15
D. Detergent clean the concrete or masonry surface with trisodium phosphate in
accordance with ASTM D 4258. Then sandblast surfaces (brush-off blast). Floor
slabs may be acid etched in accordance with ASTM D 4260 in lieu of
sandblasting. After sandblasting, wash surfaces with water to remove dust and
salts, in accordance with ASTM D 4258 or D 4261. The grain of the concrete
surface to touch shall not be rougher than that of No. 10 mesh sand.
E. Before coating concrete, plaster, and masonry with System No. 35, determine the
presence of capillary moisture according to ASTM D 4263, except as modified
below. Tape a 4-foot-by-4-foot sheet of polyethylene plastic to the concrete
surface to be coated. Allow the plastic sheet to remain in place at least 24 hours.
After the specified time has elapsed, remove the plastic sheet and visually
examine both the underside of the plastic sheet and the concrete surface beneath
it. There shall be no indication of moisture on either surface. If moisture is
indicated, allow additional curing time for the concrete and then retest. Provide
one test sheet for every 500 square feet of concrete surface to be coated. For
walls, provide one test sheet for each 10 feet (or fraction thereof) of vertical rise
in all elevations starting within 12 inches of the floor or base slab.
F. Acceptance criteria for concrete surfaces shall be in accordance with SSPC SP-13,
Table 1, "Severe Service."
G. Do not apply coatings to concrete when the concrete is outgassing. Apply
coatings only when the concrete surface temperature is stable, not nsmg.
Depending upon the time of the year and the atmospheric conditions, stable
conditions may only occur during non-standard working hours. The Contractor
shall be responsible for notifying the City when working non-standard working
hours is necessary to comply with this Specification. The Contractor shall
perform this work during non-standard working hours at no additional cost to the
City.
3.05 PROCEDURES FOR ITEMS HAVING SHOP-APPLIED PRIME COATS
A. After application of primer to surfaces, allow coating to cure for a minimum of 2
hours before handling to minimize damage.
B. When loading for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective
devices to separate items to prevent damaging the shop-primed surfaces during
transit and unloading. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and
particles from the shop-primed surfaces after separation. Use padded chains or
ribbon binders to secure the loaded items and minimize damage to the shop-
primed surfaces.
03720-030-0 ]
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Cover shop-primed items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent
deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.
D. Handle shop-primed items with care during unloading, installing, and erecting
operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store shop-primed items on the
ground or on top of other work unless the ground or the work is covered with a
protective covering or tarpaulin. Place shop-primed items above the ground upon
platforms, skids, or other supports.
E. Inorganic and organic zinc primers shall be lead free.
3.06 FIELD TOUCH-UP OF SHOP-APPLIED PRIME COATS
A. Remove oil and grease surface contaminants on metal surfaces in accordance with
SSPC SP-l. Use clean rags wetted with a degreasing solution, rinse with clean
water, and wipe dry.
B. Remove dust, dirt, salts, moisture, chalking primers, or other surface
contaminants that will affect the adhesion or durability of the coating system. Use
a high-pressure water blaster or scrub surfaces with a broom or brush wetted with
a solution of trisodium phosphate, detergent, and water. Before applying
intermediate or finish coats to inorganic zinc primers, remove any soluble zinc
salts that have formed by means of scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush. Rinse
scrubbed surfaces with clean water.
C. Remove loose or peeling primer and other surface contaminants not easily
removed by the previous cleaning methods in accordance with SSPC SP-7. Take
care that remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation.
Remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with blast-cleaned
edges feathered.
D. Remove rust, scaling, or primer damaged by welding or during shipment, storage,
and erection in accordance with SSPC SP-lO. Take care that remaining primers
are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Areas smaller than 1 square inch
may be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-l1. Remaining primers shall be
firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with cleaned edges feathered.
E. Use repair procedures on damaged primer that protects adjacent primer. Blast
cleaning may require the use of lower air pressure, smaller nozzles, and abrasive
particle sizes, short blast nozzle distance from surface, shielding, and/or masking.
F. After abrasive blast cleaning of damaged and defective areas, remove dust, blast
particles, and other debris by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming; then apply the
specified touch-up coating.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-17
G. Surfaces that are shop primed with inorganic zinc primers shall receive a field
touch-up of organic zinc primer as in System No. 18 to cover scratches or abraded
areas.
H. Other surfaces that are shop primed shall receive a field touch-up of the same
primer used in the original prime coat.
3.07 PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. All materials of a specified painting system, including primer, intermediate, and
finish coats, shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners,
driers, and other additives shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for
the particular coating system.
B. Deliver paints to the jobsite in the original, unopened containers.
C. Refer to Section 09902 for piping and equipment painting systems.
3.08 PAINT STORAGE AND MIXING
A. Store and mix materials only In areas designated for that purpose by the
Construction Manager. The area shall be well-ventilated, with precautionary
measures taken to prevent fire hazards. Post "No Smoking" signs. Storage and
mixing areas shall be clean and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Tightly close
containers after each use. Store paint at an ambient temperature from 500F to
1 OooF.
B. Prepare multiple-component coatings using all of the contents of the container for
each component as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Do not use partial
batches. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond
their pot life. Provide small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting
other small areas. Mix only the components specified and furnished by the paint
manufacturer. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or
otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating.
3.09 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. Conform to the requirements ofSSPC PA-I. Follow the recommendations of the
coating manufacturer, including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers,
cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application,
and safety precautions.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during
application. Power mix components. For multiple component materials, premix
each component before combining. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush
marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. Use a different
shade or tint on succeeding coating applications to indicate coverage where
possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. If thinning
is allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of
coating material. Stir coating materials at all times when adding thinner. Do not
flood the coating material surface with thinner before mixing. Do not reduce
coating materials more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper
application characteristics and to obtain the specified dry-film thicknesses.
Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast-cleaned surfaces by
dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust
to provide good visibility in the working area before coating applications.
Remove dust from coated surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming before
applying succeeding coats.
E.
Apply coating systems to the specified rmmmum dry-film thicknesses as
determined in SSPC P A-2.
F.
Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting
occurs, or any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Before applying
coating, reclean surfaces by blast cleaning that have surface colored or become
moist.
G.
Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular
surfaces before applying the primer and finish coat. Apply the brush coat before
and in conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the
brush coat.
H.
Before applying subsequent coats, allow the primer and intermediate coats to dry
for the minimum curing time recommended by the manufacturer. In no case shall
the time between coats exceed the manufacturer's recommendation.
I.
Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat completely, and there shall
be a visually perceptible difference in applied shade or tint of colors.
J.
Applied coating systems shall be cured at 750F or higher for 48 hours. If
temperature is lower than 750F, curing time shall be in accordance with printed
recommendations of the manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed by the City's
Representative.
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-19
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K. Assembled parts shall be disassembled sufficiently before painting or coating to
ensure complete coverage by the required coating.
3.10 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED
Do not paint the following surfaces unless otherwise noted in the Drawings or In other
Specification Sections. Protect the following during the painting of adjacent areas:
A. Concrete walkways.
B. Mortar-coated pipe and fittings unless otherwise noted.
C. Stainless steel.
D. Metal letters.
E. Glass.
F. Roofings.
G. Fencing.
H. Copper tubing and red brass piping.
I. PVC and CPVC piping except as required for UV protection or as noted on pipe
schedule in Section 09902.
J. Electrical fixtures except for factory coatings.
K. Nameplates.
L. Grease fittings.
M. Brass and copper, submerged.
N. Buried pipe, unless specifically required in the piping specifications.
O. Fiberglass items, unless specifically required in the FRP specifications.
P. Aluminum handrail, stairs, and grating except for insulating these items from
concrete or dissimilar metals for corrosion protection.
Q. Insulated pipe.
09901-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.11 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. To protect surfaces that are not to be painted, the Contractor shall do the
following:
1. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures,
switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts,
bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be
painted.
2. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring
adjacent surfaces.
3. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from
damage during surface preparation and paintin.
4. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from
entering the motors.
3.12 SURFACES TO BE COATED
The exact coating to be applied in any location is not designated by the descriptive phrases in the
coating system titles such as "corrosive environment," "buried metal," or "submerged metal."
Coat surfaces with the specific coating systems as described below:
A. Coat mechanical equipment, such as pumps, fans, and air compressors as
described in the various mechanical equipment specifications. The color of the
finish coat shall match the color specified in Section 09902.
B.
Coat aboveground and exposed piping or piping in vaults and structures as
described in the various piping specifications and as shown in Section 09902.
The color of finish coat shall match the color specified in Section 09902.
C.
Coat submerged steel and steel piping and ductile iron piping in non-potable
water or sewage wet wells according to System No. 1 for non-potable water
applications. Coat submerged steel and steel piping and ductile iron piping in
potable water wet wells or tanks with System No. 7 for potable water
applications. Steel or ductile iron piping inside tanks shall be coated with System
No.7.
D.
Coat valves as described in the various valve specifications. Aboveground valves
or valves in vaults and structures shall match the color of the connecting piping.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-21
E. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete according to System No. 51 or
54.
F. Coat buried flanges, nuts and bolts, valves, flexible pipe couplings, exposed rebar
in thrust blocks, and valve boxes as specified in the particular specifications for
the above items. If the particular specifications do not specify a coating system,
coat buried bolt threads, tie bolt threads, and nuts according to System No. 24.
3.13 SURFACE PREPARATION OBSERVATION, COATINGS OBSERVATION, AND
DRY-FILM THICKNESS TESTING
A.
The Contractor shall employ the services of a NACE-certified coatings inspector
to perform surface preparation inspections, coatings inspections, and wet and dry
film thickness testing of field-applied coatings. The Contractor shall schedule and
coordinate the inspections with the work. The NACE-certified inspector shall
provide the City and the Engineer with signed reports of the inspection work. No
coatings shall be applied until the NACE-certified inspector provides the City and
the Engineer with a signed report indicating that surface preparation meets the
requirements specified in this Section.
B.
Measure coating thickness specified for carbon steel surfaces with a magnetic-
type dry-film thickness gauge in accordance with SSPC PA-2. Provide
certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the
past 6 months. Provide dry-film thickness gauge as manufactured by Mikrotest or
Elcometer.
C.
Test the finish coat of metal surfaces (except zinc primer and galvanizing) for
holidays and discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector, low-voltage, wet-
sponge type. Provide measuring equipment. Provide certification that the gauge
has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past 6 months. Provide a
detector as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor or K-D Bird Dog.
D.
Measure coating thickness specified for concrete or masonry surfaces in
accordance with ASTM D 4138. Test the finish coat of concrete and masonry
surfaces in accordance with NACE RP-0188-90 or ASTM D 4787. Patch coatings
at the points of thickness measurement or holiday detection.
E.
Check each coat for the correct dry-film thickness. Do not measure within 8
hours after application of the coating.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. For metal surfaces do the following:
1. Make five separate spot measurements (average of three readings) spaced
evenly over each 100 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be
measured.
2. Make three readings for each spot measurement of either the substrate or
the paint. Move the probe or detector a distance of 1 to 3 inches for each
new gauge reading.
3. Discard any unusually high or low reading that cannot be repeated
consistently.
4. Take the average (mean) of the three readings as the spot measurement.
The average of five spot measurements for each such 100-square-foot area
shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot measurement
in any 1 OO-square- foot area shall be less than 80% nor more than 120% of
the specified thickness. One of three readings which are averaged to
produce each spot measurement may underrun by a greater amount as
defined by SSPC P A-2.
G. For concrete surfaces, make five separate spot measurements spaced evenly over
each 400 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured. The average of
five spot measurements for each such 400-square-foot area shall not be less than
the specified thickness. No single spot measurement in any 400-square-foot area
shall be less than 80% nor more than 120% ofthe specified thickness.
H. Perform tests in the presence of the City's Representative.
3.14 REPAIR OF IMPROPERLY COATED SURFACES
A. If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean and
topcoat the surface with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color
and coverage. Sandblast or power-sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or
abraded paint, feathering the edges. Then prime and finish coat in accordance
with the Specifications. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other
imperfections.
3.15 CLEANING
A. During the progress of the Work, remove discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and
rags at the end of each day's work.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-23
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
B.
ThorougWy clean brushes and other application equipment at the end of each
period of use and when changing to another paint or color.
C.
Upon completion of painting work, remove masking tape, tarps, and other
protective materials, using care not to damage finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS
09901-24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09902
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes pipe and equipment painting and identification as required
for this project.
B. See Section 09901 for painting systems and requirements.
C. All painting systems used on pipes and equipment coming in contact with potable
water shall be NSF61 approved.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The Specification Sections listed below are an integral part of this Equipment Specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating
C. Section 15075 - Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. The Conttractor shall ppply color coding to all new plant piping in accordance
with Table 09902-1, Pipe Color and Label, and/or Engineer's instructions. Plant
piping shall be painted solid colors unless otherwise specified.
B. Apply pipe identification bands in accordance with this Section and Section
15075.
Table 09902-1 Pipe Color and Label
Piping
Material! Paint Color
No Description Pip in!!: Label Linin!!: System No. (Exoosed Pioinl!)
1 Sodium Hypochlorite Chlorine PYC 41 Yellow
2 Sodium Bisulfite Bisulfite PYC 41 Yellow
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
09902-1
PWEANDEQUWMENTPNNTmG
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
09902-2
PWEANDEQUWMENTP~TING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09980
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This Section includes materials and installation of a chemical-resistant coating for concrete in
chemical secondary containment service. The coating systems specified in this Section are based
on products by Carboline and Sherwin-Williams, and the Specification is intended to show the
quality of the products and the level of preparation and application detail that will be required of
other manufacturers in order to be considered equal coating systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The Specification Sections listed below are an integral part of this Equipment Specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
E. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds
F. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
G. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process System
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all submittals in accordance with Section 01340, Project Submittals and
Acceptance.
B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information:
1. Percent solids by volume of coating compound.
2. Number of coats required to give the specified dry thickness.
3. Minimum recommended dry thickness per coat for prime, intermediate,
and finish coats.
4. Recommended surface preparation.
5. Recommended surface tensile strength of the concrete surface.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
09980-1
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
PART 2
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
6. Recommended procedures for storage of the materials, including
temperature limitations.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Application instructions including recommended equipment and
application atmospheric limitations such as temperature and humidity.
8. Application detailed drawings showing the recommended systems for the
treatment of bridging concrete expansion joints, control joints, and
structural cracks for vertical and horizontal surfaces. Also at a minimum
include detailed drawings showing recommended treatment systems for
bridging or sealing the following:
a. Concrete comers.
b. Equipment and piping supports with anchors that penetrate into the
concrete surfaces.
c. Tank bottoms to concrete support pads and foundations.
d. Pipe penetrations through walls.
e. Sumps and trenches.
f. Floor drains.
g. Recessed areas for grating support.
9. Curing requirements and instructions.
C.
Submit color selection chart for selection by the Owner.
D.
Submit documentation showing that the applicator has been certified or approved
by the coating manufacturer to apply the coating systems. Submit a list of
projects with references that have been constructed in Florida and that have used
the specified coating products to demonstrate the applicator's experience.
E.
Submit documentation demonstrating the credentials of the NACE-certified
coatings inspector.
MA TERlALS
09980-2
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COA TlNGS
FOR CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.01 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING SYSTEM
A. The chemical-resistant coating system for concrete secondary containment areas
and other concrete and masonry surfaces subject to chemical exposure shall
integrate two types of coating systems, Types A and B, to produce one complete
coating system.
2.02 TYPE "A" COATING: VINYLESTER 100% SOLIDS
A. Type: Vinyl ester 100% solids finish coat system, using Ashland Derakane 411
resin or equal, with vinyl ester prime coat. Minimum resin content in the finish
coat system shall be 29% by weight. The vinyl ester finish coat system shall be
formulated with an abrasion-resistant pigment to provide no more than an average
60-mg weight loss when run on a Taber Abraser using a CS-17 wheel, 1,000-
gram weight on 1,000 cycles.
B. Service Conditions: Concrete surfaces in secondary containment service and
other concrete surfaces designated on the Drawings and in this Section that are
subject to exposure to 12.5% sodium hypochlorite and 40% sodium bisultite.
C. Surface Type 1: Vertical Concrete and Masonry Surfaces such as secondary
containment walls.
1. Prime Coats: Two-Step Vinyl Ester Primer System
Apply vinyl ester primer and filler/surfacer to fill in depressions. Products:
Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer followed by Carboline Semstone
800 Series Primer blended with Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720) and 50-140
mesh coarse staurolite.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer at 8 to 1 0 mils using
a medium-nap roller. Allow Carboline Semstone 800 primer to
cure tack free before overcoating.
b. Apply Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer blended with Part
"D" Cab-O-Sil and 50- to 140-mesh coarse staurolite using a flat
trowel. Blend in accordance with the coating manufacturer's
instructions. Apply as a scratch coat to provide a level and
uniform surface. Pour the blended Semstone 800 primer at the
base of the wall and work the material up into the form voids. Do
not add thickness. Provide a consistent I-inch, 45" chamfer at the
floor-to-wall junctures.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
09980-3
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COA TlNGS
FOR CONCRETE
D.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
c. Allow prime coats to cure a minimum of 12 hours before applying
finish coats.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Finish Coats: 100% Solids Vinyl Ester Blend
Apply Carboline Semstone 870 blended with 50- to 140-mesh Dupont
Starblast and Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720) to a total thickness of 40 mils
minimum using a flat trowel or medium-nap roller. Blend and apply in
accordance with the coating manufacturer's instructions.
Surface Type 2: Horizontal Concrete Surfaces such as secondary containment
floors, stairways, and chemical room floors subject to foot traffic.
1. Prime Coats: Vinyl ester primer. Products: Carboline Semstone 800
Series Primer.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer at 8 to 10 mils using
a medium-nap roller.
b. Allow Carboline Semstone 800 primer to cure tack free before
overcoating.
2. Intermediate Coat: 100% Solids Vinyl Ester Base Coat. Products:
Carboline Semstone 870.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 at 30 mils using a notched
squeegee. Broadcast 50/140 mesh DuPont Stargate aggregate
evenly and provide a dry beach sand appearance.
b. Allow to cure until the system can support bodyweight without
disrupting the base-coat.
c. Once cured, remove excess aggregate.
3. Finish Coats: 100% Solids Vinyl Ester Finish Coat. Products: Carboline
Semstone 870
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 to a total thickness of 20 mils
minimum using a flat squeegee and back-roll with a medium nap
roller.
b. Allow to cure a minimum of 36 hours before placing the area into
service or subjecting the area to foot traffic.
09980-4
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Surface Type 3: Vertical Concrete Surfaces associated with concrete surfaces that
have frequent transitions such as pump bases, trenches, sump areas, and chemical
truck unloading stations.
1. Prime Coats: Two-Step Vinyl Ester Primer System
Apply vinyl ester primer and filler/surfacer to fill in depressions. Products:
Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer followed by Carboline Semstone
800 Series Primer blended with Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720) and 50-140
mesh coarse staurolite.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer at 8 to 1 0 mils using
a medium-nap roller. Allow Carboline Semstone 800 primer to
cure tack free before overcoating.
b. Apply Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer blended with Part
"D" Cab-O-Sil and 50- to 140-mesh coarse staurolite using a flat
trowel. Blend in accordance with the coating manufacturer's
instructions. Apply as a scratch coat to provide a level and
uniform surface. Pour Semstone 800 primer blend at the base of
the wall and work the material up into the form voids. Do not add
thickness. Provide a consistent I-inch, 450 chamfer at the floor to
wall junctures.
c. Allow prime coats to cure a minimum of 12 hours before applying
finish coats.
2. Intermediate Coat: Carboline Semstone 870 blended with 50- to 150-
mesh Dupont Starblast and Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720)
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 blended with 50- to 150-mesh
Dupont Starblast and Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720) to a total
thickness of 25 mils minimum using a medium-nap roller or flat
trowel. Blend and apply III accordance with the coating
manufacturer's instructions. Move immediately to the
reinforcement step.
3. Reinforcement: Carboline Scrim Cloth
a. While fmish coat is still wet, place pre-cut rolled up scrim cloth at
the top of the wall and unroll carefully into the tack coat over the
chamfer and 2 to 3 inches onto the floor. Overlap seams a
minimum of 1-112 inches. Remove all wrinkles and air and
saturate cut ends using a flat trowel and serrated roller.
09980-5
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
F.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
b. Allow to cure to a tacky state.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Finish Coat: Carboline Semstone 870 blended with 50- to 140-mesh
Dupont Starblast and Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720)
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 blended with 50- to 140-mesh
Dupont Starblast and Part "D" Cab-O-Sil (TS-720) to a total
thickness of 80 to 100 mil using a flat trowel. Blend and apply in
accordance with the coating manufacturer's instructions. Remove
trowel marks with Styrene on a clean trowel.
b. Allow to cure 36 hours before placing the area III servIce or
allowing other work to start.
Surface Type 4: Horizontal Concrete Surfaces with frequent transitions such as
pump bases, trenches, sumps, and chemical truck unloading stations.
1. Prime Coats: Vinyl ester primer. Products: Carboline Semstone 800
Series Primer.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 800 Series Primer at 8 to 10 mils using
a medium-nap roller.
b. Allow Carboline Semstone 800 primer to cure tack free before
overcoating.
2. Intermediate Coat: 100% Solids Vinyl Ester Base Coat. Products:
Carboline Semstone 870.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 at 20 to 25 mils using a notched
squeegee.
b. Move immediately to the reinforcement step.
3. Reinforcement: Carboline Scrim Cloth
a. While finish coat is still wet, place pre-cut rolled up scrim cloth at
the top of the wall and unroll it carefully into the tack coat over the
chamfer and 2 to 3 inches onto the floor. Overlap seams a
minimum of 1-112 inches. Remove all wrinkles and air and
saturate cut ends using a flat trowel and serrated roller.
09980-6
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Saturant Coat: 100% Solids Vinyl Ester Coat. Products: Carboline
Semstone 870.
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 at 30 mils usmg a notched
squeegee or medium-nap roller.
b. Broadcast 20/40 mesh DuPont Starblast aggregate evenly and
provide a dry beach sand appearance.
c. Allow to cure until the system can support bodyweight without
disrupting the saturant -coat.
d. Once cured, remove excess aggregate
5. Finish Coats: 100% Solids Vinyl Ester Finish Coat. Products: Carboline
Semstone 870
a. Apply Carboline Semstone 870 to a total thickness of 20 mils
minimum using a flat squeegee and back-roll with a medium-nap
roller.
b. Allow to cure a minimum of 36 hours before placing the area into
service or subjecting the area to foot traffic.
2.03 TYPE "B" COATING: FLEXIBLE NOVOLAC EPOXY 100% SOLIDS
A. Type: Flexible novo lac epoxy 100% solids treatment coat system.
B. Service Conditions: Treatment of expansion joints, control joints, structural
cracks, horizontal and vertical transitions, equipment bases, pipe supports, pipe
penetrations, and other transitions subject to movement and exposure to 12.5%
sodium hypocWorite and 40% sodium bisulfite..
C. Prime Coat: 100% solids Epoxy Primer
Apply Semstone 110 Primer to a thickness of 8 mils.
D. Intermediate Coat: 100% solids Flexible Novolac Epoxy
Apply Semstone 805 Flexible Novolac Epoxy to a thickness of 40 to 50 mils.
E. Reinforcement: Semstone #100 Fabric Needle Point Polypropylene
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
09980-7
Apply Semstone #100 Fabric centered on the joint according to the applicable
treatment detail sheet provided by the manufacturer.
F. Finish Coat: 100% solids Flexible Novolac Epoxy
Apply Semstone 805 Flexible Novolac Epoxy to a thickness of 10 mils to saturate
the reinforcement fabric.
G. Construction Details: Apply the Flexible Novolac Epoxy system in accordance
with the manufacturer's construction details submitted for each treatment
application.
2.04 ABRASIVES FOR SURF ACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE
A. Abrasives used for preparation of concrete surfaces shall be selected by the
coating manufacturer and shall be 16- to 40-mesh angular aggregate or diamond
grind.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COATING SYSTEM
A. Materials including primer, intermediate, reinforcement, and finish coats shall be
produced by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other
additives shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
B. Deliver coatings to the jobsite in the original, unopened containers and store
materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED
A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates,
aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on
machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be coated. Provide drop cloths to
prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect
working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during
surface preparation and coating process. Mask openings in motors to prevent
coating and other materials from entering the motors.
3.03 WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Do not coat in the rain, wind, snow, mist, and fog or when surface temperatures
are less than 50F above the dew point.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
09980-8
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Do not apply coatings when the relative humidity IS above 85% or the
temperature is above 90oF.
C. Do not coat when temperature of concrete to be painted is above 120oF.
D. Do not apply coatings if air or surface temperature is below 600F or expected to
drop below 600F in 24 hours.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces shall be in accordance with
SSPC SP-13 /NACE 6 and the following:
1. Do not apply coating until the concrete has cured at least 30 days. Finish
concrete surfaces in accordance with Section 03300, Cast-in-Place
Concrete for Structures. Do not use curing compound on surfaces that are
to be coated.
2. Concrete surfaces on which coating is to be applied shall be of even color,
gray, or gray-white. The surface shall have no pits, pockets, holes, or
sharp changes of surface elevation. Scrubbing with a stiff-bristle fiber
brush shall produce no dusting or dislodging of cement or sand.
Sprinkling water on the surface shall produce no water beads or standing
droplets. Concrete and masonry shall be free of laitance and slick
surfaces. The grain of the concrete surface to touch shall not be rougher
than that of 40- to 60-grit sandpaper.
3. Repair or replace damaged or poorly cast concrete in accordance with
Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete for Structures, before preparation.
4. Detergent clean the concrete or masonry surface with trisodium phosphate
in accordance with ASTM D 4258 or D 4261. Then abrasive blast
surfaces (brush-off blast) in accordance with ASTM D 4259. After blast
cleaning, wash surfaces with water to remove dust and salts, in accordance
with ASTM D 4258 or D 4261. Rinse thoroughly to achieve a surface pH
of 7 to 11. Take at least two pH readings for each 500 square feet or
portion.
5. Test for surface strength in accordance with ASTM D 4541, as modified
by ACI 503R. Provide one test for every 500 square feet. The minimum
surface tension shall be 300 psi unless the coating manufacturer
recommends a higher value.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
09980-9
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
6.
Before coating new concrete walls and ceilings, determine the presence of
capillary moisture in accordance with ASTM D 4263, except as modified
below. Tape a 4-foot-by-4-foot sheet of polyethylene plastic to the
concrete surface to be coated. Allow the plastic sheet to remain in place at
least 24 hours. After the specified time has elapsed, remove the plastic
sheet and visually examine both the underside of the plastic sheet and the
concrete surface beneath it. There shall be no indication of moisture on
either surface. If moisture is indicated, allow additional curing time for
the concrete and then retest. Provide one test sheet for every 500 square
feet or portion of concrete surface to be coated. For walls, provide one test
sheet for each 10 feet of vertical rise in all elevations starting within 12
inches of the floor or base slab.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7.
Before coating concrete floors, determine the presence of moisture by the
calcium chloride test in accordance with ASTM F 1869. The MVER shall
not exceed 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours. If test results
exceed this value, provide additional drying and retest until test results
meet this value.
8.
Acceptance criteria for concrete surfaces shall be ill accordance with
SSPC SP-13 Table 1 "Severe Service."
9.
Test concrete for contamination and porosity with water. When water is
applied to horizontal surfaces, the water should spread out and penetrate
immediately. On vertical surfaces a stream of water should zig-zag,
spread out, and penetrate. This is a good indication that the surface has
been properly prepared. If water beads up on horizontal surfaces and
moves in a rapid straight line down a vertical surface, the surface IS
contaminated with oil, curing compounds, or other contaminant.
10.
Some manufacturer's systems may require treatments to certain transitions
before applying coatings. Apply manufacturer's recommended treatments
to these transitions as required before applying coatings as recommended
by the coatings manufacturer. The coating manufacturer's factory
representative shall observe the conditions of the concrete and treatments
and provide the Owner with written notice that the substrate has been
properly prepared and is suitable for coatings before applying coatings.
Should the manufacturer's representative note deficiencies, a deficiency
list shall be provided in writing to the Contractor and Engineer and the
Contractor shall be responsible for making corrections at no additional
cost to the Owner until the manufacturer's representative provides the
Owner with written acceptance of the substrate and treatments. In
addition, the NACE-certified inspector shall also observe the conditions of
the surfaces before coating application and provide a written report noting
09980-10
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
deficiencies or indicating that the surfaces have been prepared m
accordance with these Specifications.
3.05 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING
A. Use dry abrasive blast cleaning material. When field blast cleaning with hand-
held nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles.
B. After blast cleaning and before application of coating, dry clean surfaces to be
coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting.
Apply the specified primer or touch-up coating within an 8-hour working day. Do
not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Reclean any blast-cleaned surface
not coated within the 8-hour period before applying primer or touch-up coating.
C. Keep the area of the work in a clean condition and do not permit blasting particles
to accumulate and constitute a nuisance or hazard.
D. During blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule blast
cleaning and coating so that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale,
etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces.
3.06 PRE-APPLICATION PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall arrange a pre-application meeting with the Engineer and
Owner, the NACE coatings inspector, and the coating manufacturer's
representative at the jobsite to review the application procedures and the overall
plan for applying and inspecting the chemical-resistant coatings.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that all liquid materials are stored below 750F prior to
application or in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. The Contractor shall pre-cut scrim cloth and carefully roll up and store the cloth
until it is required. The cloth shall be stored in a moisture-protected environment.
D. Do not apply coatings to concrete when the concrete is outgassing. Apply
coatings only when the concrete surface temperature is stable or dropping, not
nsmg.
E. Surface and ambient temperatures shall be above 500F during application and
cure.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
09980-11
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
3.07 COATING APPLICATION
A. When applying multiple coats, each successive coating shall be a different color
from the previously applied coat.
B. The entire coating shall be pinhole free.
C. Apply coatings and treatments in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures for the types of surfaces and transitions as described
previously in Part 2 and as submitted in the Shop Drawing by the manufacturer.
D. Apply coating to the following surfaces:
1. Surface Type 1: Vertical concrete and masonry surfaces with infrequent
transitions such as secondary containment walls and storage tank pads.
2. Surface Type 2: Horizontal Concrete Surfaces such as secondary
containment floors, concrete floor, storage tank pads, stairway treads, and
chemical feed room floors subject to foot traffic.
3. Surface Type 3: Vertical concrete surfaces that have frequent transitions
such as pump bases, stairways, trenches, sump areas, and chemical truck
unloading stations.
4. Surface Type 4: Horizontal concrete surfaces with frequent transitions
such as pump bases, undersides of walkways, trenches, sumps, and
chemical truck unloading stations not subject to foot traffic.
5. Apply chemical resistant coatings for the Chemical Storage Building as
follows:
Building or Location Area Surfaces Coating Type of
Name System Surface
Chemical Buildings Bulk Storage Secondary Containment Walls Type A or B Type 1
Areas and Storage Tank Pads
Chemical Buildings Bulk Storage Secondary Containment Type A or B Type 2
Areas Floors, Stair Landings and
Stair Treads
Chemical Buildings Bulk Storage Vertical Surfaces of Sump and Type A or B Type 3
Areas Stairs and Landings
Chemical Buildings Bulk Storage Horizontal Surfaces of Sump Type A or B Type 4
Areas and Top of Containment
Walls
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
09980-12
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Coat concrete surfaces within the sodium hypocWorite bulk storage
areas, and sodium bisulfite bulk storage areas.
b. Coat concrete surfaces within the chemical pIpmg junction
(conduit) boxes.
3.08 SURFACE PREPARATION OBSERVATION, COATINGS OBSERVATION, AND
DRY-FILM THICKNESS TESTING
A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a NACE-certified coatings inspector
to perform surface preparation inspections, coatings inspections, and dry film
thickness testing of field-applied coatings. The Contractor shall schedule and
coordinate the inspections with the work. The NACE-certified inspector shall
provide the Engineer and the Owner with signed reports of the inspection work.
No coatings shall be applied until the NACE-certified inspector provides the
Engineer and the Owner with a signed report indicating that surface preparation
meets the requirements specified in this Section:
1. Measure coating thickness specified for concrete or masonry surfaces in
accordance with ASTM D 4138. Test the fmish coat of concrete and
masonry surfaces in accordance with NACE RP-0188-90 or ASTM D
4787. Patch coatings at the points of thickness measurement or holiday
detection.
2. Check each coat for the correct dry-film thickness. Do not measure within
8 hours of the application of the coating.
3. Make five separate spot measurements spaced evenly over each 100
square feet of area (or fraction thereot) to be measured. The average of
the five spot measurements for each such 100-square-foot area shall not be
less than the specified thickness. No single-spot measurement in any 100-
square-foot area shall be less than 80% or more than 120% of the specified
thickness.
B. In addition to the NACE inspector, the chemical-resistant coating manufacturer's
representative shall make periodic site visits to the jobsite to observe progress
during each step of the coating process to observe the applicator's work and to
provide written reports to the Engineer and the Owner noting deficiencies and
recommending corrective actions if any are deemed necessary.
3.09 HOLIDA Y (CONTINUITY) TESTING OF APPLIED COATING
The Contractor's NACE-certified inspector shall inspect each coat of primer and fmish coating
in accordance with ASTM D 4787 to determine integrity. Each coating application shall be
checked and deficiencies shall be marked. After observing the specified recoat time, apply
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
09980-] 3
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
additional coating materials over areas having any holidays or pinholes. After the correction of
deficiencies, the Contractor shall reinspect those areas to determine the acceptability of the
additional coating. Each coating application must be 100% to the satisfaction of the NACE
inspector, the coating manufacturer's representative, and the Engineer before succeeding coating
applications.
3.10 LEAKAGE TESTING OF SECONDARY CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES
Perform hydraulic leakage testing of each secondary containment structure in accordance with
ACI 350.1 Chapter 2 after chemical-resistant coatings application, holiday testing, and repairs, if
necessary, have been completed. Leakage testing shall meet the HST-NML (no measurable loss)
tightness criteria specified in ACI Chapter 2, Part 2.1.1. Repair any leaks as required and retest
if necessary.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS
FOR CONCRETE
09980-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11345
CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes provisions for the complete installation of Chemical Metering Pump Skids
and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified in this Section. During
the installation the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and temporary chemical supplier
to minimize the interruption to the chlorination and de-chlorination operation at the plant.
1.02 RELATED WORK
The Specification Sections listed below are an integral part of this Equipment Specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 01660 - Plant Start-Up and Initial Operation
E. Section 01700 - Project Closeout
F. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
G. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds
H. Section 01800 - Training
I. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process Systems
J. Section 11350 - HDXLPE Chemical Storage Tanks
K. Division 13 - Instrumentation and Control Systems
L. Division 15 - Piping, Valves, Pipe Supports
M. Division 16 - Low-Voltage Electrical Work
1.03 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section 01340 the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all
materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the
following:
A. Shop drawings and product data for the products of this Section as specified
elsewhere. Include detailed schematic of equipment, piping, controls, etc.
B. Manufacturer's certificates.
C. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions in accordance
with Section 01730.
D. Five references where similar chemical metering pumps are being used for 12%
sodium hypochlorite and 40% sodium bisulfite application.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
11345-1
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
E. A copy of proposed manufacturer's guarantee and local parts/service center
information.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Designing, manufacturing, and assembling elements of the products specified in this Section
shall be in accordance with the standards of the organizations listed below:
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
B. American Water Works Association (A WW A)
C. Hydraulic Institute Standards
Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above or other organizations, the version of
the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The work under this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials,
equipment and supervision for the manufacture and installation of skid-mounted
chemical metering systems suitable for the application of 12% sodium hypochlorite
and 40% sodium bisulfite, as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section.
B. This Section provides requirements for the sodium hypochlorite and sodium
bisulfite metering pump skid systems. The material and product specifications
presented here apply to all systems, except where otherwise noted.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS
A. Sodium Hypochlorite (NaOCl)
1. Concentration: 12.5 Trade Percent
2. Specific Gravity: 1.1 to 1.2
3. Ambient Temperature
B. Sodium Bisulfite (NaHS03)
1. Concentration: 40 Trade Percent
2. Specific Gravity: 1.32 to 1.37
3. Ambient Temperature
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-2
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Pump Capacity for Marshall Street APCF
12% Sodium Hypochlorite 40% Sodium
Bisulfite
Chlorine Contact Pre- F il ter Reuse De-chlorination
Chamber Water Contact Chamber
No. of Pumps 3 2 2 3
Pump Capacity, gph 40 16 16 6
Minimum Pump 25 25 35 25
Pressure, psi
D. Pump Capacity for East APCF
12% Sodium Hypochlorite 40% Sodium
Bisulfite
Chlorine Contact Pre-Filter De-chlorination
Chamber Contact Chamber
No. of Pumps 2 2 2
Pump Capacity, gph 40 10 16
Minimum Pump 25 25 25
Pressure, psi
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single
manufacturer and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a
competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the
manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods and
shall operate satisfactorily when installed.
B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be
the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of
manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified in this Section.
C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required,
but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact
requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover
the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing, and field calibration of all
materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the
proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-3
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-4
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no
change in Contract Price or Time.
D. The manufacturer must have a service center within Florida with trained
technicians authorized to make repairs to all components of the chemical feed
system. The manufacturer shall be responsible for providing all equipment,
accessories, spare parts, documentation, and installation supervision required for a
complete and operational chemical feed system. Systems assembled by second-
party fabricators, integrators, equipment-distributors/representatives, contractors,
or manufacturers not normally engaged in chemical metering skid design and
manufacturing shall not be acceptable.
1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
All equipment delivered and stored shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
1.09 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts in clearly identified containers for each
chemical metering skid:
A. One maintenance kit for each chemical metering pump size for each APCF;
maintenance kits shall include but not be limited to suction and discharge check
valve assemblies, gaskets and o-rings.
B. One spare valve of each size for each pump skid.
C. One parts list/instruction sheet for all serviceable components.
All parts shall be in one box labeled with the Skid ID Information. The spare parts kit shall
include all parts required for 2 years of normal maintenance. A packing list, instruction sheet,
and parts list shall be provided for all serviceable items.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The system manufacturer shall provide a I-year warranty after final acceptance for
the metering pumps and skid materiaVconstruction and skid-mounted equipment,
piping and valves, including but not limited to, motors, valves, instruments, control
panel, piping, and fittings. The warranty shall also cover all material and moving
parts of the metering pumps.
B. During the warranty period the system manufacturer shall provide the services of a
trained technician to make all adjustments and repairs and replace all defective
equipment at no cost to the Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
The Chemical Metering Pump Skid specified in this Section is the product of a single
manufacturer and shall be manufactured by Blue Planet Environmental Systems, Inc., Florida.
No "or equal" item or substitutions are allowed. The Contractor shall include as part of his price
the purchase of four complete chemical pump skids for the Marshall Street APCF and three
complete pump skids for the East APCF for the lump-sum bid item, as stipulated in the bid form.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. The chemical metering systems shall be completely self-contained and designed to
safely feed metered amounts of 12% sodium hypochlorite and 40% sodium
bisulfite. Each chemical metering skid shall include multiple identical chemical
metering pumps and accessories to offer complete redundancy.
1. Marshall Street APCF
a. Three pumps shall be installed on the Chlorine Contact Chamber
sodium hypochlorite skid.
b. Two pumps shall be installed on the Pre-Filter sodium hypochlorite
skid.
c. Two pumps shall be installed on the Reuse Water sodium
hypochlorite skids.
d. Three pumps shall be installed on the De-chlorination Contact
Chamber sodium bisulfite skid.
2. East APCF
a. Two pumps shall be installed on the Chlorine Contact Chamber
sodium hypochlorite skid.
b. Two pumps shall be installed on the Pre-Filter sodium hypochlorite
skid.
c. Two pumps shall be installed on the De-chlorination Contact
Chamber sodium bisulfite skid.
B. Each pump skid shall be clearly labeled for its intended use: Chlorine Contact
Chamber, Pre-Filer, Reuse Water, and De-chlorination Contact Chamber.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-5
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Each skid shall contain chemical metering pumps and all necessary piping, valves,
fittings, supports, calibration column, electrical controls, and accessories as
specified in this Section.
D.
The chemical metering pump skids shall be completely assembled and tested
before delivery to the job site. All equipment shall be of materials selected
specifically for use with 12% sodium hypochlorite and 40% sodium bisulfite.
E.
Chemical Metering Pumps
1. Reference codes and standards: Pumps shall comply with the latest
editions of the following codes and standards:
a. UL Standard 778
b. Hydraulic Institute Standards
c. National Electric Code
2. Specifications of Pump Components
a. Peristaltic Metering Pump - Each pump shall consist of a sealed
housing with bolted clear cover and roller compressor mechanism
designed for operation with either tube or hose. Tube/Hose shall
be rigidly mounted to the pump body with NPT or Camlock
connections. The pump assembly shall be three component,
consisting of a standard pump head close-coupled to a commercial
gearbox that is directly connected to a NEMA C-Face motor.
b. Rotor: Corrosion-resistant Delrin@ or carbon steel with selectable
shaft positions for two- or three-roller designs. The rotor shall
mount directly on the keyed gearbox output shaft and shall be
axially sealed and secured to the shaft by a teflon gasket and
through-center 316SS retaining bolt.
c. Shafts: Corrosion-resistant 316 stainless steel. (optional:
Hastelloy, Titanium)
d. Rollers: Two reinforced Delrin@ or 304SS rollers 1800 apart for
compression of the tube/hose against the housing. One roller shall
at all times be fully engaged with tubing providing complete
compression to prevent back flow or siphoning.
e. Roller Bearings: Roller bearings are journal bearing design integral
to the roller (one-piece rollerlbearing).
f. Cover: Removable one-piece clear corrosion-resistant
polycarbonate viewing cover with EPDM gasket.
11345-6
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
m.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
g.
Connections: Rigid inlet and outlet connections shall be Camlock
or MNPT with Polypropylene, Kynar, PVC, or 316SS material as
required by the process. Loose tube-end connections to process are
not acceptable.
h.
Baseplate: Supporting base shall be corrosion-resistant HDPE
1.
Assembly: Rotor and housing are bolted directly to the output
flange of the gearbox, which supports the rotor and center the rotor
assembly within the pump housing. Pump-to-gearbox connection
shall be close coupled and self-aligning, requiring no flexible
couplings. Long-coupled pumps with external couplings are not
acceptable.
Gearbox: The gearbox shall be of in-line helical-footed design,
polyester epoxy powder coated cast iron or aluminum with a
minimum service factor of 1.4 based on motor nameplate rating
and an AGMA Class II continuous-duty rating, NEMA 56C input.
The reduction ratio shall be as required for the application. The
face of the output flange shall be sealed from the wetted pump
head by a single 0 'ring seal.
k.
Performance: Each pump shall be capable of self-priming when
completely dry with a suction lift capability of up to 27 feet of
water. The pump shall be capable of running dry without damaging
the pump or tube. The pump shall use no check valves or
diaphragms and not use any dynamic seals in contact with the fluid
being pumped.
1.
Speed: Maximum pump operating speed shall be 60 rpm in order
to maximize tube/hose life. Pumps with higher operating speeds
are not acceptable.
TubingIHose: Thermoplastic Tubing or Reinforced Hose may be
installed as required by the application:
(1) Tubing: Thermoplastic tubing shall be designed specifically
for use with peristaltic pumps and working pressures to 30
psi. The tubing shall be constructed from the highest
quality compounded thermoplastic materials; shall meet
FDA, 3-A, and NSF criteria; and have a durometer rating of
60 to 63 Shore A. Wetted materials shall be Norprene.
Tubing lubrication will be food-grade silicon grease.
(2) Hose: Rubber hose shall be designed specifically for use
with peristaltic pumps, working pressures to 115 psi. The
hose shall be constructed from the highest quality
11345- 7
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
compounded rubber materials, reinforced with multiple
layers of braided nylon, and have a durometer rating of 55
to 70 Shore A. The wetted layer shall be Natural Rubber,
Buna-N, EPDM, or Hypalon as required for the service.
Hose lubrication will be food-grade silicon grease.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n. Leak Detector: The pump manufacturer shall supply a capacitance-
type non-contact leak sensor mounted to the pump cover and
interlocked with the Drive/Controls to automatically shut down the
pump in the event of a tube failure. Leak detection that senses
leaks external to the pump head is not acceptable.
3. General
a. Output volume shall be adjustable while the pump is in operation.
4. Materials of Construction
a. Housing: Cast iron or cast aluminum with a corrosion-resistant
ECTFE Halar@ fluoropolymer coating. Housing may be mounted
in any of four mounting orientations with the suction and discharge
connections located at the 12,3,6, or 9 o'clock positions.
b. Connections shall be PVC / 316SS / polypropylene or PVDF.
5. The chemical metering pumps shall be:
a. Periflo, ChemTUFF series
b. Wallace Tieman Chemtube CPS series
c. or approved equal
F.
Chemical Metering Skid
1. The chemical metering skids shall be constructed from solid white rigid
PVC or HDPE sheet with a minimum thickness of ~-in. The skid shall
be self-supporting and all components of the chemical metering system
shall be contained within the skid. The skid shall have adequate
containment to store chemical in case of a minor leak and shall have a
pipe connection to drain.
2. Pedestals shall be provided to elevate the chemical metering pumps to a
height between 1.5 and 2.0 feet. The skids shall be manufactured using
thermal welding technology; bolted construction is not acceptable.
3. For each chemical metering pump the piping system shall include the
following:
a. One flushing inlet.
b. One flushing outlet.
11345-8
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. All required pIpmg, valves, back pressure valve, pulsation
dampener, accessory, and supports for a complete pump system.
4. Piping shall include isolation valves and unions for all serviceable
components. The chemical supply piping shall allow for dual chemical
inlets with y-strainers and a calibration column shall be provided and
designed for use with any of the metering pumps. The discharge piping
shall allow each pump to serve individual loads or a common load with
backup.
5. All piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC assembled in a controlled shop
environment by the skid manufacturer. All pipes shall be squarely cut
on precision equipment with the ends chamfered and de-burred. All
socket welded connections shall follow the guidelines set by the
pipe/fitting manufacturer for proper cleaning, priming, and gluing
procedures. A heavy-bodied solvent suitable for use with 12% sodium
hypochlorite and 40% sodium bisulfite shall be used. All threaded
connections will use Teflon tape, a suitable thread sealant, or a
combination of both. Threaded connections shall use stainless-steel
reinforcement rings where applicable to reduce the risk of cracking.
6. The piping shall be attached to the chemical metering skid with a non-
metallic corrosion-resistant support system. The straps shall be
removable and reusable to allow for servicing the system. All
inlet/outlet connections, valves, and pump accessories shall be clearly
labeled on the skid.
7. A drain pipe shall be provided in the skids for draining spill to the drain.
8. The chemical metering skids shall be completely assembled and tested
by the manufacturer before delivery to the job site. Each skid shall
include 316 SS mounting brackets.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Calibration Columns
A clear PVC calibration column shall be provided in the chemical supply piping.
The piping shall be designed for the calibration column to be used with any of the
metering pumps. The Contractor shall vent the top of the calibration column to
the atmosphere. Calibration columns may also be used as de-gassing chambers.
B. Piping and Valves
All piping shall be solvent-welded Schedule 80 PVC. All valves and unions shall
be Schedule 80 PVC with Viton o-rings. Valves shall be true union type and
include built-in handle locking mechanisms. Ball valves for use with chemicals
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-9
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
03720-030-0 ]
Bid Documents
11345-10
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
prone to gassing, such as sodium hypochlorite, shall be vented.
2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVERS
A. Pump Drive
1. The pump mechanism shall be totally enclosed with no exposed moving
parts.
2. The motor shall be TENV, Inverter-Duty, Chern-Duty, Washdown-Duty
with Stainless-Steel Shaft, Epoxy-Impregnated Moisture-Resistant
Windings, Corrosion-Resistant Powder-Epoxy Coating, 1725 rpm,
NEMA 56C, 230/460V AC/3PH/60Hz with a minimum continuous
turndown capability of 1000: 1 and mBeting NEMA MG-1 Parts 30 & 31.
Horsepower shall meet maximum speed and pressure requirements.
Alternate DC motor as required by application.
3. The pump motor to gearbox connection shall be close coupled and self-
aligning, requiring no flexible couplings.
2.05 POWER AND CONTROLS
In accordance with Division 16:
A. A NEMA 4X terminal box shall be provided on the skid back panel for termination
of all power wiring. A power outlet with weatherproof cover shall be provided for
the metering pump power cords and shall be pre-wired to the terminal junction
box. Skid-mounted control panel power shall be pre-wired to the terminal junction
box. The connection between the skid-mounted junction box and the local
equipment safety switch shall be made using corrosion-resistant flexible conduit.
B. A NEMA 4X control panel shall be provided on each pump skid for local control
capabilities. At a minimum the following controls shall be included on the skid
control panel face:
1. Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) selector switch (each pump).
2. Pump running indication (each pump).
3. Pump fault indication (each pump).
4. Pump manual speed selector (each pump).
5. Chemical flow, indicating total chemical flow from skid-mounted
pumps.
C. Control panel shall be equipped with terminals for the following interface signals:
1. Remote flow setpoint from SCADA, used in Auto mode of operation, 4
to 20mA, 0 to 1 00% (each pump).
2. Pump speed to SCADA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 1 00% (each pump).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Total skid flow signal from flow meter, 4 to 20mA, scaled based on sum
of pump capacities.
4. Pump run signal to SCADA, contact closure (each pump).
5. Pump in Auto signal to SCADA, contact closure (each pump).
6. Pump fault signal to SCADA, contact closure (each pump).
Connection between the skid-mounted control panel and the local equipment
junction box shall be made using corrosion-resistant flexible conduit, maintaining
separation between analog signal conduits and other conduits.
D. Control of each chemical feed pump shall be selectable between manual and
automatic with the HOA switch on the local control panel.
E. In hand mode the pump speed shall be adjustable by a readily accessible keypad
with digital display located on the skid-mounted control panel.
F. In auto mode the operation of the pump is controlled by the compound loop control
function within the plant Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), which uses the
contact chamber flow and contact chamber chlorine residual to determine the pump
remote flow setpoint.
2.06 SHOP TESTING
A. Shop tests shall be conducted on the actual pumps, control panels, and skids being
provided for the project.
B. The system shall operate throughout the entire operating range.
C. The manufacturer shall assemble and test the chemical metering skids before
delivery.
2.07 PAINTING
Surface preparation, shop painting, field pamtmg, and other pertinent detailed painting
specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process
Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the
instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents.
B. The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all
dimensions in the field, and advise the Owner or Engineer of any discrepancy
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-11
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
before performing the work. Each skid shall be stored and installed in accordance
with the written instructions of the manufacturer and as indicated on the Contract
Drawings and this Specification.
C. A qualified manufacturer's representative shall be retained to supervIse the
installation, adjustment, and field testing of the system.
3.02 TESTING
A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600.
B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after the Chemical Metering Pump Skid is
installed. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following:
1. The units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment.
2. The units operate without objectionable leaks, overheating or
overloading of any parts, objectionable noise, and without objectionable
vibration.
3. There are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.
4. All manual and automatic controls function properly.
C. Final acceptance will be dependent upon satisfactory operation and performance
after installation. The feed system shall be operated in automatic mode for at least
30 consecutive days without problem.
D. Final acceptance of the complete chemical feed system will be dependent upon
satisfactory operation and performance of the system in automatic mode
maintaining a set point residual within :f:3% of the set point for 30 consecutive
days without failure.
D. If any deficiencies are revealed during testing, they shall be corrected and the tests
shall be repeated at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor is unable to
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the skid units will satisfactorily
perform the service required, the units shall be rejected. In such an event the
Contractor shall remove and replace the equipment at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required for such
tests and shall correct any deficiencies noted.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATES(S)
A. Provide manufacturer's services according to Section 01600.
B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a
qualified representative to check and supervise the equipment installation; to
supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the
Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance, and repairs. The number of
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
11345-12
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in Table 1 in
Specification Section 01600. Training shall be in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 01800.
C.
The equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings
and installation approval. The report shall include descriptions of all inspections
and any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer.
D.
The Contractor shall provide for the Owner's consideration a proposal for
professional annual maintenance of the chemical metering skid. This proposal
shall include the services of a qualified technician to perform maintenance as
recommended by the manufacturer. The proposal shall include a schedule of
services to be performed. This service must include all travel charges, labor, and
materials required to properly recondition the chemical metering pumps, pressure
relief valves, back-pressure valves, and pulsation dampeners.
The maintenance proposal must be provided with the bid for the system
manufacturer to be considered.
END OF SECTION
11345-13
METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11350
HIGH-DENSITY CROSS-LINKED POL YETHYLENE (HDXLPE)
CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes provisions for the complete installation of double walled vertical storage
tanks designed for use with 12% sodium hypocWorite and 40% sodium bisulfite and
appurtenances as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 01660 - Equipment Start-up and Initial Operation
E. Section 01700 - Project Closeout
F. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
G. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds
H. Section 01800 - Training
I. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process Systems
J. Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting
K. Section 11345 - Metering Pumps and Skid Systems
L. Division 15 - Piping, Valves, Pipe Supports
1.03 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section 01340, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all
materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the
following:
A.
Shop drawings
1. Dimensions of tanks, fittings, and attachments.
2. Wall thickness calculations in accordance with ASTM D 1998-97 using
600-psi design hoop stress at 1000 F.
3. Locations of fittings and attachments.
4. Resin used and a complete manufacturer's specification ofthe resin used.
5 . Weight of tanks.
6. Statement that fabrication is in accordance with these Specifications.
7. Samples.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-1
8. Instructions for handling, storing, and installing tanks.
9. Statement that materials and resins used are suitable for intended service.
B. Samples
Representative samples of the High-Density Crosslinked Polyethylene with and
without an anti-oxidant-resistant LLDPE Linear Low-Density Polyethylene Liner
tank shall be furnished at the time of shop drawing review. These samples shall
be from plant production and shall be representative of the quality and impact
resistance of the tanks to be furnished. The Engineer may reject any tank that
does not meet the standard of the representative samples.
C. Manufacturer's certificates
D. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions III
accordance with Section 01730
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Designing, manufacturing, and assembling of elements of the products specified in this Section
shall be in accordance with the standards of the organizations listed below:
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
2. ASTM D746 - Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by
Impact
3. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Un-
reinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
4. ASTM D883 - Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics
5. ASTM D1505 - Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique
6. ASTM D1525 - Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics
7. ASTM D1693 - ESCR Spec. Thickness .125" F50 - 10% Igepal
8. ASTM D1998 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage
Tank: Section 11.3 : Low-Temperature Impact Test and Section 11.4:
Oxylene-Insoluble Fraction (Gel Test).
B. American Water Works Association (A WW A)
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
D. Hydraulic Institute Standards
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHENUCAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above or other organizations, the version of
the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This Specification Section provides the material and product specifications
required for sodium hypocWorite and sodium bisulfite storage tanks suitable for
indoor installation.
B. As specified in this Section, the tanks will be used to store 12% sodium
hypocWorite liquid and 40% sodium bisulfite liquid with normal producer
impurities for indefinite periods on site until used.
C. The tanks shall be vertical, double walled, and flat bottomed. The outer
containment tank shall be designed to hold a minimum of 110% of the normal fill
capacity of the inner primary tank.
D. Flange faces shall be protected from damage. All openings are to be covered to
prevent the entrance of dirt and debris.
E. Nozzles or other fittings shall not be used for lifting. Manway may be used for
lifting only if recommended by the manufacturer and only according to
procedures submitted by manufacturer. Handling the tank when it is filled is not
recommended.
F. Instructions shall be provided for unloading and installing tanks.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS
A. All components of the liquid chemical storage tanks shall be capable of normal
operations and shall be compatible with the following chemical solutions:
Sodium HypocWorite Sodium Bisulfite
Chemical Formula NaOCI NaHS03
Concentration Trade Percent 12% 40%
Specific Gravity 1.2 1.37
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHENUCAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-3
B. The High-Density Crosslinked Polyethylene tanks shall be designed for the
following:
1. Marshall Street APCF
Tank Descri tion
Tank Outer Diameter
Overall Height (max. 10ft)
Inner Primary Tank
Sodium H ochlorite
Vertical, double wall
8ft,Oin
9 ft, 11 in
HDXLPE with an anti-oxidant
resistant liner and UV inhibitor
2,500 allons
1.9
5
Sodium Bisulfite
Vertical, double wall
4ft,Oin
5 ft, 9 in
HDXLPE with an UV
inhibitor
405 allons
1.65
3
Note: Tank dimensions and capacities in the table are given by a single manufacturer. Other manufacturers may
have slightly different dimensions and capacities. The layout of the tanks shall be in accordance with the drawings.
2. East APCF
Sodium H ochlorite
Vertical, double wall
8ft,Oin
9 ft, 11 in
HDXLPE with an anti-
oxidant resistant liner and
UV inhibitor
2,500 allons
1.9
3
2,500 gallons
1.65
2
Sodium Bisulfite
Vertical, double wall
8ft,Oin
9 ft, 11 in
HDXLPE with an UV
inhibitor
Note: Tank dimensions and capacities in the table are given by a single manufacturer. Other manufacturers may
have slightly different dimensions and capacities. The layout of the tanks shall be in accordance with the drawings.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single
manufacturer and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a
competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the
manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods and
shall operate satisfactorily when installed.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be
the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of
manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified in this Section
for a minimum of 5 years.
C. The manufacturer shall supply five references, with contact names and phone
numbers, where substantially similar installations for the chemical and equipment
as specified has been in satisfactory operation for a minimum of 5 years.
D. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is
required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact
requirements of the equipment offered. They are, however, intended to cover the
furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing, and field calibration of all materials
and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper
operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these
Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no
change in Contract Price or Time.
E. Tanks shall be manufactured by a firm with a nationally accepted quality standard
(i.e. NSF-61).
1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
All equipment delivered and stored shall be protected from the weather, humidity,
temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the tanks to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship and to be suitable for the applications and chemicals as specified in
these Specifications.
B. The Manufacturer's warranty shall consist of replacement ofa defective tank for 3
years and replacement of all other accessories for 1 year, starting after installation
and acceptance tests.
C. The Manufacturer shall warranty the vessel for the intended application of storing
12% sodium hypochlorite and 40% sodium bisulfite solutions.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
The chemical storage tank manufacturer and model shall be the following:
A. PolyProcessing Co., Monroe, LA,
B. Assman Corporation of America, Garrett, IN
C. Approved equal
Naming of a manufacturer does not indicate approval nor shall standard product offerings by any
named manufacturers be accepted in lieu of component features as specified herein. All
manufacturers are required to comply fully with these specifications.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Plastic
The tanks shall be molded from High-Density Crosslinked Polyethylene. The
resin used shall be Paxon 7004 as manufactured by Exxon/Mobil Chemical or
equal.
B. Fillers and Pigments
The plastic shall not contain any fillers. All plastic shall contain a minimum of
0.25% U.V. stabilizer and maximum of 0.60%. Pigments may be added as desired
by the Owner or as designated by the manufacturer, not to exceed 0.5% of dry
blended or 2% of melt compound of the total weight of the tank.
C. The tanks shall be manufactured by a manufacturer having experience with
sodium hypochlorite. Unless otherwise indicated, the plastics terminology used in
this standard shall be in accordance with the design, manufacturing, and testing
requirements found in ASTM D1998.
D. The tanks shall be constructed by the rotational molding process.
E. The tanks shall be capable of storing sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite at
1000 F. The sodium hypochlorite should not exceed 1000 F at delivery or during
storage to reduce decomposition of the chemical.
F. Tanks shall be rotationally-molded, high density crosslinked polyethylene, double
wall, flat bottom tanks. The assembly consists of one cylindrical, closed top inner
HDXLPE primary tank and one cylindrical, open top HDXLPE containment outer
tank. Each tank that stores sodium hypochlorite shall have an anti-oxidant
resistant LMDPE liner in the primary tank for maximum chemical resistivity.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Each tank is a rotationally molded one-piece seamless constructed tank. The
double wall tank assemblies shall be designed for above-ground, vertical
installation and be designed to store sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite at
atmospheric pressures. The assemblies shall be designed to prevent rainwater and
debris from entering the containment tank.
G. All edges cut out, such as entrance manways, shall be trimmed to have smooth
edges.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
The HDXLPE tanks shall be equipped with the following accessories:
A. Manway:
1. A top mounted manway cover on the 2,500 gallon tanks shall be at least
I9-inches inside diameter and include a surge relief feature. The manway
cover shall be manufactured out of HDPE. Bolts used on the lid shall be
made from a material chemically resistant to the chemical in storage.
2. The top mounted manway cover on the 405 gallon tanks shall be at least 7-
inches inside diameter and shall be threaded HDPE.
B. Flange Fittings: The flange attached to the tank wall shall be I50-lb ANSI and be
constructed of PVC. The flange shall have a minimum outer diameter of 4~-
inches with all-thread bolts with bolt heads encapsulated in polyethylene. The
polyethylene encapsulation shall fully cover the bolt head and a minimum of 114-
inch of the threads closest to the bolt head. Each bolt shall have a gasket which is
on the inside of the tank. Each fitting shall be made of material resistant to the
chemical in storage.
C. Dome Fittings: All the tanks shall include one (1) 2-inch exterior fill assembly,
one (1) 3-inch level sensor fitting, and one (1) U-vent with screen (shall be 3"
minimum for smaller tank and 4"minimum for larger tank). The exterior fill
assembly shall include a Schedule 80 PVC bolted flange style universal ball dome
or threaded bulkhead fitting and exterior fill pipe that extends to the floor and is
supported at 3 foot intervals by external pipe supports fastened to the secondary
tank wall. The level sensor fitting shall be Schedule 80 PVC bolted flange style
universal ball or threaded bulkhead dome fitting with flange adapter and shall be
located on a dome runway (flat area) at least 18" from the tank sidewall. The U-
vent with screen shall include a flange style or threaded bulkhead fitting and be
located on the center dome of each tank. All dome mounted fittings shall be
threaded Schedule 80 PVC, with EPDM gaskets for sodium bisulfite and EPDM
or Viton gaskets for sodium hypochlorite, and hardware made from material
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPECHEMUCALSTORAGETANKS
11350-7
D.
E.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
chemically resistant to sodium hypochlorite (titanium) and sodium bisulfite (Type
316 stainless steel).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sidewall Fittings: Sidewall fittings shall keep the stored chemical from contacting
the tank wall cross section. The discharge fitting on each primary tank shall be a
2-inch maximum socketed Schedule 80 PVC bolted flange style or threaded
titanium double male flange connection bulkhead fitting located no higher than 6
inches above tank bottom and shall include a PVC siphon leg.
The connections between the primary and secondary tank sidewall on the 2,500
gallon tanks shall be a flexible type transition fitting assembly that maintains the
containment integrity of the entire double wall tank system. The transition fitting
shall insure 100% chemical containment in the event of either primary tank side
wall or discharge fitting failure. The flexible design shall allow for differential
expansion and contraction between the primary and secondary tank while
minimizing the residual stress on the primary tank side wall. The transition fitting
assembly shall include an integral bellows type expansion joint or equal on the
primary tank discharge pipe that is contained within the transition assembly such
that any leak from the expansion joint is contained within the secondary
containment tank. Any transition fitting assembly that does not contain a leak
from the primary tank drain fitting and expansion joint shall not be allowed. The
discharge fitting on the 405 gallon tanks shall be located at the fitting pocket,
eliminating the need for a transition fitting.
Side Wall Fitting Material of Construction: Flanges on all tanks shall be Schedule
80 PVC. Side wall fittings on sodium hypochlorite tanks shall have Viton gaskets
and expansion joints, and titanium hardware. Side wall fittings on sodium
bisulfite tanks shall have EPDM gaskets and expansion joints, and Type 316
stainless steel hardware.
Level Gauges:
1. Each tank shall include a flanged opening sized for an ultrasonic level
sensor to monitor chemical levels in the control room and at the filling
station. The sensor shall be located on the runway and at least 18 inches
from the sidewall of the tank.
2. Each tank shall include a sight level with gallonage tape specific to each
tank size and shall be installed on the drain/pump feed line as a backup to
the ultrasonic level sensors to allow personnel to view the amount of
chemical inside each tank. This gauge shall be routed back to the primary
tank dome/sidewall, above the tank shoulder, and include a vented
isolation true union ball valve at the base of the sight tube. The sight tube
shall be supported at 3 foot maximum intervals using exterior pipe
HDXLPE CHENUCAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
supports utilizing materials of construction that are compatible with the
chemical being stored as listed elsewhere in this specification.
F. Manual Leak Detection: The leak detection device shall consist of a 2-inch vented
ball valve attached to a 6-inch long clear PVC capped pipe. It shall have a
threaded connection, only penetrate the outer containment tank and be at least 45
degrees away from the drain line.
G. The Contractor shall furnish and install all precautionary labeling as
recommended by the Manufacturing Chemists Association for each of the
chemicals to be stored.
2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVERS (NOT USED)
2.05 CONTROLS (NOT USED)
2.06 SHOP TESTING
A. The tank manufacturer shall have quality-control procedures adequate to ensure
that all fabrications comply with these Specifications. Quality control shall
include in-process inspections as well as a final inspection by the manufacturer
and a written record of these inspections. The objective of the manufacturer's
quality control and inspection procedure shall be to have the tank comply with the
Specifications and Drawings at the time of the first inspection, thus eliminating
any need for rework by the manufacturer or a second inspection by the Engineer.
B. Inspection records shall be kept for each tank and shall be available to the
Engineer. Upon request, the manufacturer shall send a copy of his inspe~tion
records to the Engineer for review before inspection by the Engineer. Inspection
and test records and certifications shall be included in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
c. Final acceptance by the Engineer shall be contingent upon satisfactory inspection
upon delivery and upon installation at the job site.
D. The tank manufacturer shall perform the tests described below before shipping.
Test samples shall be taken from the cut-out areas of where fittings are inserted in
each tank. The Engineer or designated representative shall have the option of
witnessing these factory tests.
1. Impact Test: ASTM 1998-Section 11.3 shall be used for this test. The
sample shall not shatter at 120 ft Ib with the sample at minus 200 F for a
~-in wall thickness. For a wall thickness less than ~-in, the sample shall
not shatter at 100 ft Ib and minus 200 F.
03720-30-0]
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEM]CAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-9
2. Degree of Cross-linking Test: ASTM 1998-Section 11.4 shall be used in
this test. A minimum of 70% Gel must be obtained.
3. Hydrostatic Test: Each tank shall be filled with water and checked for
leaks no less than 1 hour after filling.
4. Wall Thickness: Each tank shall have an actual wall thickness
measurement taken at every 900, at each I-foot elevation, up to 3 feet from
the bottom of the tank.
2.07 PAINTING
Surface preparation, shop painting, field painting, and other pertinent detailed painting
specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating -
Process Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the
instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents.
B. All fitting connections must be installed with flexible-type connections as
described above and per the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Make all pipe connections to tanks as shown on the Drawings.
D. Following the field test, tanks and support members shall be anchored in their
final position according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 TESTING
A.
Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600.
B.
Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the Chemical Storage
Tanks. Final field tests shall demonstrate that the units have been properly
installed and are in proper alignment.
C.
After installation, each tank, connecting pipes, and valving shall be field tested by
filling with water. The tank and fittings shall hold water without loss, evidence of
weeping, or capillary action for 24 hours before acceptance. The Engineer may
also inspect each tank for defects, damage, and conformance with the
Specifications.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. After testing, the tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried.
E. Should any defects become evident during inspection, testing, or within the
guarantee period, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defective tank or
fitting as approved by the Engineer.
F. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and
performance after installation
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATES
A. Provide manufacturer's (or supplier's) services according to Section 01600.
B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a
qualified representative to check and supervise the equipment, unloading, storage,
and installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation;
and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance, and
repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as
summarized in Table 01600-1 located in Specification Section 01600.
C. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings
and installation approval. The report shall include descriptions of all inspections
and notes on any deficiencies and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
HDXLPE CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
11350-11
I
I
.
I
To: Elizabeth Johnson
Jones Edmunds and Associates
3/16/09
I
Re.:
City of Clearwater WWTP Improvements Project (BPES Job #1214R2)
I
Dear Elizabeth,
Below please find revised pricing for the chemical metering systems for your City of Clearwater WWTP Improvements
project based on the most recent specification with peristaltic metering pumps.
I
Design Basis:
I
. Chemical metering skids designed for sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite at the Marshall S1. and East
WWTP.
. Systems to include Periflo ChemTuff peristaltic metering pumps.
· Skids shall be installed indoors.
. Provide SCADA interface signals for control/monitoring as indicated on attached PID's.
· Marshall Street Criteria:
o Triplex for sodium hypochlorite (CCC), 40.0-gph @ 25 psi.
o Duplex for sodium hypochlorite (filter/clarifier), 16-gph @ 25 psi.
o Duplex for sodium hypochlorite (holding tank), 16-gph @ 35 psi.
o Triplex for sodium bisulfite (dechlorination), 6-gph @ 25 psi.
· East Plant Criteria:
o Duplex for sodium hypochlorite (CCC), 40-gph @ 25 psi.
o Duplex for sodium hypochlorite (prefilter), 10-gph @ 25 psi.
o Duplex for sodium bisulfite (dechlorination), 16-gph @ 25 psi.
I
I
I
Total Price .......................................................................................................................................... ........... $220,860.00
I
*prices do not include any applicable taxes.
I
Materials:
I
. (I) Triplex chemical metering skid (Marshall Street CCC) suitable for indoor installation designed for sodium
hypochlorite (3/4" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with I" suction header) with peristaltic metering pumps
and local VFD's rated for minimum 40.0 GPH @ 25 PSI.
I
. (I) Duplex chemical metering skid (Marshall Street Filter/Clarifier) suitable for indoor installation designed
for sodium hypochlorite (1/2" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with I" suction header) with peristaltic
metering pumps and local VFD's rated for minimum 16.0 GPH @ 25 PSI.
I
. (I) Duplex chemical metering skid (Marshall Street Holding Tank) suitable for indoor installation designed
for sodium hypochlorite (1/2" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with I" suction header) with peristaltic
metering pumps and local VFD's rated for minimum 16.0 GPH @ 35 PSI.
I
. (I) Triplex chemical metering skid (Marshall Street Dechlorination) suitable for indoor installation designed
for sodium bisulfite (1/2" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with I" suction header) with peristaltic metering
pumps and local VFD's rated for minimum 6.0 GPH @ 25 PSI.
I
· (I) Duplex chemical metering skid (East Plant CCC) suitable for indoor installation designed for sodium
hypochlorite (3/4" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with I" suction header) with peristaltic metering pumps
and local VFD's rated for minimum 40.0 GPH @ 25 PSI.
I
· (I) Duplex chemical metering skid (East Plant Prefilter) suitable for indoor installation designed for sodium
hypochlorite (112" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with I" suction header) with peristaltic metering pumps
and local VFD's rated for minimum 10.0 GPH @ 25 PSI.
I
I
I
. (1) Duplex chemical metering skid (East Plant Dechlorination) suitable for indoor installation designed for
sodium bisulfite (lI2" Sch-80 PVCNiton socket weld with 1" suction header ser) with peristaltic metering
pumps and local VFD's rated for minimum 16.0 GPH @ 25 PSI.
I
. (1) Spare parts as specified in Section \.09
· (1) Freight to Jobsite
· (1) SubmittalJO&M
. (6) Days startup/training services
I
Notes:
I
. ABB chemical flow meters are excluded from this proposal.
. This proposal includes only items and services as specifically listed above; installation, additional equipment
and/or services are to be provided by others or at additional cost..
. Each pump will include a properly sized PRY and pulsation dampener, including design and installation, and
a spare rebuild kit for each unit.
. Payment Terms: 10% upon receipt of approved submittals
80% Net 30-days of delivery
10% upon startup and acceptance not to exceed 90-days from delivery.
I
I
Should you favor us with your purchase order, please forward to:
I
BLUE PLANET ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS, INC.
C/O Heyward Incorporated
415 County Club Drive
Winter Park, FL 32789
I
Should you have any questions concerning our offering, or if we may be of any service, please do not hesitate to
contact us.
Respectfull y,
I
HEYWARD INCORPORA1ED - for
BLUE PLANET ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS, INC.
I
Gye.<JOY.Y J. cho-tnio
Gregory J. Chomic
Winter Park Office
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13401
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section requires the Contractor to perform all work necessary to furnish, install,
commission, test, document, and start-up the instrumentation and control system,
including modifications to existing instrumentation and control systems. The
Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, incidentals, and services
required for a complete and operational system.
B. The Contractor shall provide chemical feed system PLC control panels as shown in
the contract drawings. Oversight ofthe control panel design, fabrication, startup and
commissioning shall fall under the responsibility of the System Integrator.
C. The Contractor shall acquire the services of an experienced System Integrator
specifically trained in the type of equipment to be provided. The System Integrator
shall assume responsibility for satisfactory operation of the process instrumentation
and controls as an integrated system. Responsibility of the System Integrator shall
include: familiarization with the existing facility electrical and control systems to be
modified, physical identification and labeling of existing circuits to be modified
under this contract, development of equipment removal, replacement, and
installation plan and schedule, close coordination with facility operations, equipment
manufacturers, other construction trades (especially electrical), and Owner's system
programmer, oversight of controls and instrumentation equipment installation,
wiring, configuration, and commissioning, production of control system as-built
drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. The System Integrator will be
responsible for providing custom manufactured PLC control systems to the
Contractor for installation and be responsible for all PLC/HMI programming; The
System Integrator shall assume responsibility for satisfactory operation ofthe process
instrumentation and controls as an integrated system
D. The System Integrator shall provide all control system components and perform all
programming and configuration services for the Owners existing PLC and SCADA
systems. The System Integrator services are identified separately in the Bid Form.
The System Integrator shall be one of the following pre-qualified firms:
1. Company Name: McKim & Creed
Contact person: Gene Robinson
Phone: 727-442-7196
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401- ]
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
2. Company Name: Rocha Controls
Contact person: Raymond Rocha
Phone: 813-628-5584
3. Company Name: Revere Controls
Contact person: Sean Gucken
Phone: 727-431-2011
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 01660 - Plant Start-Up and Initial Operation
E. Section 01700 - Project Closeout
F. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
G. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds
H. Section 01800 - Training
I. Division 13 - Instrumentation and Control Systems
J. Division 16 - Low-Voltage Electrical Work
1.03 PERMITS AND FEES
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, licenses and inspections required for the work of
this section and pay all charges incidental thereto. The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer all
certificates of inspection and licenses issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 REFERENCES
The work shall conform to applicable provisions of the latest edition or revision of the following
standards, except as modified in this Section.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
D. Instrument Society of America (lSA)
E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
13401-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials and Equipment
The Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment to be
incorporated in the work to the Engineer within 30 days after Award of Contract.
1. The list shall include catalog numbers, cut sheets, diagrams, and other
descriptive data required to demonstrate conformance to the specifications.
Partial lists will not be acceptable.
2. The basis of acceptance will be the manufacturer's published ratings for the
equipment. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of
products specified.
B. Testing and Training
The Contractor shall submit testing procedures, test reports and a training program.
1. Provide a test procedure outline, example operational report, and example
functional test procedures and schedules.
2. Provide a factory test report.
3. Provide an operational acceptance report. The report shall contain a
completed status sheet for each control loop. The report shall be reviewed,
verified, and signed off by the System Integrator.
4. Provide a training program to supplement the equipment manufacturer's
required training for overall system operation, not specific to manufactured
systems. Training shall include operations, configuration, and maintenance
of the control system. Contractor to provide training schedule which
accommodates the use of Contractor-provided Operations and Maintenance
manuals, or provides separate manuals for training attendees. Provide a
minimum (2) 4-hour sessions of training, per site, for six Owner personnel in
each session. Training may be divided into maintenance and operations
categories for Owner convenience.
C. Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings for all equipment, field panels and enclosures.
1. As a minimum, the drawings shall show the fabrication design, internal
equipment arrangement, internal wiring, and external wiring connections.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401-3
PROCESS INSTRUMENT AnON
AND CONTROLS
D.
E.
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
2. Provide panel elementary diagrams. The diagrams shall show all control
functions, power distribution, switched analog signals, and auxiliary devices
such as relays, alarms, fuses, lights, fans, etc.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Provide a power requirement (voltages, currents, phases) and heat dissipation
(maximum BtuJhr) summary for all panels.
4. Panel connection drawings shall show ISA wire tags.
5. Provide any needed installation details to adequately defme the installation of
panels and field components.
Loop Diagrams
Provide loop diagrams for each specified loop. The loop diagrams shall meet the
minimum requirements of ISA S5.4. A diagram(s) shall show the wiring and/or
plumbing for all major components, resistors, diodes, DC power supplies, shield
terminations, tubing, piping, valving, test taps, and other appurtenances for process
connections. Each analog diagram shall tabulate loop impedances. An individual
loop shall be shown on a diagram divided into three areas for identification of
element locations: panel face, back-of-panel, and field. Loop diagrams shall be on
8'l'2 x II-inch or 11 x 17-inch drawings.
1. Provide a description of operation for each loop.
Interconnection Diagrams
Provide electrical and plumbing interconnection diagrams showing all component
and panel connection/terminal identification numbers and external wire numbers.
These diagrams shall include all intermediate terminations (e.g., at terminal junction
blocks and motor control centers).
1. The interconnection diagrams shall be coordinated with other suppliers and
the electrical subcontractor. The electrical subcontractor shall review and
approve the diagrams prior to any submission to the Engineer.
2. The diagrams, device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with
NEMA ICS 1-101.
General Submittal Requirements
1. Each submittal shall be complete, neat, orderly, and bound with a table of
contents and section divider tabs.
2. Each submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the requirements described
in this Section.
13401-4
PROCESS INSTRUMENT AnON
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Equal materials or products may be submitted for approval. Submissions
shall be accompanied with adequate data to demonstrate equality. Equality of
materials or products shall be the decision of the Engineer.
4. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a cover letter describing any
exceptions or deviations from the specifications. Cover letters addressing
resubmitted materials shall also describe any changes which have been made
since the previous submittal and include a brief response to the Engineer's
comments.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. Provide descriptive literature for all equipment provided under this section. The
literature shall include major components, electrical devices, panel materials, panel
components, panel paints and colors, mechanical devices, equipment tags, tubing,
valves, fittings, fasteners, and appurtenances. This descriptive literature shall include
catalog information, external wiring information, dimensional data, and mounting
requirements.
B. Provide data (specification) sheets for all equipment and components. Provide a
separate data sheet for each major component. The data sheets shall show the
"component name", tag numbers, quantities, specific catalog/ordering numbers,
specific features, and special options.
C. Provide components parts list with exact and complete (including options and
accessories) manufacturer's part number. Group the list by the component name
used in these specifications. Group each component type by tag number used in these
specifications. Components without tag numbers shall be grouped by the
manufacturer's part number.
D. Provide a list of recommended spares, spare parts, and expendables with tag number,
part number, unit pricing, and total purchase cost.
E. Provide storage requirements for all components provided under this section.
1.07 CERTIFICATION/DOCUMENTATION
The System Integrator shall verify the calibration and operation of all control and instrumentation
components and shall present written certification of the systems readiness for operation.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Before to final acceptance of this project, the Contractor shall submit an Operation
and Maintenance (O&M) Manual to the Engineer for all components provided under
this section. The manual shall comply with the following:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
13401-5
1. The literature shall have sufficiently detailed descriptions and figures to
facilitate the operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration, and
maintenance of each component to the printed circuit board level.
2. The manual shall include internal wiring and piping diagrams. Termination
designations and wire and pipe numbers shall be clearly shown. Diagrams,
device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1-
101.
3. The manual shall include an updated set of manufacturer's literature, data
sheets, loop descriptions of operations, drawings corrected per shop drawing
review comments and as-built modifications and components parts list.
4. Instructions and parts lists shall have been prepared for the specific
equipment furnished.
5. List of suppliers and/or service shops that can provide parts and accessories
and equipment repair for the components provided under this section. The
list shall include a contact name, telephone number and address.
B. The Contractor shall provide one as-built set of Record Drawings on CD ROM
diskettes in Autocad "DWG" or "DXF" format, consisting of the following:
1. Process and instrumentation diagrams.
2. Loop diagrams.
3. Panel elementary diagrams.
4. Interconnecting wiring diagrams.
1.09 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
A. The general arrangement of the instruments, controls and monitoring systems are
shown on the drawings and specified in this Section. The location of all sensors,
transmitters, indicators, etc., shall be as shown on the plans and/or as indicated in this
Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for all detail installation drawings
showing wiring, tubing, piping, etc., and shall be responsible for furnishing all
devices required for a complete and functioning system.
B. This project involves several complete control system packages which are part of the
overall treatment system. These systems are to be installed at two of the Owners
wastewater treatment facilities while the facilities maintain their treatment processes.
All electrical and control system work requires the careful coordination of the
electrical contractor and System Integrator to assure seamless system integration and
overall system functionality in order to maintain operations of the treatment facility
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401-6
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
during the construction and commissioning phase of the project.
C.
New chemical storage and delivery systems are to be installed at the Owner's
treatment facilities as indicated on the contract drawings. During the construction of
the chemical feed system, the temporary chemical storage and feed systems shall
remain in operation at all times until the new chemical feed system is complete,
operational, and accepted by the Owner. Under no circumstances the chlorination
and dechlorination processes can be disrupted and the Contractor shall be responsible
for any permit violation in performing his Work The electrical contractor and
System Integrator shall work closely with the temporary chemical storage and feed
systems supplier during the decommissioning and removal of the temporary storage
and feed systems.
D.
In addition to the packaged control systems, several system parameters will be
monitored on the existing plant-wide SCADA system. The System Integrator shall
be responsible for delivery of this data to the existing plant Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLCs). The Contractor shall provide all necessary hardware including
wiring, terminal blocks, relays, PLC modules, power supplies, surge arrestors, or any
other electrical equipment necessary for connection of these systems to the plant
SCADA system. The digital interfaces between the equipment control systems and
the plant SCADA system shall be accomplished through the use of several
interposing relays, supplied under this contract, and installed in the equipment
vendor's control panel. These relays shall be wired to the contractor-furnished digital
input modules as indicated on the plans. Analog signals are to be wired to
contractor-furnished analog input modules.
E.
The work requires the Contractor to provide and install control panels, PLC
equipment, terminal blocks and interposing relays and make wiring terminations in
existing control panels, MCC's, and I/O cabinets as outlined in the drawings.
F.
Chlorine Dosing
1. Control of the chlorine dosing will be achieved with a compound loop control
strategy implemented in the existing plant control PLC, with control and
monitoring functionality in the Owners existing SCADA system. The
plant's existing PLC will control the chemical dosing of the treated water.
Existing flow and chlorine residual signals in the plant's PLC system will be
used to configure the compound loop control. The Contractor shall verify the
flow and chlorine residual signals before installation.
2. Normal Automatic Operation: The compound control loop will monitor
chlorine residual from the existing chlorine analyzer at the tail end of the
chlorine contact chamber and the flow from the existing flow meter, and will
adjust the chemical feed setpoint sent to the chlorine feed system based on
proportional and integral control techniques using the flow signal as the
13401-7
PROCESS INSTRUMENT AnON
AND CONTROLS
G.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
biasing factor with a time delay function to account for inherent system
latency.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Operator Setpoint Operation: The operator shall have the ability to select this
control mode from the Chemical Feed HMI screen on the existing SCADA
computer. The system programmer will modify the existing HMI screen, or
develop a new screen for this purpose. In this control mode, an operator has
the ability to select a 0-100% feed setpoint which is sent via the plant PLC to
the chlorine feed system. The chlorine feed system will feed chlorine at this
fixed setpoint until it is changed by the plant operator, or until the system is
shut down, or the system is placed in automatic operation by the plant
operator.
4. East Plant Operation: Unique to the East treatment plant is a second existing
chlorine residual analyzer located at the front end of the chlorine contact
chamber. The signal from this analyzer shall be used as a feeder limiting
function inside the chlorine compound loop controller. The chlorine loop
controller compares the measured chlorine at this sensor with an operator
entered High Chlorine Feed Limit Setpoint, and limits the feeder setpoint sent
to the chlorine feed system to avoid an overdosing condition. The Contractor
shall verify the flow and chlorine analyzer signals before installation.
Sulfite Dosing
1. The sulfite dosing scheme will operate in a similar manner to the chlorine
dosing, utilizing existing flow and chlorine signals, to dose the sulfite in a
directly proportional relationship to flow, and an inverse relationship to the
measured chlorine residual. The Contractor shall verify the flow and chlorine
analyzer signals before installation.
2. East Plant Operation: The East treatment plant accepts treated water from the
Northeast treatment plant and mixes the two flows before to the
dechlorination contact chamber. Flow and chlorine residual measurements
exist in the plant PLC for both East and Northeast plants. These signals will
be combined to produce the necessary inputs for the East plant sulfite
compound loop controller.
a. Flow - the flow input to the compound loop controller is the addition of
the Northeast and East plant flows.
b. Chlorine Residual - the chlorine residual input to the compound loop
controller is the calculated chlorine residual based on the measured flows
and chlorine residuals as follows:
Cj = ~ X F!! + C~ x F~
Fn + Fe
13401-8
PROCESS INSTRUMENT AnON
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Where:
Cj is cWorine residual to the compound loop controller
Cn is measured cWorine residual for Northeast
Ce is measured cWorine residual for East
Fn is measured flow for Northeast
Fe is measured flow for East
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and equipment with manufacturer's tags and labels and UL labels
intact. Deliver packaged material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers
bearing manufacturer's name, brand, and UL label.
B. Throughout this Contract, the Contractor shall provide suitable protection for
materials and equipment against loss or damage and the effects of weather and the
construction environment. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of
materials and equipment until the acceptance of equipment by the Owner.
C. Before to installation, store material and equipment indoors in a dry, clean location.
Handle and store so as to avoid damage. Heat storage areas which contain items
subject to corrosion under damp conditions.
D. Turn off power to panels and equipment and close and cover control panels and
equipment during any dusty construction to prevent degradation of operation or
service life.
E. Follow manufacturers' installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated.
Wherever any conflict arises between the manufacturers' instructions and these
Contract Documents, follow the Engineer's decision at no additional cost to the
Owner. Keep a copy of the manufacturers' installation instructions on the job site
and available for review at all times.
F. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Before to
fmal inspection and testing and upon completion of the work, remove materials,
scraps, and debris from the premises and from the interior and exterior of all devices
and equipment.
G. Touch up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and
equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, and
consistency of the original finish.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401-9
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
1.11 WARRANTY
A. All work, equipment, and materials supplied shall be warranted against defective
design, materials and workmanship for a period of one year. The warranty period
shall begin at the time of project completion and acceptance by the Owner.
B. The warranty shall cover replacement equipment and/or repair, including labor, travel
time and miscellaneous expenses, at no cost to the Owner for the full warranty
period.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The manufacturer(s) and/or supplier(s) shall have regularly engaged in the
manufacture of major components and/or assembly or instrumentation and control
systems of the type and scope required for this project for a minimum of five years.
B. It is recognized that one manufacturer may not make all the equipment required and
specified under this section. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure
that the various manufacturers and equipment suppliers are coordinated in providing
the equipment needed to perform the specified functions. The Contractor shall
ensure that they are fully aware and understand the requirements of the system.
2.02 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide the functions described under paragraph 1.10, System Overview. Major
components and equipment items to implement these functions are specified under
paragraph 2.03, Component Specifications. All components and items of equipment
that are necessary, whether indicated or not, to effect the required functions and
performance shall be provided. In general and unless otherwise noted, corrosion-
resistant materials such as 316 stainless steel shall be used. Working pressures,
spans, and other ratings shall be selected to best fit the application. All like
equipment shall be of the same manufacture.
B. Whenever any material or product is indicated by patent or proprietary name, by
name of manufacturer, or by catalog number, such specifications shall be deemed to
be used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and expanding the
description of the material or product desired. Materials and products equal to named
material or product may be provided with Engineer's approval.
C. All equipment furnished under this section of the specifications shall be new and
unused and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer having a minimum of five
years successful experience in the manufacture of the equipment. Wherever possible,
equipment having the same or similar rated capacity or function shall be identical.
Equipment shall be of the manufacturer's most current and proven design.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
13401-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
F.
G.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
D.
The design of the instrumentation and control system is based on the equipment and
components specified in this Section. If more than one manufacturer is noted, the
first named is the basis for design where there are differences. Should the Contractor
select equipment which changes the design basis, the Contractor shall obtain
approval from the Engineer and make all approved changes at no additional cost to
the Owner.
Electrical Transient Protection: All instrumentation and control equipment shall be
equipped with suitable surge-arresting devices to protect the equipment from damage
due to electrical transients induced in the interconnecting lines by lightning
discharges or by nearby electrical devices.
1. Voltage surge and transient protectors for both power and analog field
circuits shall be provided on the field end and destination end of the circuits.
a. Analog circuits shall be protected by EDCO SS Series suppressors.
b. All instrument 120 volt power and signal circuits shall be protected
by EDCO SLAC Series suppressor.
2. The devices shall be connected to the system ground. Total resistance of the
ground circuit from the device to the driven ground rod shall not exceed
0.1 ohm.
Signal Characteristics
1. Analog signals shall be 4 to 20 mA DC and shall conform to the
compatibility requirements on SA Standard S50.1. Unless otherwise noted,
circuits shall be Type 2 two-wire. Transmitters shall have a load resistance
capability conforming to Class L. Transmitters and receivers shall be fully
isolated.
2. Discrete signals are two-state logic signals of two types. Control signals shall
use 120 V AC sources. Alarm signals that interface directly with an
annunciator shall use less than 30 VDC sources. All alarm signals shall be
"normally open, close to alarm" isolated contacts rated for 5 amperes at
120 V AC and 2 amperes at 30 VDC.
Environmental Conditions
1. Unconditioned air: 20 to 105 of, 10 to 100% humidity, subject to wash down
or rain, corrosive (assume marine salts and H2S as a minimum), and
nonhazardous. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X.
2. Other conditions as noted or approved.
13401-11
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
I.
J.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
H.
Nameplates, Name Tags and Service Legends: All field and panel mounted
components provided under this section shall be provided with permanently mounted
name tags indicating the entire ISA tag number of the component.
1. Panel mounted tags shall be engraved plastic. Field mounted tags shall be
stamped 16-gauge 316 stainless steel with 3/16-inch high characters.
2. Nameplates shall be inscribed to identify the component listed and mounted
near a panel face mounted instrument.
3. Service legends shall be integrally mounted on a panel mounted instrument.
Unless otherwise noted, service legends shall be engraved with the functional
explanation.
4. Nameplates and service legends shall be engraved, rigid, laminated plastic
plates attached to enclosure with stainless steel screws maintaining NEMA
rating of enclosure. Unless otherwise noted, plate color shall be black with
3/16-inch high white lettering. Panel nameplates shall have 112-inch high
lettering.
Colors and Inscriptions: Unless otherwise noted, the following inscription and color
code shall be used for all push buttons and indicating light lenses: ON, green; OFF,
red; OPEN, green; CLOSED, red; AUTO, white; MANUAL, yellow; START, red;
STOP, green; RESET, red; TEST, black; ACKNOWLEDGE, green; and READY,
blue. All unused or noninscribed buttons shall be black.
1. Lettering shall be black on white, amber, or yellow. Lettering shall be white
on black, red, blue, or green.
Relays
1. Digital signal switching relays shall be provided for switching AC or DC
based on application need. The relays shall have double-throw dry circuit
contacts in a break-before-make configuration rated for 15 VA minimum.
The relays shall be sealed to prevent dust, dirt, or moisture contamination.
Relays shall be UL recognized and shall be Potter and Brumfield KUP or
KUL Series or Struthers-Dunn Series 219.
2. Control circuit switching relays shall be rated for not less than 2 amperes at
120 V AC or 28 VDC.
3. All relay connections shall have a screw terminal interface with the wiring.
Terminals shall have a permanent, legible identification and shall be mounted
such that terminal identifications are clearly visible and the terminals are
readily accessible.
13401-12
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
K.
Power Supplies: Provide DC power supplies as required to power instruments
requiring external DC power.
1. Power supplies shall convert 120 V AC power to DC power of the appropriate
voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that
the instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances.
2. Output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices shall be provided with
the power supply to protect the instruments from damage due to power supply
failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure.
3. Each power supply shall be provided with a NEMA 1 enclosure for mounting
within other enclosures. Power supplies shall be mounted such that
dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components.
Wiring: All electrical wiring and wiring identification shall be in accordance with
the applicable requirements of Section 16401, Low-Voltage Electrical Work -
General Requirements.
1. Wires shall be 600-volt class, pve insulated stranded copper.
2. Wiring for 120 volt circuits and signals shall be sized as required for the
current to be carried, but not smaller than 14 A W G if enclosed in sheet metal
raceway or plastic wiring duct. Wiring for signal circuits shall be twisted
shielded pairs (TSP) not smaller than 16 A WG. Analog signals shall be
separated from any power wiring by at least 6 inches.
3. All interconnecting wires to other enclosures shall be terminated at numbered
terminal blocks. All external connections shall be to numbered terminal
blocks. All connections for future functions shall be wired to numbered
terminal blocks.
a. Terminal blocks shall be grouped to keep circuits of different voltages
separate. Provide sufficient terminal blocks for all functions required,
all spare annunciator points, and all spare conductors plus 15 percent
spare.
b. Terminal blocks shall be one-piece molded plastic blocks with screw-
type terminals and barriers rated for 300 volts. Terminals shall be
double sided and supplied with removable covers which prevent
accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent,
legible identification, clearly visible with protective cover removed.
c. Wires shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp-type,
preinsulated, ring-tongue lugs. Lugs shall be the appropriate size for
13401-13
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
size of the terminal block screws and the size and number of wires
terminated.
4. All analog signal wiring shall be TSP with tie points at terminal blocks.
Provide external dropping resistors or diodes to allow removal of an
instrument from the loop without opening the circuit.
5. Shield connections shall only be made at terminal blocks. No splicing shall
be permitted. Shield wires shall be dressed with heat-shrink tubing. Ground
signal shields at control panels only (not field devices).
6. Enclosures shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturer's
Association, NEMA-3R, unless otherwise noted. Construction shall be of
316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. Minimum metal thickness shall be
14 gauge. Where practical, enclosures shall be manufactured by Hoffman or
H.F. Cox.
a. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with a continuous hinge.
b. Panels mounted outside or in unheated areas shall be provided with
thermostatically controlled heaters that will maintain the panel inside
temperature above 40 of.
c. Panel shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by
equipment in or on the panel.
d. Provide a breaker protected 120 volt, 15 amp duplex receptacle
within the panel.
2.03 ADDITIONS TO THE EXISTING IN-PLANT SCADA SYSTEM
A. Hardware Requirements:
The contractor is to provide chemical feed system PLC control panels at each facility
to accommodate the I/O requirements of this contract. The PLC control panels shall
include, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following hardware:
1. NEMA 4X free standing control panels.
2. Operator interface terminal, CTC industrial touchscreen monitor.
3. SLC5/04 controllers, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, no exceptions.
4. SLC I/O Analog and Digital Input and Output Modules, as manufactured by
Allen Bradley, no exceptions.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401 - 14
PROCESS INSTRUMENT AnON
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
5. va Module faceplate labeling shall be included to match existing type and
style of va module labeling.
6. Interconnection cables, as required by the application, and as dictated by the
existing installation. Provide cable labeling of same style of existing va
cables, and indicate cable numbers on as-built drawings.
7. Relays, power supplies, surge arrestors, din rail, wireway, back panels,
terminal blocks, circuit breakers, fuses, UPS's, and other hardware necessary
for a complete chemical feed control system.
8. All mounting hardware as required by application.
Configuration and Programming Requirements:
1. The existing plant SCADA system shall be modified to include the new PLC
va points being added to the plant-wide SCADA system. HMI databases
must be modified to include the new va points. Database entries shall
include equipment descriptions to match PLC point descriptions and shall
utilize P&ID drawing equipment numbers for data point identification tags.
a. HMI screens shall be created to reflect the status and alarm data for
the chemical feed systems. In addition, existing HMI screens shall be
modified to include data and alarms from the new equipment.
b. Modify any existing HMI screens depicting the equipment removed
under this contract.
c. A new HMI screen, titled "Sodium Hypochlorite", shall be created
depicting a system overview similar to the P&ID drawings of that
system. Include on this screen Metering Pumps, Sodium
Hypochlorite Chemical Storage Tanks, and all chemical feed system
handling data as required under this contract.
d. A new HMI screen, titled "Sodium Bisulfite", shall be created
depicting a system overview similar to the P&ID drawings of that
system. Include on this screen Metering Pumps, Sodium Bisulfite
Storage Tanks, and all chemical feed system handling data as required
under this contract.
e. Graphics on the new HMI screens shall match existing HMI screens
in type, background, font, icon color conventions, and interface
functionality. Provide shortcuts (or links) to these screens from any
system overview screens, menu bar buttons, or other pertinent
locations within the HMI system.
13401-15
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
f. Modify existing alarm database points, alarm summary screens, and
alarm event logs to display alarm events indicated on project plans.
g. Modify existing event logs to record operations data; to include as a
minimum: pump run times, channel levels, motor starts, and
equipment states such as hand or auto.
h. Provide documentation of all new and modified HMI files (database
listing, screen captures, and program code listings).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
The Contractor shall lay out the work and be responsible for necessary lines, levels, elevations and
measurements. Installations shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 16401, Low
Voltage Electrical Work - General Requirements. The drawings indicate extent and general
arrangement of the components. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with work of other trades
engaged in the construction. Exact routing of raceways, piping and locations of equipment may be
governed by structural conditions and obstructions. The Contractor shall coordinate with the details
of equipment shop drawings for connections to equipment furnished by others. This is not to be
construed to permit redesigning systems.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Comply with referenced standards, National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code,
local codes and rules and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction. Size of conductors,
circuit breakers, motor controllers and protective devices indicated or specified shall meet all
requirements of the NEC.
3.03 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
The installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer and/or supplier of the instrumentation and
control systems. The installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing instrumentation
and control systems of a similar type and scope.
3.04 WORKMANSHIP
A. General
1. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen
skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished
appearance.
2. Coordinate the work with the Owner, the Contractor, and the work of other
trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401-16
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Electrical Power and Signal Wiring
1. Control and signal wiring in enclosures and racks shall be restrained by
plastic ties or ducts. Hinge wiring shall be secured at each end so that any
bending or twisting will to be around the longitudinal axis of the wire and the
bend area shall be protected with a sleeve.
2. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire.
Provide abrasion protection for any wire bundles which pass through holes or
across edges of sheet metal.
3. Use the manufacturer's recommended tool with the proper sized anvil, for all
crimp terminations. No more than one wire shall be terminated in a single
crimp lug and no more than two lugs shall be installed on a single-screw
terminal.
4. Wiring shall not be spliced or tapped except at device terminals or terminal
blocks. All devices with pig-tail wiring shall terminate on terminal blocks
within or near the device.
5. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at
any time by the Engineer. Correct any work, materials, or equipment not in
accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or
defective. Corrections shall be made in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer
at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.05 TESTING
A. General: All elements of the instrumentation and control system shall be tested to
demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this specification.
1. All testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, the Contractor
shall provide a suitable means of simulation. These simulation techniques
shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall have an updated set of drawings and specifications, a
master copy of approved test procedures, and the master copy of current test
failures and solutions to test failures.
3. Testing will not to be considered complete until all portions of the test have
been approved by the Engineer. If a test or a portion of a test fails to the
point where it needs to be rescheduled at a later date, the additional testing
cost shall be borne by the Contractor.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
13401-17
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
B.
Factory Testing: The components shall be tested with simulated inputs and outputs at
the factory. Factory tests shall generally conform to the applicable sections of ISA
RP55.1.
C.
Operational Acceptance Testing: The objective ofthese tests is to demonstrate that
each portion of the instrumentation and control system is ready for operation.
1. All components of the system shall be checked for proper installation,
adjusted, and calibrated on a loop-by-Ioop basis.
2. All elements shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly
and that all terminations have been made correctly. All pneumatic tubing
shall be tested in accordance with ISA procedure RP7.1.
3. All discrete elements and systems shall have their set points adjusted and
shall be checked for proper operation.
4. All continuous elements and systems shall have three-point calibrations
performed. All controller tuning constants shall be adjusted to preliminary
settings.
5. The Contractor shall prepare operational acceptance test status report sheets
for each loop listing the checks and adjustments performed and the
calibration points actually set. Copies of completed status report sheets shall
be submitted before to final acceptance.
Functional Acceptance Testing: The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that
the instrumentation and control system is operating and complying with the specified
performance requirements.
1. Each loop function shall be demonstrated to the Engineer in accordance with
approved test procedures. Each loop shall be signed off by both the
Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion.
2. A test date may be set after the testing submittal has been approved and pre-
test training has been completed.
3. No modifications shall be made to the system during the functional
acceptance test period except as required to maintain Owner operations. The
test shall not interrupt normal operations unless approved by the Owner.
4. If a test fails to produce the expected results, minimal time shall be spent to
determine the cause and take corrective action. Construction shall not
interfere with the tests unless approved by the Engineer.
13401-18
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. All failed tests shall be retested until the result complies with the
specifications and/or is acceptable to the Engineer and Owner.
6. At the end of the test, a punch list will be provided to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall then determine the cause of the failure, correct the
deficiency, and report to the Engineer why the test failed and the corrective
action taken. The Engineer will then determine if the function needs to be
retested and determine any other tests which may be required.
7. Within 10 working days from the end of a test period or retest period, a
formal punch list will be transmitted to the Contractor. The Contractor shall
submit a single test report for the test period and reschedule retesting.
Retesting shall be scheduled for not less than one week after the Engineer
receives the test report and the retest dates shall be acceptable to all.
3.06 ON-SITE SUPERVISION
A. The System Integrator shall supervise and coordinate installation, adjustment, testing,
training, and startup of the instrumentation and control system.
B. The Contractor shall provide additional startup and testing assistance by engineers
and programmers as required to thoroughly check all of the equipment and perform
all operational and functional tests required.
C. The System Integrator shall be specifically trained on the type of equipment specified
and shall advise the Contractor in the location and method of installing special cable,
mounting, pipe and wiring of each type of device utilized on the project. The System
Integrator shall supervise the calibration, commissioning and initial start-up of the
instrumentation and control system. A signed and dated calibration sticker shall be
affixed to each new and re-calibrated instrument.
3.07 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one 8-hour day on-site training per site
for the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel at the job site before to
functional acceptance testing.
B. The training program shall include classroom and field instruction by the System
Integrator or other experienced and knowledgeable technicians/engineers on the
operation and maintenance of the instrumentation and control elements, components,
and systems provided.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Docwnents
13401-19
PROCESS INSTRUMENT A nON
AND CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13402
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
This section includes provisions for the supply and installation of instrumentation and controls
used to measure, monitor, and control process parameters as shown on the contract drawings and
specified herein. The process control system shall consist of a complete process chemical
control and monitoring system to be interfaced with the treatment facilities existing SCADA
systems. Requirements for the instrumentation and PLC-Based control panels are among the
equipment to be provided within the scope of the project.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 1 of these specifications is a part of this section as if incorporated in this
Section.
B. Section 13401 - Process Instrumentation and Controls
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to
establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following:
A. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and
identifications of material of construction.
B.
Installation manual
C.
Detailed drawings and schematics showing the equipment dimensions, size, and
locations of connections.
D.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminal numbers.
E.
Manufacturer's certificates
F.
Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions III
accordance with Section 01730
G.
Warranty information for each item.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-1
1.04 REFERENCES
Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in
accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations.
A. UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142 for Dielectric Withstand
B. NEMA Standard ICS-230 for Noise Immunity and Showering Arc Levels
C. IEEE Std. 472-1974/ANSI C37.90/90A-1974 for Surge Withstand Capability
D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
E. American Water Works Association (A WW A)
F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above, or other organizations, the version of
the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This specification covers the instrumentation used to measure and monitor parameters within the
wastewater plant. The system shall be complete with all necessary components for a functional
system, including sensors, sensor holder, flow meter, mounting brackets, and all required cables
and spare parts.
1.06 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. The equipment and approved manufacturer or approved equal shall be listed. The
system shall be complete with all necessary components for a functional system,
including sensor, sensor mounting hardware, instrument meter, meter mounting
hardware, and all manufacturer recommended cables and spare parts.
B. The following PLC-based control panels, complete with all necessary power
supplies, circuit breakers, terminal blocks, pilot lights, etc:
1. Marshall Street
2. East APCF
C.
The following is a summary of the required instrumentation:
Instrumentation at Marshall Street APCF Tal{
Chlorine Tank 1 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-121
Chlorine Tank 1 Level Transmitter LIT-121
Chlorine Tank 2 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-122
Chlorine Tank 2 Level Transmitter LIT-122
Chlorine Tank 3 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-123
Chlorine Tank 3 Level Transmitter LIT-123
Chlorine Tank 4 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-124
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
INSTRUMENT ATlON & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
Chlorine Tank 4 Level Transmitter LIT-I 24
Chlorine Tank 5 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-125
Chlorine Tank 5 Level Transmitter LIT-I 25
Pre Filter Chlorine Flow Sensor FE-I26
Pre Filter Chlorine Flow Transmitter/Totalizer FIT-I 26
Chlorine Contact Chamber Chlorine Flow I Sensor FE-128
Chlorine Contact Chamber Chlorine Flow I Transmitter/Totalizer FIT -128
Chlorine Contact Chamber Chlorine Flow II Sensor FE-13 1
Chlorine Contact Chamber Chlorine Flow II Transmitter/Totalizer FIT-13 1
Re-use Chlorine Flow Sensor FE-130
Re-use Chlorine Flow Transmitter/Totalizer FIT-13 0
Bisulfite Tank 1 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-13 1
Bisulfite Tank 1 Level Transmitter LIT -131
Bisulfite Tank 2 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-132
Bisulfite Tank 2 Level Transmitter LIT -132
Bisulfite Tank 3 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-I33
Bisulfite Tank 3 Level Transmitter LIT-133
De-chlorination Bisulfite Flow Sensor FE-204
De-chlorination Bisulfite Flow Transmitter/Totalizer FIT-204
Contact Chamber Chlorine Residual Meter Existing
Contact Chamber Effluent Flow I Meter Existing;
Effluent Pump Station Ultrasonic Sensor FE-238
Effluent Pump Station Flow Transmitter FIT-238
Instrumentation at East APCF Tal!
Chlorine Tank 1 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-201
Chlorine Tank 1 Level Transmitter LIT-201
Chlorine Tank 2 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-202
Chlorine Tank 2 Level Transmitter LIT-202
Chlorine Tank 3 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-203
Chlorine Tank 3 Level Transmitter LIT-203
Pre Filter Chlorine Flow Sensor FE-204
Pre Filter Chlorine Flow Transmitter/Totalizer FIT-204
Chlorine Contact Chamber Chlorine Flow Sensor FE-206
Chlorine Contact Chamber Chlorine Flow Transmitter/Totalizer FIT-206
Bisulfite Tank 1 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-2I1
Bisulfite Tank 1 Level Transmitter LIT-211
Bisulfite Tank 2 Ultrasonic Level Sensor LE-212
Bisulfite Tank 2 Level Transmitter LIT-212
De-chlorination Bisulfite Flow Sensor FE-215
De-chlorination Bisulfite Flow Transmitter FIT-215
Chlorine Contact Chamber Influent Chlorine Meter Existing
Chlorine Contact Chamber Effluent Chlorine Meter (East Plant Chlor) Existing;
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-3
Chlorine Contact Chamber Effluent Flow Meter (East Plant Flow) Existing
Northeast Plant Flow Meter Existing
Northeast Plant Chlorine Residual Existing
De-chlorination Chamber Effluent Chlorine Meter Existing
D. FIT-238: Provide extended PVC pipe stilling well as required by contract
drawings. Still well shall be integrally mounted to pipe flange used for ultrasonic
sensor mounting. Stilling well shall extend from mounting flange, through pump
concrete deck, and a minimum of 2" below flow weir elevation. The sensor shall
be properly calibrated to measure the flow, i.e., when the measured level is below
the weir elevation, the flow should be zero.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
A.
All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a
manufacturer experienced in manufacturing analytical equipment used to
accurately measure parameters that are monitored in wastewater and chemical
applications, and shall be standard units of proven reliability as manufactured by a
competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the
manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
constructed and installed in accordance with the industry best practices and
methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed.
B.
All equipment provided under this Section shall be obtained from suppliers or
manufacturers who shall assume full responsibility for the completeness and
proper operation of the measurement systems.
C.
All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be
the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of
manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a
minimum of five (5) years.
D.
The manufacturer shall supply five separate references, with contact names and
phone numbers, where substantially similar installations for the equipment as
specified has been in satisfactory operation for a minimum of five years.
E.
These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is
required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact
requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover
the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all
materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the
proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather,
humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty information for each item with submittals.
B. The Manufacturer shall warrant the unit to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship and to be suitable for the applications specified in these
specifications.
C. The Manufacturer's warranty shall consist of repair or replacement of defective
products for a period of five years, starting at the date of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MANUFACTURERS
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
A.
Programmable Controller:
1 General:
a Function: Processor with communication ports.
b Type: Capable of initiating communication
c Parts: Processor, power supply, battery, I/O chassis, I/O modules
and cabling.
2 Processor Features:
a Central Processing Unit (CPU): Processor: 16 bit, minimum
b Memory:
1) User Logic: 16 K words
2) Data: 24 Kbytes
c Scan Time: Less than 1 msec per 1000 words
3 Communication:
Communication ports as necessary to interface with existing plant PLC
network
a Ports:
1) One (1) RJ-45
2) One (1) RS-232
b Protocols
1) Data Highway (DH-485), DFl, ASCII
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-5
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
4
Diagnostics:
a As a minimum, the CPU shall monitor the following system
failures:
1) Memory Failure
2) Input/Output subsystem error
3) Watchdog timer time out.
b Upon failure detection, the CPU shall provide a discrete output.
Programming:
a Programming Language: Ladder Logic
b Minimum Basic Operations:
1) Binary logic operation
2) Timers and counters
3) Shift registers
4) Drum sequencers.
c Enhanced Operations:
1) Four-function integer math
2) Word shift registers
3) Word compare
4) Word move
5) Two (2) PID controllers, as a minimum
Data Input/Output:
a Discrete Input:
1) Quantity: 16 Inputs
2) Type: AC
3) Nominal Operating Voltage: 120V ac
4) Status Indication: LED
b Discrete Output:
1) Quantity: 16 Outputs
2) Type: Relay, rated 8.0 amperes continuous at 120V ac.
3) Nominal Operating Voltage: 120V ac
4) Status Indication: LED
c Analog Input, Differential:
1) Signal Quantity: 8 Inputs
2) Type: 4 -20 mA
3) Isolation:
a) Between Channels: 200 V dc for 1 minute
b) Between Channel and Ground: 1780V ac for 1
minute
4) Resolution: 12 bit, minimum
5) Status Indication: LED
d Analog Output, Differential:
1) Signal Quantity: 4 Outputs
2) Type: 4 -20 mA
3) Isolation:
a) Between Channels: 200 V dc for 1 minute
b) Between Channel and Ground: 1780V ac for 1
minute
4) Resolution: 12 bit, minimum
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5
6
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
5) Status Indication: LED
e VO Point Quantity:
1) Provide digital inputs as required, plus 10 percent wired
spare
2) Provide analog inputs as required, plus 10 percent wired
spare
3) Provide digital outputs as require, plus 10 percent wired
spare
4) Provide analog outputs required, plus 10 percent wired
spare
7 Environmental Requirements:
a Mount each PLC, its power supply, and VO modules inside the
specified control panels or as shown on the Drawings.
b General Specifications
1) Operating Temperature: 0 to 45 degrees C
2) Humidity: 5 to 95 percent, non-condensing
8 Power Supply: PLC equipment shall operate on 120V ac, plus or minus 10
percent, single phase, 60-Hz, plus or minus 0.5-Hz power.
9 Spare Parts:
a Provide one spare processor unit for each unique processor
installed.
b Provide one spare VO module for each unique VO module type
installed
c Provide one spare VO chassis for each chassis installed
d Provide one spare power supply for each power supply installed
10 Manufacturer and Product:
a Allen Bradley SLC 5/04 Processor with Series 1746 VO System.
B.
15" Industrial Touchscreen Monitor
1 15" XGA (1024 x 768), 200 nits minimum
2 Panel mount installation
3 Video image autosizing for lower resolutions
4 Analog resistive touchscreen
5 Serial touchscreen interface
6 Interface cable of sufficient length to connect to PLC'
7 Video frequency detect
8 24 VDC or 120V AC
9 On-screen display control
10 Rear button control for on-screen display
11 Field replaceable bulbs
12 Configuration software CD
13 Operators manual
14 Manufacturer and Product:
a CTC Power Station
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-7
C.
D.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
Uninterruptible Power Supply (Small, less than 5 kV A):
1. Provide UPS power units withing PLC control panels. This
Specification applies for units rated less than 5 kV A.
2. UPS units larger than 5 k V A are supplied under Division 16,
ELECTRICAL.
3. Each UPS shall be true on-line UPS that meets the following
specifications:
a. Rating: As shown.
b. Input/Output Voltage: 120V ac, single-phase. Provide
six 120V output receptacles.
c. Backup Time: Minimum 12 minutes of rated power
output, on failure of input power.
d. Output Waveform: Pure sine wave, not to exceed 5
percent THD.
e. Output Frequency: 60 plus or minus 0.15 Hz on battery.
When on ac line, track the input frequency.
f. Safety: UL listed, FCC Class A.
g. Efficiency: 95 percent online.
h. Environment: 32 degrees F to 113 degrees F, relative
humidity 0 to 95 percent (noncondensing).
1. Audible Noise: 38 to 42 dB at one meter.
J. Battery: As required to meet backup time requirements.
k. Battery Charger: Temperature compensated. Typical
recharge time to 85 percent is 7 to 12 hours.
l. Crest Factor: 3 to 1.
4. Manufacturer:
a. Best Ferrups Series "FE" with ratings as shown.
b. Or approved equal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter (Chemical Bulk Storage Tanks)
1. Ultrasonic level sensors are to be installed in the top of the chemical bulk
storage tanks and connected via a manufacturer supplied sensor cable to
the level transmitter located in the filling station transmitter panel located
outside of the chemical building.
2. The unit shall be an ultrasonic type, continuous level measuring system
consisting of a level element (sensor), transmitter with LCD display, fill
station transmitter panel, cable for connection from level element to
transmitter and integrated temperature sensor for time-of- flight correction.
3. Level element shall be ultrasonic type transducer. The transducer shall be
of waterproof construction with operating range of -20 to +50 degree C at
1 atmosphere unless otherwise noted.
4. All components of the ultrasonic level senor shall be made of material
with chemical resistance to (12%) sodium hypochlorite and (40%) sodium
bisulfite.
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICA nONS
13402-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
15.
5.
The level signal of each bulk chemical storage tank shall be displayed on
the LCD panel at their respective filling station and at the SCADA
computer.
6.
A high and a low alarms shall sound at preset high and low level in each
tank.
7.
Level measurement system shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus
0.25 percent of full scale and shall operate on 120volt ac, 60 Hz power
8.
The measuring range shall be, at a minimum, 14 feet with a blocking
distance of no more than 1 foot.
9.
The PVDF sensor shall be hermetically welded for chemical resistance.
10.
The sensor shall be capable of remote installation location from
transmitter up to 1,000 ft without signal degradation.
11.
Transmitter shall contain solid state programmable controls to operate
transducer and to provide a 4 to 20 mA dc output signal in linear
proportion to the level being sensed. Transmitter shall be provided with
high contrast 4 digit 18mm LCD display and five (5) LEDs to indicate
alarm conditions. Transmitter range and beam configuration shall be
compatible with the bulk storage tanks specified. Transmitter shall be
mounted in the appropriate tank filling station transmitter panel as
indicated on project drawings.
12.
Transmitter shall provide five (5) discrete outputs, adjustable over the
entire scale range. At the noted set point, unit shall transfer SPDT
contacts which shall be rated for 5 amperes, continuous, at 120V ac. Set
points shall be screwdriver adjustable from inside the enclosure and shall
be repeatable within plus or minus Y4 percent of full scale.
13.
Provide transient surge protection for the incoming 120V AC and DC
transmitter signals. Transient surge protection shall be mounted within the
filling station transmitter panel.
14.
Filling station transmitter panel shall be a rugged, lockable, watertight,
dust-tight, corrosion resistant (NEMA 4X and IP65) 316 stainless steel
enclosure suitable for conduit connections. The enclosure shall include a
clear polycarbonate window for viewing the LCD transmitter displays
without opening the enclosure.
Manufacturers:
a. Milltronics
INSTRUMENT AnON & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-9
I
E. Magnetic Flow Meter (Chemical Flow) I
1. The magnetic flow sensors are to be installed at each chemical pump skid I
discharge line to indicate the chemical flow to specific process points, and
connected via a manufacturer supplied sensor cable to the wall-mount I
transmitter to be located adjacent to the chemical pump skid.
2. The flow signal of each flow meter shall be displayed locally on the pump
skid control panel and at the SCADA computer. I
3. The flow meter shall be suitable for measuring, indicating and transmitting I
chemical process flow in a full pipe. Meter must be a full bore meter with
the magnetic field traversing the entire cross-section of the flow tube.
Insert magmeters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool I
piece are not acceptable. The flow meter consists of a flow tube,
interconnection cable, and transmitter with LCD display and integral
keypad. I
4. The flow transmitter shall indicate flow rate and totalize in the forward
direction, as well as transmit a flow signal from separate terminals. I
The nominal diameter of the flow tube shall be 2 inches.
5.
6. The sensor shall be capable of remote installation from transmitter up to I
330 feet without signal degradation.
7. The sensor shall be of waterproof construction with operating range of -40 I
to +70 degree.
8. The flow transmitter shall have an input impedance of 1012 ohms. I
9. The flow transmitter shall include bi-directional isolated, internally I
powered 4 - 20mA outputs from separate terminals into a maximum load
of 800 Ohms. A scaleable pulse frequency output shall be available, with a
frequency mode 0 - 800Hz, 30V de. I
10. The flow transmitter shall operate on 120Vac, 60Hz line power. Typical
power consumption shall be 20V A. I
11. The flow transmitter shall have a waterproof and backlit LCD display, 2
lines with 16 characters. I
12. The flow transmitter shall be programmable using a tactile feedback,
waterproof and sealed keypad. All necessary diagnostics, user security I
password readings and system status shall be available using the keypad.
A separate calibration box shall be unnecessary. I
03720-30-01 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS I
Bid Documents COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
G.
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
13. The Meter shall be designed, manufactured, and calibrated in an 1S0900 1,
NAMAS, N1ST, NATA certified facility.
14. The flow transmitter shall be housed in a wall mounting NEMA 4X, 316
stainless steel enclosure suitable for conduit connections. The enclosure
shall embody lockable stainless steel latches, as well as a screwed down
lid. The enclosure shall include a clear polycarbonate window for viewing
the LCD transmitter displays without opening the enclosure.
15. Manufacturer:
a. ABB, ModellOD1475T with MagMaster MFE remote converter
b. Yamatake, Model MTG 14C with Model MTG 18B remote
transmitter
c. Approved equal.
Digital Panel Meters
1. Where indicated on the contract drawings, and anywhere necessary to
fulfill system functionality as described in these specifications, the
Contractor shall provide digital panel meters to display process
parameters.
2. Panel meter shall have five digit, red LED display, enclosed in 2.25" high
aluminum case, suitable for panel mounting.
3. Panel meter shall accept 4-20mA input signal and have configurable linear
display scale, complete with decimal point, as necessary to indicate
process variables.
4. Panel meter will be equipped with fully configurable, dual, 5A, form C
contacts for remote signal or alarm capabilities.
5. Panel meter shall operate from 120V AC line power.
6. Manufacturer:
a. Red Lion, Model LD2A
b. Approved equal
Analog Signal Splitters
1. Where indicated on the instrumentation drawings, and anywhere necessary
to fulfill system functionality as described in these specifications, the
Contractor shall provide analog signal splitter devices to allow a 4-20mA
instrument signal form a single transmitter device to be relayed to multiple
indicating devices.
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-11
2. Signal splitter shall provide isolation between all three connected signals
and 24VDC power supply.
3. Output signals shall be configured to be 4-20mA signals, duplicating the
4-20mA input signal.
4. Manufacturer:
a. Phoenix Contact, MINI MCR
b. Approved equal
2.02 SHOP TESTING
A. The ultrasonic sensor manufacturer shall have quality control procedures adequate
to ensure that the equipment complies with these Specifications. Quality control
shall include in-process inspections, final inspection by the manufacturer, and a
written record of these inspections.
B. Inspection records shall be made for each unit. Inspection records shall be
available to the Engineer. Upon request, manufacturer shall send a copy of his
inspection records to the Engineer for review prior to equipment installation.
C. Final acceptance of the level measurement system by the Engineer may be
contingent upon satisfactory delivery, installation, and performance of the entire
system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the
instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents.
B. All fitting connections must be installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 TESTING
A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400, Section 01600, and
Section 01660.
B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the unit analyzing and
monitoring equipment. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following:
1.
2.
That the units have been properly installed, are in proper alignment.
That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
13402-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Should any defects become evident during inspection, testing, or within the
guarantee period, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defective unit or
component at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and
performance after installation
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE AND CERTIFICATES
A. Provide manufacturer's (or supplier's) services according to Section 01600.
Additional manufacturer's services include:
B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a
qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment
installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to
instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The
number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in
Table 01600-1 located in Specification Section 01600. Training shall be in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 01800.
C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings and
installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and
any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
03720-30-01
Bid Documents
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
13402-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15060
PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification describes responsibilities and requirements for Piping Systems
including the following:
1. Labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services to be furnished in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The materials
to be used for the piping systems shown in the Drawings are listed by
servIce In the Piping Schedule, included in the Process Mechanical
Drawing.
2. Coordination of work with other trades.
3. The furnishing and installation of all supplementary or miscellaneous
items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure, and complete installation, although such work is not specifically
indicated.
4. The furnishing of As-Built Drawings and documents for piping systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating
E. Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting
F. Section 15100 - Process Valves
G. Section 15101 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
H. Section 15103 - PVC Pipe and Fittings
I. Section 15063 - Wall Pipes, Seep Rings, and Penetrations
J. Section 15064 - Pipe Hangers and Supports
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-1
PIPING SYSTEM~ENERAL
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification as if incorporated in it except as
modified in this Section. Referenced standards and recommended practices referred to in this
Section shall be the latest edition of any such document.
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
2. ANSI B 1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads
3. ANSI B2.l, Pipe Threads.
4. ANSI BI6.21, Nonmetallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
5. ANSI BI8.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head
Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Lag Screws.
6. ANSI B 18.2.2., Square and Hex Nuts.
7. ANSI B31.1, Power Piping (Pressure Piping).
8. ANSI B31.3, Process Piping
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A 183, Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and nuts
2. ASTM A 194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service
3. ASTM A 307, Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded
Standard Fasteners.
4. ASTM D 1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets
5. ASTM F 467, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use
C. American Water Works Association:
1. A WW A C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Sizes 4 inch
through 144 inch.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-2
PIPING SYSTEMS--GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340, Project Submittals and Acceptance, for submittal
requirements.
B. If the Contractor deviates from the pIpmg layout as shown on the Contract
Drawings, the Contractor shall submit scaled piping drawings showing locations
and dimensions to and from fittings, valves, tanks, equipment, structures, and
related appurtenances. Provide scaled drawings to a minimum scale of 1/8 inch
equals 1 foot. Provide details to minimum scale of 1/8 inch equals 1 foot.
Elevations shall correspond to reference vertical elevation datum shown or
provided for this project.
C. Copies of any manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling,
delivery, storage, and installation.
D. As-built piping drawings shall meet the requirements of Section 01700, Project
Record Documents. During the progress of the work and when the work is finally
completed and accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, "As-Built" Drawings of
piping systems installed in the project, including pre-existing piping discovered,
relocated, or at locations other than as originally shown in the Drawings. The
Contractor shall identify complete location, elevations, and description of piping
systems. Piping systems and fittings are to be identified from three points on
structures and/or stationary appurtenances.
E. Submit copies of forms documenting required field pressure testing work and
results.
F. Submit welding certificate copies.
G. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for bolts and nuts, including coatings if
specified. Provide recertification by an independent domestic testing laboratory
for materials originating outside of the United States.
H. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for gaskets supplied showing dimensions and
bolting recommendations.
1.05 HANDLING, STORAGE, INSPECTION, AND PROTECTION - (NOT USED)
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-3
PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL
1.06 DEFINITIONS OF BURIED AND EXPOSED PIPING
A. Buried piping is piping buried in the soil beginning at the wall or beneath the slab
of a structure. Where a coating is specified, provide the coating up to the structure
wall. Piping encased in concrete is considered to be buried. Do not coat encased
pIpe.
B. Exposed piping is piping in any of the following conditions or locations:
1. Above ground.
2. Inside buildings, vaults, or other structures.
3. In underground concrete trenches or galleries.
C. Submerged piping is considered all piping inside the tank.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SCHEDULE
A. Unless noted otherwise in the Contract Drawings, piping system materials,
fittings, and appurtenances are subject to requirements of the individual
Specifications for the piping systems.
2.02 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. A piping schedule (legend and identification) listing the piping identification
abbreviations, materials of construction, working pressures, test pressures, lining
systems, coating systems, Specification section, and color coding associated with
the flow streams is provided in the Contract Drawings. In locations where the
piping material referenced on the piping schedule is not appropriate, the piping
material is indicated in the Contract Drawings. Materials called out in the
Contract Drawings shall govern over materials stated in the piping schedule.
B. The piping schedule in the Contract Drawings may show alternative piping
materials for certain services. In such cases the same pipe material shall be used
for all pipe sizes in all locations for the given piping service. Do not intermix
piping materials unless specifically designated on the Contract Drawings.
2.03 THREAD FORMING FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS
A. Form threads for stainless steel bolts by rolling, not by cutting or grinding.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-4
PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.04 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Bolts and nuts for Class 150 flanges (including A WW A C207, Class D) located
indoors, outdoors above and below ground, and in vaults and structures shall be
carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B.
B. Bolts and nuts for submerged Class 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A 193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A 194 (Grade 8) for
nuts. Fit shall be Classes 2A as specified in ANSI B 1.1 when connecting to cast-
iron valves having body bolt holes.
2.05 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
A. Bolts and nuts for flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM
A 193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8, for nuts.
2.06 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR PVC, CPVC, AND PVDF PIPE
A. Bolts for piping in sodium hypochlorite service shall be made of titanium
conforming to ASTM F 467, Grade Til, Ti2, or Ti7. Nuts shall conform to ASTM
F 467, same material as the bolts.
B. Bolts and nuts in chemical service other than sodium hypochlorite shall be Type
304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A
194, Grade 8, for nuts.
C. Bolts and nuts for buried and submerged flanges and flanges located outdoors
above ground or in vaults and structures shall be Type 304 stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8, for
nuts.
D. Provide a washer under each nut and under each bolthead. Washers shall be of the
same material as the nuts.
2.07 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL PIPE
A. Bolts and nuts for Class 150 flanges (including A WW A C207, Class D) located
indoors, outdoors above ground, in vaults, and in structures shall be carbon steel,
ASTM A 307, Grade B. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall also be hot-dipped
galvanized.
B. Bolts and nuts or submerged Class 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A 193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A 194 (Grade 8) for
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-5
PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL
nuts. Fit shall be Classes 2A conforming to ANSI B 1.1 when connecting to cast-
iron valves having body bolt holes.
2.08 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. Anti-Seize Lubricant shall be chloride free and shall be nongalling NSF-approved
when used on potable water pipes.
2.09 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL, DUCTILE IRON, AND STAINLESS STEEL
PIPE
A. Flange gaskets shall be in accordance with ANSI! A WW A C207, except as
modifiedin this Section. Gaskets shall be ring type. All gasket material shall be
suitable for the fluid being conveyed and shall be resistant to free chlorine
concentrations up to 10 mg/L. All gasket material shall be rated to the surge
pressures listed in the pipe schedule. Gaskets shall be EPDM, Viton, or an
approved equal.
2.10 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS IN RAW
SEWAGE
A. Gaskets shall be full face, 1/8 inch thick, Buna-N having a hardness of 55 to 65
durometer. Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 200 psi at a
temperature of 250oF. Gaskets shall have "nominal" pipe size inside diameters,
not the inside diameters specified in ANSI B16.21. Provide Garlock Style 9122
or equal.
2.11 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR PVC AND CPVC PIPE
A. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full faced, 1/8 inch thick, having a hardness of
50 to 70 durometer A. Gasket material for sodium hypochlorite service shall be
Viton ETP. Gasket material for sodium bisulfite services shall be EPR.
2.12 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR PVDF PIPE
A. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full faced, 5/64 inch thick (minimum), made of
Teflon-bonded EPDM or PVDF-bonded EPDM. The EPDM shall have a
hardness of 65 to 70 Durometer "A". Gaskets shall be suitable for a fluid
temperature range of -40oF to +21OoF.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-6
PIPING SYSTEMS---DENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.13 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPE IN CHEMICAL SERVICE
A. Gaskets shall be suitable for a maximum pressure of 300 psi and a maximum
temperature of 500oF. Gaskets for chemical service shall be one of the following
materials:
1. Teflon envelope type, full face, 118 inch thick, with compressed
nonasbestos filler. Provide free-flow design in which the Teflon is
machined or milled between leaves to provide a space for the filler.
2. Teflon (PTFE) with inert filler, 1I8-inch thick. Product: Garlock "Gylon
3510" shall be used for sodium hypocWorite.
2.14 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEMS - (NOT USED)
2.15 LOCATOR WIRE - (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION - (NOT USED)
3.02 FIELD LAYOUT AND MODIFICATIONS - (NOT USED)
3.03 PIPE PRODUCTS INSPECTION- (NOT USED)
3.04 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PIPE AND FITTINGS - (NOT USED)
3.05 BURIED PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS - (NOT USED)
3.06 FLANGED JOINTS FOR EXPOSED PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. When bolting flanged joints, the Contractor shall take care to avoid restraint on
the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would prevent uniform gasket
compression or which would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. One flange
shall be free to move in any direction while the flange bolts are being tightened.
Bolts shall be tightened gradually and at a uniform rate to ensure uniform
compression of the gasket, in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant before
assembly.
C. Connecting to Pumping Equipment: The Contractor shall take special care when
connecting to pumping equipment to ensure that piping stresses are not
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-7
PIPING SYSTEM~ENERAL
transmitted to the pump flanges. All connecting pipe shall be permanently
supported so that accurate matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the
entire surface of flanges are obtained before any bolts are installed in the flanges.
In addition, pump connection piping shall be free to move parallel to its
longitudinal center line while the bolts are being tightened.
1. Each pump shall be leveled, aligned, and wedged into a position which
will fit the correcting pipe, but shall not be grouted until the initial fitting
and alignment of the pipe so that the pump may be shifted on its
foundation if necessary to properly install the connecting pipe. Each pump
shall, however, be grouted before final bolting of the connecting piping.
2. After final alignment and bolting, the pump connections shall be tested for
applied piping stresses by loosening the flange bolts which, if the piping is
properly installed, should result in no movement of the piping relative to
the pump or opening of the pump connection joints. If any movement is
observed, the piping shall be loosened and re-aligned as required and then
the flanges bolted back together. The flange bolts then shall be loosened
and the process repeated until no movement is observed.
3. All carbon steel bolts and nuts shall be coated with the same coating as the
piping system they are used on.
3.07 ANCHORING AND RESTRAINING - (NOT USED).
3.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION
See Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping, for pressure testing end inspection
requirements.
3.09 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Welding:
1. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined
in Section 9 of the ASME and other codes and requirements in accordance
with local building and utility requirements. Submit Welder's certificates
to the Engineer for review before beginning any welding on the project.
Welders must be certified for all positions (flat, vertical, and overhead).
2. Have all welds conform to highest industrial practice in accordance with
ANSI B31.3 and ANSI B31.1 or other codes and requirements in
accordance with local building and utility requirements.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-8
PIPING SYSTEM~ENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.10 PIPE COLOR CODING
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and the Owner to generate a list of
acceptable pipe colors for buried and exposed piping systems. Where color-coding is
achieved by painting and or banding exterior surfaces of the piping systems, painting and
pipe identification shall be provided in accordance with Sections 09901, 09902, and
15075.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15060-9
PIPING SYSTEMS--GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15063
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This Section includes requirements for materials, installation, and testing of steel, cast-iron, and
ductile-iron wall pipes and sleeves (including wall collars and seepage rings) and penetrations.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment
D. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process Systems
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following:
A. Shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340.
B. Detail drawings for fabricated steel or cast-iron wall and floor pipes and sleeves,
wall flanges, seep rings, and sealing materials. Show dimensions and wall
thicknesses.
C. Show flange sizes and the appropriate ANSI or A WW A flange dimensional
standard where flanged end wall pipes or penetrations are used.
D. Show grooved-end dimensions and A WW A grooved-end dimensional standard
where grooved-end wall pipes or penetrations are used.
E. A list of coating systems to be applied, the manufacturer, and the dry thickness of
coatings. Call out coatings where coatings are to be applied.
F. A list materials of construction, with ASTM material reference and grade.
G. Manufacturer's instructions for installing rubber annular hydrostatic sealing
devices.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRA nONS
15063-1
1. Submit six copies of the results of the leakage test for cast-iron sleeves
having shrink-fit steel collars or collar halves bottomed in a groove and
steel sleeves having welded steel collars.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Use cast-iron, ductile-iron, stainless steel or fabricated steel wall sleeves when
containing rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices through which piping
passes.
1. Use only cast-iron or ductile-iron wall pipes when connecting to cast-iron
and ductile-iron pipe. Use only fabricated steel or stainless steel wall pipes
when connecting to steel or stainless steel pipe, respectively.
2. Cast-iron flanges shall conform to ANSI BI6.1, Class 125 or 250, to
match the flange on the connecting pipe.
3. Class 150 steel flanges shall conform to A WW A C207, Class D. Flanges
shall be flat face. Flanges shall match the flange on the connecting pipe.
2.02 CAST-IRON OR DUCTILE-IRON WALL PIPES AND SLEEVES
A. Provide cast- or ductile-iron wall pipes with ends as shown in the Drawings for
connection to adjacent cast-iron and ductile-iron pipe or for containing pipes
where they pass through concrete walls, ceilings, and floor slabs. Provide seepage
ring on wall pipes and sleeves passing through concrete walls and slabs that are to
be watertight. Locate collars so that the collar is at the center of the wall or floor
slab, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings.
B. Wall pipes and sleeves shall be of the following types:
1. Pipe or sleeve with integrally cast seep ring.
2. Pipe or sleeve with shrink-fit steel collar attached.
3. Pipe or sleeve with steel collar halves bottomed in a groove provided in
the pipe or sleeve.
C. Minimum wall thickness for pipes and sleeves having integrally cast seep rings
shall be as shown in the following table:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS
15063-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Pipe or Sleeve Size Minimum Wall Thickness
(inches) (inches)
3 0.48
4 0.52
6 0.55
8 0.60
10 0.68
12 0.75
14 0.66
16 0.70
18 0.75
20 0.80
24 0.89
1. Minimum wall thickness of pipes or sleeves having shrink-fit collars shall
be special Class 52. Cut shrink-fit collars from a 114-inch-thick steel ring.
Attach the collar to a cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe or sleeve by heating the
steel collar and allowing it to shrink over the pipe at the necessary
location. Provide an epoxy bond (Keysite 740 or 742 or Scotchkote 302)
between the pipe and collar. Sandblast the area of the pipe to be epoxy
coated in accordance with SSPC SP-IO.
2. Wall pipes or sleeves having steel collar halves bottomed in a groove shall
be ductile iron Special Class 54 minimum unless otherwise shown. Wall
flanges shall consist of 1/4-inch-thick steel seep ring halves for pipes
through 24-inch and 3/8-inch-thick halves for pipe 30 inches and larger,
bottomed in a groove provided on the pipe. The pipe groove shall be
machine cut to a depth of 1/16 to 5/64 inch to provide a press fit for the
seep ring. Seep ring halves shall be welded together after fit into groove
but shall not be welded to pipe. Seep rings shall be sealed completely
around the pipe with silicon sealant manufactured by Dow-Corning No.
790, General Electric Silpruf, or equal.
3. The material used in cast- or ductile-iron wall flanges, wall sleeves, and
wall penetrations shall conform to ASTM A 395, A 436, A 536, A 48
(Class 35), or A 126 (Class B).
Fabricated Steel Wall Pipes and Sleeves:
1. Provide fabricated steel wall pipes and sleeves with ends as shown in the
drawings for connection to adjacent steel pipes, or for containing pipes,
where they pass through concrete walls. Provide seepage ring or wall
flange on wall pipes and sleeves passing through concrete walls and slabs
that are to be watertight. Wall thickness shall be the same as the pipe wall
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS
15063-3
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
thickness when connecting to steel pipe. Minimum wall thickness for
sleeves containing pipes shall be standard weight specified in ANSI
B36.1O for sleeves 72 inches and smaller and 1/2 inch for sleeves greater
than 72 inches through 96 inches.
2. Wall flanges shall be in the form of a steel wall collar welded to the steel
sleeve or penetration. Cut welded wall collars from a 1/4-inch steel ring.
Attach the collar to a steel wall pipe or sleeve with full circle, 3/16-inch
fillet welds. Welding procedures shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.3,
Chapter V.
3. Steel pipe used in fabricating wall sleeves containing pipes shall comply
with ASTM 53 (Type E or S), Grade B; ASTM A 135, Grade B; ASTM A
139, Grade B; or API 5L or 5LX. Wall pipes connecting to steel pipe
shall be of the same material as the connecting pipe. Wall collar material
shall comply with ASTM A 36, A 105, A 181, or A 182.
4. Stainless steel pipe used in fabricating wall pipes shall be of the same
material as the connecting pipe. Wall collar material shall comply with
ASTM A 240.
E.
Rubber Annular Hydrostatic Sealing Devices:
1. Rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be of the modular
mechanical type, using interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill the annular space between the pipe sleeve and the passing
pipe. Assemble links to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe,
with a pressure plate under each bolt-head and nut.
2. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Comoound Material
Pressure plate Delrin plastic, carbon steel, Type 304 stainless steel, Type
316 stainless steel (According to Contract Drawings)
Bolts and nuts for Type 303 or 316 stainless steel
links
Sealing element EPDM rubber
3. The size of the wall sleeve needed to accommodate the passing pipe shall
be as recommended by the rubber annular seal manufacturer.
4. Provide centering blocks in 25% of the sealing elements on pipelines
larger than 12 inches in diameter.
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS
15063-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. The rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be Link Seal as
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation; Innerlynx as manufactured by
Advance Products & Systems, Inc., or equal.
F. Painting and Coating:
1. Line and coat sleeves and pipes (except stainless steel) in accordance with
Section 09901.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LOCATION OF PIPES AND SLEEVES
A. Provide a wall or floor pipe where shown in the Drawings and wherever piping
passes through walls or floors of tanks or channels in which the water surface is
above the pipe penetration.
B. Provide a floor sleeve where shown in the Drawings and wherever plastic pipe,
steel, or stainless steel pipe 3 inches and smaller or stainless steel or copper tubing
passes through a floor or slab. Provide a rubber annular sealing device in the
annular space between the sleeve and the passing pipe or tubing.
C. Provide wall sleeves where shown in the Drawings and wherever plastic, steel, or
stainless steel pipe 3 inches and smaller or stainless steel or copper tubing passes
through a wall. Provide a single rubber annular seal when the wall is 8 inches
thick or less. Provide two rubber annular seals (one at each end of the sleeve)
when the wall is more than 8 inches thick.
D. Where wall sleeves are installed with water or soil on one or both sides of the
channel or wall, provide two rubber annular seals (one at each end of the sleeve).
E. Where pipes pass through walls or slabs and no sleeves or wall or floor pipe with
seep ring is provided, pack the annular space with polyethylene foam filler and fill
the ends of the penetration with 2 inches of elastomeric sealant on both sides of
the structure.
3.02 INSTALLATION IN EXISTING CONCRETE WALLS AND SLABS
Core drill holes 1 to 2 inches larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the wall flange or
collar. Install wall pipe and collar assembly axially aligned with the piping to which it will be
connected or will contain. Pack the void space between the sleeve and concrete with grout. See
Division 3 for grouting specification.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS
15063-5
A.
B.
C.
D.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Installation in New Concrete Walls and Slabs:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Install wall pipes and sleeves in walls before placing concrete. Do not allow any
portion of the pipe or sleeve to touch any of the reinforcing steel. Install wall pipe
or sleeve and collar assembly axially aligned with the piping to which it will be
attached or will contain. Provide supports to prevent the pipe or sleeve from
displacing or deforming while the concrete is being poured and is curing.
Installation in Dry Floors and Slabs:
Install pipe sleeves and spools in concrete floors and slabs which do not have
water over them so that the sleeve or pipe extends from the bottom of the floor or
slab to 2 inches above the floor or slab unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
Installation of Wall Pipes Having Flanged End Connections:
1. Check alignment before grouting in place or pouring concrete. Realign if
the sleeve is not properly aligned.
2. Install flanged end wall sleeves or penetrations with bolt-holes of the end
flanges straddling the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the sleeve.
Qualifications of Welders:
Welder qualifications shall be in accordance with A WS D 1.1.
E.
Installation of Rubber Annular Hydrostatic Sealing Devices:
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Field Testing:
Check each wall penetration for leakage at the time the hydraulic structure is
tested for leakage; see Division 3. Penetrations shall show zero leakage.
END OF SECTION
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRA nONS
15063-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15064
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes requirements for materials and installation of pipe hangers
and supports including accessory items, such as anchor boIts and screws, pipe
spiders, neoprene isolation pads, cable trays for hoses, and drip guards.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process systems
D. Section 15060 - Piping Systems - General
E. Section 15100 - Process Valves
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340,
Project Submittals and Acceptance, and the following.
B. Provide line drawings of each piping system to the scale shown in the drawings,
locating each support or hanger. Identify each type of hanger or support by the
manufacturer's catalog number or figure.
C. Provide installation drawings and manufacturer's catalog information on each type
of hanger and support used. Clearly indicate the actual pipe outside diameter (not
just nominal pipe size) that is used for the hangers and supports.
D. Submit layout drawings for the drip guards, showing dimensions and thicknesses.
Show design of seam or joint where field connections will be made between
sections and pieces of drip guards. Submit a certificate listing the type of resin to
be used, describing the manufacturer's brand name or designation, composition,
and characteristics.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15064-1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Not all pipe supports or hangers required are shown in the Drawings. Provide
pipe supports for every piping system installed. Support piping by pipe support
where it connects to pumps or other mechanical equipment.
B. Pipe support and hanger components shall withstand the dead loads imposed by
the weight of the pipes, fittings, and valves (all filled with water), plus valve
actuators and any insulation, and shall have a minimum safety factor of five based
on the material's ultimate strength.
2.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Anvil, Grinnell, Unistrut,
Cooper B-Line, Aikinstrut, Superstrut, or equal.
B. Pipe hangers and supports shall comply with MSS SP-58. Construct special
hangers and supports if detailed in the drawings. The standard hangers and
supports shall be in accordance with MSS SP-58 as listed below:
Manufacturer and Model
Description (or Equal)
Adjustable steel clevis Anvil Fig. 590 or 260, B-Line B31 00 or B31 02
Steel double-bolt pipe clamp Anvil Fig. 295A or 295H, B-Line B3144 or
B3144A
Steel pipe clamp (pipes smaller than 3 Anvil Fig. 212, B-Line B3140
inches)
Steel pipe clamp (pipes 3 inches and Anvil Fig. 216, B-Line 3142
larger)
Pipe hanger B-Line B6690
Adjustable swivel pipe ring Anvil Superstrut 714, Anvil Fig. 104
Adjustable steel band hanger B-Line B3172
Extension pipe or riser clamp Anvil Fig. 261, B-Line B5573
Adjustable band hanger Anvil Fig. 97
Adjustable swivel ring band hanger Anvil Fig. 70, B-Line B3170 NF
Split pipe ring with adjustable Anvil Fig. 108, B-Line B3173
turnbuckle
Steel turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 230, B-Line B3202
Steel clevis Anvil Fig. 299, B-Line B3201
Swivel turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 114, B-Line B3224
Malleable iron socket Anvil Fig. 11 OR, B-Line B3222
Steel weldless eye nut B-Line B3200
Steel or malleable iron concrete insert Anvil Fig. 281, Superstrut 452
Top beam C-clamp Anvil Fig. 92, B-Line B3033
Side I-beam or channel clamp Anvil Fig. 14 or 217
Center I-beam clamp Anvil Figure 134
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15064-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e
Manufacturer and Model
(or E ual)
Anvil Fi . 66 B-Line B3083
Anvil Fig. 86, B-Line B3036L
AnvilFi .137,B-LineB3l88
Anvil Fi . 262, B-Line B3l80
Anvil Fi . 228
Anvil Fi . 228 clam with e e nut
Superstrut CM-754, B-Line B3054
Anvil Fi . 194, B-Line B3063
Anvil Fi . 195, B-Line B3066
Anvil Fi . 199, B-Line B3067
Anvil Fi . 202, B-Line B3062
Anvil Fi . 258, B-Line B3095
Anvil Fi . 259, B-Line B3090
Anvil Fi . 264, B-Line B3093/B3089
Anvil Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, or 165;
Su erstrut A 789; B-Line B3 l60/B3 165
Anvil Fig. 167, B-Line B315l
Anvil Fi . 171, B-Line B3114
Anvil Fig. 181, B-Line B3110
Anvil Fi .271, B-Line B3ll7SL
C. The material of construction for all hangers and supports, applicable to process
piping and fire protection used on the project, shall be in accordance with the
Hanger and Support Application Schedule at the end of this Section.
2.03 OFFSET PIPE CLAMP
A. Anvil Figure 103, Cooper B-Line B3148, or equal. Material shall be Type 316
stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
A. Pipe Anchor Chair: Anvil Figure 198 or equal.
B. One Hole Clamp: Anvil Figure 126 or equal.
C. Roller Chair: Anvil Figure 175 or equal.
2.05 STEEL CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Steel channel frames shall be 1-5/8 inches wide by 1-5/8 or 3-1/4 inches high by
12-gauge metal thickness, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. Material
shall conform to ASTM A 36, A 570 (Grade 33 minimum), or A 653 unless
stainless steel is required by the Hanger and Support Application Schedule.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15064-3
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Stainless steel shall be Type 304. One side of the channel shall have a continuous
open slot with inturned clamping ridges. Maximum allowable stress under any
combination of applied uniformly distributed loads and concentrated loads shall
not exceed those recommended in the AISC or AISI. Deflection shall not exceed
1/240 of span. Use multiple back-to-back channels to achieve these criteria if
single channels are not sufficient. Products: Unistrut PIOOO or P5000 Series, B-
Line B 11 or B22 Series, or equal.
B. Steel channels shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A 153.
C. Nuts shall be machined and case hardened. Provide rectangular nuts with the
ends shaped to permit a quarter turn crosswise in the framing channel. Provide
two serrated grooves in the nut to engage the inturned edges of the channel.
D. Pipe clamps (including attachment screws and nuts) shall be Unistrut PllOO or
P2000 Series, B-Line B2000 Series, or equal. Material shall be Type 304
stainless steel.
E. Hanger rods for trapezes shall be carbon steel (ASTM A 36, A 575, or A 576)
unless stainless steel is required by the Hanger and Support Application Schedule.
Stainless steel hanger rod material shall comply with ASTM A 276, Type 304.
F. Accessory fittings and brackets shall be the same material as the channel or
trapeze. Provide coating on carbon steel fittings and brackets as specified for the
channels and frames.
1. Flat Plate Fittings: Unistrut PI065, PI066, P1925; Superstrut AB-206,
AB-207; or equal.
2. Post Bases: Unistrut P2072A, Superstrut AP-232, or equal.
3. 900 Brackets: Unistrut P1326, P1346; Superstrut AB-203; or equal.
4. Rounded-End Flat Plate Fittings: Unistrut P2325, Superstrut X-240, or
equal.
G. Parallel pipe clamps shall be Unistrut P1563 through P1573, Superstrut AB-719,
or equal. Material shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
2.06 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEM
A. FRP pipe hangers and supports shall be Aickinstrut, Inc., or equal.
B. Material properties shall be as follows:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15064-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Longitudinal Direction
Ultimate Tensile (psi) 37,500 minimum
Ultimate Compressive (psi) 35,000 minimum
Ultimate Flexural (psi) 37,500 minimum
Tensile Modulus (psi) x 10**6 3.00 minimum
Flexural Modulus (psi) x 10**6 2.00 minimum
Ultimate Shear Strenj];th (psi) 6,000 minimum
Ultimate Bearing Stress (psi) 35,000 minimum
Izod Impact (ASTM D 256) ft-lb/inch notch 30 minimum
Transverse Direction
Ultimate Tensile (psi) 10,000 minimum
Ultimate Compressive (psi) 20,000 minimum
Ultimate Flexural (psi) 14,000 minimum
Tensile Modulus (psi) x 10**6 1.0 minimum
Compressive Modulus (psi) x 10**6 1.4 minimum
Flexural Modulus (psi) x 10**6 1.0 minimum
Ultimate Shear Strength (psi) 5,500 minimum
Ultimate Bearing Stress (psi) 35,000 minimum
Izod Impact, ft-lb notch 5 minimum
Hardness
Barcol Test 50 minimum
C.
Glass fiber reinforced composites and plastic products shall have a flame spread
rating of25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
D.
Channel framing shall be 1-5/8 inches deep by 1-5/8 inches wide and shall be
made using vinylester resin equal to AsWand Derakane 411, AsWand Hetron 922,
or Reichhold Dion 9800. It shall have a nexus polyester surfacing veil over 100%
of the surface which, along with a filler system, will protect against degradation
from ultraviolet light. Channel shall be supplied with integral notches 1 inch on
center. Notches shall be located on the interior flange to prevent slippage of pipe
clamps and fittings after installation. In place of notched channel, unnotched
channel may be used if the vertical channel sections supporting the horizontal
piping are provided with stop lock hardware at each pipe clamp to prevent
slippage. Channel framing shall be Aickinstrut G.R.P. Type V 2000 series or
equal.
E.
Channel framing connections shall be made with vinyl ester glass fiber composite
nuts, bolts, all threaded rods, channel fittings, bases, and hanger assemblies. Nut,
bolts, and rods shall be Aickinstrut 4200 series, Strut Tech PVCG, or equal.
Channel fittings shall be Aickinstrut 2800 style or equal.
F.
Load-bearing pipe clamps and nonload-bearing pipe straps shall be nonmetallic
and nonconductive and shall be made by the injection molding process using
15064-5
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
polyurethane base resin. Pipe clamps and straps shall be Aickinstrut 3100 series
or equal.
G. Clevis hangers shall be made with vinylester glass fiber and be Aickinstrut 1500
series or equal.
H. Hanger rods for trapezes shall be stainless steel or FRP as indicated in the
drawings. Stainless steel hanger rod material shall comply with ASTM A 276,
Type 304. FRP hanger rod shall be by Aickinstrut, StrutTech, or equal.
2.07 PIPE SPIDERS
A. Cooper B-Line B3281 to 3286, Superstrut S-794 or equal.
2.08 WAFFLE ISOLATION PADS
A. Mason Type "W;" Machinery Installation Systems "Unisorb" Type S, SB, F, or
FB; or equal. Provide minimum 1/4-inch thickness.
2.09 NEOPRENE ISOLATING SLEEVES FOR METAL PIPE 6 INCHES AND SMALLER
A. Unistrut P2600, B-Line "Vibrocushion," or equal.
2.10 ANCHOR BOLTS AND SCREWS
A. Anchor bolts and screws for attaching pipe supports and hangers to walls, floors,
ceilings, and roof beams shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 276 or F 593.
Nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, or ASTM F 594,
Type 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE HANGER AND WALL SUPPORT SPACING
A. Install pipe hangers and wall supports on horizontal and vertical runs at the
spacing shown or detailed in the drawings. Provide hanger rods (for horizontal
runs) and wall supports of the sizes shown or detailed in the Drawings. If no
spacing or rod sizes are given in the Drawings or in the Specifications for a
particular piping system, use the following:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15064-6
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
1. Pipe Hanger and Wall Support Spacing for Steel, Stainless Steel and
Ductile-Iron Pipe:
Pipe Size Maximum Support or Hanger Minimum Rod Size
(inches) Spacing (feet) (inches)
3/8 and smaller 4 3/8
1/2 through 1 6 3/8
1-1/4 through 2 8 3/8
2-1/2 and 3 10 1/2
3-1/2 and 4 10 5/8
6 10 3/4
8 10 7/8
10 and 12 10 7/8
14 and 16 10 1
18 10 1
20 through 24 9 1
30 6 1
B.
Pipe Hanger or Wall Support Spacing for PVC Pipe:
Maximum Support or Hanger
Pipe Size Spacing Minimum Rod Size
(inches) (feet) (inches)
3/4 3 3/8
1 3 3/8
1-1/2 3 3/8
2 3 3/8
2-1/2 3 'is
3 3 'is
C.
Pipe Hanger or Wall Support Spacing for PVDF Piping:
Maximum Hanger or Support
Pipe Size Spacing Minimum Rod Size
(inches) (feet) (inches)
3-1/4 2 3/8
1 2 3/8
1-1/2 3 3/8
2 3 3/8
For piping services not described, provide hangers and supports in accordance
with MSS SP-58 and SP-69.
Provide bracing for piping 8 inches and smaller that is installed on hangers or
trapezes in accordance with MSS SP-127, except provide lateral bracing at
maximum IO-foot center-to-center spacings. Provide sway bracing for hangers
for piping larger than 8 inches.
15064-7
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.02 PIPE SUPPORT SPACING FOR SUPPORTS ON TOP OF SLABS OR GRADE
A. Install pipe supports on horizontal runs at the spacing shown or detailed in the
Drawings. Provide supports of the type shown or detailed in the Drawings. If no
spacings are given in the Drawings or in the Specifications for a particular piping
system, use the following:
1. Pipe Support Spacing for Steel, Stainless Steel, and Ductile-Iron Pipe:
Pipe Size Maximum Support Spacing
(inches) (feet)
3/8 and smaller 4
1/2 throug,h 1 6
1-1/4 throug,h 2 8
2-1/2 and 3 10
3-1/2 and 4 10
6 10
8 10
10 and 12 10
14 and 16 10
18 10
20 throug,h 24 10
30 10
B. Pipe support spacing for other pipe materials shall be the same as described above
in paragraph titled "Pipe Hanger and Wall Support Spacing."
3.03 INSTALLING PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide separate hangers or supports at each valve. Provide one hanger or support
around each end of the valve body or on the adjacent connecting pipe within one
pipe diameter of the valve end. Provide additional hangers or supports to relieve
eccentric loadings imposed by offset valve actuators.
B. Provide separate hangers or supports at each pipe elbow, tee, or fitting. Provide
separate hangers or supports on both sides of each nonrigid joint or flexible pipe
coupling.
C. Adjust pipe hangers in accordance with MSS SP-89, paragraph 10.6.
D. Install leveling bolts beneath support baseplates. Provide 314-inch-thick grout pad
beneath each base.
E. Install piping without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any connecting
valves, pumps, and other equipment to which the pipe is connected.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
] 5064-8
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.04 INSTALLING STEEL AND FRP CHANNEL FRAMES
A. Use 1-5/8-inch-high channel frames unless 3-1I4-inch is needed to provide
clearance from walls. Use multiple back-to-back channels if additional clearance
is needed.
3.05 INSTALLING NEOPRENE ISOLATING SLEEVES
A. Install a sleeve around each metal pipe 6 inches and smaller at the point of
bearing or contact with the pipe hanger or support.
3.06 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Grind welds of fabricated steel pipe supports smooth, prepare surface by
sandblasting, and apply coating system.
B. Paint exposed metallic pipe hangers and supports to match the color of the
adjacent wall using System No. 52 in accordance with Section 09901, Painting
and Coating. If the adjacent wall is not painted, paint the hangers and supports to
match color code of the largest pipe on the support.
C. Coat submerged pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 09901,
Painting and Coating, System No.7.
D. Coat FRP pipe hangers and supports exposed to direct sunlight with System No.
41 or 42. FRP pipe hangers and supports that are hidden from direct sunlight
need not be coated.
3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Area Location Acceptable Material
Exterior:
Exposed to Outside Conditions Outside of Structures Stainless Steel
Under Roof Canopy Stainless Steel
Interior: All Areas in Dewatering Building Stainless Steel
and Chemical Building
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15064-9
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15075
PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Ibis Section includes requirements for materials and installation of markers,
labels, and signs for pipes, tanks, and valves; for mechanical equipment; for
hazardous materials warnings; and for miscellaneous plant services.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
1. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
2. Section 01400 - Quality and Requirements
3. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process Systems
4. Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following:
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340
and the following.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature describing materials,
colors, letter size, and size of labels.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 LABELS FOR PIPING
A. Labels for piping shall bear the full piping system name as shown in the Piping
Schedule in the Drawings. Provide separate flow directional arrows next to each
label. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Labels
for piping inside buildings shall be vinyl cloth: W. H. Brady Co. B-500 vinyl
cloth, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. Labels for piping
located outdoors shall be weather- and UV -resistant acrylic plastic and shall be
W. H. Brady Co. B-946, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
15075- I
PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
B. Alternatively, provide preprinted, semirigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers.
Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Label shall
cover 3600 (minimum). Labels shall be fabricated of weather- and UV -resistant
acrylic plastic. Labels shall be Seton Nameplate Corporation SetMark pipe marks
or equal.
2.02 LABELS FOR VALVES
A. Provide each valve listed on the Tag Number list with an identification tag. Tags
shall be 2-inch-square or circular aluminum or 1I16-inch-thick fiberglass: W. H.
Brady B-60, Seton Name Plate Corp. Series SVT, or equal. Aluminum tags shall
have black-filled letters. Provide fiberglass tags for the chemical system
(Processes 61 to 67) valves. Tags shall show the valve tag number and/or name
or designation as given in the Drawings.
2.03 HOSE BIBB SIGNS-NON-POTABLE WATER
A. Provide a rigid sign labeled "NON-POTABLE WATER" for each hose-bibb.
Size and lettering shall conform to OSHA requirements. Signs shall be Seton
Nameplate Company 20-gauge baked enamel, minimum size 7 inches by 3
inches; Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield fiberglass, minimum size 7 inches by 3 inches,
118 inch thick; or equal.
2.04 LABELS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Provide a label for each pump, blower, compressor, tank, feeder, mixers, or other
piece of mechanical equipment. Labels shall show the equipment name and tag
number as shown on the P&ID drawings. Labels shall be 1-112 inches
(minimum) by 4 inches (minimum) brass, aluminum or 1/8-inch-thick fiberglass
tags. Provide fiberglass tags for the chemical system (Processes 61 to 67)
equipment: Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield, Seton Style 2065, or equal.
2.05 LABELS FOR TANKS
A. Signs shall be weather- and UV -resistant. Labels shall be Brady B-946, Seton
Name Plate Corporation PSPL, or equal. Minimum size shall be 7 inches by 10
inches. Provide a sign on each quadrant of the tank bearing the tank tag number
and the name of the liquid stored.
2.06 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING AND DANGER SIGNS
A. Provide hazardous materials warning diamond signs complying with NFP A 704.
Size shall be 10 inches square. Wall signs shall be 1I8-inch-thick fiberglass:
Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield or equal. Signs attached to tanks, cabinets, or pieces of
equipment shall be self-adhesive vinyl cloth. Provide four signs for each
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15075-2
PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
chemical bulk storage tank, one for each quadrant of the tank. Affix a sign to the
exterior side of each chemical feed room door: Brady B-946 or equal. Provide
signs at the following locations:
B. Provide signs reading "DANGER" followed by the name of the chemical, gas, or
hazard. Size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Signs shall be 1I8-inch-thick
fiberglass: Brady B-120 or equal. Provide one sign at chemical fill station and at
each chemical metering pump.
2.07 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE - (NOT USED)
2.08 UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE - (NOT
USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLING PIPE LABELS
A. On piping having external diameters less than 6 inches (including insulation, if
any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around pipe at each location.
B. On piping designated to receive identification bands, such bands shall be 6 inches
wide, neatly made by masking, and spaced at intervals of 30 inches on center,
regardless of the diameter of the pipe being painted. Use approved precut and
pre-finished metal or plastic bands on piping in lieu of marked and painted bands,
if approved by the Engineer. PVC pipe shall be banded with colored bands in lieu
of painting, unless otherwise noted.
C. Apply identification labels to all types and sections of piping, as outlined in this
section. Such labels shall be in form of plain block lettering naming the pipe's
content in full and showing direction of flow by arrows. All lettering shall have
an overall height in inches, in accordance with the following table:
Diameter of Pipe or Pipe Cover Height of Lettering
3/4 to 1-3/8 inches ~ inch
1-112 to 2-3/8 inches % inch
2-112 to 7-7/8 inches 1 14 inches
8 to 10 inches 2 ~ inches
Over 10 inches 3 ~ inches
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15075-3
PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
D. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to
view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, valve/pipe vaults, accessible
maintenance spaces and exterior non-concealed locations.
1. Adjacent to each valve and control device (except on pump suction and
discharge where labels are required on headers only).
2. At each branch and riser take-off.
3. At locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings or enter
non-accessible enclosures.
4. Maximum distance between labels shall be 10 feet on all non-potable
water, chemical piping, and on all cWorine solution lines with a minimum
of two labels in each room, gallery, or tunnel. Maximum distance
between labels on all other piping runs shall be 20 feet.
E. Identification lettering shall be located midway between color coding bands
where possible and shall be properly inclined to pipe axis to facilitate reading. If
lettering and arrow identifications are required for piping less than o/.i-inch in
diameter, the Contractor shall furnish and attach approved color coded tags where
instructed.
3.02 INSTALLING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Attach labels to the valve or piece of equipment with Type 304 or 316 stainless
steel chains unless otherwise noted. For sodium hypocWorite and hydrofluosilicic
acid use thermoplastic chains to attach labels.
B. Attach valve labels to the valve hand-wheels. If the valve has no handwheel,
attach the label to the valve by tying the tag wire or chain around the operating
shaft or nut.
3.03 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS
Attach miscellaneous signs according to the sign manufacturer's recommendations and in
accordance with OSHA requirements.
3.04 INSTALLING WALL AND DOOR SIGNS
Attach to walls and doors using epoxy adhesive.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
15075-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15100
PROCESS VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This Section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated valves, check
valves, and process valves including gate, knife gate, butterfly, ball, hose bibbs, globe, angle,
needle, eccentric plug, lubricated plug, nonlubricated plug, diaphragm, check, pinch, solenoid,
pet cocks, mud valves, vacuum breakers, deluge valves, flap valves, balancing valves, gauge
valves, instrument valve manifolds, and telescoping valves.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals
C. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process Systems
D. Section 15060 - Piping Systems - General
E. Section 15064 - Pipe Hangers and Supports
F. Section 15075 - Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification
G. Section 15144 - Pressure Testing of Piping
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following:
A. Shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Manufacturer's catalog data and detail construction sheets showing all valve
parts. Describe each part by material of construction, specification (such as AISI,
ASTM, SAE, or CDA), and grade or type. Identify each valve by tag number to
which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain.
C. Valve dimensions including laying lengths. Show port sizes. Show dimensions
and orientation of valve actuators, as installed on the valves. Show location of
internal stops for gear actuators. State differential pressure and fluid velocity
used to size actuators. For worm-gear actuators, state the radius of the gear sector
in contact with the worm and state the handwheel diameter.
D. Valve linings and coatings. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive
literature.
E. Copies of a report verifying that the valve interior linings and exterior coatings
have been tested for holidays and lining thickness. Describe test results and repair
procedures for each valve.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15100-1
PROCESS VAL YES
F. For butterfly and eccentric plug valves, show the clear diameter or size of the
port. Show the actual area of the port as a percentage of the area as calculated for
the nominal valve size.
PART 2 ~TERlALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Install valves complete with operating hand-wheels or levers, chain-wheels,
extension stems, floor stands, gear actuators, operating nuts, chains, and wrenches
required for operation.
B. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or
molded onto the valve body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate.
C. For buried locations, valves with mechanical joint ends may be substituted for the
flanged ends specified provided the mechanical joint ends are compatible with the
pipe ends.
2.02 VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Provide lever or wrench actuators for exposed valves 8 inches and smaller. For
larger valves, provide hand-wheels.
B. Where manually operated valves (size 2 inches and larger) are installed with their
centerlines more than 6 feet 9 inches above the floor, provide chain-wheel and
guide actuators.
C. Provide 2-inch A WW A operating nuts for buried and submerged valves. Provide
2-inch A WW A operating nuts with the hand-wheels for manually actuated valves
24 inches and larger for use with a portable electric valve actuator.
D. Provide enclosed gear actuators on butterfly, ball, and plug valves 10 inches and
larger, unless electric valve actuators are shown in the Drawings. Gear actuators
for valves 10 inches through 20 inches shall be worm and gear or the traveling nut
type. Gear actuators for valves 24 inches and larger shall be worm and gear
types.
E. Provide gear actuators on gate valves 14 inches and larger, unless electric valve
actuators are shown in the Drawings. Gear actuators shall be bevel or spur gear
type. Provide grease case. Gearing shall comply with A WW A C500.
F. Design gear actuators assuming that the differential pressure across the plug or
disc is equal to the test pressure of the connecting piping pressure rating of the
valve and assuming a line fluid temperature range of 500F to 1000F unless
otherwise required in the detailed valve specifications.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
15100-2
PROCESS VALVES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Gear actuators shall be enclosed, oil lubricated, with seals provided on shafts to
prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Gear actuators for valves located
above ground or in vaults and structures shall have hand-wheels. The actuators
for valves in exposed service shall contain a dial indicating the position of the
valve disc or plug. Gear actuators for buried or submerged valves shall have 2-
inch-square A WW A operating nuts.
H. For buried or submerged service, provide watertight shaft seals and watertight
valve and actuator cover gaskets. Provide totally enclosed actuators designed for
buried or submerged service.
I. Traveling nut and worm and gear actuators shall be of the totally enclosed design
so proportioned as to permit operation of the valve under full differential pressure
rating of the valve with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the handwheel or crank.
Provide stop limiting devices in the actuators in the open and closed positions.
Actuators shall be of the self-locking type to prevent the disc or plug from
creeping. Design actuator components between the input and the stop-limiting
devices to withstand without damage a pull of 200 pounds for handwheel or
chain-wheel actuators and an input torque of 300 foot-pounds for operating nuts
when operating against the stops.
J. Handwheel diameters for traveling nut actuators shall not exceed 8 inches for
valves 12 inches and smaller and shall not exceed 12 inches for valves 20 inches
and smaller.
K. Self-locking worm gear shall be a one-piece design of gear bronze material
(ASTM B 427; or ASTM B 584, Alloy C86200), accurately machine cut.
Actuators for eccentric and lubricated plug valves may use ductile-iron gears
provided the gearing is totally enclosed with spring-loaded rubber lip seals on the
shafts. The worm shall be hardened alloy steel (ASTM A 322, Grade G41500 or
G41400; or ASTM A 148, Grade 105-85), with thread ground and polished.
Support worm-gear shaft at each end by ball or tapered roller bearings. The
reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. The handwheel diameter shall
be no more than twice the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm.
Worm-gear actuators shall be Limitorque Model HBC, ElM Series W, or equal.
L. Design actuators on buried valves to produce the required torque on the operating
nut with a maximum input of 150 foot-pounds.
M. Valve actuators, hand-wheels, or levers shall open by turning counterclockwise.
2.03 EXTENSION STEMS FOR BURIED AND SUBMERGED VALVE ACTUATORS
(Not Used)
2.04 FLOOR STANDS, EXTENSION STEMS, AND EXTENSION STEM SUPPORT
BRACKETS
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15100-3
PROCESS VAL YES
A. When required by the installations, provide floor stands and extension stems for
operation of valves. Floor stands shall be of the nonrising stem, indicating type,
complete with steel extension stems, couplings, hand-wheels, stem guide
brackets, and special yoke attachments as required by the valves and
recommended and supplied by the stand manufacturer. Floor stands shall be cast-
iron base type: Clow, Figure F-5515; Bingham and Taylor; Stockham; or equal.
Hand-wheels shall turn counterclockwise to open the valves.
B. Provide Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts.
C. Provide Type 316 stainless steel extension stems for valves in exposed and/or
submerged service.
D. Provide adjustable stem guide brackets for extension stems. The bracket shall
allow valve stems to be set over a range of 2 to 36 inches from walls. Provide
bushings drilled to accept up to 2-inch-diameter stems. Base, arm, and clamp shall
be ductile iron. Coat ductile iron components in accordance with Section 09901.
Bushing shall be bronze (ASTM B 584, Alloy C86400 or C83600). Bolts, nuts,
screws, and washers (including wall anchor bolts) shall be Type 316 stainless
steel. Provide slots in the bracket to accept 3/4-inch bolts for mounting the bracket
to the wall. Products: Trumbull Industries, Inc., Adjustable Stem Guide or equal.
2.05 CHAINWHEELS AND GUIDES
Chain-wheels and guides shall be Clow Figure F-5680, DeZurik Series W or L WG, Stockham,
or equal. Chain-wheels and guides shall be galvanized iron or steel. Chains shall extend to within
4 feet of the operating floor. Chains shall be galvanized steel.
2.06 VALVE TAGGING AND IDENTIFICATION
Provide identifying valve tags in accordance with Section 15075.
2.07 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat metal valves located above ground or in vaults and structures the same as the
adjacent piping. If the adjacent piping is not coated, then coat valves in
accordance with Section 09901
B. Coat buried metal valves at the place of manufacture in accordance with Section
09901.
C. Coat submerged metal valves, stem guides, extension stems, and bonnets at the
place of manufacture in accordance with Section 09901.
D. Line the interior metal parts of metal valves 4 inches and larger, excluding seating
areas and bronze and stainless steel pieces, in accordance with Section 09901,
System No.7. Apply lining at the place of manufacture.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15100-4
PROCESS VALVES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Coat floor stands in accordance with Section 09901.
F. Test the valve interior linings and exterior coatings at the factory with a low-
voltage (22.5 to 80 volts, with approximately 80,000-ohm resistance) holiday
detector, using a sponge saturated with a 0.5% sodium chloride solution. The
lining shall be holiday free.
G. Measure the thickness of the valve interior linings in accordance with Section
09901. Repair areas having insufficient film thickness in accordance with Section
09901.
2.08 PACKING, O-RINGS, AND GASKETS
Unless otherwise stated in the detailed valve specifications, packing, O-rings, and gaskets shall
be one of the following non-asbestos materials:
A. Teflon.
B. Kevlar aramid fiber.
C. Acrylic or aramid fiber bound by nitrile. Products: Garlock "Bluegard", Klinger
"Klingersil C4400", or equal.
D. Buna-N (nitrile).
2.09 RUBBER SEATS
Rubber seats shall be made of a rubber compound that is resistant to free chlorine and
monochloramine concentrations up to 10 mg/l in the fluid conveyed.
2.10 VALVES
A. Gate Valves:
1. Buried Cast-Iron Gate Valves 4 Inches and Larger for Fire Protection
Service:
Gate valves of sizes 4 inches through 12 inches for fire protection shall be
UL listed, FM approved, nonrising stem for use with indicator posts, solid
wedge disc, bolted bonnet, with indicator post flange. Valves shall be
rated for at least 175 psi, nonshock cold water. Ends shall be flanged,
Class 125, ANSI B16.1 or mechanical joint. Materials of construction
shall be as follows:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15100-5
PROCESS VALVES
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Component Material Specification
Body, bonnet, disc, and Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B
indicator post flange
Disc bushing, disc ring, Bronze ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584
backseat bushing, and (Alloy C83600)
seat ring
Stem Copper silicon or brass ASTM B 21 or ASTM B 584
or ASTM B 763 (Alloys
C87600, C99500, or C87500)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Valves shall be Stockham G-632 or G-634, Nibco F-609, Clow F-6100 or
F -6102, or equal.
2. Cast-Iron Resilient Wedge Gate Valves 3 Inches Through 20 Inches
(A WW A C509):
Valves shall comply with A WW A C509 and the following. Valves shall
be of the bolted-bonnet type with nonrising stems. Valve stems shall be
Type 304 or 316 stainless steel or cast, forged, or rolled bronze. Provide
operating nut for buried valves. Provide handwheel for exposed valves.
Stem nuts shall be made of solid bronze. Bronze for internal working
parts, including stems, shall not contain more than 2% aluminum nor more
than 7% zinc. Bronze shall conform to ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584
(Alloy C83600), except the stem bronze shall have a minimum tensile
strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi, and a
minimum of 10% elongation in 2 inches (ASTM B 584 or B 763, Alloy
C87600 or C99500). Body bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. End
connections for exposed valves shall be flanged. End connections for
buried valves shall be mechanical joint or push-on type.
Provide reduction thrust bearings above the stem collar. Stuffing boxes
shall be O-ring seal type with two rings located in the stem above the
thrust collar. Each valve shall have a smooth unobstructed waterway free
from any sediment pockets.
Valves shall be lined and coated at the place of manufacture with either
fusion-bonded epoxy or heat-cured liquid epoxy. Minimum epoxy
thickness shall be 8 mils.
Manufacturers: Clow RfW, A VK, American Flow Control CRS-80,
Waterous Series 500, Kennedy Ken-Seal, or equal.
B.
Knife Gate Valves:
1. Stainless Steel Knife Gate Valves 2 Inches Through 24 Inches:
15100-6
PROCESS VALVES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Knife gate valves shall be of the solid one-piece cast body design.
Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi. Provide bevel gear actuators
for valves 14 inches and larger. Materials of construction shall be as
follows:
Component Material Specification
Body Stainless steel ASTM A 743, Grade CF8M
Yoke, superstructure, Stainless steel AISI Type 304 or 316
fasteners, and packing stainless steel
gland
Gate Stainless steel ASTM A 240, Type 316
Stem Stainless steel ASTM A 582, Grade
S20300
Handwheel Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B
Packing Flax or acrylic PTFE --
Valves shall be bonnet-less, wafer type with through bolting flange, for
installation between two adjacent flanges. Flange holes in the body shall
be Class 125, ANSI BI6.1. Valve leakage shall be in accordance with
MSS SP-81. Valves shall have a resilient seat (neoprene or nitrile) for
drip-tight shutoff. Valves shall be DeZurik Series KGS, ITT Fabri- Valve
Model C67S, or equal.
C.
Plug Valves
1. Plug Valves shall be non-lubricated, eccentric type and shall close trop-
tight at the rates pressure of 150 psig.
2. Port areas shall be at least 80% of the full pipe area to provide clog-free
operation.
3. The valve body shall be cast iron with a welded-in-place nickel seat. The
body shall have a bolted bonnet for permitting removal of the plug while
the body remains in line.
4. Flanges shall be 125-pound, faced and drilled.
5. The plug shall be cast iron with synthetic rubber facing, suitable for
frequent open-close operation and for flow throttling.
6. Journal bearings shall be provided at each end of the plug and shall be of
the wetted type to prevent binding. Bearings shall be fabricated from oil-
impregnated 316 stainless steel so that the plug will operate freely after
long periods of inactivity.
15100-7
PROCESS VAL YES
03 720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
7. Packing shall be adjustable U-rings, and shall be capable of being replaced
under pressure without removal of the bonnet or plug.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Valves shall be provided with adjustable stops.
9. Valves for interior installation and smaller than 8 inches in diameter shall
be equipped with standard 2-inch nuts for wrench operation.
10. Valves 8 inches in diameter and larger shall be equipped with worm gear
and hand-wheels.
11. Chain operators shall be furnished ill accordance with chain wheel
operators as stated below.
12. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be installed so that when closed,
the plug is at the upstream end of the valve.
13. In horizontal piping with the plug shaft installed horizontally, the plug
shall be in the upper part of the valve body when open.
14. Plug valves on digester gas piping shall be NBR Hydrocarbonated for
corrosion protection.
15. Plug valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Keystone, Pratt or
equal.
D.
Butterfly Valves:
1. Thrust Bearings for Butterfly Valves:
Provide thrust bearings to hold the valve disc in the center of the valve
seat. No bearings shall be mounted inside the valve body within the
waterway. Do not use thrust bearings in which a metal bearing surface on
the disc rubs in contact with an opposing metal surface on the inside of the
body.
2. Bronze Components in Butterfly Valves:
Bronze components in contact with water shall comply with the following
requirements:
15100-8
PROCESS VAL YES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
Constituent Content
Zinc 7% maximum
Aluminum 2% maximum
Lead 8% maximum
Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum
3.
Actuator Sizing for Butterfly Valves:
a. Actuators shall be sized to produce valve shaft output torques
equivalent to at least 75% of the torsional shear stress of the
minimum required shaft diameters.
4.
Port Sizes for Butterfly Valves:
a. For valves 24 inches and smaller, the actual port diameter shall be
at least 93% of the nominal valve size. For valves larger than 24
inches, the port diameter shall not be more than 1.25 inches
smaller than the nominal valve size. The dimension of the port
diameter shall be the clear waterway diameter plus the thickness of
the rubber seat.
5.
Corrosion-Resistant Materials in Butterfly Valves:
a. Where A WW A C504 requires "corrosion resistant" material, such
material shall be one of the following:
(1) Bronze as described above.
(2) Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
(3) Monel (UNS N04400).
(4) Synthetic nonmetallic material.
6.
Seating Surfaces in Butterfly Valves:
a. Seating surfaces in valves having motorized actuators shall be
stainless steel or nickel-copper as in A WW A C504 or nickel-
chromium alloy containing a minimum of 72% nickel and a
minimum of 14% chromium.
7.
Factory Leakage Testing:
a. Perform factory leakage tests in accordance with A WW A C504 on
both sides of the seat.
8.
Flanged, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 4 through 72 Inches, Class
150B:
15100-9
PROCESS VALVES
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Butterfly valves shall be short-body, flanged type for exposed valves and
valves in vaults or structures, and either flanged or mechanical joint for
buried valves. Valve shall conform to A WW A C504, Class 150B.
Minimum working differential pressure across the valve disc shall be 150
psi. Flanged ends shall be Class 125, ANSI B16.1. Valve shafts shall be
stub shaft or one-piece units extending completely through the valve disc.
Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Component Material Specification
Body Cast iron or ductile AWWAC504
Iron
Exposed body Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 304 or
capscrews and bolts and 316
nuts
Discs Cast iron, ductile iron, AWWAC504
or Ni-Resist
Shafts, disc fasteners, Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 304 or
seat retention segments, 316
and seat fastening
devices
Seat material EPDM --
The rubber valve seat shall be secured to or retained in the valve body or
on the valve disc. Valves shall be Pratt, DeZurik Series BA W, M&H,
Val-Matic, or equal.
9.
Butterfly Valves for Air Piping:
a. Cast iron bodies.
b. Cast iron valves conforming to ASTM A126, Class B with
nichrome seating edge, or cast iron vanes conforming to ASTM
A48 Class 40 with mechanically secured rubber seat having
integral 18-8 stainless steel clamp ring.
c. Type 316 stainless steel valve shafts with permanently lubricated
Teflon bearings.
d. Flanged ends or wafer type lug body rotating on a horizontal axis.
e. 150-psi minimum working pressure.
f. Resilient EPT rubber seats.
g. Design and construction complying with A WW A Standard C504.
15100-10
PROCESS VAL YES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
h. Actuators as specified; lever actuators for valves 8 inches and
smaller shall be infinitely variable level actuators with locking
device.
1. Valve position indicators.
J. All valve components suitable for operation up to 2500 F.
k. Extended operators on valves installed on drop legs of aeration
tank piping.
Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by Dresser, DeZurik, Pratt, or
equal.
E.
Ball Valves:
1. Threaded Bronze Ball Valves 2 Inches and Smaller:
Ball valves, 2 inches and smaller, for air or water service shall have
bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600 or C84400) body and
plug ball retainer. Ball and stem shall be bronze (as specified for the
body) or Type 316 stainless steel. Provide chrome-plated ball, if ball is
bronze. Valves shall have screwed ends (ANSI B1.20.1), non-blowout
stems, reinforced Teflon seats, and have plastic-coated lever operators.
Valves shall have a pressure rating of at least 600 psi WOG at a
temperature of 1500F. Valves shall be Stockham S-206, Apollo 77-100
Series, or equal.
2. Nut-and-Ferrule Brass Ball Valves (Straight Pattern), 3/4 Inch and
Smaller:
Brass ball valves, 3/4 inch and smaller, for water service shall be straight
pattern and rated at a minimum pressure of 2,500 psi at a temperature of
150oF. Adjust valves for an operating pressure of 150 psi at a temperature
of 700F. Valve body, ball, stem, side rings, disc rings, and packing bolt
shall be brass. Upper and lower packing shall be Teflon. Provide lever
actuators with plastic handle. Provide end connections of the nut-and-
ferrule type for connection to tubing. Products: Whitey Series 40 or equal.
3. Nut-and-Ferrule Brass Ball Valves (Angle Pattern), 3/4 Inch and Smaller:
Brass ball valves, 3/4 inch and smaller, for water service shall be angle
pattern and rated at a minimum pressure of 1,500 psi at a temperature of
150oF. Adjust valves for an operating pressure of 150 psi at a temperature
of 70oF. Valve body, ball, stem, side rings, disc rings, and packing bolt
shall be brass. Upper and lower packing shall be Teflon. Provide lever
actuators with plastic handle. Provide end connections of the nut-and-
15100-11
PROCESS VAL YES
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
ferrule type for connection to tubing. Products: Whitey Series 40A or
equal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
Flanged Bronze Ball Valves, Class 150, 4 Inches and Smaller:
Ball valves 4 inches and smaller shall have a minimum pressure rating of
200 psi at a temperature of l500F. The valve body shall be aluminum
bronze (ASTM B 148, Alloy C95400) or bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B
584, Alloy C83600). Ball and stem shall be Type 316 stainless steel or
bronze (ASTM B 21, Alloy C48500). Seat and seals shall be Teflon.
Ends shall be flanged, flat faced ANSI BI6.5, Class 150. Valves shall be
Neles-Jamesbury Style 5150, McCanna Series SI51-BR, or equal.
5.
Double Union PVC Ball Valves 3 Inches and Smaller:
Thermoplastic ball valves, 3 inches and smaller, for water service shall be
rated at a pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of 1050F. Body, ball, and
stem shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D 1784, Type 1, Grade 1. Seats
shall be Teflon. O-ring seals shall be Viton or EPDM depending on the
service conditions. Valve ends shall be of the double-union design. Ends
shall be socket welded except where threaded or flanged-end valves are
specifically shown in the Drawings. Valves shall have handle for manual
operation. Provide stem extensions when valves are installed in insulated
piping. Stem extensions shall be of a length sufficient to bring the bottom
of the operating handle above the outside of the insulation; see Section
15080 for insulation thickness. Valves shall be as manufactured by
Chemtrol, Hayward, R & G Sloan, Spears Manufacturing Company, Plast-
O-Matic, or equal.
6.
Double Union PVC Ball Valves 3 Inches and Smaller with Vented Ball for
Hypochlorite Service:
Vented PVC ball valves, 3 inches and smaller, for chemical service shall
be rated at a pressure of 230 psi at a temperature of 700F and 150 psi at a
temperature of 1050F. Provide machined vent hole, de-burred, in the ball
to allow gases to vent. Body, ball, and stem shall be PVC conforming to
ASTM D 1784, Cell Classification 12454-A. Stems shall have double 0-
rings and be of blowout proof design. Seats shall be Teflon and shall have
elastomeric backing cushion of the same material as the valve seals. 0-
ring seals shall be Viton FKM. Valve ends shall be of the double-union
design. Ends shall be socket welded except where threaded or flanged-end
valves are specifically shown in the Drawings. Valves shall have a handle
for manual operation. Valves shall be Asahi/ America Type DuoBloc 21.
7.
Full Port Threaded Stainless Steel Ball Valves 2 Inches and Smaller in
Oxygen Service:
15100-12
PROCESS VAL YES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Stainless steel ball valves, 2 inches and smaller, for water and hydraulic
oil and oxygen service shall be rated at a minimum pressure of 1,000 psi
WOG at a temperature of lOOOF. Provide full port ball and body design.
Valve body, ball, and stem shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 276
or A 351. Seat and seals shall be reinforced Teflon. Valves shall have
lever actuators, plastic coated. Valves shall have screwed ends (ANSI
B1.20.1) and non-blowout stems. Valves shall be Worcester Series 59,
Apollo 86-100 Series, or equal.
8. Nut-and-Ferrule Stainless Steel Ball Valves (Straight Pattern), 3/4 Inch
and Smaller:
Stainless steel ball valves, 3/4 inch and smaller, for water and chemical
service shall be straight pattern and rated at a minimum pressure of 2,500
psi at a temperature of 150oF. Adjust valves for an operating pressure of
150 psi at a temperature of 700F. The valve body, ball, stem, side rings,
disc rings, and packing bolt shall be Type 316 stainless steel (ASTM A
276, A 351, or A 479). Upper and lower packing shall be Teflon. Provide
lever actuators with plastic handle. Provide end connections of the nut-
and-ferrule type for connection to tubing. Products: Whitey Series 40 or
equal.
9. Flanged Stainless Steel Ball Valves 4 Inches and Smaller, Class 150:
Stainless steel ball valves 1/2 inch through 4 inches shall have flanged
ends, ANSI BI6.5, Class 150. Pressure rating shall be at least 250 psi at a
temperature of lOooF. Bodies shall be Type 316 stainless steel (ASTM A
351, Type CF8M). Ball, stem, and compression ring shall be Type 316
stainless steel. Bonnet bolting shall be ASTM A 193, Grade B8M. Seats
and seals shall be Teflon. Valves shall be Neles-Jamesbury Type 5150 or
7150, McCanna Series FI51-S6, Apollo Series 87, or equal.
10. Threaded Stainless Steel Ball Valves, 14 Inch through 2 Inches:
Stainless steel ball valves, 14 inch through 2 inches, for carbon dioxide
storage and feeding service, shall be rated at a minimum pressure of 1,500
psi WOG at a temperature of 1 OooF. Bodies shall be Type 316 stainless
steel (ASTM A 351, Type CF8M). Ball, stem, and compression ring shall
be Type 316 stainless steel. Seats shall be filled TFE and seals shall be
TFE. Valves shall be Neles-Jamesbury type 3636MT, or equal.
F.
Globe and Angle Valves:
1. Bronze Globe Valves 2 Inches and Smaller:
Globe valves, 2 inches and smaller, shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62 or
ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600) with screwed ends, union bonnet, inside
screw, rising stem, and composition or PTFE disc. Valves shall have a
15100-13
PROCESS VALVES
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
pressure rating of at least 300 psi at a temperature of 150oF. Stem shall be
bronze: ASTM B 371 (Alloy C69400), ASTM B 99 (Alloy C65100), or
ASTM B 584 (Alloy C87600). Valves shall be Crane No. 7TF, Walworth
Figure 3095, StQckham B-22T, or equal.
2.
Bronze Angle Hose Valves:
Angle-type hose valves of sizes 1-112 inches and 2-112 inches shall be
brass or bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600) body with
rising or nonrising stem, composition disc, and bronze or malleable iron
handwheel. Stem shall be bronze, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584 (Alloy
C83600), or ASTM B 198 (Alloy C87600). Valves shall have a cold-
water service pressure rating of at least 150 psi. Provide cap and chain
with valve. Threads on the valve outlet shall be American National
Standard fire hose coupling screw thread. Valves shall be Nibco T-301-
HC, Powell Figure 151 with Figure 527 nipple adapter, Crane 17TF with
hose nipple adapter, or equal.
3.
Bronze Angle Hose Valves (1-1I2-inch and 2-1I2-inch) with Quick
Connect Coupling Adapters (for Non-potable Water Service):
Angle-type hose valves of sizes 1-1/2 and 2-112 inches shall have brass or
bronze (ASTM B 62 or B 584, Alloy C83600) body with rising or
nonrising stem, composition disc, and bronze or malleable iron hand
wheel. Stem shall be bronze, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 585 (Alloy C83600),
or ASTM B 198 (Alloy C87600). Valve shall have cold-water service
pressure rating of at least 150 psi. Threads on valve outlet shall be
American National Standard fire hose coupling screw thread (ANSI
B1.20.7). Provide atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to ASSE
Standard 1011 and IAPMO code and approved by the City. Provide with
quick connect female adapter to fit the quick connect male adapter on
rubber water hose per specification section 15435. Products: Nibco T-301-
HC, Powell Figure 151, Crane 17TF, or equal.
4.
Bronze Hose Bibbs:
Hose bibbs of size 112 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch shall be all bronze
(ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600) with rising or nonrising
stem, composition disc, bronze or malleable iron handwheel, and bronze
stem (ASTM B 99, Alloy C65100; ASTM B 371, Alloy C69400; or
ASTM B 584, Alloy C87600). Packing shall be Teflon or graphite.
Valves shall have a pressure rating of at least 125 psi for cold-water
service. Threads on valve outlet shall be American National Standard fire
hose coupling screw thread (ANSI B 1.20.7). Provide atmospheric vacuum
breaker conforming to ASSE Standard 1011 and IAPMO code and
approved by the City. Valves shall be Jenkins Figure 112, 113, or 372,
Nibco Figure T-l13-HC, Powell Figure 503H, or equal.
15100-14
PROCESS VAL YES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
G.
Check Valves:
1. Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves 3 Inches to 12 Inches, Class 125:
Swing check valves, 3 inches to 12 Inches, shall be iron body, bronze
mounted, and shall be used at the well sites, with the following materials
of construction:
Description Material Specification
Disc or clapper seat ring and Bronze or brass ASTM B 62 or B 584 (Alloy
valve body seat ring C84400 or C87600)
Body and cap (bonnet) Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B
Disc and hinge or arm Bronze ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584
(valves 4 inches and smaller) (Alloy C84400)
Disc and hinge or arm Cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B; ASTM
(valves larger than 4 inches) bronze B 62.
Hinge pin Stainless steel Type 303, 304, or 410 stainless
Cover bolts and nuts Stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B8M;
ASTM A 194, Grade 8M
Internal fasteners and Bronze or Type
acceSSOrIes 304or316
stainless steel
Bronze or brass components in contact with water shall comply with the
following requirements:
Constituent Content
Zinc 7% maximum
Aluminum 2% maximum
Lead 8% maximum
Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum
Ends shall be flanged, Class 125, ANSI B16.1. Minimum valve working
pressure shall be 150 psi. Provide check valves with outside lever and
spnng.
The shop drawing submittal shall include a detail showing how the hinge
pin extends through the valve body. Show packing gland, hinge pin gland,
cap, and other pieces used.
Valves shall be M&H Style 259, Clow F-5381 or equal.
15100-15
PROCESS VALVES
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
2.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
High-Service Pump - Surgebuster Swing Check Valves:
The valve shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with
A WW A C508. Valves shall consist of body, flapper, and bolted cover.
Operating pressure shall be at least 250 psi at a temperature of 150oF.
Valve seat shall be set at an angle of 35 degrees to the centerline of the
pipe. Ends shall be flanged, ANSI B 16.1, Class 125. Body and cover
shall be ductile iron (ASTM A 351). The disk shall be molded BUNA-N,
ASTM D-2000-BG. The disk accelerator shall be Type 302 stainless
steel. Interior and exterior lining shall be fusion-bonded epoxy. A
mechanical indicator shall be provided for each valve. Cover bolts shall
be Type 316 stainless steel. Products: Val-Matic Series No. 7200
Surgebuster.
3.
PVC Ball Check Valves:
PVC check valves, 3 inches and smaller, shall be constructed of PVC in
accordance with ASTM D 1784, Type I, Grade 1. Ends shall be double
union, socket welded. Seats and seals shall be Viton or EPDM. Valve
shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi at a temperature of750F.
4.
PVC Diaphragm Check Valves 1 Inch and Smaller:
PVC diaphragm check valves, 1 inch and smaller, shall be constructed of
PVC in accordance with ASTM D 1784, Type I, Grade 1. Seats and seals
shall be Viton. Provide a union nut in the valve body containing the
diaphragm seal and seat. Diaphragm shall be EPDM. The design of the
valve shall be such that it is normally closed. Flow entering the valve
shall open the diaphragm, pushing it off the seat until it rests against an
internal stop. If the inlet flow ceases or if backflow occurs, the diaphragm
shall reposition itself, closing off the valve seat. Products: Plast-O-Matic
Series CKM or equal.
5.
CPVC Ball Check Valves:
CPVC check valves 3 inches and smaller shall be constructed of CPVC in
accordance with ASTM D 1785, Type IV, Grade 1. Ends shall be double
union, socket welded. Seats and seals shall be Viton or EPDM and shall
be suitable for the service intended. Valves shall have a pressure rating of
150 psi at a temperature of750F.
15100-16
PROCESS VALVES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
6. Stainless Steel Ball Check Valves:
Stainless steel back check valves 14 inch through 2 inches shall be
constructed of Type 316 stainless steel body (ASTM A351 - CF8M). The
tailpiece, guide, and spring shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. The
valves shall have a pressure rating of 400 WOG at a temperature of 100oF.
Valves shall be Conbraco Industries, Inc. or equal.
H.
Pinch Valves.;.
1. Pinch Valves 1 Inch through 8 Inches:
Pinch valves of sizes 1 inch through 8 inches shall haye cast-iron
(ASTM A 48, Class 30) bodies with totally enclosed actuators. Sleeves
shall be neoprene, Buna-N, or Hypalon. Ends shall be flanged, ANSI
BI6.1, Class 125. Valves shall be handwheel operated with upper and
lower pinch bars. Valves installed on the end of a pipe shall be provided
with a Type 304 stainless steel retaining ring to hold the sleeve end in
place. Valves shall be Red Valve Series 75, Flexible Valve Corporation
Series 2100, Galligher "SIGMA," or equal.
2. Pinch Valves 1 Inch through 8 Inches With Extension Stems:
Pinch valves of sizes 1 inch through 8 inches shall have cast-iron (ASTM
A 48, Class 30) bodies with totally enclosed actuators. Sleeves shall be
neoprene, Buna-N, or Hypalon. Ends shall be flanged, ANSI BI6.1, Class
125. Valves shall have 2-inch-square A WW A operating nuts with
extension stem actuators. Valves shall have upper and lower pinch bars.
Valves installed on the end of a pipe shall be provided with a Type 304
stainless steel retaining ring to hold the sleeve end in place. Valves shall
be Red Valve Series 75, Galligher "SIGMA," or equal.
Solenoid Valves:
Design and construct solenoid valves so that they can be used in both
horizontal and vertical piping.
1 Metallic Solenoid Valves 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller:
Solenoid valves of sizes 1/4 inch through 1-1/2 inches for water and air
service shall have forged brass (Alloy C23000) or bronze (ASTM B 62)
bodies with Teflon main seats. Internal plunger, core tube, plunger spring,
and cage assembly shall be stainless steel (Types 302, 304, or 305).
Solenoid enclosures shall be NEMA 4, except where explosion-proof is
noted in the drawings. Valve actuators shall be 120-volt a-c. Seals shall
be Teflon. Valves shall have a maximum operating pressure and a
maximum differential pressure of 125 psi. Solenoid valves shall be
15100-17
PROCESS VAL YES
I.
J.
03 720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
energized to open or close based on design condition. Valves shall be
ASCO "Redhat," Parker Hannifin "Skinner," or equal.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Plastic Solenoid Valves 1/4 Inch through 1 Inch:
Solenoid valves of sizes 1/4 inch through 1 inch for water and chemical
services shall have CPVC bodies with EPDM seals. Valve bodies shall be
of the true union design with threaded end connections with the coil
assembly contained in a molded polyester housing. Plunger or core tube
shall be Teflon or polypropylene. Solenoid enclosures shall be NEMA
4X. Valve actuators shall be 120 volts A-C. Valves shall have a
minimum operating pressure of 120 psi and a maximum differential
pressure of 25 psi on either side of the valve, with the valve in the closed
position. Solenoid valves shall be energized to open. Products: Hayward
or equal.
Pet Cocks and Drain Cocks:
1. Pet Cocks 1/2 Inch and Smaller:
Pet cocks shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62) or brass (ASTM B 16), rated at
125 psi. Provide lever or tee handle operator. Pet cocks shall be Crane
Figure 724, Lunkenheimer Figure 478 or 479, or equal.
3. Type 1010-Drain Cocks 1/2 Inch and Smaller:
Drain cocks shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62) or brass (ASTM B 16), rated at
125 psi. Provide lever or tee handle operator. Drain cocks shall be Crane
Figure 702, Lunkenheimer Figure 476 or 980, or equal.
Mud Valves:
1. Mud Valves 4 Inches through 24 Inches:
Mud valves shall be rising stem with flanged end, unless otherwise shown
in the Drawings. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Component Material Specification
Body Cast iron ASTM A 48 or A 126
Stem, nut, disc ring, and Bronze ASTM B 62 or B 584, Alloy
seat ring C83600
Extension stem Stainless steel AlSI Type 316
15100-18
PROCESS VALVES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K.
L.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Provide extension stem, stem guides, and A WW A operating nut. Mud
valves shall be Clow Figure F-3088, Waterman Industries, or equal.
Vacuum Breakers:
1. PVC Vacuum Breaker Valves, 1 Inch and Smaller:
Vacuum breaker valves shall have PVC body and EPDM diaphragm and
seals. The diaphragm shall unseat at 2-inch Hg vacuum and allow air to
enter the system at 80 scfm. End shall be threaded or socket welded.
Vacuum breaker valve shall be Plast-O-Matic Series VBM, Ryan Herco,
Harrington Industrial Plastics, or equal.
Electric Actuators:
Valves indicated on the Drawings with electric actuators shall have the following
features and controls:
1. "Remote" mode. Valve operation is controlled in response to a 4- to 20-
mA signal from the plant's SCADA system.
2. "Local" mode. Valve can be opened or closed based on open, close, stop
pushbuttons or actuator.
3. "Off" mode. Valve will not operate in the remote or local mode.
The valve actuator shall be capable of completely opening or closing the valve at
a minimum rate of 60 seconds in response to "open" and "close" pushbutton
operation and remote "open" and "close" contact closures at peak flow and
maximum unseating head conditions. The maximum torque and thrust required to
meet these performance requirements shall be determined by the gate
manufacturer, based on these Specifications and Drawings. The lift mechanism
must be capable of withstanding an effort of up to 200 pounds without damage.
The valve actuator manufacturer shall coordinate specific model selection with
torque-and-thrust requirements.
Self-Locking Feature - The actuator gearing and/or stem threading shall be self-
locking.
Manual Operation - A metallic handwheel shall be provided for manual operation
with an arrow to indicate "open" rotation. The handwheel shall not rotate during
motor operation. A fused motor shall not prevent manual operation. When in the
manual operating mode, the actuator will remain in this mode until the motor is
energized, at which time the actuator will automatically return to electric
operation. Movement from motor operation to handwheel operation shall be
accomplished by a positive padlockable declutch lever, which mechanically
disengages the motor and related gearing. It shall be impossible for simultaneous
15100-19
PROCESS VALVES
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
manual and motor operation to occur. A friction-type declutch mechanism is not
acceptable. Maximum effort required to open or close the gate shall not exceed
40 pounds pull on the handwheel.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Position Limit Switches - The actuator shall be capable of transmitting a position-
indicating signal to indicate the percent the valve is open or closed.
Torque Switch - Each valve actuator shall be equipped with a switch that will
interrupt the control circuit in both the opening and closing directions when
torque overload occurs.
The valve actuator motor and all electrical enclosures shall be NEMA 4. Motor
shall be 3 hp maximum. The motor shall be suitable for operation on three-phase,
60-Hertz, 480-volt current. The motor shall be specifically designed for gate
actuator service and shall be of high starting torque, totally enclosed, non-
ventilated construction. Motor insulation shall be a minimum NEMA Class F,
with a maximum continuous temperature rating of 1550 C (rise plus ambient) for
the duty cycle specified. The motor shall be of sufficient size to open or close the
valve at the maximum stated torque. The motor shall be capable of operating at
plus or minus 10% of specified voltage. The motor duty rating shall be sufficient
for one complete cycle (open-close-open; or reverse) without exceeding its
temperature rating. Motor bearings shall be of the anti-friction type and
permanently lubricated. Space heaters are not acceptable. The gearbox shall be
oil-filled; grease is not acceptable. The actuator shall not be non-intrusive and
shall be commissioned without removing covers. The motor shall be an
independent sub-assembly such that the power gearing shall not be an integral
part of the motor assembly, to allow for motor or gear changes dictated by system
operation requirements. The motor shall be equipped with internal thermal
contacts to protect against motor overload. Actuator shall provide a battery
backup in case of power loss to allow operation of display panel.
"Open/Close/Stop" pushbuttons shall be provided at the actuator. A padlockable
"Local/Off/Remote" switch shall be provided at the actuator. In the "Local"
position the actuator shall be controlled by the "Open/Close/Stop" pushbuttons.
In the "Remote" position the actuator shall open or closed or be set at a partially
open position by the plant's SCADA system. The actuator shall have a contact
closure indicating that the "Local/Remote" switch is in the "Remote" position.
The motorized valve actuators shall be tested to demonstrate that the system has
been properly installed and meets the performance requirements specified in this
Section. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience
manufacturing the proposed actuator. Actuators shall be as manufactured by the
following, or approved equal:
Rotork, Inc, Rochester, New York.
Limitorque, Lynchburg, Virginia.
15100-20
PROCESS VAL YES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 JOINTS
A. Boltholes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of
the pipe run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing
before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing,
lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and
progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts
and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and
retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight.
B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint
compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints
shall be watertight.
C. Install lug-type valves with separate hex head machine bolts at each bolthole and
each flange (two bolts per valve bolthole).
D. Install grooved-end couplings for valves in accordance with Section 15050.
3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES:
A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, install valves in horizontal runs of
pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the floor with their
operating stems vertical. Install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having
centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above the floor
with their operating stems horizontal.
B. Install valves on vertical runs of pipe that are next to walls with their stems
horizontal, away from the wall. Valves on vertical runs of pipe that are not
located next to walls shall be installed with their stems horizontal, oriented to
facilitate valve operation.
3.03 INSTALLING BURIED VALVES - (NOT USED)
3.04 FIELD COATING BURIED VALVES: - (NOT USED)
3.05 INSTALLING ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES:
A. Install such that the rotation of the plug is about a horizontal axis.
B. Install such that the plug stores in the top when the valve is open.
C. Orient the valve such that the seat is opposite the high-pressure side.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15100-21
PROCESS VAL YES
3.06 INSTALLING EXTENSION STEM GUIDE BRACKETS:
Install at 6- to 8- foot centers. Provide at least two support brackets for stems longer
than 1 0 feet, with one support near the bottom of the stem and one near the top.
3.07 MOUNTING GEAR ACTUATORS:
The valve manufacturer shall select and mount the gear actuator and accessories on each
valve and stroke the valve from fully open to fully closed before shipment.
3.08 FIELD INSTALLATION OF GEAR ACTUATOR:
Provide the actuator manufacturer's recommended lubricating oil in each actuator before
beginning the field-testing.
3.09 VALVE LEAKAGE TESTING:
Test valves for leakage at the same time that the connecting pipelines are tested. See
Section 15144 for pressure testing requirements. Protect or isolate any parts of valves,
actuators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the
pressure test. Valves shall show zero leakage. Repair or replace any leaking valves and
retest.
3.10 VALVE FIELD TESTING:
A. Operate manual valves through three full cycles of opening and closing. Valves
shall operate from full open to full close without sticking or binding. Do not
backfill buried valves until after verifying that valves operate from full open to
full closed. If valves stick or bind or do not operate from full open to full closed,
repair or replace the valve and repeat the tests.
B. Gear actuators shall operate valves from full open to full close through three
cycles without binding or sticking. The pull required to operate handwheel- or
chain-wheel-operated valves shall not exceed 80 pounds. The torque required to
operate valves having 2-inch A WW A nuts shall not exceed 150 ft-Ib. If actuators
stick or bind or if pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously,
repair or replace the actuators and repeat the tests. Operators shall be fully
lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations before
operating.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15100-22
PROCESS VAL YES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15103
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes materials, installation, and testing of PVC pipe and fittings
for use in process piping having a maximum design pressure of 150 psi and
having a maximum design temperature of 1050F.
B. All buried PVC pipe shall be laid with an accompanying dual # 14 gauge copper
wire with a suitable for burial service blue electrical insulation for potable water
pipe and purple electrical insulation for reclaimed water pipe installed above the
pipe in a continuously conductive run from test station to test station, to facilitate
future location of the main. The installation shall comply with standard detail
shown in these Specifications.
C. All PVC pressure pipe, upon delivery to the site until such time as the pipe is
placed in the trench, shall be shielded from the weather and direct sunlight to
prevent pipe deterioration.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process Systems
D. Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting
E. Section 15060 - Piping Systems - General
F. Section 15064 - Pipe Hangers and Supports
G. Section 15075 - Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification
H. Section 15100 - Process Valves
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification as if incorporated in it except as
modified in this Section. Referenced standards and recommended practices referred to in this
Section shall be the latest edition of any such document.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (pve)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15103-1
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM D1784: Standard Specification for Rigid PVC Compounds and
Chlorinated PVC Compounds.
2. ASTM D2837: Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
3. ASTM D3034: Sewer Pipe Short Form Specification
4. ASTM D3139: Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
5. ASTM F477: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for
Joining Plastic Pipe
6. ASTM F1417: Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of
Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air
B. American Water Works Association (A WW A)
1. A WW A C605: Standard for Underground Installation of PVC Pressure
Pipe and Fittings for Water
C. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
1. NSF14: Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials
2. NSF61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects
1.04 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section 01340 the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of materials
required to establish compliance with this Section. The Contractor shall include at least the
following in submittals:
A. Shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340 and the
following.
B. Submit materials list showing materials of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference
and grade. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with referenced
standards, e.g., ASTM D 1784, D 1785, and D 2467. Show wall thickness of pipe
and fittings. Show fitting dimensions.
C. Submit data sheets for solvent cement and demonstrating compliance with ASTM
D 2564 and F 656.
D. Submit data sheets showing that the pipe and fittings are ANSI/NSF 61 listed for
use in potable water service and that the pipe will bear the NSF logo for potable
water use.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15103-2
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (pvC)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 PIPE
A. Pipe shall be Schedule 80, Type I, Grade 1 (Class 12454-B), conforming to
ASTM D 1784 and D 1785.
B. Pipe shall bear the NSF61 logo when used for potable water.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be Schedule 80 and shall conform to ASTM D 2464 for threaded
fittings and ASTM D 2467 for socket-type fittings.
B. PVC fittings shall be Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D-2464 and D-2466 or
latest revision thereof. (Threaded IPS nipples and plugs only.)
C. Nipples bushings couplings, bends and caps shall be made from Schedule 80 PVC
unless shown differently on the Contract Drawings.
2.03 FLANGES
PVC flanges shall be of the one-piece solid socket design and shall be made of the same
material as the pipe. Pressure rating shall be at least 150 psi at a temperature of 73 OF.
Minimum burst pressure shall be 500 psi. Flanges shall match the dimensions of ANSI
B16.5, Class 150, steel flanges for outside diameter, bolt circle, and boltholes. Do not
use VanStone flanges.
2.04 UNIONS
Unions shall have socket-type ends, Viton O-rings, and shall be Schedule 80. Material
shall be Type I, Grade 1 PVC, in accordance with ASTM D 1784.
2.05 JOINTS
Pipe and fitting joints shall be socket welded except where threaded and flanged joints
are required to connect to valves and equipment.
2.06 SOLVENT CEMENT IN OTHER THAN CHEMICAL AND CHEMICAL CARRIER
WATER SERVICE
Solvent cement for socket joints shall comply with ASTM D 2564 and F 656.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15103-3
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (pve)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.07 SOLVENT CEMENT IN CHEMICAL AND CHEMICAL CARRIER WATER
SERVICE
A. Solvent cement shall be free of silica. Products: IPS "Weld-On 724" or Oatey
"Lo V.O.C. PVC Heavy Duty Gray."
B. Sodium Hypochlorite PVC lines shall use IPS Weldon CPVC 724 or IPS EZ
Weldon Wet'R Dry PVC 725
2.08 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
See Section 15060.
2.09 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
See Section 15060.
2.10 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 15060.
2.11 WYE STRAINERS
PVC wye strainers shall be manufactured of the same material as the pipe, with 30-mesh
screens and Viton seals. Connecting ends shall be the socket type, solvent welded.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Do not install PVC pipe when the temperature is below 400F or above 900F.
Store loose pipes on racks with a maximum support spacing of 3 feet. Provide
shades for pipe stored outdoors or installed outdoors until the pipe is filled with
water.
B. Store fittings indoors in their original cartons.
C. Store solvent cement indoors or, if outdoors, shade from direct sunlight exposure.
Do not use solvent cements that have exceeded the shelf life marked on the
storage container.
D. Before installation, check pipe and fittings for cuts, scratches, gouges, buckling,
kinking, or splitting on pipe ends. Remove any pipe section containing defects by
cutting out the damaged section of pipe.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PvC)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15103-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Do not drag PVC pipe over the ground, drop it onto the ground, or drop objects on
it.
3.02 SOLVENT-WELDED JOINTS
A. Before solvent welding, remove fittings and couplings from their cartons and
expose them to the air at the same temperature conditions as the pipe for at least 1
hour.
B. Cut pipe ends square and remove all burrs, chips, and filings before joining pipe
or fittings. Bevel solvent-welded pipe ends as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
C. Wipe away loose dirt and moisture from the inside and outside of the pipe end
and the inside of the fitting before applying solvent cement. Clean the surfaces of
both pipes and fittings that are to be solvent welded with a clean cloth moistened
with acetone or methyl ethyl ketone. Do not apply solvent cement to wet surfaces.
D. The pipe and fitting socket shall have an interference fit. The diametrical
clearance between pipe and entrance of the fitting socket shall not exceed 0.04
inch. Check the fit at every joint before applying solvent cement.
E. Make up solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Application of
cement to both surfaces to be joined and assembly of these surfaces shall produce
a continuous bond between them with visual evidence of cement at least flush
with the outer end of the fitting bore around the entire circumference.
F. Allow at least 8 hours of drying time before moving solvent-welded joints or
subjecting the joints to any internal or external loads or pressures.
G. Acceptance criteria for solvent-welded joints shall be as follows:
a. Unfilled Areas in Joint: None permitted.
b. Unbonded Areas in Joint: None permitted.
c. Protrusion of Material into Pipe Bore, Percent of Pipe Wall Thickness:
Cement, 50%.
3.03 FLANGED JOINTS
A. Lubricate carbon steel bolt threads with graphite and oil before installation.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
15103-5
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVe)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
B. Tighten bolts on PVC flanges by tightening the nuts diametrically opposite each
other using a torque wrench. Complete tightening shall be accomplished in stages
and the final torque values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 15060.
3.05 THREADED JOINTS
A. Cut threaded ends on PVC to the dimensions of ANSI B1.20.1. Ends shall be
square cut. Follow the pipe manufacturer's recommendations regarding pipe
hold-down methods, saw cutting blade size, and saw cutting speed.
B. Pipe or tubing cutters shall be specifically designed for use on PVC pipe. Use
cutters manufactured by Reed Manufacturing Company, Ridge Tool Company, or
equal.
C. If a hold-down vise is used when the pipe is cut, insert a rubber sheet between the
vise jaws and the pipe to avoid scratching the pipe.
D. Thread cutting dies shall be clean and sharp and shall not be used to cut materials
other than plastic.
E. Apply Teflon@ thread compound or Teflon@ tape lubricant to threads before
screwing on the fitting.
3.06 INSTALLING UNIONS
Provide unions on exposed piping 3 inches and smaller as follows:
a. At every change in direction (horizontal and vertical).
b. Six to 12 inches downstream of valves.
c. Every 40 feet in straight pipe runs.
d. Where shown in the Drawings.
3.07 INSTALLING BURIED PIPE
A. Install in accordance with the Specification as follows.
1. Trench bottom shall be continuous, smooth, and free of rocks. See the details
in the Drawings for trench dimensions, pipe bedding, and backfill.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (pve)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15103-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. After the pipe has been solvent-welded and the joints have set, snake the pipe
in the trench according to the pipe manufacturer's recommendations in order to
allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe.
3. Do not backfill the pipe trench until the solvent-welded joints have set.
Support the pipe uniformly and continuously over its entire length on firm, stable
soil. Do not use blocking to change pipe grade or to support pipe in the trench.
B. Install buried PVC pipe in accordance with ASTM D 2774 and the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. Backfill materials in the pipe zone shall be
imported sand. If water flooding is used, do not add successive layers unless the
previous layer is compacted to 90% relative compaction.
3.08 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. See Section 15060 and Section 15064.
B. Fill empty piping with water, provide temporary shading, or use other means to
keep the surface temperature of the pipe below 1 OooF.
3.09 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat piping that is exposed to sunlight as specified Section 09901, System No. 41
or 42.
3.10 PIPE LABELS AND COLOR CODING
A. Label and color code exposed piping and piping located inside concrete pipe
trenches with flow stream identification labels and banding in accordance with
Sections 09901, 09902, and 15075 and the Piping Schedule on the Drawings.
3.11 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Perform hydrostatic testing for leakage in accordance with Section 15144.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15103-7
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVe)
PiPE AND FITTINGS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15144
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the hydrostatic and leakage testing of pressure piping for
chemical piping, wash water piping, and sludge piping.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and
the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers.
A. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 15060 - Piping Systems - General
D. Section 15100 - Process Valves
E. Section 15101 - Ductile Iron Piping and Fittings
F. Section 15103 - PVC Pipe and Fittings
1.03 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section 01340, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all
materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the
following:
A. Test bulkhead locations and design calculations.
B. Pipe attachment details.
C. Methods to prevent excessive pipe wall stresses.
1.04 REFERENCES
Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products specified in this Section shall
be in accordance with the standards of the organizations listed below:
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
B. American Water Works Association (A WW A)
C. Hydraulic Institute Standards.
Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above or other organizations, the version of
the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
15144-1
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 VENTS AND DRAINS FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Install vents on the high points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the
Drawings or not. Install drains on low points of aboveground piping, whether
shown in the Drawings or not. Provide a valve at each vent or drain point.
Valves shall be 3/4 inch for piping 3 inches and larger and 1/2 inch for piping
smaller than 3 inches.
2.02 MANUAL AIR-RELEASE VALVES FOR BURIED PIPING
Provide temporary manual air-release valves for pipeline test. Construct the pipe outlet
in the same manner as for a permanent air valve and, after use, seal with a blind flange,
pipe cap, or plug and coat the same as the adjacent pipe.
2.03 TEST BULKHEADS
A. Design and fabricate test bulkheads in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Materials shall comply with Part UCS of the
code. Design pressure shall be at least 2.0 times the specified test pressure for the
section of pipe containing the bulkhead. Limit stresses to 70% of yield strength
of the bulkhead material at the bulkhead design pressure. Include air-release and
water drainage connections.
2.04 TESTING FLUID
A. Testing fluid shall be water unless otherwise indicated on the Piping Schedule.
B. For fuel oil piping, use potable water for hydrostatic testing and flushing.
C. For potable water pipelines, obtain and use only potable water for hydrostatic
testing.
D. Submit request for use of water from waterlines of Owner 48-hours in advance.
E. The Contractor may obtain the water from the Owner at no charge.
2.05 TESTING EQUIPMENT
Provide calibrated pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, compressors, chart
recorder, and meters to perform the hydrostatic testing.
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
15144-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE LEAK TESTING
A. General
1. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on newly installed pipelines and
appurtenances, in accordance with the reviewed testing plan.
2. Furnish necessary equipment and material and make taps in piping, as
necessary for testing and as specified.
3. The Engineer will observe the tests.
4. Provide 10 days' advance written notice of start of testing to Engineer.
5. Test Pressures and Type of Test: As specified in the piping schedule as
shown.
6. Test Records: Make records of each piping system during the test to
document the following:
a. Date of test.
b. Description and identification of piping tested.
c. Test fluid.
d. Test pressure.
e. Remarks, including:
1. Leaks (type, location)
2. Repairs made on leaks.
f. Certification by the Contractor and signed acknowledgment by the
Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed.
B. Testing New Pipe Connected to Existing Pipe
1.
Isolate new pipe with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, or blind
flanges.
2.
Test joint between new piping and existing piping by methods, approved
by the Engineer, that do not place the entire existing system under test
load.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
]5144-3
C. Buried Pressure Piping
1. Initial Service Leak Test: Conduct with partially backfilled trench and
joints left open for inspection, as field conditions permit and as approved
by Engineer.
2. Final Hydrostatic Acceptance Test: Conduct after trench has been
completely backfilled.
3. Expose all joints on buried pressure piping to be pneumatically tested or
subjected to an initial service leak test.
D. Exposed Pressure Piping: Conduct tests after pIpmg has been completely
installed and inspected for proper installation, including all supports, hangers, and
anchors, but before installation of insulation.
3.02 HYDROSTATIC LEAK TESTING
A. GENERAL
1. Hydrostatic tests shall consist of pressure test and leakage test.
Hydrostatic tests shall be conducted on all newly laid pressure pipes, joints
and valves, including all service lines to the curb stops. Air testing of
pressure pipes will not be permitted under any circumstance. Tests may
be made on sections not exceeding 2,000 feet, when this procedure is
acceptable to the Engineer or designee. The Contractor shall furnish all
necessary equipment and material including water, make all taps including
cross connects, and furnish all closure pieces in the pipe as required.
Equipment to be furnished by the Contractor shall include graduated
containers, pressure gauges, hydraulic force pumps, and suitable hoses and
piping. The Engineer or designee will monitor the test.
2. The Contractor may conduct hydrostatic tests after the trench has been
partially backfilled with the joints left exposed for inspection purposes
only. The hydrostatic tests for acceptance shall only be conducted after
the trenches have been completely backfilled and compacted as specified.
B. TESTING CRITERIA
1.
All pipe sections to be pressure tested shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
pressure of 150 psi or in accordance with the piping schedule in the
mechanical drawings. Each pressure test shall last for 2 hours. The
maximum allowable pressure loss for the 2-hour test shall be 2 psig. If
during the test the integrity of the tested line is in question, the Engineer or
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
15144-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
designee may require a second 2-hour pressure test. The basic provisions
of A WW A C-600 shall be applicable.
C.
PROCEDURE FOR PRESSURE TEST
1. Each section of pipe to be tested shall be slowly filled with water and the
specified test pressure shall be applied by a pump connected to the pipe in
a satisfactory manner. Before the specified test pressure is applied, all air
shall be expelled from the pipe and the main shall be flushed and pigged
using a City-approved swab. To accomplish this, taps shall be made and
appropriate valves installed to ensure bleeding of all air from the main. If
defective pipes, fittings, valves, or hydrants are discovered in consequence
of this pressure test, the Contractor shall replace all such items with sound
material and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are
obtained. Provisions of A WW A C600, where applicable, shall apply.
D.
PROCEDURE FOR LEAKAGE TEST
1. After completion of the pressure test, a leakage test shall be conducted to
determine the quantity of water lost by leakage under the specified test
pressure. Applicable provisions of A WW A C600 and C602 shall apply.
2. Allowable leakage in gallons per hour for pipeline shall not be greater than
that determined by the formulas:
Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)
L = SD (P) 'li
133,200
Where:
L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S = Length of pipe tested, in feet.
D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches.
P = Average test pressure during leakage testing pounds per
square inch gauge.
133,200 =
Predetermined constant.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Where:
L = ND (P)'li
7,400
L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
N = Number of joints.
D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches.
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
15144-5
P=
Average test pressure during leakage test in pounds per
square inch gauge.
Predetermined constant.
7,400 =
Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied in the newly laid pipe
or any valved section under test, which is necessary to maintain the specified
leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled.
If any test of pipe laid discloses leakage greater than that allowed, the Contractor
shall locate and replace or repair the defective joints, pipe, or valve until the
leakage from subsequent testing is within the specified allowance.
3.03 INITIAL SERVICE LEAK TESTS
A. Testing Equipment
Testing equipment shall be as specified in this Section.
B. Procedure
1. Gradually bring piping system up to normal operating pressure and hold
continuously for a minimum of 10 minutes.
2. Examine joints and connections for leakage with soap bubbles.
3. The piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or
valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leaking.
4. Correct any visible leakage end retest as directed by the Engineer.
3.04 FINAL CLEANING
A. Interim Cleaning
1. Prevent accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings,
gravel, cleaning rags, and other foreign material within piping sections
during fabrication.
2. Examine piping to ensure removal of these and other foreign objects
before assembly and installation.
B.
Following assembly and testing and before disinfection and final acceptance,
flush pipelines with water to remove accumulate construction debris and other
foreign matter.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
15144-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
C.
Flush until all foreign matter is removed from the pipeline.
D.
Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, and other items as required to properly
dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties.
E.
Minimum Flushing Velocity: 2.5 fps.
F.
For large-diameter pipe where it is impractical to flush the pipe at 2.5 fps velocity,
clean the pipeline in-place from the inside by brushing and sweeping and then
flush the line at a lower velocity as approved by the Engineer.
G.
Insert cone strainers in the flushing connections to attached equipment and leave
in place until cleaning has been accomplished.
Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing
spools and valves from piping.
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
15144-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16401
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for a
complete corrosion-resistant and operable electrical installation, including all fees, charges and
permits necessary.
A. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to, installation of equipment as
provisioned by this section or other sections as follows:
1. Installation of chemical feed equipment.
2. Installation of lighting systems.
3. Installation of instrumentation equipment.
4. Modification of plant control system wiring and equipment.
B. The Contractor shall provide temporary and permanent electrical services of proper
voltage and phase as required for the Project. All single-phase temporary receptacle
outlets shall be provided with ground fault protection per NEC Article 305-6.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate the work ofthis section with others involved in the
construction of the project.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. The provisions of all other technical sections of the specifications are fully applicable
to this section as if incorporated in this Section.
B. Division 1 of these specifications is a part of this section as if incorporated in this
Section.
1.03 PERMITS AND FEES
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections required for the work of this
section and pay all charges incidental thereto. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner all
certificates of inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 REFERENCES
The work shall conform to local codes, rules, and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction
and to applicable provisions of the latest edition or revision of the following standards, except as
modified herein.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-1
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B.
c.
D.
E.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
C2
Cl2.20
C62.4l
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes
Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits
Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage
AC Power Circuits
Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
High Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps, Ballasts,
and Transformers
C62.45
C80.l
C82.9
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Al53 Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
B8 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors; Hard, Medium-Hard,
and Soft Drawn
Federal Specifications and Standards (FSS)
A-A-50552 Fittings for Cable, Power, Electrical and Conduit, Metal, Flexible
A-A-50553A Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid (Thick-Wall and Thin-Wall (EMT)
Type)
A-A-50563A Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps, Electrical
A-A-55809A Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure-Sensitive, Plastic
A-A-558l0 Conduit, Metal, Flexible
A-A-59213 Splice Connectors
A-A-59544 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)
W -C- 37 5D Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service
W-C-596G(2) Connector, Electrical Power, (Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet)
W-S-896F(1) Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-Mounted (General
Specification)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
ICS 1
ICS 6
MGl
ST20
TC2
TC3
WDl
Industrial Controls and Systems: General Requirements
Industrial Controls and Systems: Enclosures
Motors and Generators
Dry-Type Transformer for General Applications
Electric Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
National Fire Protection Association (NFP A)
70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
10 I Life Safety Code
16401-2
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIDCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
67 Panelboards
83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
360 Liquid- Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
508 Industrial Control Equipment
510 PVC, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape
514A Metallic Outlet Boxes
514B Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings
514C Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Devices Boxes and Covers
651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
797 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel
1029 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts
1449 Surge Protective Devices
1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
117
Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of Insulating Materials for
Random-Wound AC Electric Machinery
Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems
519
1.05 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the
work to the Owner for review within 30 days after the Award of Contract.
A. The list shall include catalog numbers, cut sheets, diagrams, and other descriptive
data required to demonstrate conformance to the specifications. Partial lists will not
be acceptable.
B. The basis of acceptance shall be the manufacturer's published ratings for the
equipment. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of products
specified.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following items of equipment:
1. Wiring Devices
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-3
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIUCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. Safety Switches
3. Circuit Breakers
4 Relays
5. Control Devices
6. Concrete Posts/Poles
7. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
8. Concrete Handholes and Pull Boxes
B. Contents of the shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Details of construction, outline and assembly drawings
2. Dimensions
3. Materials
4. Finish
5. Ratings
6. Accessories
7. Trim
8. Engineering data
9. Ladder type schematic control diagrams and wiring diagrams
10. Calculations for harmonic current and voltage distortion
1.07 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's literature for the equipment listed in Article 1.06 above
for the Owner to review, including the following:
A. Written description of equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and
limiting conditions.
B. Recommended assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and calibration
instructions.
C. Operating instructions.
D. Guide to troubleshooting.
E. Maintenance instructions and timetables.
F. Parts List with identification to assembly drawing.
1.08 CERTIFICATION/DOCUMENTATION
Transient voltage surge suppressor submittals shall include the following:
A. UL 1449 peak let-through voltage documentation.
B. Category C3 peak let-through voltage test results.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-4
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Prior to final acceptance of this project, an operation and maintenance manual shall be submitted to
the Owner. The manual shall include manufacturer's literature as outlined in Article 1.07 above,
drawings corrected per shop drawing review comments and as-built modifications, and lists of
suppliers and/or service shops that can provide parts and accessories and equipment repair for the
items of equipment listed in Article 1.06 above. The lists shall include a contact name, telephone
number, and address.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials with manufacturer's tags and labels and UL labels intact. Deliver packaged
material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand, and
UL label. Store materials and equipment in a dry, clean location. Handle and store to avoid damage.
Items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition shall be removed from the project
site and replaced with acceptable items.
A. The Contractor shall provide suitable protection of materials and equipment from
dust and moisture. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of materials
and equipment until acceptance by the Owner.
1.11 WARRANTY
All equipment and materials supplied shall be warranted against defective design, materials, and
workmanship for a minimum period of one year, or as specified herein, against normal use. The
warranty period shall begin once the total project is accepted by the Owner and shall cover
replacement of equipment and/or repair, including labor, travel time, and miscellaneous expenses at
no cost to the Owner for the full warranty period.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MA TERlALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All material and equipment shall be new, approved and labeled, where required, by
UL. Only products by manufacturers regularly engaged in production of specified
units will be acceptable.
B. Where two or more units are required which perform the same function or are of the
same class of equipment or materials, provide all units from a single manufacturer.
C. Provide materials and equipment of suitable composition to perform satisfactorily
when exposed to corrosive conditions of project site.
1. Provide breather and drain fittings in all raceways and enclosures where
necessary to prevent condensation or trapping of moisture.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-5
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIUCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. Provide heaters in all control panels to prevent condensation.
2.02 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Metal Conduit: Rigid metal conduit shall be zinc-coated steel and shall
conform to UL 6. Fittings shall be cast or malleable iron, zinc-coated, and shall
conform to FSS A-A-50563A and UL 514B.
1. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit, elbows, and fittings shall be coated with a
bonded polyvinylchloride, which is permanently fused on at the factory.
a. Above ground conduit system, PVC coating shall have a minimum
thickness of 40 mils. Couplings and condulets shall have overlapping
pressure sealing sleeves.
b. Below ground conduit system, PVC coating shall have a minimum
thickness of 20 mils.
c. Below ground conduit system, PVC coating for extreme corrosive
conditions shall have a minimum thickness of20 mils and shall have
both external and internal bonded coatings.
B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be polyvinyl chloride
compound and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL 651. Conduit shall be sunlight
resistant, rated for use with 90 oc conductors. Fittings shall be ofthe same polyvinyl
chloride compound, of the same manufacture as the conduit and shall conform to
NEMA TC-3 and UL 514B. Conduit and fittings shall be joined by means of a
solvent cement. Type of cement and procedure for application shall be as
recommended by the conduit manufacturer. Conduit shall be Carlon Plus 40 and
Plus 80, or equal.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Electrical metallic tubing shall be zinc-coated steel and
shall conform to UL 797. Fittings shall be compression type and shall conform to
FSS A-A-50553A.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be zinc-coated steel and shall
conform to FSS A-A-55810. Fittings shall conform to FSS A-A-50552.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be made
with galvanized steel flexible conduit covered with an extruded PVC jacket.
1. Fittings shall be compression type specifically designed for use with flexible
conduit and shall form watertight connections. Box connectors shall have
"0" ring between the fitting body and the enclosure.
F. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
shall be an assembly of a hard PVC spiral completely surrounded by flexible PVC.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-6
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Conduit shall conform to UL 1660 for use as indicated in Article 351 of the NEC and
shall be sunlight resistant.
1. Fittings shall be compression type designed for use with the flexible conduit.
Box connectors shall have "0" ring between the fitting body and the
enclosure.
2. Conduit shall be "Carflex" manufactured by Carlon, or equal.
2.03 BOXES
A. General: Boxes shall be sized as recommended by the NEC or as shown on the
drawings.
1. Boxes shall be nonmetallic or code gauge galvanized steel, stainless steel or
cast metal, as specified or shown on the drawings.
2. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron and shall be gasketed ofthe type indicated
on the drawings.
B. Outlet Boxes: Outlet boxes shall be sheet steel, cast metal or nonmetallic.
1. Sheet steel boxes shall be cadmium-coated or zinc-coated.
2. Cast metal boxes shall conform to FSS A-A-50563A.
3. Non-metallic boxes shall conform to UL 514C.
4. Fixture outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be 4-inch, octagonal.
5. Switch and receptacle outlet boxes shall be 2 inches wide by 4 inches high by
2 inches deep.
6. Junction box extensions and covers shall conform to UL 514A.
7. Boxes installed in wet locations or on exterior surfaces shall be gasketed.
2.04 WIRING DEVICES
A. Toggle Switches: Toggle switches shall be specification grade and shall conform to
FSS W -S-896F (1) and shall be totally enclosed with bodies of molded compound
and a mounting strap.
1. Handles shall be brown.
2. Wiring terminals shall be screw type, back- or side-wired.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-7
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3. Switches shall be rated, quiet type, 20 amperes, 277 volts.
4. Switches shall be suitable for control of tungsten filament lamp loads with
"T" marking of UL.
5. No more than one switch is allowed in a single gang position of a switch box.
B. Receptacles: Receptacles shall be specification grade and shall conform to FSS W -C-
596G(2), NEMA WD-l and UL 498.
1. Single and duplex receptacles for general-purpose use shall be heavy-duty
specification grade, 20 amperes, 125 volts, three-wire grounding, NEMA
configuration 5-20R.
2. Special purpose single receptacles shall be heavy-duty specification grade, 20
amperes, 250 volts; three wire grounding, NEMA configuration 6-20R,
unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
3. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amperes, 125
volts, three-wire grounding, NEMA configuration 5-20R.
a. Receptacles shall have a nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current
of 4 to 6 milliamps and shall function to interrupt the current supply
for any value of ground leakage current exceeding the trip level of 4
to 6 milliamps on the load side of the receptacle with a maximum
tripping time of 1I30th of a second.
b. Receptacles shall provide protection for any device connected to the
circuit beyond the receptacle.
c. Receptacles shall have test and reset buttons accessible on the face of
the receptacle.
4. Receptacles shall be suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box, and shall
have a high-impact nylon face.
5. Wiring terminals shall be screw type, back- or side-wired.
6. Receptacles shall be Leviton, Hubbell, or approved equal.
2.05 DEVICE PLATES
Cover Plates: Cover plates shall conform to UL 514A.
A. Furnish one-piece type to suit devices installed, with round or beveled edges.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-8
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Weatherproof cover plates shall be spring-loaded gasketed type with individual cover
for each outlet or switch.
C. Waterproof cover plates shall have screw cap for each outlet. Plug shall have
matching screw attachment to maintain rating when plug is attached. Screw cap shall
be permanently attached to cover plate by chain. A matching plug shall be provided
for each cover plate.
D. Zinc-coated steel or cast metal plates shall be used on unfinished walls.
E. Satin finish stainless steel plates shall be used on finished walls.
F. Provide metal screws with countersunk heads and finish to match finish of plate.
2.06 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Conductors: All conductors shall be annealed soft drawn copper, conforming to
ASTM B8, FSS A-A-59544, UL 83, and the latest requirements of the NEC. All
conductors shall have THW or THWN type insulation, rated at 600 volts, unless
specifically noted otherwise.
1. Other types of insulation may be used as permitted by the NEC. The
Contractor shall be responsible for change in conduit size and conductor size
to maintain ampacity of circuit.
2. Wire #8 A WG and larger shall be stranded concentric lay. Wire sizes #14,
#12, and #10 A WG shall be stranded for control and motor power and solid
for light and receptacle circuits.
3. Conductors shall be as manufactured by Senator Wire & Cable Company,
Laribee Wire Manufacturing Company, Inc., Southwire Company, or equal.
B. Conductor splices shall conform to FSS A-A-59213. Acceptable: Scotchcast
Splicing Kit, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Plastic tape shall
conform to FSS A-A-55809A.
2.07 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy-duty type and UL listed. Switches shall be
rated as indicated on the drawings.
1. All switches shall have switchblades, which are fully visible in the OFF
position when the door is open. Switches shall have permanently attached arc
suppressors, hinged or otherwise attached to permit easy access to line-side
lugs without removal of the arc suppressor. Lugs shall be UL listed for
copper and aluminum cables and front removable. All current-carrying parts
shall be plated by electrolytic processes.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-9
LOW-VOLT AGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and
mechanism, which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover.
Padlocking provisions shall be provided for padlocking in the OFF position
only, with at least three padlocks. Switches shall have a dual-cover interlock
to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the ON position or
closing of the switch mechanism with the door open.
B. Enclosures: Switches installed indoors shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general-
purpose enclosure with knockouts, unless otherwise specified. Switches located
outdoors shall be furnished in NEMA 3R or NEMA 4X enclosures as indicated on
the drawings.
1. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with butt-type pin hinges.
2. NEMA 3R switches through 200 amperes shall be provided with closing caps
and/or interchangeable hubs as required. Rain-tight covers shall be securable
in the open position.
3. NEMA 4X switches shall be furnished in stainless steel enclosures without
knockouts. The means of sealing the cover shall be positive, with 30 through
200-ampere switches having quick release latches with pin type hinges and
gaskets. Enclosures shall be of Code gauge stainless steel.
C. The switchjaws shall be multi-spring type for positive grip of the switchblades. The
fuse clips shall be spring-reinforced, positive pressure type or electrolytic copper.
D. Switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, Cutler-
Hammer/Westinghouse, ITE, or approved equal. All switches shall be of the same
manufacture.
2.08 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Provide molded case thermal magnetic circuit breakers of the type, size and electrical
characteristics as specified or indicated on the drawings. Circuit breakers used as
service entrance disconnects shall be suitable and rated as service entrance
equipment.
B. Circuit breakers shall be of single unit construction, and multi-pole circuit breakers
shall have trip elements in each pole with common trip bar. Frame size 225 amperes
or larger shall have adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip and shall have
interchangeable thermal magnetic trip units.
C. Shunt trip shall be installed in circuit breakers where required by drawings or
specifications.
D. Circuit breaker interrupting ratings shall be equal to the available short circuit current
at the point of installation with the minimum ratings as follows:
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-10
WW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Frame Size
100A
225 A
400 A
800A
1200 A
240 V
18,000
25,000
42,000
42,000
42,000
480V
14,000
22,000
30,000
30,000
30,000
E. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures for general duty indoor use. Enclosures shall be
NEMA 4X stainless steel for exterior locations unless indicated otherwise.
F. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or
Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, or approved equal.
2.09 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
A. Branch Feeder Circuit Breakers: Branch feeder circuit breakers shall be molded case
type; UL listed and shall meet NEMA and FSS standards where applicable. The
breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type with individual trip mechanisms on each
pole and shall be common trip. Thermal trip of all breakers shall be calibrated for
40 oC ambient temperature. The breakers shall have an over-center, trip-free, toggle-
type operating mechanism and quick-make, quick-break action with positive handle
indications. Trip indications shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a
position between ON and OFF. The breakers shall have a minimum interrupt rating
equal to the integrated equipment rating of the motor control center.
1. Branch feeder breakers shall be plug-on units, which utilize a two stage
operating mechanism.
a. In the engaged position the unit stabs shall engage the vertical bus
and allow complete on-off control with clear indication of the breaker
status.
b. In the disengaged position the unit stabs shall be disengaged from the
vertical bus. It shall be possible to close the unit door when in this
position.
c. A non-defeatable interlock shall be provided to prevent the unit from
being placed in the "on" position when disengaged from the bus.
d. Mechanical interlocks shall prevent an operator from opening the
door with the breaker in the "on" position or from placing the breaker
in the "on" position with the door open.
e. Breakers shall have a separate "tripped" position to clearly indicate a
circuit breaker trip condition. It must be possible to reset a tripped
breaker without opening the unit door.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-11
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIUCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
f. A padlock shall be able to lock the unit in the disengaged position and
to simultaneously lock the unit in the "off' position. Provision shall
be provided for locking the unit in the "off' position with up to three
padlocks.
B. Identification: MCC shall have identification nameplates for each unit within each
section. The identification nameplates shall give catalog identification and factory
order number. Unit identification nameplates shall be located on the inside of unit
buckets in a conspicuous location. The engraved bakelite or phenolic plastic
nameplates shall be modified on the exterior of the MCC to identify the MCC and
each load served out of the individual units. Load designations shall be as indicated
on drawings.
2.10 LIGHTING
A. Lighting fixtures similar and equal to the types indicated on the drawings shall be
furnished and installed complete with all ballasts, lamps, starters, lenses, accessory
hardware and associated equipment to provide a complete and working lighting
system. Each fixture furnished shall be designed for the wattage and lamp type
indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein.
1. Lamps of the proper type, wattage and voltage rating shall be furnished and
installed in each fixture. Lamps shall be delivered to the project site in their
original cartons. Unless otherwise indicated, lamps shall comply with the
following:
a. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, medium screw shell base,
extended service type, rated at 125 V AC.
b. Fluorescent lamps shall be standard cool white, with 3150 initial
lamp lumens, 40-watt power usage, and 20,000 hours lamp life.
c. High pressure sodium lamps shall be diffused and shall be rated for
24,000 hours lamps life with initial lumens as follows:
Watts
70
100
150
250
400
Initial Lamp Lumens
5,950
8,800
15,000
26,000
47,500
d. Mercury lamps shall be phosphor-coated deluxe white and shall be
rated for 24,000 hours lamp life with initial lamp lumens as follows:
Watts
Initial Lamp Lumens
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-12
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIDCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
100
175
4,200
8,600
e. All high-intensity discharge lamps shall be provided with a mogul
screw shell base.
2.11 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
A. Secondary transient voltage surge suppressors shall be installed on the secondary side
of step-down transformers or at the associated panelboards, at control panels and at
motor disconnects or junction boxes as indicated on the drawings. Suppressors
located at panelboards shall be connected to a 30 amp multi-pole breaker. All other
suppressors shall be fused.
1. Secondary transient voltage surge suppressors shall be listed in accordance
with UL 1449. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Single impulse current rating of80,000 amperes per phase (8/20 Jlsec.
waveform).
b. Pulse life rating of 1,000 occurrences with no clamping drift for
Category C (8/20 Jlsec. waveform).
c. UL 1449 peak let-through voltage shall not exceed the following:
Voltage
1201208 or 120/240
277/480
L-N
500
800
N-G
500
800
d. Test for Category C3 peak let-through voltage ANSI/lEEE C.62.41
(20 kV-1.2/50 Jls) shall be accomplished by an independent testing
laboratory. Documentation of the test shall be submitted with the
shop drawings.
e. Peak let-through voltage measured in UL and ANSI/lEEE testing
shall include the effect of 6-inch leads connected to the complete unit.
f. Turn-on and turn-off times shall be less than 1.0 nanosecond.
B. Minimum requirements for surge suppressors:
1. Provide suppression elements between each phase or leg and the system
neutral and between the neutral conductor and ground.
2. Each module of modular type suppressors shall be externally fused. Status of
each module shall be monitored on the front of the enclosure and on each
module.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-13
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3. Suppressor failure mode shall be of a "fail-short" design.
4. Visible indication of proper connection and operation shall be provided.
5. Modular type suppressors shall have an internal disconnect and current
limiting fuses. Encapsulated suppressors shall have external fuse or circuit
breaker protection.
6. Terminals shall be provided for all necessary power and ground connections
and shall accommodate # 10 to # 1 A WG wire sizes.
7. Suppressors shall be of solid-state componentry and shall operate bi-
directionally.
8. Suppressors shall have a warranty guarantee period of at least five years.
C. All transient voltage surge suppressors shall be of the same manufacture and shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Mounting
position shall be selected to provide shortest lead possible between the suppressor
and point of connection.
D. Transient voltage surge suppressors shall be as manufactured by Advanced Protection
Technologies, Inc., or approved equal.
2.12 GROUNDING
A. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, 3/4" x 10' sectional type, with couplings and
driving studs for installation.
B. Conductor shall be bare, stranded copper, complying with ASTM B8, for main power
ground and instrument ground, unless otherwise indicated. Grounding conductors
run in conduit shall have green insulation.
C. Connection to ground rod shall be made with exothermic welding kits by Cadweld,
or approved equal. "Acorn" type clamps are not acceptable. Ground connections to
equipment frames, building steel, etc., shall be made with equipment grounding lugs
or clamps intended for grounding purposes.
2.13 PLASTIC CAUTION TAPE
Provide a continuous non-metallic caution tape, 12 inches below finished grade, above each duct or
conduit run. The tape shall be 6 inches wide, imprinted to indicate underground electric utilities, as
manufactured by Giffolyn, Terra-Tape, or equal.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-14
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.14 PRECAST PRODUCTS
A. Concrete Handholes: Concrete handholes shall conform to the dimensions shown on
the drawings, shall be designed to AASHTO H-20 loading and shall be constructed
of 4000 PSI (minimum) reinforced concrete.
1. Handholes shall have full-si2e aluminum (T6061- T6) diamond plate
pedestrian covers with reinforcing angles, rated for 300 pounds per square
foot unless otherwise indicated. Covers shall be removable and shall be
provided with lifting holes (four per cover). Covers larger than 4' x 4'
nominal shall be of sectional construction. Aluminum angles with flat bars
shall be set into inside of walls flush with the top to match covers.
2. Handholes shall be open bottom unless otherwise indicated or specified.
3. Handholes shall have pulling eyes cast in wall opposite duct entry. Conduit
shall be terminated in handhole with end bells grouted in entrance windows
with non-shrink grout.
4. Power and/or signal cables shall be supported on heavy-duty non-metallic
cable racks with adjustable arms and be held in place with non-metallic tie
wraps. Racks shall be maximum three feet apart with a minimum of one per
wall of handhole. Racks shall be attached to handhole walls per the rack
manufacturer's recommendation with a minimum of three anchors per rack.
An anchor shall be located in holes immediately above each adjustable arm.
5. Handholes shall be installed on a 6-inch thick bed of gravel. Gravel shall be
compacted prior to casting or setting handholes. Handholes shall protrude 2
inches minimum above surrounding grade.
B. Concrete Pull Box: Pull box shall be constructed of reinforced concrete or polymer
concrete and shall be Brooks Products, Inc., Quazite, or equal. Covers shall be
provided with lifting slot, bolts and "ELECTRIC" logo.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT OF CONDUIT AND WIRING SYSTEMS
The Contractor shall layout the work and shall be responsible for all necessary lines, levels,
elevations and measurements. The drawings indicate extent and general arrangement of the
components. The Contractor shall become familiar with work of other trades engaged in the
construction. Exact routing of raceways and locations of equipment may be governed by structural
conditions and obstructions. This Contractor shall coordinate with the details of equipment shop
drawings for power and control connections to equipment furnished by others. This is not to be
construed to permit redesigning systems.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-15
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit all requests for changes in the proposed layout due to structural features,
equipment locations and similar conditions to the Owner, with the following
provIsIOns:
1. Detail the reasons for the changes.
2. Submit request within 30 days after award of contract.
3. Make no changes without written approval of the Owner.
B. Examine areas scheduled to receive electrical equipment and material for conditions,
which will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work. Determine
field conditions by actual measurement. Do not proceed with installation until
defects have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with NEC, NESC, local codes and rules and regulations of local
agencies having jurisdiction. Coordinate electrical installation of systems and
packaged equipment items specified in other sections of these specifications.
1. Conductors, circuit breakers, motor controllers, and protective devices
indicated or specified shall be sized to serve the electrical equipment
furnished and shall meet all requirements of the NEC. Voltage drop shall be
limited to 3%, including main service, feeder and branch circuit.
2. Provide coordination of protective, control and signaling devices.
B. Grounding: A ground network shall be established which will electrically connect the
metal structural materials, equipment enclosures, conduits, outlet boxes, cabinets,
motor frames, transformer cases, switchgear enclosures, etc., the service transformer
neutral and the earth to obtain a potential common to all of these. The ground system
shall be properly bonded and sized in accordance with NEC. Solidly ground all non-
current-conducting metal parts to the electrical installation grounding bus. A green
insulated grounding conductor shall be carried with each circuit.
1. Provide common grounds throughout system.
2. Provide a ground grid consisting of driven copper-clad steel ground rods
connected by bare copper conductor at service entrance and/or as shown on
the drawings. Resistance to remote earth shall be 10 ohms or less before
connection to system.
C. Identification: Equipment such as, but not limited to: disconnect switches, motor
starters, control panels, etc., shall be clearly marked.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-16
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIUCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IhI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
1. Identify all devices operating at more than 250 V AC phase-to-phase, or 125
V AC phase-to-ground, with red enamel letters or numerals of appropriate
height applied with a stencil.
2. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment shall be marked with engraved
nameplates of laminated two-color phenolic plastic having white letters.
Attach each nameplate with stainless steel screws. Align nameplates on
equipment being marked in center near the top.
3. Panelboards and control panels shall have designation in II2-inch high letters
and voltage in 1/4-inch high letters centered above door on exterior trim.
4. Mark equipment mounted remotely from source of power (such as pumps and
fans) with equipment number, source of power and starter location. Where
starters are remotely mounted, marking shall include equipment name,
number and location.
5. Conductors shall be identified at each termination, pull box, junction box,
handhole, point of entry to or exit from wireways, panelboards, control
panels, and other points of access. Tags or labels shall be securely affixed to
the conductor in visible locations. Tags shall be durable plastic with the
designation stamped on one side with suitable dies. Labels shall be
permanent with legible black characters on white heat-shrink tubing or
equivalent identification acceptable to the Owner.
a. Power conductors shall be color-coded to identify phases, neutral and
switching legs, using plastic, self-sealing tape. Tags or labels shall
identify the switchboard, MCC, panel, etc., it is served from and the
circuit number.
b. Control conductor (including monitor and instrumentation
conductors) shall be identified by color-coding and tag or label as to
wire number (corresponding to manufacturer's wiring diagram) and
equipment name.
c. Power wiring and control wiring shall be identified in all handholes
with a waterproof permanent tag attached to the cable with plastic
cable ties.
Equipment Connections: Provide complete system with all power and control
connections required for proper operation.
Conduit:
1. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit may be used as follows:
a. Exposed in buildings.
16401-17
LOW-YOLTAGEELECTIUCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
b. Exposed with PVC coating where indicated on the drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Concealed in poured concrete.
d. Below grade with a coating of tar or pitch; pressure-sensitive plastic
tape; or two coats of asphalt tar enamel, allowing 24 hours drying
between coats and before covering.
e. Below grade with PVC coating where indicated on the drawings.
2.
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used as follows:
a. Concealed above suspended ceilings.
b. Exposed in buildings with non-corrOSIve atmospheres where
acceptable to the Owner.
3.
Rigid non-metallic (PVC) conduit may be used as follows:
a. Concealed in walls and floors, Schedule 40.
b. Below grade direct burial, Schedule 40.
c. Exposed in damp or wet locations, Schedule 40.
d. Exposed below 6 feet above finished floor or grade and where subject
to damage, Schedule 80.
4.
Conduit burial depth shall be measured from top of conduit to top surface of
finished grade, pavement, concrete or similar covers as follows:
a. 24 inches (minimum) below unpaved areas,
b. 30 inches (minimum) below stabilized subbase in paved areas.
5.
For concretes slabs on grade and foundations, conduit burial depth shall be
measured from the bottom of the concrete slab or foundation as follows:
a. 12 inches (minimum) below concrete slabs on grade or foundations.
6.
It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to coordinate the
location and depths of all electrical conduits to be installed under this
contract with other trades. Particular attention shall be provided at all
locations where conduits enter a structure or building from underground.
Proper clearances from the top of the conduits to the bottom of slabs and
foundations shall be maintained.
16401-18
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIDCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
7.
8.
9.
10.
Where conduits rise through slabs on grade, curved portion of bends shall not
be visible above finished slab.
Conduit stub-up to above grade and conduit stub-up out of or from below
floor slab shall be rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC from and
including last 90 degree bend.
Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete in wet locations shall be
protected by a 20-mil sheath of PVC at the penetration extending from 2
inches within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete.
Stub-ups through concrete slabs for connection of future equipment or
conduits runs shall be provided with couplings threaded inside for plugs and
shall be set flush with finished floor or slab. Install screwdriver-operated
threaded flush plugs in couplings. Provide pull wire in all empty conduit
runs.
11.
A void bends and offsets, where possible. Make bends and offsets with an
approved hickey or conduit bending machine. Install plastic (PVC) coated
conduit and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
manual using tools designed for the purpose of installing plastic (PVC)
coated conduit and fittings. Touch-up any and all damaged areas with
manufacturer's recommended coating compound. Do not install crushed or
deformed conduit. Use expansion fittings or other approved devices where
conduit or tubing crosses expansion joints. Prevent dirt or trash from lodging
in conduits, boxes and fittings. Free clogged conduit of all obstructions or
replace conduit.
12.
Supports:
a. Pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers or ceiling trapeze.
b. Use wood screws or screw-type nails for fastening to wood. Use
toggle bolts for fastening to hollow masonry units. Use concrete
inserts or expansion anchors for fastening to concrete. Use machine
screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps for fastening
to steel work.
c. Power-driven threaded studs may be used in lieu of expansion bolts
or machine or wood screws where acceptable to the Owner.
d. Use threaded C-clamps on rigid steel conduit only.
e. Do not weld conduit or pipe straps to steel structures.
f. Non-metallic conduit through I-inch size shall use one hole snap
strap clamps and 1-1/4 inch through 2-inch shall use two hole snap
16401-19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
F.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
straps clamps, with maximum spacing between supports as outlined
in the NEC based on 50 oC conductor temperature. Clamps shall be
manufactured from a nylon compound.
13. Expansion couplings shall be used in all straight lengths of non-metallic
conduit in exposed applications. Maximum spacing between expansion
couplings shall be 100 feet.
14. Connections: All conduits, where they enter sheet metal enclosures such as
panel boards, pull boxes or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place by
galvanized locknuts and bushings, one locknut inside of box with bushing on
conduit end and one locknut outside of box for rigid conduit. The locknuts
shall be tightened against the box without deforming the box.
a. Conduit connections shall use fittings to maintain NEMA rating of
enclosures. All bushings and conduit box connectors shall have the
insulating material permanently fastened to the fittings.
b. Grounding bushings shall be used in switchgear and motor control
centers.
c. Conduit connections exposed in wet locations shall be by watertight
threaded hub. Metallic conduit box connections may use a two-piece
hub with built-in recessed neoprene gasket such as Appleton Uni-
Seal. Non-metallic conduit box connectors may use a neoprene flat
washer or "0" ring placed over threads of the fitting between the
shoulder of the fitting and the box.
Duct Banks:
1. Conduit: Conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC of the number and size as
indicated on the drawings.
a. Conduits shall maintain a continuous slope between handholes and
shall be sloped toward handholes with a minimum grade of 3 inches
per 100 feet, where practical.
b. Conduits shall terminate in handholes with end bells.
c. Thoroughly clean each conduit after installation. Pass a mandrel, not
less than 12 inches long with a diameter ~ inch less than the inside
dimension, through each conduit.
d. Conduit shall follow straight lines, as far as possible, with spacing
both horizontally and vertically maintained by spacers, manufactured
by the conduit manufacturer. Securely anchor conduit to prevent
movement during placement of backfill or concrete encasement.
16401-20
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
Conduit couplings shall be staggered by rows. Long radius bends
shall be used where deviation from straight lines is necessary.
e. Concrete encasement, where indicated on the drawings, shall be
constructed to the dimensions shown. Trench bottoms shall be
tamped firm and even. Suitably braced side forms shall be employed.
Concrete shall be installed in a continuous pour to eliminate joints.
f. The high point of conduits between handholes shall have a minimum
of 18 inches cover below the finished grade.
g. The entire underground conduit/duct system shall be watertight. Seal
conduits to exclude moisture at each building or structure.
h. Provide plastic caution tape above the duct run 12 inches below
finished grade.
G.
Cast-in-Place Concrete Handholes: Cast-in-place concrete handholes shall conform
to the dimensions shown on the drawings, shall be designed to AASHTO H-20
loading and shall be constructed of 4000 PSI reinforced concrete. The construction
shall conform to the methods, form, mixture, placement and curing as specified in
Section 03300, "Concrete Construction".
1. Handholes shall have full-size aluminum (T6061-T6) diamond plate
pedestrian covers with reinforcing angles, rated for 300 pounds per square
foot unless otherwise indicated. Covers shall be removable and shall be
provided with lifting holes (four per cover). Covers larger than 4' x 4'
nominal shall be of sectional construction. Aluminum angles with flat bars
shall be set into inside of walls flush with the top to match covers.
2. Handholes shall be open bottom unless otherwise indicated or specified.
3. Handholes shall have pulling eyes cast in wall opposite duct entry. Conduit
shall be terminated in handhole with end bells.
4. Power and/or signal cables shall be supported on heavy duty non-metallic
cable racks with adjustable arms and be held in place with non-metallic tie
wraps. Racks shall be maximum three feet apart with a minimum of one per
wall of handhole. Racks shall be attached to handhole walls per the rack
manufacturer's recommendation with a minimum of three anchors per rack.
An anchor shall be located in holes immediately above each adjustable arm.
5. Cast-in-place handholes shall have 6-inch thick walls reinforced with 4" x 4"
W2.9 x W2.9 WWF.
16401-2]
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRlCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I.
J.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
6. Handholes shall be installed on a 6-inch thick bed of gravel. Gravel shall be
compacted prior to casting or setting handholes. Handholes shall protrude 2
inches minimum above surrounding grade.
H.
Boxes:
1. Provide outlet, pull, junction or terminal boxes in wiring or conduit systems
wherever required for pulling wires, making connections and mounting of
devices or fixtures.
a. Indicated locations are approximate only. Coordinate actual location
with all work to be performed in space or area and for equipment to
be served.
b. Locate outlets so that fixtures and other items will be symmetrically
located according to space or area layout.
c. Outdoor switch and receptacle outlets shall utilize non-metallic boxes
and covers.
2. Outlet boxes in exposed work or wet locations shall be cast metal. Sheet
metal boxes shall be concealed in walls or ceiling. Non-metallic boxes shall
be used with non-metallic conduit.
3. Supports:
a. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to rigid metallic conduit
need not be separately supported unless used for fixture support.
b. Use wood screws or screw-type nails for fastening to wood. Use
toggle bolts for fastening to hollow masonry units. Use concrete
inserts or expansion anchors for fastening to concrete. Use machine
screws or welded, threaded studs for fastening to steel work.
c. Power-driven threaded studs may be used in lieu of expansion bolts
or machine or wood screws, where acceptable to the Owner.
Wiring Devices: Receptacles installed outdoors shall be the ground fault circuit
interrupter type.
Wiring:
1. Provide complete system of conductors as indicated.
2. Size shall be as required by the NEC and shall be #12 A WG minimum for
power and lighting circuits, and #14 A WG minimum for control and alarm
circuits.
16401-22
LOW-VOLTAGEELECTIUCAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
3. Crimp on insulated wire terminals shall be used on stranded wire for
terminations.
4. Splices shall not be permitted.
K. Lighting Fixtures: All fixtures and supports shall be carefully laid out and equipped
with suitable swivel hangers, canopies and/or other auxiliaries as required to ensure
that fixtures are plumb without bending or offsetting stems, rods, or supports;
properly aligned both lengthwise and crosswise, except that where obstructions or
conflicts are encountered, the fixtures shall be relocated as directed by the Owner;
installed in such a manner as to provide a finished, neat, and workmanlike
installation.
L. Appearance: All items shall be cleaned or touched up as necessary to assure first
class condition.
3.03 FIELD TESTS AND OBSERVATION
A. General: Do not enclose or cover any work until it has been observed, tested and
accepted.
1. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for observation
and testing.
2. Show, by demonstration, that all circuits and devices are in operating
condition. Tests shall include the following:
a. Megger all motor windings before operation for insulation resistance
and, if found low, dry out windings to secure acceptable insulation
resistance.
b. Check control center components, buses, starters, breakers, relays,
alarms, interlocks, etc., and place in service in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Provide inspection and adjustment of
electrical equipment prior to energization.
c. Megger all power cables and wiring for insulation resistance and
record.
d. Check all motors for correct lubrication and lubricate, if required, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
e. Check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse, if necessary.
3. Assemble in binders and turn over to the Owner all instruction bulletins,
lubrication schedules, operating instructions, pampWets, parts lists, prints,
etc., accompanying or attached to apparatus and equipment.
03720-030-01
Bid Documents
16401-23
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4. Notify Owner one week prior to test date.
B. Ground Rod Test: Before any wire is connected to ground rods, test each rod for
resistance to ground.
1. Testing instrument shall be a direct reading, single test, portable ground
testing megger.
2. Test procedure shall be as recommended by manufacturer of test instrument
used.
3. The make and model of test instrument used and a copy of test procedure
shall be submitted to the Owner before test is conducted.
4. Do not conduct tests within 48 hours after rainfall or during foggy weather.
5. If ground resistance exceeds 10 ohms, additional grounds shall be driven.
6. The grounding test shall be witnessed by the Engineer or other representative
of the Owner. A copy of test results and method shall be included in the
maintenance manual. Deliver one copy of test results to the Owner within
one week after test.
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Remove excess and waste materials from project site.
B. Remove defective work and replace with material that meets specification
requirements or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner.
C. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in factory- or shop-finished
surfaces.
END OF SECTION
03720-030-0 I
Bid Documents
16401-24
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX
ODP DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS
. Instructions for Addendum to Agreement
· ODP Agreement Form
o Addendum to Agreement
o Attachment "A"
o Attachment "B"
o Attachment "C"
o Attachment "D"
· Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and
ReceivinglInvoicing
· Request to Requisition Form
Appendix.doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS
I Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND
SULFUR DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION PROJECT
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # #07-0021-UT
1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the Addendum
to Agreement for Construction of the Marshall Street and East APCF Chlorine Gas and Sulfur
Dioxide Gas Conversion project.
2. Attachment "An is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum.
3. Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a
Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor
responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work.
4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to:
City of Clearwater
Attention: Ed Burke, Construction Project Coordinator
Phone; 462-6126
Fax: 462-6989
P. O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to:
Andrea Beane, Senior Accountant: 562-4950 ext. 7206
Fax: 562-4951
E-Mail: Andrea.Beane@myClearwater.com
Appendix.doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR
DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION PROJECT
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT No. #07-0021-UT
dated
, the Contractor, it is further
between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and
as follows:
1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order
to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax.
2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and
incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall
govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner.
3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally
applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the
Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other
amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used.
4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's
authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "0".
5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner
acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials
directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax.
This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement.
CITY OF CLEARWATER:
CONTRACTOR:
Date:
Date:
City Manager/Owner
Contractor
ATTEST:
ATTEST:
City
(City's Corporate Seal)
Secretary
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Carlos Colon
Assistant City Attorney
Appendix.doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ATTACHMENT "A"
FROM CITY OF CLEARWATER
(OWNER)
(CONTRACTOR)
TO.
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION
PROJECT (#07-0021-UT)
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment
which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make
direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of
construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase
Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number.
2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for
consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a
description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the
Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying
documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and
guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to
the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that
the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the
project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other
arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all
services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless
the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from
the action of the Contractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all
shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that
each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase
Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the
supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract.
5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine
prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are
identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or
non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such
nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the
defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or
interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the
Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew
or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner,
resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages.
6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's
Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the
Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such
materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all
materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall
be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor.
Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the
Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials.
9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties
incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner
treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the
Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such
matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment,
proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished
Materials.
10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of
Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor and either concur or
object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to
the site and any defects in such materials.
I
I
I
I
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a
listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials.
The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption
number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be
reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The
Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the
end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to
provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at
the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option.
12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor
invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications.
I
13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner-Furnished Material
shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ATTACHMENT "B"
FROM
TO
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION
PROJECT (#07-0021-UT)
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment
which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make
direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner-Purchasing of
construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase
Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number.
2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for
consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as
a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by
the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities,
verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and
guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to
the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time
that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into
the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and
other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor
shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify
and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to
suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all
shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure
that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase
Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the
supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract.
5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine
prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such
materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor
discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor
shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify
the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur
without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise
incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition
of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for
all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including
liquidating or delay damages.
6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into
Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account
monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating
portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work.
7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all
materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall
be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub-subcontractor.
Appendix.doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession,
the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials.
9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties
incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner
treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the
Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such
matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit,
assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-
Furnished Materials.
I
10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of
Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur
or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials
delivered to the site and any defects in such materials.
I
I
I
I
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a
listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of said goods or materials.
The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption
number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be
reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The
Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the
end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to
provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the
Subcontractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the
Subcontractor's option.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ATTACHMENT "C"
From
To
Project: MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION
PROJECT (#07-0021-UT)
This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In
order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished
in the following manner:
1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax.
2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater
(owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials.
3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf
of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read:
To: Supplier
For: Material per attached Subcontractor order,
4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o Contractor.
Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City of Clearwater (Owner)
for payment.
5. City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive
change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax.
It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each
month for payment by the _. Those received after the _ will be processed in the next month's billing cycle.
Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ATTACHMENT "D"
PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX
CREDITS
1. General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor
application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount.
2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of
electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number.
3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director.
4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested.
5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner
Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount
of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment
requests (monthly).
6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be
submitted for approval as indicated below:
7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order:
a. General Contractor
b. Architect
c. Project Manager
d. Engineering/City Manager
e. Purchasing/for processing only
f. Finance/for processing only
Appendix.doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO REQUISITION and
RECEIVINGIINVOICING
CITY OF CLEARWA TER :
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR
DIOXIDE GAS CONVERSION PROJECT (#07-0021-UT)
Contractor:
CEI:
Addendum to Aareement for Construction:
1. See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement.
Process procedures for tax savinas:
2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor.
3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s):
4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition.
5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager
to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important
to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby
reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P. O. Construction contract will not change
and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total
contract commitment. Before sendina to the Purchasina ManaQer. the schedule will be
forwarded to the Owner's ReDresentative. CEI and Contractor's reDresentative for aDDroval.
We will need the e-mail address for the Contractor's & CEI's contact Derson(s} for this
Drocess.
6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines
of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the
Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are
purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary.
7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change
order (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C/O).
Process procedures for reauest to reauisition forms:
1. General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc)
2. Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number.
3. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructions.
4. Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%.
5. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices.
6. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to
requisition.
7. City staff will complete the charge code line.
Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the OOP supplier:
a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system
(stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each
system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition of the City's charge
code.
b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Attachment
10/9/2008
Appendix.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
should include estimated Quantities and types of materials. Cost information is optional.
Procedures where a detailed line item proposal is not available:
c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as
the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier.
d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major billing line
items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the
appropriate charge codes.
8. The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's
authorized procurer(s):
9. The official approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized
personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers:
NOTE: Any materials ordered by the contractor that are not included on the City's issued purchase
order or any amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the City issued purchase order MUST
be separately ordered pursuant to a purchase order directly between the supplier and the
contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separately from the materials supplied pursuant to
the City issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional Reauest to
Reauisition to increase the amount of the OOP purchase order for that supplier.
Process procedures for receivina and invoicina:
I
I
I
1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will verify the materials are in usable condition and
the quantity received.
2. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor
to the attention of
3. Contractor must sign oft on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached,
must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with
the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error,
it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions:
a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invoice but not
in excess of that amount.
b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice
for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier.
c. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must
be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and/or
approvals as all other invoices to be paid.
4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation
but must follow the approval process as all other invoices.
5. After approval the Contractor will forward the original invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's
Owner Representative:
City of Clearwater
Department Name: Utilities Engineering Division
Attn: Name: Robert Maue
100 N. Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33755
I
I
I
I
I
6. After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the
original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing.
7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice.
8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the
approval of the Contractor.
I
I
Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the appropriate
line(s) on Contractor's P.O.
ClosinQ of Contractor's P.O.:
1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the
Contractor's P.O.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Appendix.doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u..
o
>-
...
u
PUBLIC WORKS
REQUEST TO REQUISITION
STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER
General Item Description:
Vendor:
Street Address:
City/State/Zip:
Phone No:
Receiving Location (Ship to):
Street Address:
City/State/Zip:
Requested by:
Phone Number:
Date Needed by:
Expense Code: (City will complete)
Units Detailed Description Price Per
Line # Quantity ($, etc.) (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each Total
Date:
Date:
Requesting Official
Approving Official
Title and Organization - C.E.1. Services
Title and Organization - Contractor
Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&1. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention
according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program.
Page 1 of 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u..
o
>
....
o
PUBLIC WORKS
REQUEST TO REQUISITION
STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER
(Continuation page)
Requested by:
Phone Number:
Date Needed by:
Expense Code:
Units Detailed Description Price Per
Line # Quantity ($, etc.) (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each Total
Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&1. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention
according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program.
Page 2 of 2
Appendix. doc
10/9/2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
CONTRA CT BOND.... ........................ ................................. ..................... .......... ......................... 1
CONTRA CT ......................... ........... ..... ................................. .... ........... ........... ..... ......................... 3
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAyMENT..................................................... 6
PRO POSAL BOND ........................ .......... ...................................................... .............................. 7
A FFI DAVIT ............... ........... ....... ........ ........ ..................................................... ............................ 8
N ON -CO LL USION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9
PRO POSAL ..................................... ...... ...................................... ................. ............... ................ 10
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................ 13
BID D ER' S PROPOSAL ............................................................................................................ 14
SectionV 092309.doc
Page i
9/24/2008
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BOND NUMBER: 0070664
CONTRACT BOND
ST ATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF PINEL LAS
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC DIVERSIFIED. l.J.~c. Contractor
and WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is P.O. BOX 5001.
WESTFIELD CENTER. OHIO. 44251
HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater:
Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: ONE MILLION, ONE HUNDRED
FIFTY-THREE THOUSAND, FIVE HUNDRED FIFTY-NINE DOLLARS AND NO CENTS
($1,153,559.00) for the payment of which we bind ()urselves~ our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the <:6.~ day
of f" A ,2010, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for:
- \
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE
CONVERSION (07-0021-UT)
a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as If fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects comply with the tenus and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Fonn of Proposal, Form of Contract, Fonn of
Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided fc,)r, and shall indemnify and save ham1less
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things~ keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
Page: i.
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT BOND
(2)
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors,
administrators~ and assigns, jointly and severally. that they will amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damag~s, cOsts and judgments which may be
recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by
reason of any damages arising from the perfonnance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor 01" his agents or
servants or the improper perrom1ance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or
the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material fumishcd or work done; as
aforesaid, or otherwise.
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby fUlther bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work,
embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the tenns of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension oftime, alteration or addition to the terms of
the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this
day of , 2L.
TLC DIVSERSIFIED. INC.
kCONTRACTOR ------
Thurston Lamberson, President
WITNESS:
U/;d/
Westfield Insurance COIDpany
:U;1t~
Aria N-FACT
C1l~
Page 1
I
I
1
1
I,
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
I
1
Genera I
Power
of Attorney
POWER NO. 0992202 04
Westfield Insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance Co.
Ohio Farmers .Insurance Co.
Westfield Center, Ohio
CERTIFIED COpy
Know All Men by These Presents. That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE. COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a 'Company' and collectively as 'Companies,' duly
organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
present~ make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDlICK, ROBERT H. BOND, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
Of DAVIE and State of FL Its true and lawful Attorney(s)-In-pact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in Its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds. recognizances, undertakings, or other Instruments or contracts ot
suretyshlp- - - . - - - - - - - . . . . - - - - - - - - - - . . . - . . - -. . . . . . . . - . - - . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . '.
LIMITATION, THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY. MORTGAGE
GUARANTEE. OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS.
and to qlnd any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of the apptlcable Company and duly attested by Its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-In-Fact may do In
the premises. Said appointment Is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INS,URANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
'Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and Is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-In-Fact to represent and act for
and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions:
The Attorney-in-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and In the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and
deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of Indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such
Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary:
"Be It Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any
power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certlflcat,e bearing facsimile signatures Or facsimile
seal sftall be valid and binding upon the company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which It Is attached: (Each adopted at a meeting
held on February 8, 2000).
In WftnessWhereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WE&TFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 20th day of
MAY A.D.,2003 .
....M....._
corporatM.".. 'U~ :..",
Seal 5 ~'~"'~""~('4' "\
Affixed ~/ ... \: (t
~I \0
\S(~ SEAL~i
. ...... "" "
....
",,""'.'1""'1
,." -<IONAl./ ....
......~,'?'-'......,...I\t& "~
i"o '.... ....(/"P..........
i.....,... \-p-=:'
:'U.' '.z~
:lL:; S'EAL :()~
:l-: ' :m:
\~\ /0j
':..;;..... .....0,...
"""" 't... ~. ~. I" I ,..~.......
""I""'~II,,\I\'\'
By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
. ..I.........~.,""""t#,1.
~. '..
~"., ........... ~'\
!~lt'WERii\c.\
:.. ;.~
\~\ 1848 .ilf
~~. .....:':'....... ......:-
'" ......
.,"""',i....",\...\"....
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
;Pc.
State of Ohio
County of Medina
ss.:
On this 20th day of MAY A.D., 2003 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say, that he resides In Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS iNSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above
Instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed
by order of the Boards of Directors of said, C,ompanies: and that he signed his name theret,o by like order. ;aL
Notarial ..................... d2
Seal ,,010* ~ I ',A l ..... ... .
Affixed h"'~"~,'~,'~i@'~~, ....)
Sl.le of Ohio \.. :Dl ~"~~~~i,~:~e6~, ANal ',~~r,::S':ow,4~~~'cihiou~~~..d Code)
County of Medina ss.: '" '<t . ~ ,.-
..... 'r'E: of" 0..,,"
#",'...".".......,-
I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS
INSU,RANCE COMPANY, ,do hereby certify tha.t the above and foregoing Is a true an'd correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said
Companies, whIch Is stili In full force and effect, and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors set out in the Power of Attorney are
In full force and effect. '
In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this
A.D., ' .
................._ ,,1111 .'
~.::'VR.(#o..,,' ,.,.'~;ONAl';...... ......-.~..".""'..
....'i,.........:IICA ,'~\.~ ..........t\t~ '" ,..~..c;. """
~..... ... "~(t /ii?" ...~.~1l..,.~ /..~....::........r;.\
E(,SEAL1\~ {tit SEAL \'A\ !~"tf.WEIl,\C.'
tit \ '" l- m' :.. i..
\ ..., . ~ ~ (/):. f = : . :i!:
\'t\ ""...,,, -:'-'~.-i\. ...../]/ \~....184B /~J
,........... ~~ "1,... ....~....... ,..:
""" '" I......'.,. .~.......-, ...
I" * \\' '" ".'"
"""'"11""'\\\ ""....,..........'
day of
8Ino1."e'~ S_
BPOAC2 (combined) (06.02)
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
.~ ~
This CONTRACT made and entered into tillS ~ day of ___' 20/0 by and between the
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, herein ter desi 1ated as the "City", and TLC
DIVERSIFIED, INC. of the City of PALMETTO, County of MANATEE and State of FLORIDA
hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract eaeh in consideration of the undeliakings, promises and agreements
on the pmi of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perf 01111 all labor, fumish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE
CONVERSION (07-0021-UT) IN THE AMOUNT OF: ONE MILLION, ONE HUNDRED
FIFTY-THREE THOUSAND, FIVE HUNDRED FIFTY-NINE DOLLARS AND NO CENTS
($1,153,559.00)
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any
adveliisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be perfon11ed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the tenns, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
Page 3
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to confol111 to the following requirements:
In c01mection with the perfol111ance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of payor other fonns of compensation: and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting f01ih the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be perfonned by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be perfonned by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per
day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of
the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is
not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the
Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the tenns and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such perfonnance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the perfol111ance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such tern1 and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the tenns and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the tern1S hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a fonn
satisfactory to it.
Page 4
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS 'VHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: tJ~ g.~ -:IT..
William B. Home, II
City Manager
Countersigned:
tP/~
~ R-
~/.
By: '-- j~~",-
Frank Hibbard,
Mayor-Councilmember
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
Page 5
(Seal)
Attest:
~~~'--
Cyn la E. Goudeau,
City Clerk
Approved as to fonn
TLC Diversified, Inc.
( Contractor)
~ ~ (~tAQ
Thurston Lamberson, President
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORM)
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
On this day personally appeared before me,
administer oaths and take acknowledf,'1nents,
deposes and says:
the undersigned authority, duly authOlized to
, who after being duly swom,
That he is the (TITLE) ofTLC DIVERSIFIED,
INC., a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located 2719 17TH STREET E,
PALMETTO, FLORIDA 34221 (herein, the "Contractor").
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the
, 20_, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA,
corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perfom1 the construction of:
day of
a municipal
MARSHALL STREET AND EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE
CONVERSION (07-0021-UT)
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in cOlU1ection with said work
against the described property.
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the FIOlida Mechanic's Lien Law as set fOlth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Swom and subscribed to before me
TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC.
AFFIANT
This _ day of
, 2010
BY:
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
PRESIDENT
Page 6
I
I
I
PROPOSAL BOND
1]\10: 'C :"le ftik>d out if a ccrtDed cbe::k is subm:tted;
KNOW'N ALL I\lE..l\ BY TllESE PRESE:"ITS: That we, the lU1dersig.nec.
TLC Di versi f i eo I Jr:c. as P:-inc.ipd, and lties t fie 1d Insurance Compar: y
____ as Surety, who's addre~s is PO _ Box 5001
We s t fie 1 d C P- nt.e.r....--D h i n 4 4 2 5 J . are held and firmly bound 110:0 the
C:ty ofCiearwatel', FlcriclL in the slim cf Ten PeJ;:..C.en..L~mOl1 n t R i il
DaUru's ($1 0 % 0 f b i q (:.Jeing a minimum of 10% of Contractor's t0tal bid ,U:lOunt) for the payment 0:
which, weil ancl tm:)' to be :r:acle, we l;c:'cby jo:ntly me: seveJ.'JUy b:J:c ourselves, our heirs, cx~cutOI'S,
admini:;h'ui;)J's, st.;C(;l;,.'SSOb':ijC: assigus,
I
I
I-
I
The comEcon of the above obiigation is sucl: Lila: if the al~ached PI'O:Josal of
TLC Di.versifi P-cL--Dlc..as PrinciprJ, and Westfield_.J.nsuranr.p r.o as
Surety,forwo)'kspecifiec~2is:._t1arshall Street and Rrls-L APf'P Chlorine Gas
and Sulfur Dioxide Gas Conversion
I
I
all as stipuiated in sa.:d Propusal. Ll)' dciDg aU work inc.icental tlEreto, in accordance whh the pbns and
specifications provIded he;'d'or, all wit1JjJ1 Pineilas COllnty, is accepted and the contract awarded to tlie above
muned bidder, and tl:e said bickler shuJJ \....ithin ten days afte, mtice of said award e.ater into a contract. i.11
w;iti.ng, and furnish the required Perf.'Jl1DEU1CC t30:1c! with surety 0;' sureties to be approved by (he City
Manager. this obligation shall be void, Qthelwise the same shall be h fll1J force and virtue by law anc the nIl]
rulJOl1nt of this Proposal Bonel wiU be paid to the City as stipulated or Jjquidated dar:1ages.
1
Signed this -1.L clay of J2c.t..ober
120~,
I
(P:'incipai must indicate 'Nhe~,he:'
corporation. partnerstJp, COr.1~lllY
or individl:cl)
Corporation
I
The person signing shall, in his awn
handwriili:.g, sign the Principal's
name, his own name aJ~d h:s Uk;
the person signing for a ciJr;Xlration
I~ltlst, by affidavit, show hi.." authority
to bind (he corporation.
TLC Diversified, Inc.
Principal
<:~.:~--"::--~. ~~:-
l_ ..' ....... .._~__ _
J ;::, Pres.ident
Thursi f' Lamberson
weS~~~lld Insuran~~ Company
00/1-' ~--_.-
Sure,
Attor - y' Fact
I
I
1
I
I
~wlonV _Ot~2)09.r.1oc
Pngc 7 0: 15
9/24/20()&
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
General
Power
of Attorney
CERTIFIED COpy
POWER NO. 099220204
Westfield Insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance Co.
Ohio Farmers Insurance Co.
Westfield Center. Ohio
Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFiELD INSURANCE COVPANY. WESTFI"LD NATiONAL INSURANCE, COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations. hereinafter referred to I~div,cual'y as a 'Company' and cOliectlvely as 'Co-npanles," duly
organiZed and exiSting L;nder the laws of the State of Ohio, and having ,ts prirciDal office :n Westfieid Center, Medina County, Ohio. do by these
pre3cnl~ make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDLICK, ROBERT H. BOND, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
01 DAVIE and State 01 FL Its true and lawlul At1omeyfs:'-T-Fact, with f\,;'1 power and author:ty hereby conlerred in Its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other Instruments or contracts 01
suretyship- - " . . " . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ _ _ _. _ _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . _ . . . .. " _ . _.
al~~~~~:~ THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE. MORTGAGE! DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE
, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS.
and to bind any of the Ce'mpanies thereby as fu:iy a~d to the same extent asf Sl,ch :JO'1ds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal 01 the applicable Ccmpany and dUlY attested by Its Secretary, hereby rat'fylrg and confirmi~g ail that the said Attorney(s)-ir-Fact may do In
the premises. Seld apP':J!ntment Is made under and by author'!y 01 t~e 'o'lowng resolutioC' adopted by the Board 01 D:ractors 01 each Of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY. WESTFIE;",D NATONAL :NSURA."CF. COM~ANY and O!"iIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
"B6tt R660tV6d. that !'l6 Preslden't, any Senior Executive, any Secre:a'y 0' any Fide!ity & S\;roty Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and Is hereby vested with ful' power and authority to appoint anyone 0' rro'e suitable perSons as Attorney(s)-in-~act to represent and act tor
and on b~hall oltha Company Subject to the 101l0Wlng provisions:
The Attorney-tn-Fact. may be given lull power and authority fo~ and I" :'"1e name 01 ar.d on behaif or the CO:TIpany, :0 execule, aCknOWledge and
deliver, any and all bones, recognizances, contracts, agreements o~ ,rdem"lty ana other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereundo" and any such Instruments se executed by any such
Attorney-In-Fael shall be es binding upon the Company as It Signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary.'
"BlJ II Further Resolve::J, that the signature o! any such designated person and the seal of the Compeny heretofore or hereafter affixed to any
power of attorney or any certl!lcate relating thereto by lacslmlle, and any power 0: attorney or aertlllcat,e bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile
seal sf1all be valid and blr'dlng upon lhe Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which It Is attached." !Each adoptad at a.meetlng
held on February 8. 20001.
In Witness WhIJrIJof, WESTI=IELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESi'I=IELD NATIO"lAL iNSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS IN\3URANCE
COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto aHixed this 20th day ot
MAY A.D., 2003 .
...............,
Corporale ..'"11.(......'
Seals ~ ,~..._...:~('~ '\
Affixed tt/ ... \ ~
st.. SEAL )}
,. ", .... ~"
..............-
,,,'111",,,,
\.\,\\~ \()NAl /"1;,
"" ~\>;,,"""".:"r$' "'"
."0." .,.v'?'"
/Jj// \~ \
,LL. S'EAL .():
: 1-: :m:
\~,...,.,',.....,.......:~.,/
"""'IIIII~IIII,'II"\\
. ............~'UI"'/".",
/~.......... ~.~'\
llit~WERi;r~\
'.' ~. ~
\~\ 1848 /#J
',. .....~....... ....
"""" ,.,.."
"'~""""""""
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSU~,k~~:h> ~ ~ C1..
By: ~~!/(
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
On this 20th day o' MAY A.D.. 2003 . before me persona iy (;an-e Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and sav. that he resides j,,, Medina, Ohio: tha: re :5 Senior Executive of W~STFIELD IN5ljRANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE ::::lMPANY and OHIO FARMERS 1"J5URANCE C8MPAI'.Y, the companies described in ana whicr. executed the above
Instrument; that he knows the seals 01 said Compan'es; that the seals affixed to said :nstrument are SUCh corporale seals: that they were so affixed
by order or the Boards o~ Directors of said C,ompanies; and that he signed ~:s roame thereto by like order_ ~
Notartal ....._._....... ~ ' .
~eal ,," 'il-' A l .....
Affixed ~~~..~\ii~l~~ ~)
O.~l
~:' '~_ 'f'" .
., William J. Kahelln, A rney at ~aw, Notary Public
State 01 Ohio ~ . "'/0 f./y Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised COde)
county 01 Medina ss.: \)o~,.. ~' ,"
'..... ~ (' 0 Fa.......
"""II'UII"""."
55.:
BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02)
"and and affixed the seals 01 said Compan:es at Westlle!d Center, Ohio, this Z' day 01
\1,.HIIli""..",
.... ~\ON^l/ft ....
.... ""I>:..,_.....'..~.s, ""
"'0." """'il'-.
i 0'.... ....'2,."
Eli:; SEAL :n:
: r-: :m:
~ ~\... /() %
"%"" ....0..-
~~'" '. '0,. ",....,.. I' ..,....
""""fll'~'"ll""'"
..,..,..'UH""
,,':~c. ,tW~;'~'""
J' ~.~:"'~':'"
l...46..- ~ '.;yo ~
i i'(t\\WERtD'ii \
\\'" 1848 ...~j
~...,. .I...~..",'. ......
"""11 "......
~"'.~.ffl.Ullt....
~in/Let~ S_
I
S-f/\-':"E tJ ~::: ~::L() R~:Jt\
11(...
~~i:,~(~~it!.~:zl
.~i...~'-./.
,,\.:~ /'
I~.!.:~
I)BF'AP_T~'..iEtTT OF BUS Il--4'ES S ]\tl=-'; I?F_:=I~~~E S 8 I c)r!]:_~
CO?) 3 ~Fr(JC ~ I 0l-7 ::t-TDUSTR:{ L I CE~>T :-:: I ~>~CJ 13 OJ._RLI
19~O NORTE NONaOE STREET
~r_~~I.JAFL~._E' S~E F:; ~: 2::. ~-; ~ -~ C 7 8 3
I
I
I,pJ1BERSON, TEURS~ON
T I, C DIVERSIFIED INC
2719 17TH STREET EAST
PALNETTC) FI, 3L!:22:L
I
I'rcngr-'. 'la"o~sl \i"""t";S'''I:I~P.' "l"s"e"'y"o"u"'h'e"c"o"~~'o"n"'e"'o'''ftn<o r ~T" 0'" 'n'II!'lnll
....... C:~""'..I.,. \/..., 1/' ,t.......... U II....... ..1;__ ,,':::::L.I Ij ,Ie:: . t..:
F!oridia~s licG"se'::' bv t~.e Dep=:-:ment or Business 2nd Pro7ess:::lnel F~equI6tion.
IOU~ professionals 6:l'd busi01esses range from arc:'ite::;ts to Y5'Jd brcl'~ers, i~or;-:
bcxers to barbeq'..;e rsstaurents, and t'ley keep Flo~ida's e:::oncnlY stror,g.
Every day we "'lark to iGlp~DVe the way we co business in orae: to serve you better.
For infcrrraticm abOl.:t our servoes, piease log .onto www.r.iyilorid2Iicense.com.
IThere you can f:nd :TIore i~forr.:2tion 8bOLlt our divisions al,G t~le reg~12tjons that
i;n;:;act you, subscribe to ce;:J8"l:TIent newsletters and lea~r filore 3:JOlCt the
Depart:-:1snt's ~n:ti2tives.
Our mission at the Departme:l" is: License Efficiently, Regu!atE C'airiy. VVe
I cCr!sta~tiy strive to serve you. ,e':':er so that you cen serve your customers.
Thank yc~ for doir.g :Jusiness i:-: Florida, and oongratu!atior.s 0:. your new license:
I
I
I. ..........--....
- . . -
'j} l 0 7 D. 'J, ll. ')
I" -..J...."J, 'v.' L
'JE:TACH HERe
,_ _ . ,. .1';;-', r", STP-n: OF FLORiDA.
~~.:.:'5.::.~~1'}~~ :~1;;. ;!~'-;:{ -i'*j1.".<.._ ~)-~ . _ __.' .: );-'J:" .:':::': .:".
..',~iJ'E-PARTME.NT G).J.<f hG:..,sB-jH:;:-;~ j;.iiD PROFESS IO:-flU:.: R3GULATION
. :';." .,- :~~.!~;:~Fkj}!:7~ggNS~l~~jf'~~' . ... ':)R~TRY~~':tl,CENSING 30';,PX; 8EQ# i.Q8:'~:'~0:':'6~
~~::::']f;')"'~'1'&'~:~..,...t'::-"':I!';;;'=i;:;"~C:-'!)!c' ;.. ;'T~ :'-;C-_ R.'.....
!6~&..'!.!4.~l ";'~ ~;~~!.b~~;i::y:L~...::'.-""~" ....J_
I 0.9/04/2 0 O. 8 :,~, 8 ~ .?1~. ~.~ 3 :!tm,C9.~'b ~,~~:~l? .
r ne GENER.Z';.L:;-:CONTR"~CTOR\c." '::c.c
;;Ta..rned belcn~:~~:t S/'CE~TIFt:EDJ \",',';.
IJ:nder tli.e provisi'Sns cfi::%:Cha:p'i'f:.:er 4SSFS.
~xpiration date: AUG 31; 2010
: -;i ,-..:.:.'.-..,.._:'...._... :.'(~:,.-,..
. - ( . ~ ".' ""';'~'.":":'
.. _"::..: :~',:..'... "-:.: :':':,:,;,~,.,,:.. \.,"-...=. ~:l'.>;:
r7l.up.:pR....Q.O~~T c~:\;:;,lE'.TTR. SrMl'O-'N"'T~}:~:. ""..','
.:-J_~"J._.:-J '-u ,1.'1 r...";,,." - ,.~j.
T ,LC:-DI:vERS~FIED..'(~INC
2719~' 17TE 'ST"R3ET E.'\'S''l'
PAL~ETTO FL 34221
.. _.....~........-.-_.-----_.-_.... ..
I
F~8(J~T~1,--rr I :~~)~,T
( )] =, C: )
.-~.s7 -l::: Sl::.
AC# :3 C; "} L; :=; li I
\~!i' \jJi~~~i~i~:~~~ ;~~~t~:;iO~.ND
'..'i:CGC 0 4: J.:816 09/04/08 '087013"1: 5:3
,~.. CE;:R.TIFIED G2NEP'.I>.L CONTEACTOR
';~~~ LlI.MBEESON, ':C.'HURSTON ,.' '.
'~.)S::~T~:~L C;'DIV3F:SIFIED INC .: .~" c' ,,f
\~;:~i^CE::,"m "".~ ,," ,"",. ,.::~ 0:" <e '0'
. .~~::t2~~:'~~~~~"o" ~ TJ ~}*~l. f,~:~IJl~.._5li%t:,,~:~~~~:iS::'.
):--.,
'\
I
. .', ",-": ~ .
. . .fi~.,i:~;~i~~
I
...'J.' ,
_.'l'::~... J" '7"
. #~~:, Jf~
,4J~~. Q~~...I \...... 1i- ,.:. '
~.~~."".:::'.~.:~,; ;. ~. . ,
;:?~~~~{ ~r::l, ;. ""7'i.:. :~::. .:
"o~: D(~:"> L~\~~A'~~=-(J u i RE:'d;;~\; LA'W
CI-Ip...RLES ~..;. :J!).J':..GC~
SECRZTAhY
'.....
CHF.RLIE ".eRIS':'
. qOVERNOR ::":'
1--..---- -
. -- --.-.-..-----..-
--~._--
I
I
I
AFFIDA VIT
(To be ftllcd in and executed if the biclcler is a corporation)
I
STATE OF FLOlUDA
COUNTY OF Manatee
)
J
I
_Jocmne Lamberson being duly sworn, deposes (U1(( says that he/she is
Secretary of TLC Diver...ai. f i P-O t Tnr. -
a corporation organizecl ami existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its
principal ollice at:
2719 17th St. E.
Street & Number
Palmetto
City
Mi'lni'ltpF'
County
!<'T.
State
I
I
Affiant fhrlber says tbal he is familiar with the records, minute books and by~laws of
TLC Diversified-L-Inq,
(Name of Corporation)
I
I
A.fl1ant u1l1hcr says that Thurston Lamberson is J'xes~d~nt
(Officer's Name) (Title)
or the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposalior TLC DivJ:"!.JJ3..i f ied. Ine. --
for said corporation by virtue of12rgvision of by laws
(stale whether a provision of?y Jaws~)I' a Rcs.oluYoY of the Board of
Directors. Ifby Rcsoll\ I: ,!, ~,i :J41Jt 0 I' ;1dopti0n).
l </:,,~i.-h~ -
/T ., Affiant
Joanne Lamberson, Secretary
,,-' 20~_.
I
I
Sworn Lo before me this lJitb day of November
I
f ....i-..;;.t~... KAY L CUNNINGHMl l
/1} ~ ..'~. I.' '-"Hl\:-c.;'{"'. ~"r "-;,'1'f,(.
t:L1&~. . ,.!,;.I:_:'-':I~r;' 2';' ,;;t :
I "f;o;";;,..:,~!:.,, IJonoodh'" Nolllry Pul>Ii<: Underw<il1l5
,y.-:~'~~~" -
"f.' )J' >1!<.}i'
__.....L . .&fi,LHJf~--
Notary Publie ,/
I
Type/print/sLmnp name orNatary
I
Title or rank, und Serial No., if any
I
I
I
I
ScclionV _09230?doe
I'age 8 of I 5
?l2t112008
I
I
I
I
NON"COLLlJSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLOIUDA
)
I
COUNTY OF Manatee
)
I
Thurston_L_amberson
being, Ilrst duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
presider:t
of TLC _p;i.sersif ie_Q___ Inc.
I
the party maklllg the li.\rcgoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: ll~at said
biclcler is not ;i",ncial!y interested in or otherwise affiliated ill a business way with any other bielcler Oil the
smue contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly 01' indirectly, with
any bidders 0:' person, to put in a sham bid or that slIch other person shallrcl1'ain fi'01U bidding, and has not
in m1Y manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or conu11lmication or conference,
with any per::on, to fix the bid price or affi,mt or any othcr bickler, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost
element of selid bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any adv<mtage against the City of
Cle81water, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; met that all statements
contained in:;aid proposal or bid are true; and (luther, that such bickleI' has not directly or indirectly
submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged inlormatioll or data relative thereto to an)' association
or to any member or agent thereof,
I
I
I
I
I
c~~~~~
.- - Affiant
Thurston Lamberson, President
I
Sworn to and subscribed beiore me tlus -1L day of November
.20~,
I
I
~11t',
4i..~t:-."
i.: ~"i
~" r.~!
~,,,#.. ~.."
"'p It'
( -I A' j' "
jJ.d'{.J..--<-..C.'JH(~!Lif': /!,,' /9/; ,,,;,'1
,/ /l\.JotUl'Y Public .
__~" ~ . ...~~....~c""~.~
. KAY L: C' JNNINGHAM .
1.\'( C' rll-~ISSION . DO ;57300
r-Y"'IRE5: M8'Ch 23. ~012
~'<f.:H':!' IN;,! Ne~3'Y ~ !jr.I!~f'M::ef5
I
I
II
I
ScclionV _092309.c1oc
I'ngc 9 of 15
9/24/20011
I
I
I
I
PgOPOSAL
(I)
I
TO Tim CITY OF CLEARW A TEll, FLORIDA, tor
I
MAnSHALL STREET & EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR DIOXIDE
CONVERSION PROJECT (PROJECT #: 07-0021-UT)
and doing such other work illcidentaltherelo, nil in accordance with the conlract documents, marked
I
MARSHALL STREET & EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SlJLFUn DIOXIDE
CONVERSION PROJECT WROJECT #: 07-0021-lJT)
I
I
Every biclclcr must take notice of the fhcl that even though his proposal be accepted and the docrnnents
signed by the ~idder to whom ml awmd is r:lade and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the
City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a
certificate from the FU1mIce Director that funds arc available to covel' the cost of the work to be done, or
without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract cmd all the pertinent
documents relating thereto having been app:'ovcd by said City Attorney; i111d slIch bickler is hereby charged
with this notice.
I
I
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this i)roposal, arc named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement,
Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specil1cations, General Conditions,
Special Provisions, mId Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is
necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees tbat if (he Proposal
be accepted, Ice will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto ull1:exed, to
provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or appm'atl.ls, do all the work required to
complete the contract wiUun the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the
requirel11en~ of the City of Clemwater, Florida, as h.erein unci hercinafier set lortb, ancl furnish the required
smely bonds for the following prices to wit:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l)ectionV _092309.doc
I'age 10 or 15
9n<ll2008
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(2)
I
I f the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail
to execute a satisfactory cont.ract 8S stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its
option determi.ne that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon tllis Proposal shall be null
and void, and the certified chcck or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the
propclty of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the t1.111 amOlUlt of said check shall be retained by the City, or
if the Proposal !jund be given, the full amount of such bond shall bc paid to the City as stipulated or
liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, 01' the amount of
said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as speci fled herei n.
I
I
I
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Westf ield Insurance CQrnpany
-Btml~, for the sum of 19 % ()J'amount bid
I
($ 10% of amt bi):i
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
I
Tbe full nmnes and residences of aU persons m1c1 parties interested in the toregoing bid are as follows:
I
(If corporation, give the munes and addresses of the President and Sccrel(\l)'. If firm or pa.rtnership, the
nmncs and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shaUlist not only his name but also the nmne
of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby sllch person's improvements,
enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materifllman, agent, supplier, or
employer is contingent upon the award oflhe contract to the bidder).
I
NAMES:
ADDRESSES:
I
Thurston Lambe:r.:s.on_u_ ___
~539 2nd-AV€h~~le West
I
Palmett()J FL 34221
Joanne Lamberson
.-5c:;::\g ?nrl Ave. rjrcle West
I
I
. Palmet;th, FL 34221
Signaturc OfI3i~~~-=-~~-
Thurstun Lamberson,
(The bidder mllst indicate wbethcr ~..orporal1onJ Partnership, Company or Individual).
~~u ~_
President
I
I
I
$eclionV..092309.doc
Page J J of 15
9n4i2008
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRO}'OSA I~
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign (he Principal's name, his own nam~ and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-Presid.ent, he must, by
aftidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal: TLC Diver?ified, Inc.
By: Thurston }-1amberson
Tille: ..?Ie~c;:i dent
Business AcldressofBiddel': 2719 17th St. E.
City ancl State: Pal me t to, FL
_ Zip Code 34221
Dated at Palmet.to, FL
, this 18th day of November
, AD., 20-0-9
--..
SectionV _092J09.doc
Page 12 of I 5
9r24/2001l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF CLEAH.W ATl~R
ADDENDUM SlmET
PROJECT: \1ARSHALL STREET & EAST APCF CHLORlNl GAS AND SULFUl{
DIOXIDl~ CONVERSION PROJECT (PRo.meT #: 07-0021-UT)
Acknowledgn~ent is hereby made of the following acidemia received since issu<mcc of Plans ane!
Specification~ .
Addendum No. _L__. Date: ~+()_L 2 8/09
Addendull1 No. _ _:2 Dak: 11/1 7 /09
Addendum No. Date:
-'LJ:,J;PJ-y~):'sified .__.Ine.
~,o;,... (Name of Bidder)
-~ . ==- ~ :,,-..~:;--~--
(Sigmllurc ofOfl1cer)
Thurston Lamberson
President
(Tille of Officer)
November 18. 2009
(Date)
SCClillIlV..092309.doc
I'lIgc 13 of 15
912t112008
I
I
I
BIDQER'S PROPOSAL
I
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET & EAST APCF CHLORINE GAS AND SULFUR
DIOXIDE CONVERSION PROJECT (PROJECT #: 07-0021-UT)
I,~~~, I~~~ I PRICE
"ar,hall "tn'd \ 1'( I, ('hlorin(' and "ulfur Uio,id('
ikllloJilion 01 Remaining I'iplllg, LqUlprncnt, and I
Electrical Components of Chlorine OIL, System and Sulfur
Dioxide Gas System (Main Components Already
Removed.
---~..._~----
Furnbh and Deliver Sodium Hypochloritc Bulk Storage
Tanks .- ODP Item
2b i Sodium H ochlorile Bulk Stora e Tanks Sales Tax
Installation, Testing and Warranty of Sodium Hypochlorite
Bulk Sto e Tanks.
Furnish and Deliver Sodium Bisulfitc Bulk Storagc Tanks
- ODP Item
Sodium Bisulfite Bulk Stornge Tank, "nl.", T:w
Installation. le"if1)! and \\ iHl:ii1i\
Bulk Sto e Tanks,
Furnish and Deliver Chemical Fccd Pump Skids For
Sodium H 'hlorite S stem - aDP Itcm
Chern ilAlI Feed Pump Skids For Sodium Hypochlorite
S stern Sales Tax
Installation, Testing and Warranty ofChcmical Fccd Pump
Skids For Sodium H ochlorite S stern
Furnish and Deliver Chemical Fced Pump Skids For
Sodium Bisulfite S stem - aDP Item
Chemical Feed Pump Skids For Sodium Bisulfite System
Sales Tax
Installation, Testing and WllITanty of Chemical Feed Pump LS 8
Skids For Sodium Bisulfite S stem 000
Furnish and Relocate the Level Meter in the Reclaimed LS
Water Pum Wet Well 7 5 tJ 0 .
MobiljzationlDemobilization LS , ..5 0 00.
SCADA Inte ration Services Allowance I LS $ 23,000.00
Marshall Street APCF ~ Chlorinc and Sulfur Dioxide - Subtotal Bid Item ~os. 1-8 ~
Owner's 10% Contin enc =
Marshall Street" PCF ('h!,,";!]:' :md Stllfi,r Dioxide Total mid Ikll1 ...<, ':.
~_.~_ __.__nw~_.,~...,.__________.__."._ _"'_..'_.._ _ .__
\I'()' (hlor-inc and SulfUl' Ilio:ddc
lJemolition of Chlorine Gas System and Sulfu~ Di~~-ide ~-----_.~.- --.-
~~~ ~
Furnish and Deliver Sodium Hypochlorite Bulk Storage
Tanks - ODP Item
Sodium H hlorite Bulk Star' e Tanks Sales Tax
Installation. Testing and WRrrnnlv ofSn<iillnl Hvrochlorite
Bulk Sh~I~'::.~~~~"s.___
Furnish and Deliver S..l{liullJ tbuiJilc: LJulL :,[0I..lt:;c: Tanks
- aD? Item
Sodium Bisulfite Bulk Stora e Tanks Sales Tax
Installation, Testin and Warran of Sodium Bisulfite
lITE!\,1 I
I '\i0
I
I
I
r2;
I
I
~
1-
I
2c:
l.
I ~~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DESCRIPTIO1\<
Ili"'lllfite
4a
4b
4c
Sa
5b
5c
6
7
8
9
IU
Ila
lib
lie
123
12b
12c
Rcvised Bidder's ProPOSllU 11709.doc
I
I
Page 14 of 15
TOTAL
I
j
LS
~'-J.~oo.
dlJOOO.
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
II
00.
94,700.00
$ 6,600,00
0 000_
'$ 31,530,00
$ 2,300,00
Oe>O.
LS
$
94,700.00
LS
$
6,600.00
LS
\ 0 000,
S 3 I ,530.00
LS
LS
$
2.300.00
LS
000
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
11/1712009
--
I
I
I
I
PTEM
NO.
l3a
13b
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DESCRIPTION
EST. I l:NlT
UNIT TY
PRICE
TOTAL
\3c
Bulk Stora e Tanks.
Furnish and Deliver Chemical Feed Pump Skids For
Sodium H ochlorite S stem ~ ODP Item
Chemical Feed Pump Skids For Sodium Hypochloritc
S stem Sales Tax
Installation, Testing and Warranty of Chemical Feed Pump
Skids For Sodium H ochlorite S stcm
Fwnish and Delivcr Chemical Feed Pump Skids For
Sodium Bisulfite S stem - ODP Item
Chemical Feed Pump Skids For Sodium Bisulfite System
Sales Tax
Installation, Testing and Warranty of Chemical Feed Pump
Skids For Sodium Bisulfite kstem
Mobilization/Demobilization LS
SCADA Inte ation Services ^lIowanee I LS $ 23,000.00
East APCF- Chlorine and Sulfur Dioxide - Subtotal (Bid Item Nos. 10-16 =
Owner's 10% Contin >en =
East APeI' Chlorine and Sulfur Dioxide - Total (Bid Item Nos. 10-17 =
2.300.00
LS
$ 63.100.00 $ 63,100.00
LS
s
4,400.00 $
4,400.00
LS
000
14a
$ 31.530.00 $
31,530.00
LS
14b
2,300.00 $
LS
$
14c
LS
15
]6
17
Base Bid Subtotal Bid Item Nos. 1-8 10-1
Subtotal Owner's 10% Contin ene' Bid Item Nos. 9 1
Base Bid Grand Total Bid Item Nos. 1-1
CONTRACTOR: TLC DiverE)if::ioed. Inc~__
~
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL $ \, \ 5~, S,sq. (Numbers)
BIDDER'SGRANDTOTAL~ ~" \';C'lM) (')roJt!' hul\lc).('p'~ -\.", '\-'1 '\-\-."....~
-\~4:l"'~~IoJ~ ~"uP ~1A"'tlrl2.d. -\'A"'~ AI',rut ~o'\(lI'!" 4.../Va
Ot) 1_ f> _ ~ ~_ (Words)
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS IDS TOTAL BID BASED ON IDS UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH
SECTION. TmS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING
BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND
LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT
SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL
GOVERN.
I
I
I
I
AWARD OF THE CONTRACT WILL BE BASED ON THE LOWEST TOTAL BASE BID
AMOUNT.
I
I
I
Revised Bidder's Proposal_II ]709.doc
Page 15 of 15
11/17/2009
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/
Project:
A 1'1' ACHMENT TO BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS
Marshall Street and East APCIi' Chlorine Gas and Sull'ur Dioxide Gas
Conversion Project
The Contraclor proposes that the items of !11njor equipment named herein will be supplicd by the
Manufacturers and Suppliers set forth below as wrillen by the Contractor (circle one), Linless
changes are specifically authorized by the Owner. If Manufacturers and Suppliers have not been
determined, I is: all potential Manufacturers and S upplicrs. Preliminary acceptancc of cqui pment
listed b\!! .. i ~i:I ufacturer's name and model shall not in any way constitute a wai vcr of the
specificntions; final acceptance will be bnsecl on full conformity with the specifications covering
the equipmcnt.
:he~ic~~llme:;:,~g pumps ,ud-k m:le p::::~:~\::~::,::P;:I:ice~IlC
l)tun ) S IC S I
-..t.~0 PolyProccssing Co. _____m_ ---
Chemical bulk storage tanks ~
U~'-- Assman Corporation of Amer!~.a
!
Section
11345
113'50
03720030-0 I
Bid Documents
mODER'S I'IWI'OSAL ATTAClIMENT
EQUIPMENT LIST
- -
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DRUG FRIEE WORKPLACE FORM
The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087, as amended from
time to time, hereby certifies that
TLC Diversified, Inc. does:
(Name of Business)
1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited
in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees
for violation of such prohibition.
2. Inl; It"ll1 employees about thc-"hrC'~';~ of drug abuse in the workplace, the
business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug
co unseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the Pl'I:; dties
that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.
3. Oi ve each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual
services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notifY the employees that, as a
condition of working on the commodities, or contractual services that are under
bid, the employee will abide by the tenus of the statement, and will notify the
employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty, or nolo contendere to any
violation of chapter 893, Florida Statutes, as amended from time to time, or of any
controlled substance law of the United States, or any State, for a violation
occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse
assistance, or rehabilitation program, if such is available in the employee's
community, by any employee who is so convicted.
6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully
with the above requirements.
~
. ,. .. .' =:;: -.~~'~~~--=---
--. - ~_ ,~c.-:?~'?::::::
Bidders Signature
Thurston Lamberson, President
November 18, 2009
Date